2012 2013 Catalog Eversion

Table of Contents Accounting ........................................................................... 2 Taxation ............................................................................. 35 CIS ..................................................................................... 38 Decision Science ................................................................. 61 Economics .......................................................................... 76 Finance .............................................................................
105 General Business .............................................................. 121 Business Communication .................................................. 124 Management..................................................................... 128 Marketing ......................................................................... 175 Hospitality & Tourism ....................................................... 206 Culinary Arts .................................................................... 214 Fashion............................................................................. 225 Interior Design ................................................................. 235
Accounting
Alvin A. Arens Randal J. Elder Mark S. Beasley
Auditing and Assurance Services with ACL Software, 14/e
ISBN 10: 0273754947 ISBN 13: 9780273754947 872pp 2012 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM
Basic Approach
For the core auditing course for accounting majors. Comprehensive integration of the fundamental auditing concepts. Auditing and Assurance Services: An Integrated Approach presents an integrated concepts approach that shows students the auditing process from start to finish. This text prepares students for real-world audit decision making by using illustrative examples of key audit decisions, with an emphasis on audit planning, risk assessment processes and collecting and evaluating evidence in response to risks. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART 1: THE PROFESSION OF AUDITING 1. The Assurance Services Market 2. The Audit Standards Setting Process 3. Audit Reports 4. Legal Liability Considerations for Auditors 5. Ethics and the Audit Profession PART 2: THE PROCESS OF AUDITING 6. Audit Responsibilities and Objectives 7. Nature and Type of Audit Evidence 8. Audit Planning 9. Considering Materiality and Audit Risk 10. Considering Internal Control 11. Considering the Risk of Fraud 12. Implications of Information Technology for the Audit Process 13. Developing the Overall Audit Plan and Audit Program PART 3: APPLICATION OF THE AUDIT PROCESS TO THE REVENUES AND CASH RECEIPTS CYCLE 14. Audit of the Revenues and Cash Receipts Cycle: Tests of Controls and Substantive Tests of Transactions 15. Audit Sampling for Tests of Controls and Substantive Tests of Transactions 16. Completing the Tests in the Revenue and Cash Receipts Cycle: Accounts Receivable 17. Audit Sampling for Tests of Details of Balances PART 4: APPLICATION OF THE AUDIT PROCESS TO OTHER CYCLES 18. Audit of the Purchases and Cash Disbursement Cycle: Tests of Controls, Substantive Tests of Transactions, and Accounts Payable 19. Completing the Tests in the Purchases and Cash Disbursements Cycle: Verification of Selected Accounts 20. Audit of the Inventory and Warehousing Cycle 21. Audit of the Payroll and Personnel Cycle 22. Audit of the Capital Acquisition and Repayment Cycle 23. Audit of Cash Balances PART 5: COMPLETING THE AUDIT 24. Audit Completion PART 6: PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITIES AND OTHER SERVICES 25. Other Assurance Services 26. Internal and Governmental Financial Auditing and Operational Auditing
Accounting for Corporate Combinations and Associations, 7/e

Neal Arthur Louise Luff Peter Keet
ISBN 10: 1442519568 ISBN 13: 9781442519565 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Accounting for Corporate Combinations and Associations is the latest update of this well-known and highly regarded text. This latest version reflects the significant changes to the Australian Accounting Standards and Corporations Law that have occurred since the last publication. This seventh edition continues to provide the clearest, most comprehensive and most practical coverage of the complex areas of consolidations and related accounting topics. The text includes fully updated coverage of the
main principles and techniques used in the preparation of consolidated financial reports for a company at the head of a corporate group. Accounting for Corporate Combinations and Associations is written for second and third year undergraduate Advanced Financial Accounting, Company Accounting and Consolidated Financial Reporting courses requiring comprehensive coverage of accounting combinations and related topics. It is also suitable for students undertaking professional accounting qualifying examinations (in particular the CPA Australia or CA programs).
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
Text objectives and introduction to consolidation Principles of consolidation Fair value adjustments and tax effects Intra-group transactions Non-controlling interest Partly-owned subsidiaries: indirect non-controlling interest Consolidated cash flow statements Accounting for associates: the equity method Accounting for joint ventures Translation and consolidation of foreign currency financial statements Segment reporting by diversified entities
Management Accounting: Information for Decision-Making and Strategy Execution, 6/e

Anthony A. Atkinson Robert S. Kaplan Ella Mae Matsumura S. Mark Young
ISBN 10: 0273769987 ISBN 13: 9780273769989 552pp 2011 Paper
Basic Approach
For upper level undergraduate and MBA Management Accounting courses. An approach to management accounting from the perspective of a business manager. Atkinson presents state-of-the-art thinking on all of the major topics in management accounting including activity-based management, the Balanced Scorecard, target costing, and management control system design. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
How Management Accounting Information Supports Decision Making The Balanced Scorecard and Strategy Map Using Costs in Decision Making Accumulating and Assigning Costs to Products Activity-Based Cost Systems Measuring and Managing Customer Relationships Measuring and Managing Process Performance Measuring and Managing Life-Cycle Costs Behavioral and Organizational Issues in Management Accounting and Control Systems Using Budgets for Planning and Coordination Financial Control
Financial Accounting for Decision Makers, 6/e

Peter Atrill Eddie McLaney
ISBN 10: 0273763458 ISBN 13: 9780273763451 2011 Kit/Package/ShrinkWrap
A comprehensive and accessible introduction to the subject, Financial Accounting for Decision Makers focuses on the ways in which financial statements and information can be used to improve the quality of decision making. By introducing topics gradually and explaining technical terminology in a clear, friendly style, the authors cater both for accounting students, and for those studying entry-level accounting within another field.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Introduction to accounting Measuring and reporting financial position Measuring and reporting financial performance Accounting for limited companies (1) Accounting for limited companies (2) Measuring and reporting cash flows Analysing and interpreting financial statements (1) Analysing and interpreting financial statements (2)
9. Reporting the financial results of groups of companies 10. Increasing the scope of financial reporting 11. Governing a company Appendix A Recording financial transactions. Appendix B Glossary of key terms Appendix C Solutions to self-assessment questions Appendix D Solutions to review questions Appendix E Solutions to selected exercises
Management Accounting for Decision Makers, 7/e

Peter Atrill Eddie McLaney
Designed to help you study, Management Accounting for Decision Makers is praised for its clear, accessible and uncluttered style. It provides a comprehensive introduction to the main principles of management accounting, with a strong practical emphasis and avoiding excessive technical detail. It has a clear and unequivocal focus on how accounting information can be used to improve the quality of decision making by managers, providing the perfect grounding for the decision makers of the future.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
1. Introduction to management accounting 2. Relevant costs for decision making 3. Cost-volume-profit analysis 4. Full costing 5. Costing and pricing in a competitive environment 6. Budgeting 7. Accounting for control 8. Making capital investment decisions 9. Strategic management accounting 10. Measuring performance 11. Managing working capital Appendix A: Glossary of key terms Appendix B: Solutions to self-assessment questions Appendix C: Solutions to review questions Appendix D: Solutions to selected exercises Appendix E: Present value table
Accounting: An Introduction, 5/e

Peter Atrill Eddie McLaney David Harvey Maurice Jenner
ISBN 10: 144253480X ISBN 13: 9781442534803 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Often imitated, never replicated: Your complete learning solution for introductory decision-making accounting courses. Accounting: An Introduction is the text of choice for students taking a first accounting course with an emphasis on real-world decision making. It provides clear and approachable coverage of the principles of financial accounting, management accounting and financial management. In meeting the needs of nonspecialists the emphasis is on the application and interpretation of information for decision-making. Atrill's primary focus is on the underlying concepts, rather than on the collection of data and the preparation of statements and reports.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
Introduction to accounting and finance Different accounting entities Measuring and reporting financial position Measuring and reporting financial performance Measuring and reporting cash flows Analysis and interpretation of financial statements Costvolumeprofit analysis and marginal analysis Full costing Budgeting Projected financial statements Capital investment decisions Security and business valuations
13. The management of working capital 14. Financing the business 15. Trends and issues in accounting
Advanced Accounting, 11/e
Floyd A. Beams, (Retired) Virginia Polytechnic Institute Joseph H. Anthony Bruce Bettinghaus Kenneth Smith ISBN 10: 0132830361 ISBN 13: 9780132830362 840pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in advanced accounting. An in-depth guide to accounting that reflects the most up-to-date business developments. This comprehensive textbook addresses practical financial reporting problems while reflecting recent business developments and changes in accounting standards. This edition has been rewritten to align with the Financial Accounting Standards Board Accounting Standards Codification.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23.
Business Combinations Stock InvestmentsInvestor Accounting and Reporting An Introduction to Consolidated Financial Statements Consolidation Techniques and Procedures Intercompany Profit TransactionsInventories Intercompany Profit TransactionsPlant Assets Intercompany Profit TransactionsBonds ConsolidationsChanges in Ownership Interests Indirect and Mutual Holdings Subsidiary Preferred Stock, Consolidated Earnings per Share, and Consolidated Income Taxation Consolidation Theories, Push-Down Accounting, and Corporate Joint Ventures Derivatives and Foreign Currency: Concepts and Common Transactions Accounting for Derivatives and Hedging Activities Foreign Currency Financial Statements Segment and Interim Financial Reporting PartnershipsFormation, Operations, and Changes in Ownership Interests Partnership Liquidation Corporate Liquidations and Reorganizations An Introduction to Accounting for State and Local Governmental Units Accounting for State and Local Governmental UnitsGovernmental Funds Accounting for State and Local Governmental UnitsProprietary and Fiduciary Funds Accounting for Not-for-Profit Organizations Estates and Trusts
Mark S. Beasley Frank A. Buckless Steven M. Glover Douglas F. Prawitt
Auditing Cases: An Interactive Learning Approach, 5/e
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate Auditing, Professional Research Case or capstone courses. Step through real auditing cases one by one in this comprehensive text. Auditing Cases, through a unique active learning approach, provides a comprehensive case book focusing on various auditing activities. Students learn to think critically and develop their interpersonal skills, which are increasingly important in the workplace. The fifth edition includes several new and updated cases.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
Client Acceptance Understanding the Clients Business and Assessing Risk Professional and Ethical Issues Accounting Fraud and Auditor Legal Liability Internal Control over Financial Reporting The Impact of Information Technology Planning Materiality Analytical Procedures Auditing Cash Investments and Revenues Planning and Performing Audit Procedures in the Revenue and Expenditure Cycles Developing and Evaluating Audit Documentation
12. Completing the Audit, Reporting to Management, and External Reporting
Peter Best Greg Shailer Brenton Fiedler
Auditing, Assurance Services & Ethics in Australia, 8/e
ISBN 10: 1442541199 ISBN 13: 9781442541191 2011 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM
Basic Approach
This new updated edition now incorporates the content offered in the supplementary 80 page booklet which was previously provided packaged with the text and will be available for courses commencing semester 2, 2011. This includes a fully revised Chapter 2, Audit Reports. Auditing, Assurance Services & Ethics in Australia: Clarity Update Edition provides updated references to the Australian Auditing Standards (ASAs) as appropriate throughout the text. The book is a comprehensive introduction to auditing for students who have not had significant experience in the field. It is also appropriate for introductory professional development courses for public accounting firms, internal auditors and government auditors.
Table of Contents
PART I: THE AUDITING PROFESSION 1. Demand for audit and assurance services 2. Audit reports 3. Auditors legal environment 4. Audit quality and ethics PART II: THE AUDIT PROCESS 5. Audit responsibilities and objectives 6. Audit evidence 7. Audit planning and documentation 8. Materiality and risk 9. Internal control and control risk 10. Fraud auditing 11. The impact of information technology on the audit process 12. Overall audit plan and audit program PART III: APPLICATION OF THE AUDIT PROCESS TO THE SALES AND COLLECTION CYCLE 13. Audit of the sales and collection cycle: tests of controls and substantive tests of transactions 14. Completing the tests in the sales and collection cycle: accounts receivable 15. Audit sampling PART IV: APPLICATION OF THE AUDIT PROCESS TO OTHER CYCLES 16. Audit of transaction cycles and financial balance statements I 17. Audit of transaction cycles and financial balance statements II PART V: COMPLETING THE AUDIT 18. Completing the audit PART VI: OTHER ASSURANCE AND NONASSURANCE SERVICES 19. Other assurance engagements and environments
Management and Cost Accounting, 5/e

Alnoor Bhimani Charles T. Horngren Srikant M. Datar Madhav Rajan
Basic Approach
This popular text offers clear and comprehensive coverage of management and cost accounting for students and professionals. Rich in examples and real-life applications, it brings technical and theoretical concepts to life. The international focus is supported by a wealth of case studies featuring companies from around the world. For the first time, the 5e of this text is supported by MyAccountingLab.
Table of Contents
PART I: MANAGEMENT AND COST ACCOUNTING FUNDAMENTALS 1. The accountant's role in the organization 2. An introduction to cost terms and purposes 3. Job costing systems 4. Process costing systems 5. Cost allocation 6. Cost allocation: Joint cost situation 7. Income effects of alternative stock costing methods Part I Case study problems PART II: ACCOUNTING INFORMATION FOR DECISION MAKING 8. Cost-volume-profit relationships 9. Determining how costs behave
10. Relevant Information for decision making 11. Activity-based costing 12. Pricing, target costing and customer profitability analysis 13. Capital investment decisions Part II Case study problems PART III: PLANNING AND BUDGETARY CONTOL SYSTEMS 14. Motivation, budgets and responsibility accounting 15. Flexible budgets, variances and management control: I 16. Flexible budgets, variances and management control: II 17. Measuring yield, mix and quantity effects Part III Case study problems PART IV: MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEMS AND PERFORMANCE ISSUES 18. Control systems and transfer pricing 19. Control systems and performance measurement Part IV Case study problems PART V: QUALITY, TIME AND THE STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT OF COSTS 20. Quality and throughput concerns in management costs 21. Accounting for just-in-time systems 22. Strategic management accounting and emerging issues Part V Case study problems Appendix A: Solutions to selected exercises Appendix B: Notes on compound interest and interest tables
Alnoor Bhimani Charles T. Horngren Gary L. Sundem William O. Stratton Jeff Schatzberg Dave Burgstahler
Introduction to Management Accounting
Basic Approach
Suited for a second module in management accounting, this well written and readable text provides students with a real insight into the techniques and theory of management accounting and how they can be applied in the real world.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.
Managerial Accounting, the Business Organisation, and Professional Ethics Introduction to Cost Behaviours and Cost-Volume Relationships Measurement of Cost Behaviours Cost Management Systems and an Introduction to Activity-Based Costing Relevant Information and Decision Making With a Focus on Pricing Decisions Relevant Information and Decision Making: Operational Decisions Introduction to Budgets and Preparing the Master Budget Flexible Budgets and Variance Analysis Management Control Systems and Responsibility Accounting Management Control in Decentralised Organisations Capital Budgeting Cost Allocation Accounting for overhead costs Job-Costing and Process-Costing Systems Basic Accounting: Concepts, Techniques, and Conventions Understanding Corporate Annual Reports: Basic Financial Statements Understanding and Analysing Consolidated Financial Statements
Introduction to Accounting Information Systems

Tony Boczko ISBN 10: 0273739387 ISBN 13: 9780273739388 472pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Introduction to Accounting Information Systems offers an introductory insight into the nature, role and context of accounting information systems. Students will gain an understanding of how companies can integrate technologies into their AIS and how this integration can assist in the management and control of organisational resources and the maximization of shareholder wealth.
Table of Contents
PART 1: A CONTEXTUAL FRAMEWORK OVERVIEW
1. Information systems in accounting and finance: an overview 2. Systems thinking 3. Control - management by design PART 2: INFORMATION SYSTEMS IN ACCOUNTING AND FINANCE OVERVIEW 4. Accounting information systems and the information age 5. Networking: creating connections 6. Information management and data processing 7. Accounting information systems: a cyclical perspective 8. Information technology and the virtual world PART 3: RISK, SECURITY, SURVEILLANCE AND CONTROL OVERVIEW 9. Risk exposure: fraud, cyber terrorism and computer crime 10. Internal control and accounting information systems security 11. Accounting information systems audit 12. Accounting information systems development
Accounting Information Systems, 11/e

George H. Bodnar William S. Hopwood
Basic Approach
For undergraduate or graduate courses in Accounting Information Systems. Core coverage of business processes, transaction cycles, and internal controls. An understanding of business processes is fundamental to contemporary auditing, and professional and legal considerations relating to an organizations internal control processes. Following a Business Process Approach, Accounting Information Systems stresses information, communication, and networking technology within the context of business processes, transaction cycles and internal control structure. The eleventh edition offers streamlined information and a new chapter covering fraud.
Table of Contents
PART I: INTRODUCTION TO ACCOUNTING INFORMATION SYSTEMS 1. Accounting Information Systems 2. Systems Techniques and Documentation 3. eBusiness and eCommerce 4. Transaction Processing and the Internal Control Process 5. Fraud Examination and Fraud Management PART II: BUSINESS PROCESSES 6. Information Security 7. Electronic Data Processing Systems 8. Revenue Cycle Processes 9. Procurement and Human Resource Business Process 10. The Production Business Process PART III: SYSTEMS DEVELOPMENT 11. Systems Planning, Analysis, and Design 12. Systems Project Management, Implementation, Operation, Control PART IV: CONTEMPORARY INFORMATION SYSTEMS TECHNOLOGY 13. Data Management Concepts 14. Auditing Information Technology
Karen W. Braun Wendy M. Tietz
Managerial Accounting, 3/e
Basic Approach
For introductory, undergraduate Managerial Accounting courses. Rock-solid decision-making through strong coverage and effective practice. Students interact with businesses every daywhere they work, where they shop, even where they blog. At the core of these businesses are rock-solid managerial accounting fundamentals that students dont always see. Authors Wendy Tietz and Karen Braun show the connection between accounting concepts and the businesses students interact with in their new text, Managerial Accounting. By presenting the accounting decisions made in companies like Target and J. Crew, this texts precise coverage of the core concepts gets students engaged in the learning process. This edition features a new sustainability theme, and most chapters offer improved and new content.
Table of Contents
1.
Introduction to Managerial Accounting
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.
Building Blocks of Managerial Accounting Job Costing Activity Based Costing, Lean Operations, and the Costs of Quality Process Costing Cost Behavior Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis Relevant Costs for Short-Term Decisions The Master Budget Performance Evaluation Standard Costs and Variances Capital Investment Decisions and the Time Value of Money Statement of Cash Flows Financial Statement Analysis Sustainability
Core Concepts of Accounting, 11/e

Leslie K. Breitner, University of Washington Robert N. Anthony ISBN 10: 0132744392 ISBN 13: 9780132744393 208pp 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Introductory Accounting. Core Concepts of Accounting captures the full text (but not the programmed approach) of Essentials of Accounting, while including important accounting concepts and terms.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
Basic Concepts Balance Sheet Changes; Income Measurement Accounting Records and Systems Revenues and Monetary Assets Expense Measurement; The Income Statement Inventories and Cost of Sales Noncurrent Assets and Depreciation Liabilities and Equity Statement of Cash Flows Analysis of Financial Statements Nonprofit Financial Statements International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS)
Leslie K. Breitner, University of Washington Robert N. Anthony ISBN 10: 0273771469 ISBN 13: 9780273771463 384pp 2012 Paper
Essentials of Accounting, 11/e
Basic Approach
For courses in Introductory Accounting. Essentials of Accounting is a workbook that provides a self-teaching and self-paced introduction to financial accounting for active users of business data. This text presents the ideas and terminology essential to understanding balance sheets, income statements, and statements of cash flows in a unique format that enables students to study and learn with ease. Essentials of Accounting is best used when paired with the Core Concepts of Accounting, which captures the full text (but not the programmed approach) of Essentials of Accounting, while including important accounting concepts and terms.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Basic Concepts Balance Sheet Changes; Income Measurement Accounting Records and Systems Revenues and Monetary Assets Expense Measurement; The Income Statement Inventories and Cost of Sales Noncurrent Assets and Depreciation
8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
Liabilities and Equity Statement of Cash Flows Analysis of Financial Statements Nonprofit Financial Statements International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS)
Learning QuickBooks Pro 2012: A Practical Approach, 6/e

Terri E. Brunsdon, University of Akron ISBN 10: 0132751674 ISBN 13: 9780132751674 992pp 2013 Spiralbound with CD-ROM
Basic Approach
For computerized accounting courses that focus on QuickBooks. Hands-on experience in computerized accounting. Learning QuickBooks Pro uses a comprehensive approach for teaching accounting concepts in a software environment. This text includes sample company data files that simulate real-world businesses, giving students hands-on experience initiating transactions, performing accounting activities, producing financial statements, and analyzing company performance. This text has been revised to reflect the latest version of QuickBooks.
Learning QuickBooks Pro and Premier Accountant 2011: A Practical Approach and QuickBooks 2011 Software, 5/e
Terri E. Brunsdon, University of Akron ISBN 10: 0132743256 ISBN 13: 9780132743259 992pp 2012 Spiralbound with CD-ROM
For computerized accounting courses that focus on QuickBooks. Hands-on experience in computerized accounting. Learning QuickBooks Pro and Premier Accountant 2011: A Practical Approach uses a comprehensive approach for teaching accounting concepts in a software environment. This text includes sample company data files that simulate real-world businesses, giving students hands-on experience initiating transactions, performing accounting activities, producing financial statements, and analyzing company performance. This text has been revised to reflect the latest version of QuickBooks.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
Get Ready for QuickBooks Pro 2011 QuickBooks Basics General Journal Transactions and Reports Customer Activities for a Service Based Business Vendor Activities for a Service Based Business Payroll Activities for a Service Based Business Close the Accounting Period for a Service Based Business Customer Activities for a Merchandising Business Vendor Activities for a Merchandising Business Payroll Activities for a Merchandising Business Close the Accounting Period for a Merchandising Business Create a New Company
Derry Cotter
Advanced Financial Reporting: A Complete Guide to IFRS
Basic Approach
Advanced Financial Reporting provides a current and comprehensive guide to international accounting standards. Covering both IFRS and IAS, this book adopts a user-friendly structure. By clearly explaining the theory behind each standard and then illustrating its application in worked examples, this text makes a technical subject accessible and easy to understand. This text has been written primarily for intermediate and advanced students of Financial Reporting studying an undergraduate or masters level programme. It is also appropriate for students studying for professional exams on IFRS.
10
PART 1: A BRIEF HISTORY OF ACCOUNTING 1. The rise of Accounting PART 2: A THEORETICAL FRAMEWORK FOR ACCOUNTING 2. Conceptual framework 3. Alternative income models PART 3: FINANCIAL REPORTING REGULATION 4. The regulatory environment 5. The Annual Report 6. Accountability PART 4: PRESENTATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 7. Presentation of financial statements 8. Statement of cash flows 9. Accounting policies, accounting estimates and errors 10. Interim financial reporting PART 5: ACCOUNTING FOR ASSETS 11. Inventories 12. Construction contracts 13. Property, plant and equipment 14. Intangible assets 15. Investment property 16. Impairment of assets 17. Non-current assets held for sale and discontinued operations PART 6: LIABILITIES AND EQUITY 18. Share-based payment 19. Income taxes 20. Employee benefits 21. Provisions, contingent liabilities and contingent assets PART 7: CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 22. Introduction to group accounts 23. Consolidated statement of financial position 24. Consolidated statement of comprehensive income 25. Business combinations 26. Changes in ownership 27. Investments in associates 28. Interests in joint ventures 29. Consolidated statement of cash flows PART 8: MISCELLANEOUS ACCOUNTING ISSUES 30. Events after the reporting period 31. Leases 32. Revenue 33. Accounting for government grants 34. The effects of changes in foreign exchange rates 35. Borrowing costs 36. Related party disclosures 37. Financial reporting in hyperinflationary economies PART 9: FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS 38. Capital instruments, reduction of capital and distributable profits 39. Recognition and measurement of financial instruments 40. Disclosure of financial instruments PART 10: FINANCIAL ANALYSIS 41. Financsp 42. Operating segments 43. Earnings per share PART 11: SPECIALIST ACTIVITIES 44. Accounting policies 45. Exploration for and evaluation of mineral resources 46. Accounting and reporting by retirement benefit plans 47. Agriculture PART 12: FIRST TIME ADOPTION of INTERNATIONAL ACCOUNTING STANDARDS 48. Rules for first time adoption of IFRS PART 13: SMALL AND MEDIUM-SIZED ENTITIES 49. Accounting for small and medium-sized entities
Table of Contents
CPA
Accounting Handbook 2012
ISBN 10: 1442558105 ISBN 13: 9781442558106 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
The CPA Accounting Handbook is first to market and provides students and educators with all the legally enforceable Australian Accounting Standards (aligned to IFRS), including the Conceptual Framework, Accounting Standards and Interpretations updated to 15 November 2011.
11
Also included are new AASBs 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 110, 112, 118, 133, 139, 140, 1023, 1031, 1038 and 1054 and the IFRS Practice Statement Management Commentary, as well as compiled standards for AASBs 1, 3, 4, 5, 7, 101, 107, 108, 119, 121, 131, 132, 134 and Interpretations 4, 13, 14, 16, 115, 127, 132, 1039, 1042 and 1052, all with accompanying new technical editor notes. There have been important changes to the standards over the past twelve months which makes the 2012 Handbook with its Technical Editor Notes a must-have edition. There are a number of Amending Standards issued which will apply to future financial year ends and the Technical Notes will assist in identifying which Standards and Interpretations will be impacted, the relevant Amending Standard and when it applies. The Companion website for this title, www.pearson.com.au/highered/handbooks will include twelve amending standards. Also, it will be updated throughout 2012 with any changes to the accounting standards and is accompanied by technical editor notes. Students may also use the Student Self Test quizzes aligned to particular AASBs and with hints & references back to the Handbook as practice and preparation for exams.
Table of Contents
Conceptual Framework Australian Accounting Standards Amending Standards Interpretations
Auditing, Assurance and Ethics Handbook 2012

CPA ISBN 10: 1442558091 ISBN 13: 9781442558090 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
The 2012 edition of Assurance and Ethics Handbook provides a comprehensive listing of legally enforceable Australian Auditing, Assurance, Professional and Ethical pronouncements. These include all Australian Auditing Standards (ASAs) applicable to audits for financial reporting periods commencing on or after 1 January 2010, as well as Standards on Review and Assurance Engagements, Auditing and Assurance Guidance Statements, and Accounting Professional and Ethical Statements including the Code of Ethics for Professional Accountants, updated to 15 November 2011. The enhanced companion website for this title, www.pearson.com.au/highered/handbooks, will be updated throughout 2012 with any late breaking changes to the Auditing, Assurance, Professional and Ethical pronouncements along with technical editor notes. Students may also use the Student Self Test quizzes aligned to particular ASAs with hints & references back to the Handbook as practice and preparation for exams.
Table of Contents
Institutional Framework Auditing Understanding Financial Statement Audits A Guide for Financial Statement Users POL 1 The AuASB Consultative Process Auditing and Assurance Standards 100-199 Introductory Matters 200-299 General Principles and Responsibilities 300-499 Risk Assessment and Response to Assessed Risks 500-599 Audit Evidence 600-699 Using the Work of Others 700-799 Audit Conclusions and Reporting 800-899 Specialised Areas AUS 904 Engagements to Perform Agreed-upon Procedures* Auditing and Assurance Guidance Statements (AGSs and GSs) Explanatory Guides Standards on Review Engagements (ASREs) Standards on Assurance Engagements (ASAEs) Standards on Related Services 100-200 All Members 300 Members in Public Practice Other Professional Statements (APSs) Members in Public Practice All Members Risk Management Statement (RMS) Joint Guidance Notes (GNs) Members in Business Members in Public Practice
12
Ron Dagwell Graeme Wines Cecilia Lambert
Corporate Accounting in Australia
Success in Corporate Accounting starts here. The first Pearson edition of Corporate Accounting in Australia provides comprehensive coverage of the latest company accounting principles, practices and issues in a very accessible manner, while delivering enhanced pedagogy and lecturer support. The aim is to ensure that students dont feel daunted by the technical detail, but at the same time develop an understanding of the core principles that underpin contemporary professional practice. It has been written to help students succeed in what is traditionally a very demanding subject. A concern my students raise in relation to the current text we use is that it is highly technical and difficult to understand. Dagwell et al is easy to understand and it is balanced in the level of technical detail necessary for this type of course. Subhash Abhayawansa, Swinburne University
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21.
The nature and environment of companies Company formation, share capital and debt securities Reserves and profit distribution Published financial statements Accounting for company income tax Property, plant and equipment Leases Intangible assets Business combinations Impairment of assets Additional accounting standards and disclosures Principles of consolidation Consolidation: Intra-group transactions Consolidation: Non-controlling interests Consolidation: Indirect non-controlling interests Accounting for associates Accounting for joint ventures Accounting for foreign currency Capital reorganisation External administration, including liquidation Key issues in Australian corporate governance
Tony Davies Ian Crawford
Business Accounting and Finance
ISBN 10: 027372312X ISBN 13: 9780273723127 800pp 2011 Paper
Basic Approach
Business Accounting and Finance is a clear, comprehensive and engaging text that is essential reading for anyone studying accounting and finance. Carefully structured to reflect the topics covered in most one or two semester modules, the book comprises two parts: Financial Accounting and Financial Management.
Table of Contents
PART I : FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING 1. The importance of accounting and finance 2. Classifying and recording financial transactions 3. Balance sheet 4. Income statement 5. Statement of cash flows 6. Corporate governance 7. Financial statements analysis 8. Annual report and accounts Case Study I Case Study II PART II : FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT 9. The nature of costs 10. Managing costs Case Study III 11. Relevant costs, marginal costs, and decision-making 12. Short-term planning the operating budget
13
13. The control budget and variance analysis Case Study IV 14. Financing the business, and the cost of capital 15. Investment appraisal and the capital budget Case Study V 16. Working capital management Case Study VI Appendices Appendix 1 Present value tables Appendix 2 IFRSs and IASs Appendix 3 Solutions to selected exercises
Financial Accounting
Tony Davies Ian Crawford
Basic Approach
With a clear and comprehensive style, this text leads readers through their studies of Financial Accounting stepby-step, perfectly balancing theory and real-life practice. It includes topical coverage of corporate governance, international accounting standards, statement of principles (SOP), e-business, and information technology as they apply to financial accounting. This lively and up-to-date text is perfect for introductory financial accounting modules delivered as part of a business degree or MBA programmes and is full of examples, exercises and cases studies to aid students' understanding of the subject.
Table of Contents
1. The importance of financial accounting 2. Classifying and recording financial transactions 3. Financial statements of limited companies: balance sheet 4. Financial statements of limited companies: income statement 5. Financial statements of limited companies: statement of cash flows Case Study I 6. Corporate governance 7. Financial statements analysis Case Study II 8. Annual report and accounts 9. Financing the business Case Study III Appendix 1 IFRSs and IASs Appendix 2 Solutions to selected exercises
Barry Elliott Jamie Elliott
Financial Accounting and Reporting, 15/e
Basic Approach
Financial Accounting and Reporting is the most up to date text on the market. Now fully updated in its fifteenth edition, it includes extensive coverage of International Accounting Standards (IAS) and International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS). This market-leading text offers students a clear, well-structured and comprehensive treatment of the subject. Supported by illustrations and exercises, the book provides a strong balance of theoretical and conceptual coverage and is supported by MyAccountingLab. Students using this book will gain the knowledge and skills to help them apply current standards, and critically appraise the underlying concepts and financial reporting methods.
Table of Contents
PART 1: PREPARATION OF FINACIAL STATEMENTS 1. Accounting and reporting on a cash flow basis 2. Accounting and reporting on an accrual accounting basis 3. Preparation of statements of financial statements 4. Annual Report: additional financial statements 5. Statements of cash flows PART 2: INCOME AND ASSET VALUE MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS 6. Income and asset value measurement: an economists approach 7. Accounting for price-level changes 8. Revenue Recognition PART 3: REGULATORY FRAMEWORK AN ATTEMPT TO ACHIEVE UNIFORMITY99
14
9. Financial reporting evolution of global standards 10. Concepts evolution of a global conceptual framework 11. Ethical behaviour and implications for accountants PART 4: STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION EQUITY, LIABILITY AND ASSET MEASUREMENT AND DISCLOSURE 12. Share capital, distributable profits and reduction of capital 13. Liabilities 14. Financial instruments 15. Employee benefits 16. Taxation in company accounts 17. Property, plant and equipment (PPE) 18. Leasing 19. R&D, goodwill, intangible assets and brands 20. Inventories 21. Construction contracts PART 5: CONSOLIDATED ACCOUNTS 22. Accounting for groups at the date of acquisition 23. Preparation of consolidated statements of financial position after the date of acquisition 24. Preparation of consolidated statements of comprehensive income, changes in equity and cash flows 25. Accounting for associates and joint ventures 26. Accounting for the effects of changes in foreign exchange rates under IAS21 PART 6: INTERPRETATION 27. Earnings per share 28. Review of financial ratio analysis 29. Analytical analysis selective use of ratios 30. An introduction to financial reporting on the Internet PART 7: ACCOUNTABILITY 31. Corporate governance 32. Sustainability environmental and social reporting
Steven A. Finkler Thad Calabrese Robert Purtell Daniel L. Smith ISBN 10: 0132912813 ISBN 13: 9780132912815 672pp 2013 Paper
Financial Management for Public, Health, and Notfor-Profit Organizations, 4/e
Basic Approach
For introductory courses in financial and managerial accounting in the areas of government or public policy and management, not-for-profit management, and health policy and management. One of the few texts that addresses financial and managerial accounting within the three major areas of the public sector. Financial Management for Public, Health, and Not-for-Profit Organizations provides the fundamentals of financial management for those pursuing careers within the public, health and not-for-profit fields. With a unique presentation that explains the rules specific to the public sector, this book outlines the framework for students to access and apply financial information more effectively. This edition has added the expertise of new coauthors Bob Purtell (financial markets and health care financial management), Thad Calabrese (not-for-profit and government financial management) and Dan Smith (government area), and includes a new chapter devoted to case studies.
Table of Contents
PART I: INTRODUCTION: SETTING THE STAGE 1. Introduction to Financial Management PART II: PLANNING 2. Planning for Success: Budgeting 3. Additional Budgeting Concepts 4. Understanding Costs 5. Capital Budgeting 6. Long-Term Financing PART III: IMPLEMENTATION AND CONTROLLING RESULTS 7. Managing Short-Term Resources and Obligations 8. Accountability and Control PART IV: CASE STUDIES 9. Managerial Finance Case Studies PART V: REPORTING RESULTS 10. Taking Stock of Where You Are: The Balance Sheet 11. Reporting the Results of Operations: The Activity and Cash Flow Statements 12. Unique Aspects of Accounting for Not-for-Profit and Health Care Organizations 13. Unique Aspects of Accounting for State and Local GovernmentsPart I: The Recording Process 14. Unique Aspects of Accounting for State and Local GovernmentsPart II: Reporting Financial Results PART VI: FINANCIAL ANALYSIS 15. Financial Statement Analysis 16. Financial Condition Analysis
15
Governmental and Nonprofit Accounting, 10/e

Robert J. Freeman Craig D. Shoulders Gregory S. Allison Terry K. Patton G. Robert Smith
ISBN 10: 0132751267 ISBN 13: 9780132751261 850pp 2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For accounting students enrolled in a governmental and nonprofit accounting course. This is a comprehensive textbook that is written through the eyes of the learner to prepare them for professional government and not-for-profit accounting practice and the CPA exam.
Principles of Auditing: An Introduction to International Standards on Auditing, 3/e

Rick Hayes Roger Dassen Arnold Schilder Philip Wallage ISBN 10: 0273768174 ISBN 13: 9780273768173 712pp 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
This text offers a structured approach to principles of auditing using International Standards on Auditing as its basis. Written by a team of influential professional auditors with a wealth of teaching experience this book provides a real world perspective on current auditing practices with coverage of cutting edge developments and techniques.
Table of Contents
1. International Auditing Overview 2. The Audit Market 3. Ethics for Professional Accountants 4. An Auditors Services 5. Client Acceptance 6. Main Audit Concepts and Planning the Audit (ISA 300, 315, 320) 7. Internal Control and Control Risk (ISA 315) 8. Analytical Procedures (ISA 520) 9. Auditor's Response to Assessed Risk (ISA 330) 10. Audit Evidence (ISA 500-580) 11. Completing the Audit (ISA 500-580) 12. Audit Reports and Communication (ISA 700, 800, 260, 265) 13. Overview of a Group Audit 14. Other Assurance Engagements 15. Corporate Governance and the Role of the Auditor Appendix: Audit Documentation and Working Papers
QuickBooks Pro 2012: A Complete Course, 13/e

Janet Horne, Los Angeles Pierce College ISBN 10: 0132751755 ISBN 13: 9780132751759 800pp 2013 Spiralbound with CD-ROM
Basic Approach
This text provides training using the QuickBooks Pro Accounting Program. Presenting the computerized accounting concepts with hands-on training. Designed to present accounting concepts and their relationship to QuickBooks Pro 2012, this text uses a fictitious company to provide hands-on training while it introduces major accounting concepts. This text has been revised to reflect the latest version of QuickBooks.
16
Accounting, 7/e
Charles T. Horngren Peter Best David Fraser Roger Willett ISBN 10: 1442551925 ISBN 13: 9781442551923 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
Once again the Horngren team is bringing you the accuracy and reliability you have come to expect in Accounting. Designed to provide introductory accounting students with a complete learning resource, the new edition incorporates its traditional approach with contemporary examples. It offers student appeal and accessibility without foregoing attention to detail or depth of coverage. Accounting has been updated to include some of the most significant current issues in both the accounting field and the world today. It incorporates critical business matters, such as Decision Guidelines, Decision Cases and eCommerce, and also environmental, sustainability and ethical issues. Accounting takes a business approach to the study of accounting and relates back to the modern environment we live in. Real companies, their websites and their business information are used extensively throughout the text, to engage student interest and to help develop their appreciation of the importance of accounting in todays e-business world. Ethical issues within the accounting profession are also explored in a full discussion in Chapter 1 and end-of-chapter Ethical Issue boxes. A strong emphasis has also been placed on sustainability, as can be seen from the way this text has been produced. Printed on FSC paper, Pearson is taking every measure to ensure that the environmental impact of our books is being reduced. Carbon credits have even been purchased to offset the production process! ecoAccounting boxes help students to understand how other businesses are implementing sustainable practices in their own ways.
Financial Accounting, 7/e

Charles T. Horngren Peter Best David Fraser Roger Willett
ISBN 10: 1442551933 ISBN 13: 9781442551930 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
Once again the Horngren team is bringing you the accuracy and reliability you have come to expect in Financial Accounting. Designed to provide introductory accounting students with a complete learning resource, the new sixth edition incorporates a traditional approach with contemporary examples. It offers student appeal and accessibility without forgoing attention to detail or depth of coverage. Financial Accounting has been updated to include some of the most significant current issues in both the accounting field and the world today. It incorporates critical business matters, such as Decision Guidelines, Decision Cases and eCommerce, and also environmental, sustainability and ethical issues. Financial Accounting takes a business approach to the study of accounting and relates back to the modern environment we live in. Real companies, their websites and their business information are used extensively throughout the text, to engage student interest and to help develop their appreciation of the importance of accounting in todays e-business world. Ethical issues within the accounting profession are also explored in a full discussion in Chapter 1 and end-of-chapter Ethical Issue boxes. A strong emphasis has also been placed on sustainability, as can be seen from the way this text has been produced. Printed on FSC paper, Pearson is taking every measure to ensure that the environmental impact of our books is being reduced. Carbon credits have even been purchased to offset the production process! ecoAccounting boxes help students to understand how other businesses are implementing sustainable practices in their own ways.
Cost Accounting, 14/e

Charles T. Horngren Srikant M. Datar Madhav V. Rajan
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and MBA students taking a Cost or Management Accounting course. Emphasizing the different costs for different purposes, this text focuses on strategy and the decision making process. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
1. 2.
The Accountants Role in the Organization An Introduction to Cost Terms and Purposes
17
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23.
Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis Job Costing Activity-Based Costing and Activity-Based Management Master Budget and Responsibility Accounting Flexible Budgets, Direct-Cost Variances, and Management Control Flexible Budgets, Overhead Cost Variances, and Management Control Inventory Costing and Capacity Analysis Determining How Costs Behave Decision Making and Relevant Information Pricing Decisions and Cost Management Strategy, Balanced Scorecard, and Strategic Profitability Analysis Cost Allocation, Customer-Profitability Analysis, and Sales-Variance Analysis Allocation of Support-Department Costs, Common, Costs, and Revenues Cost Allocation: Join Products and Byproducts Process Costing Spoilage, Rework, and Scrap Balanced Scorecard: Quality, Time, and the Theory of Constraints Inventory Management, Just-in-Time, and Simplified Costing Methods Capital Budgeting and Cost Analysis Management Control Systems, Transfer Pricing, and Multinational Considerations Performance Measurement, Compensation, and Multinational Considerations
Accounting, 9/e
Charles T. Horngren Walter T. Harrison M. Suzanne Oliver ISBN 10: 0273770268 ISBN 13: 9780273770268 1344pp 2013 Paper
For Principle of Accounting Courses (Sole Proprietorship). The trusted choice for I Get It! moments! With its tried-and-true framework and respected author team, Horngren/Harrison/Olivers Accountingwhen combined with MyAccountingLabis the trusted choice for instructors and students of Principles of Accounting. The ninth edition preserves the classic, solid foundation of the previous editions, while also including a modern and fresh teaching approach that helps students understand the complexities of accounting, giving them more "I Get It! moments.
Basic Approach
Financial & Managerial Accounting, 3/e

Charles T. Horngren, Stanford University Walter T. Harrison, Baylor University M. Suzanne Oliver, University of West Florida ISBN 10: 0132497999 ISBN 13: 9780132497992 1280pp 2012 Cloth
Basic Approach
For Principle of Accounting Courses (Corporate). Financial & Managerial Accounting with MyAccountingLabthe trusted choice for I Get It! moments! With its tried-and-true framework and respected author team, Horngren/Harrison/Olivers Financial & Managerial Accounting with MyAccountingLab is the trusted choice for instructors and students of Principles of Accounting. The third edition preserves the classic, solid foundation of the previous editions, while also including a modern and fresh teaching approach that helps students understand the complexities of accounting, giving them more "I Get It! moments. Also Available: Financial & Managerial Accounting , Ch 1-15 (Financial Chapters), 3/e ISBN 10: 0132497948 ISBN 13: 9780132497947 896pp 2012 Paper Financial & Managerial Accounting Ch 14-24 (Managerial Chapters), 3/e ISBN 10: 0132497921 ISBN 13: 9780132497923 624pp 2012 Paper
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Accounting and the Business Environment Recording Business Transactions The Adjusting Process Completing the Accounting Cycle Merchandising Operations Merchandise Inventory
18
7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24.
Internal Control and Cash Receivables Plant Assets and Intangibles Current Liabilities and Payroll Long-Term Liabilities, Bonds Payable, and Classification of Liabilities on the Balance Sheet Corporations, Paid-In Capital, and the Balance Sheet Corporations: Effects on Retained Earnings and the Income Statement Statement of Cash Flows Financial Statement Analysis Introduction to Management Accounting Job Order and Process Costing Activity-Based Costing and Other Cost-Management Tools Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis Short-Term Business Decisions Capital Investment Decisions and the Time Value of Money The Master Budget and Responsibility Accounting Flexible Budgets and Standard Costs Performance Evaluation and the Balanced Scorecard
Charles Horngren Gary L. Sundem John A. Elliot Donna Philbrick
Introduction to Financial Accounting, 10/e
Basic Approach
For Introductory Financial Accounting courses at the MBA level, and for rigorous undergraduate courses. A unique blend of theory, practice, and robust financial statement analysis. Introduction to Financial Accounting describes the most widely accepted accounting theory and practice with an emphasis on using and analyzing the information in financial statements. This text also compares U.S. GAAP to IFRS where relevant. This Global Edition has been edited to include enhancements making it more relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
Accounting: The Language of Business Measuring Income to Assess Performance Recording Transactions Accrual Accounting and Financial Statements Statement of Cash Flows Accounting for Sales Inventories and Cost of Goods Sold Long-Lived Assets and Depreciation Liabilities and Interest Stockholders Equity Intercorporate Investments and Consolidations Financial Statement Analysis
Charles T. Horngren, Stanford University Gary L. Sundem William O. Stratton Phillip Beaulieu, University of Calgary ISBN 10: 013257084X ISBN 13: 9780132570848 832pp 2012 Kit/Package/ShrinkWrap
Management Accounting, Canadian Edition, 6/e
Basic Approach
For introductory, undergraduate Managerial Accounting courses. Emphasizing a decision-making approach to prepare students to be managers of accounting information, this new edition helps students to understand how accountants prepare information that is useful to managers. Current and accurate, Management Accounting offers a variety of assignment problems and a running theme of strategic management through the text helping students to relate management accounting decisions to a companys success.
Table of Contents
PART I: MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING, FOCUS ON INFORMATION AND COST MEASURING 1. Management Accounting and Management Decisions 2. Cost Behavior and Cost-Volume Relationships 3. Measurement of Cost Behavior 4. Cost Management Systems
19
PART II: PRODUCT COSTING 5. Cost Allocation and Activity-Based Costing Systems 6. Job-Costing Systems 7. Process-Costing Systems PART III: FOCUS ON DECISION MAKING 8. Relevant Information and Decision Making: Marketing Decisions 9. Relevant Information and Decision Making: Production Decisions 10. Capital Budgeting Decisions PART IV: MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING FOR PLANNING AND CONTROL 11. The Master Budget 12. Flexible Budgets and Variance Analysis 13. Management Control Systems, the Balanced Scorecard, and Responsibility Accounting 14. Management Control in Decentralized Organizations Appendix A Recommended Reading Appendix B Fundamentals of Compound Interest and the Use of Present Value Tables
Charles Horngren Monte Wynder William Maguire Rebecca Tan Srikant Datar George Foster Madhav Rajan Christopher Ittner
Cost Accounting, Revised Edition
ISBN 10: 1442554770 ISBN 13: 9781442554771 2011 Paper
Basic Approach
Tried. Proven. Refined. The Australian adaptation of Cost Accounting: A Managerial Emphasis combines the hallmark features of the leading American text with a contemporary Australian business focus. The clear and engaging writing style, the focus on human behavioral aspects of management accounting, and the strong technical focus are now infused with relevant and recognizable examples from the Australian and international business context, and enhanced by a greater strategic focus, particularly on the links between sustainability and economic performance. The text features a revised and simplified Five-Step Decision-Making Framework, interwoven through each chapter, to help students see how the demand for various types of management accounting information is a response to the decision-making needs of managers. The Australian edition was developed in close consultation with local academics who had previously used the American text and wanted content that provided great local content and context for their students. The authors have brought Australian business context and organisations into the text while retaining references to companies that operate globally and which students can recognize easily. Cost Accounting provides the best of both worldsthe author team comprises world leaders in the development of contemporary cost accounting and their ideas are illustrated with Australian examples that make the book come alive for students.
Table of Contents
1. Management accounting in context 2. An introduction to cost terms and inventory costing 3. Costvolumeprofit analysis 4. Decision making and relevant information 5. Product and service costing 6. Determining how costs behave 7. Activity-based costing and activity-based management 8. Cost management, capacity costing and capacity management 9. Allocation of support-department costs, common costs and revenues 10. Pricing decisions and customer-profitability analysis 11. Master budget and responsibility accounting 12. Flexible budgets, direct-cost variances and management control 13. Flexible budgets, overhead cost variances and management control 14. Measuring and reporting sustainability 15. Strategy, balanced scorecard and strategic profitability analysis 16. Balanced scorecard: quality, time and the theory of constraints 17. Inventory management, just-in-time and simplified costing methods 18. Capital budgeting and cost analysis 19. Management control systems, transfer pricing and multinational considerations 20. Performance measurement, compensation and multinational considerations Glossary Appendix A: Recommended readings Appendix B: Notes on compound interest and interest tables Index
20
Introduction to Governmental and Not-for-Profit Accounting, 7/e

Martin Ives Larry A. Johnson Joseph R. Razek, University of New Orleans Gordon A. Hosch, University of New Orleans ISBN 10: 0132776014 ISBN 13: 9780132776011 672pp 2013 Cloth For use in Governmental Accounting, Not-for-Profit Accounting and Public Administration courses. Ives, presents a comprehensive, practical, clearly written, and updated approach to governmental and not-forprofit financial accounting.
Basic Approach
Accounting Information Systems: The Crossroads of Accounting and IT

Donna Kay Ali Ovlia
Basic Approach
For courses in Accounting Information Systems. Navigate the crossroads of accounting and IT. Kay/Ovlia is designed to assist students journey as they explore the crossroads of accounting and ITthe very place where theyll learn how to gain a competitive edge in the accounting field. To help them on their journey, this text presents information on how to develop communication, leadership, strategic and critical thinking, a customer focus, an interpretation of converging information, and technological skills.
Table of Contents
PART 1: ENTERPRISE ACCOUNTING SYSTEMS: PEOPLE, PROCESSES, AND TECHNOLOGY 1. Accounting System Insights 2. Accounting Databases 3. Accounting Interface: Database Forms, Queries, and Reports 4. Accounting Systems and Business Processes 5. Business Processes: Sales, Purchasing, and Payroll Cycles 6. Integrated Enterprise Systems PART 2: ACCOUNTING AND INTELLIGENT SYSTEMS 7. Accounting and Business Intelligence 8. Accounting and Sustainability Intelligence 9. XBRL: Intelligent Business Reporting PART 3: SECURITY, CONTROLS, AND RISK 10. Fraud and Internal Control 11. Cybersecurity 12. The Risk Intelligent Enterprise: Enterprise Risk Management PART 4: DESIGNING AND DEVELOPING ACCOUNTING SYSTEMS 13. Accounting System Development 14. Database Design: ERD, REA, and SQL PART 5: ENTERPRISE ACCOUNTING SYSTEMS: CAPSTONE 15. Emerging Trends and Technologies (Online Chapter) 16. Accounting Systems in Action: Live Projects (Online Chapter)
Financial Accounting, 2/e
Robert Kemp, University of Virginia Jeffrey Waybright, Spokane Community College ISBN 10: 0132771586 ISBN 13: 9780132771580 816pp 2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For introductory courses in Financial Accounting. Understanding financial accounting as the language of business. Once students see that accounting is the language of business, they are on their way to academic and professional success. Financial Accounting translates the essentials of accounting to students so they understand why and when financially sound decisions are made in business today.
Table of Contents
1.
Business, Accounting, and You
21
2. Analyzing and Recording Business Transactions 3. Adjusting and Closing Entries 4. Accounting for a Merchandising Business 5. Inventory 6. Ethics, Internal Control, and IFRS 7. Cash and Receivables 8. Long-Term and Other Assets 9. Current Liabilities and Long-Term Debt 10. Corporations: Paid-In Capital and Retained Earnings 11. The Statement of Cash Flows 12. Financial Statement Analysis Appendix A: Columbia Sportswear Company 2008 Annual Report to Shareholders Appendix B: Time Value of MoneyFuture and Present Value Concepts
Intermediate Accounting, Vol. 1

Kin Lo George Fisher
ISBN 10: 0132612119 ISBN 13: 9780132612111 576pp 2012 Kit/Package/ShrinkWrap
Basic Approach
Appropriate for college and university Intermediate Financial Accounting courses A new, from the ground up, Canadian Intermediate Accounting text written for todays accounting environment and todays students. This new text is the first book to be written entirely to IFRS as opposed to being adapted from Canadian or U.S. standards. Its fresh approach with an emphasis on professional judgment and decision-making are in line with the way faculty want to teach this course and in line with how students need to prepare for professional practice. By introducing and integrating accounting theory, the text helps students understand the why behind accounting practice and standards. Class tests and an exhaustive technical checking process ensure that the text is both an excellent learning resource for students and a text that is of the highest quality and accuracy.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
Fundamentals of Financial Accounting Theory Frameworks for Financial Reporting Accrual Accounting Revenue and Expense Recognition Cash and Receivables Inventories Financial Assets Property, Plant, and Equipment Intangible Assets, Goodwill, Mineral Resources, and Agriculture Applications of Fair Value: Revaluations, Impairments, and Non-Current Assets Held for Sale
Intermediate Accounting, Vol. 2

Kin Lo George Fisher
Basic Approach
Appropriate for college and university Intermediate Financial Accounting courses A new, from the ground up, Canadian Intermediate Accounting text written for todays accounting environment and todays students. This new text is the first book to be written entirely to IFRS as opposed to being adapted from Canadian or U.S. standards. Its fresh approach with an emphasis on professional judgment and decisionmaking are in line with the way faculty want to teach this course and in line with how students need to prepare for professional practice. By introducing and integrating accounting theory, the text helps students understand the why behind accounting practice and standards. Class tests and an exhaustive technical checking process ensure that the text is both an excellent learning resource for students and a text that is of the highest quality and accuracy.
Table of Contents
11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19.
Current Liabilities and Contingencies Non-current Financial Liabilities Equities Complex Financial Instruments Earnings Per Share Accounting for Income Taxes Pensions and Other Employee Future Benefits Accounting for Leases Statement of Cash Flows
22
Claire B. May Gordon S. May
Effective Writing, 9/e
Basic Approach
For Accounting, Business Communication, and Technical Writing courses. A useful guide to all the stages of the writing process. Effective Writing guides the writer through all the stages of the writing process: planning, critical thinking, generating and organizing ideas, writing the draft, revising, and designing for presentation. Throughout the text, Effective Writing stresses coherence, conciseness, and clarity as the most important qualities of the writing done by accountants. This edition includes many new and revised assignments that reinforce the concepts covered in the text, as well as coverage on ethics in communication.
Table of Contents
PART I: COMMUNICATION STRATEGIES 1. Accountants as Communicators 2. The Writing Process: An Overview 3. The Flow of Thought: Organizing for Coherence 4. A Sense of Style: Writing with Conciseness and Clarity 5. Standard English: Grammar, Punctuation, and Spelling 6. Format for Clarity: Document Design 7. Critical Thinking 8. Accounting Research PART II: BUSINESS DOCUMENTS 9. Letters 10. Memos and Email 11. Reports PART III: WRITING AND YOUR CAREER 12. Writing Essay Exams: Academic Courses and Professional Certification Exams 13. Writing for Employment: Resumes and Letters 14. Writing for Publication 15. Oral Communication: Listening and Speaking
Accounting Practices: The New Zealand Context, 3/e

Ruth McIntosh ISBN 10: 1442545844 ISBN 13: 9781442562554 384pp 2011 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM
The practical nature of Accounting Practices: The New Zealand Context makes this book suited to anyone wanting to increase their knowledge of accounting practices, or to fill gaps in their bookkeeping knowledge. The text has been written specifically for students taking the New Zealand Diploma of Business paper 501 Accounting Practices. The authors clear, straightforward writing style and her thorough understanding of the learning process make this book a key resource for all accounting students.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
PART I: COMMUNICATION STRATEGIES 1. The general journal 2. Goods and services tax 3. The general ledger 4. Specialised journals 5. Subsidiary ledgers 6. Inventory methods 7. Petty cash and bank reconciliations 8. Balance-day adjustments 9. Non-current assets and depreciation 10. Financial statements 11. Computerised accounting packages 12. An introduction to other entities 13. Partnerships 14. Cash budgets
23
Alan Melville
International Financial Reporting: A Practical Guide, 3/e
Basic Approach
International Financial Reporting 3e provides a unique practical introduction to the international standards, outlining how these standards are used on a daily basis by companies in the preparation of their financial statements. The author examines the recognition, measurement, presentation and disclosure requirements of each IFRS and IAS in a clear and concise way which makes a difficult set of standards comprehensible to even a novice student. Features of the book include interpretive guidance, coverage of every key International Financial Reporting Standard (IFRS) and International Accounting Standard (IAS), together with an unparalleled level of student interactivity and assessment. Examples and practice questions are provided throughout the book and in a new Companion Website developed for this 3rd edition to aid student understanding and to provide a framework for grasping the key aspects of this complex and fast-moving subject. Table of Contents PART 1: INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL REPORTING 1. The regulatory framework 2. The IASB conceptual framework 3. Presentation of financial statements 4. Accounting policies, accounting, estimates and errors PART 2: FINANCIAL REPORTING IN PRACTICE 5. Property, plant and equipment 6. Tangible assets 7. Impairment of assets 8. Non-current assets held for sale and discontinued operations 9. Leases 10. Inventories and construction contacts 11. Financial instruments 12. Provision and events after the reporting period 13. Revenue 14. Employee Benefits 15. Taxation in financial statements 16. Statement of cash flows 17. Financial reporting in hyperinflationary economies PART 3: CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 18. Groups of companies (1) 19. Groups of companies (2) 20. Associates and joint ventures 21. Related parties and changes in foreign exchange rates PART 4: ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 22. Ratio analysis 23. Earnings per share 24. Segmental analysis PART 5: SMALL AND MEDIUM SIZED BUSINESSES 25. The IFRS and SME's PART 6: ANSWERS 26. Answers to exercises
Taxation: Finance Act 2011, 17/e

Alan Melville ISBN 10: 0273758284 ISBN 13: 9780273758280 624pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Taxation is the number one textbook on taxation in the UK. Now in its 17th annual edition, this excellent text has established itself as a reliable and comprehensive guide for students taking a first level course in the subject. This seventeenth edition brings the book completely up-to-date in accordance with the provisions of the Finance Act.
Table of Contents
PART 1: INCOME TAX AND NATIONAL INSURANCE 1. Introduction to the UKtax system 2. Introduction to income tax 3. Personal allowances 4. Payments and gifts eligible for tax relief 5. Income from property
24
6. Income from savings and investments 7. Income from employment (1) 8. Income from employment (2) 9. Income from self-employment: Computation of income 10. Income from self-employment: Basis periods 11. Income from self-employment: Capital allowances 12. Income from self-employment: Trading losses 13. Income from self-employment: Partnerships 14. Pension contributions 15. Payment of income tax, interest and penalties 16. National insurance contributions 17. Review questions (Set A) PART 2: CAPITAL GAINS TAX 18. Introduction to capital gains tax 19. Computation of gains and losses 20. Chattels and wasting assets 21. Shares and securities 22. Principal private residences 23. CGT reliefs 24. Review questions (Set B) PART 3: CORPORATION TAX 25. Introduction to corporation tax 26. Corporate chargeable gains 27. Computation and payment of the corporation tax liability 28. Corporation tax losses 29. Close companies and companies with investment business 30. Groups of companies and reconstructions 31. Review questions (Set C) PART 4: MISCELLANEOUS 32. Value added tax (1) 33. Value added tax (2) 34. Inheritance tax 35. Overseas aspects of taxation 36. Review questions (Set D) PART 5: ANSWERS 37. Answers to exercises 38. Answers to review questions
Kenneth Merchant Wim Van der Stede
Management Control Systems: Performance Measurement, Evaluation and Incentives, 3/e
Basic Approach
With its unique range of case studies, real life examples and comprehensive coverage of the latest management control-related tools and techniques, Management Control Systems is the ideal guide to this complex and multidimensional subject for upper level undergraduates, postgraduates and practicing professionals.
Table of Contents
PART I: THE CONTROL FUNCTION OF MANAGEMENT 1. Management and Control PART II: MANAGEMENT CONTROL ALTERNATIVES AND THEIR EFFECTS 2. Results Controls 3. Action, Personnel, and Cultural Controls 4. Control System Tightness 5. Control System Costs 6. Designing and Evaluating Management Control Systems PART III: FINANCIAL RESULTS CONTROL SYSTEMS 7. Financial Responsibility Centers 8. Planning and Budgeting 9. Incentive Systems PART IV: PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT ISSUES AND THEIR EFFECTS 10. Finan cial Performance Measures and their Effects 11. Combinations of Measures and Other Remedies to the Myopia Problem 12. Using Financial Results Control in the Presence of Uncontrollable Factors PART V: CORPORATE GOVERNANCE, IMPORTANT CONTROL-RELATED ROLES AND ETHICS 13. Corporate Governance and Boards of Directors 14. Controllers and Auditors 15. Management Control-Related Ethical Issues and Analyses PART VI: SIGNIFICANT SITUATIONAL INFLUENCES ON MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEMS 16. The Effects of Environmental Uncertainty, Organizational Strategy, and Multinationality on Management Control Systems 17. Management Control in Non-Profit Organizations
25
Comparative International Accounting, 12/e

Christopher Nobes Robert B. Parker
Now in its twelfth edition, Comparative International Accounting is renowned for its depth of discussion and comparative method of explaining the international dimensions of financial reporting. This text uncovers the conceptual and contextual foundations of International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) and contrasts them with US generally accepted accounting principles (US GAAP). It also examines international differences that remain between countries such as China, France, Germany and Japan, and pays particular attention to the key issues of harmonization, political lobbying and the special accounting problems of multinational companies.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
PART I: SETTING THE SCENE 1. Introduction 2. Causes and examples of international differences 3. International classification of financial reporting 4. International harmonization PART II: FINANCIAL REPORTING BY LISTED GROUPS USING IFRS OR US GAAP 5. The context of financial reporting by listed groups 6. The requirements of International Financial Reporting Standards 7. Different versions of IFRS practice 8. Financial reporting in the United States 9. Key financial reporting topics 10. Political lobbying on accounting standards US, UK, and international experience PART III: CHINA AND JAPAN 11. Financial reporting in China and Japan PART IV: FINANCIAL REPORTING BY INDIVIDUAL COMPANIES 12. The context of financial reporting by individual companies 13. Harmonization and transition in Europe 14. Making accounting rules for unlisted business entities in Europe 15. Accounting rules and practices of individual companies in Europe PART V: GROUP ACCOUNTING ISSUES IN REPORTING BY MNEs 16. Group accounting 17. Foreign currency translation 18. Segment reporting PART VI: ENFORCEMENT AND ANALYSIS 19. Enforcement of financial reporting requirements 20. International auditing 21. International financial analysis
Understanding Financial Statements, 10/e

Aileen M. Ormiston Lyn M. Fraser
Basic Approach
A supplementary text for a variety of Business courses, including Financial Statement Analysis, Investments, Personal Finance, and Financial Planning and Analysis. Fraser and Ormiston take students behind the financial reports to assess the real financial condition and performance of U.S. companies. Understanding Financial Statements retains its reputation for readability, concise coverage, and accessibility. It gives students the conceptual background and analytical tools necessary to understand and interpret business financial statements. Its ultimate goal is to improve students' ability to translate financial statement numbers into a meaningful map for business decisions and enable each student to approach financial statements with enhanced confidence.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Financial Statements: An Overview The Balance Sheet Income Statement and Statement of Stockholders Equity Statement of Cash Flows The Analysis of Financial Statements
26
Thomas Plenborg Christian Petersen
Financial Statement Analysis: Valuation - Credit Analysis - Executive Compensation
Basic Approach
This well-structured and thoughtful text is ideal for undergraduate students in accounting and finance, graduate students and MBA students wishing to gain insight into financial statement analysis. Focusing on three user-groupsequity, credit and compensation analyststhe authors present a variety of targeted tools and techniques for analysis and interpretation of financial statements. This text prompts students and professionals with a range of career goals to think critically when analysing financial dataand to make different decisions based on user-group objectives.
Table of Contents
1. Introduction to financial statement analysis PART 1: ACCOUNTING DATA 2. Introduction to financial statements and bookkeeping 3. Accrual-based versus cash-flow-based performance measures PART 2: FINANCIAL ANALYSIS 4. The analytical income statement and balance sheet 5. Profitability analysis 6. Growth analysis 7. Liquidity risk analysis PART 3: DECISION MAKING 8. Forecasting 9. Valuation 10. Cost of capital 11. Credit analysis 12. Accounting-based bonus plans for executives PART 4: ASSESSMENT OF ACCOUNTING DATA 13. Accounting quality 14. Accounting flexibility in the income statement 15. Accounting flexibility in the balance sheet
Ray Proctor
Managerial Accounting: Decision Making and Performance Improvement, 4/e
Basic Approach
Managerial Accounting teaches business students how to use accounting to make better decisions and improve performance. Engaging case studies and the popular Managers Point of View boxes illustrate how concepts are applied in real world business situations. The latter add an extra dimension to your learning, as they are written by experienced practitioners of both management and accounting. With a minimum of technical language and a dedication to practical application, this popular text gives a refreshingly clear guide to management accounting.
Table of Contents
PART 1: FOUNDATIONS 1. Cost behaviour 2. The difference between profit and cash PART 2: FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT 3. Ratio analysis and financial management 4. Working capital management PART 3: DECISION MAKING 5. Variable costing and breakeven analysis 6. Short-term decisions using variable costing 7. Short-term decisions using relevant costing 8. Capital investment appraisal for long-term decisions PART 4: PRODUCT COSTING AND PRICING 9. Product costs using absorption costing 10. Product costs using activity-based costing 11. Comparison of profits under absorption and variable costing 12. Pricing your products 13. Divisional performance and transfer pricing PART 5: BUSINESS PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT 14. Budgets and their creation 15. Using budgets to control operations 16. Budgets, Behaviour and Beyond Budgeting 17. Balanced Scorecards
27
18. Performance Management Strategies
Accounting Information Systems, 12/e

Marshall B. Romney Paul J. Steinbart
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in AIS. The market-leading book that delivers the most comprehensive and flexible coverage of the four major approaches to teaching AIS. Instructors can easily reorder chapters, and focus on what you want: (a) transaction cycles and controls; (b) systems life cycle; (c) databases and data modeling; or (d) computer-based controls, fraud, and auditing. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART I: CONCEPTUAL FOUNDATIONS OF ACCOUNTING INFORMATION SYSTEMS 1. Accounting Information Systems: An Overview 2. Overview of Transaction Processing and Enterprise Resource Planning Systems 3. Systems Documentation Techniques 4. Relational Databases PART II: CONTROL AND AUDIT OF ACCOUNTING INFORMATION SYSTEMS 5. Computer Fraud 6. Computer Fraud and Abuse Techniques 7. Control and Accounting Information Systems 8. Information Systems Controls for System ReliabilityPart 1: Information Security 9. Information Systems Controls for System ReliabilityPart 2: Confidentiality and Privacy 10. Information Systems Controls for System ReliabilityPart 3: Processing Integrity and Availability 11. Auditing Computer-Based Information Systems PART III: ACCOUNTING INFORMATION SYSTEMS APPLICATIONS 12. The Revenue Cycle: Sales to Cash Collections 13. The Expenditure Cycle: Purchasing to Cash Disbursements 14. The Production Cycle 15. The Human Resources Management and Payroll Cycle 16. General Ledger and Reporting System PART IV: THE REA DATA MODEL 17. Database Design Using the REA Data Model 18. Implementing an REA Data Model in a Relational Database 19. Special Topics in REA Modeling PART V: THE SYSTEMS DEVELOPMENT PROCESS 20. Introduction to Systems Development; Systems Analysis 21. AIS Development Strategies 22. Systems Design, Implementation, and Operation
Alan Sangster Frank Wood
Frank Wood's Business Accounting Volume 1, 12/e
Basic Approach
The worlds best-selling textbook on book-keeping and accounting, Business Accounting Volume 1 continues to provide an indispensible introduction for students and professionals across the globe. It is renowned for clarity, with easy-to-understand language and a plethora of examples to aid your understanding. The 12th edition is updated to be fully compliant with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS). Other updates include new coverage of professional ethics, disaster recovery, and over 70 new examples to test your understanding.
Table of Contents
PART ONE: INTRODUCTION TO DOUBLE ENTRY BOOKKEEPING 1. The accounting equation and the statement of financial position 2. The double entry system for assets, liabilities and capital 3. Inventory 4. The effect of profit or loss on capital and the double entry system for expenses and revenues 5. Balancing-off accounts 6. The trial balance PART TWO: THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF SOLE TRADERS 7. Income statements: an introduction
28
8. Statements of financial position 9. Income statements and statements of financial position: further considerations 10. Accounting concepts and assumptions PART THREE: BOOKS OF ORIGINAL ENTRY 11. Books of original entry and ledgers 12. The banking system in the UK 13. Cash books 14. Sales day book and sales ledger 15. Purchases day book and purchases ledger 16. Returns day books 17. The journal 18. The analytical petty cash book and the imprest system 19. Value added tax 20. Columnar day books 21. Employees' pay 22. Computers and accounting 23. Computerized accounting systems PART FOUR: ADJUSTMENTS FOR FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 24. Capital expenditure and revenue expenditure 25. Bad debts, allowances for doubtful debts, and provisions for discounts 26. Depreciation of non-current assets: nature and calculations 27. Double entry records for depreciation 28. Accruals and prepayments and other adjustments for financial statements 29. The valuation of inventory 30. Bank reconciliation statements 31. Control accounts 32. Errors not affecting the balancing of the trial balance 33. Suspense accounts and errors Scenario questions PART FIVE: SPECIAL ACCOUNTING PROCEDURES 34. Introduction to accounting ratios 35. Single entry and incomplete records 36. Receipts and payments accounts and income and expenditure accounts 37. Manufacturing accounts 38. Departmental accounts 39. Statements of cash flows 40. Joint venture accounts PART SIX: PARTNERSHIP ACCOUNTS AND COMPANY ACCOUNTS 41. Partnership accounts: an introduction 42. Goodwill for sole traders and partnerships 43. Revaluation of partnership assets 44. Partnership dissolution 45. An introduction to the financial statements of limited liability companies 46. Purchase of existing partnership and sole traders' businesses PART SEVEN: AN INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL ANALYSIS 47. An introduction to the analysis and interpretation of accounting statements PART EIGHT: AN INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING 48. An introduction to management accounting APPENDICES 1. Answers to review questions 2. Answers to multiple-choice questions 3. Glossary
Alan Sangster Frank Wood
Frank Wood's Business Accounting Volume 2, 12/e
Basic Approach
Business Accounting is the worlds best-selling textbook on bookkeeping and accounting. Now in its twelfth edition, it has become the standard introductory text for accounting students and professionals alike. The book is used on a wide variety of courses in accounting and business, both at secondary and tertiary level and for those studying for professional qualifications. It builds on Business Accounting Volume 1 to cover advanced aspects of financial accounting. The twelfth edition includes greater emphasis on management accounting, company and group accounts and also examines key accounting concepts such as corporate governance.
Table of Contents
PART ONE: SPECIAL ACCOUNTS 1. Accounting for branches 2. Hire purchase accounts 3. Contract accounts PART TWO: COMPANIES 4. Limited companies: general background
29
5. The issue of shares and loan notes 6. Companies purchasing and redeeming their own shares and loan notes 7. Limited companies taking over other businesses 8. Taxation in company financial statements 9. Provisions, reserves and liabilities 10. The increase and reduction of the share capital of limited companies 11. Accounting standards and related documents 12. The financial statements of limited companies: income statements, related statements and notes 13. The financial statements of limited companies: balance sheets 14. Published financial statements of limited companies: accompanying notes 15. Statements of cash flows PART THREE: GROUPS 16. Group financial statements: an introduction 17. Consolidation of balance sheets: basic mechanics (I) 18. Consolidation of balance sheets: basic mechanics (II) 19. Intercompany dealings: indebtedness and unrealized profit in stocks 20. Consolidated financial statements: acquisition of shares in subsidiaries at different dates 21. Intra-group dividends 22. Consolidated balance sheets: sundry matters 23. Consolidation of the financial statements of a vertical group of companies 24. Consolidated income statements and comprehensive income statements 25. Business combinations - purchase method accounting 26. Standards covering subsidiary and associates and joint venture PART FOUR: FINANCIAL ANALYSIS 27. Accounting ratios 28. Interpretation of financial statements PART FIVE: ISSUES IN FINANCIAL REPORTING 29. Accounting theory 30. Current cost accounting 31. Social accounting 32. Corporate governance 33. Public sector accounting 34. Accounting for management control PART SIX: COSTING 35. Elements of costing 36. Absorption and marginal costing 37. Job, batch and process costing PART SEVEN: BUDGETS 38. Budgeting and budgetary control 39. Cash budgets 40. Co-ordination of budgets PART EIGHT: STANDARD COSTING AND VARIANCE ANALYSIS 41. Standard costing 42. Materials and labour variances 43. Overhead and sales variances PART NINE: PLANNING, CONTROL AND DECISION MAKING 44. Break-even analysis 45. Interest, annuities and leasing 46. Capital expenditure appraisal 47. The balanced scorecard PART TEN: THE EMERGING BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT OF ACCOUNTING 48. The supply chain and enterprise resource planning systems 49. E-commerce and accounting Appendices 1. Interest tables 2. Answers to Review Questions 3. Glossary
Interpreting and Analyzing Financial Statements, 6/e

Karen P. Schoenebeck Mark P. BradyGames
Basic Approach
For use as a supplement in any accounting course where analyzing financial statements and understanding financial ratios is important. This activity workbook helps students analyze real company financial statement information. Each activity concentrates on only one aspect of the analysis and uses data from well-known corporations to pique students' interest and add relevancy.
30
William R. Scott, University of Waterloo ISBN 10: 0135119154 ISBN 13: 9780135119150 592pp 2012 Cloth
Financial Accounting Theory, 6/e
Basic Approach
Appropriate for Financial Accounting Theory courses at both the senior undergraduate and professional master's levels. Written in a friendly style with clear explanations, Financial Accounting Theory provides a thorough presentation of financial accounting theories. This new edition continues to include coverage of accounting standards oriented to IASB standards as well as major U.S. accounting standards.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
Introduction Accounting Under Ideal Conditions The Decision Usefulness Approach to Financial Reporting Efficient Securities Markets The Information Approach to Decision Usefulness The Measurement Approach to Decision Usefulness Measurement Applications Economic Consequences and Positive Accounting Theory An Analysis of Conflict Executive Compensation Earnings Management Standard Setting: Economic Issues Standard Setting: Political Issues
Shapland & Turner Cases in Financial Accounting

Julie Shapland Cynthia Turner
Basic Approach
For undergraduate or graduate financial accounting courses. A rich, relatable, and student-friendly set of cases, grounded in accounting fundamentals. The cases found in this text involve realistic, small business settings that students will be familiar withall of which will guide students through the entire accounting processing cycle.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. Project Project Project Project
DJ Wedding Planner Orthodontist Movie Theater
College Accounting, 12/e

ISBN 10: 013277206X ISBN 13: 9780132772068 936pp 2013 Cloth
Jeffrey L. Slater, North Shore Community College
Basic Approach
For college Accounting and Bookkeeping courses. Back to basics. College Accounting: A Practical Approach focuses on getting back to the basics of accounting by providing students with plenty of detailed instruction, opportunities to apply what they learn, and a basic overview of accounting in todays technology-driven world. This text is available in two different volumes: Chapters 1-25 which cover a two semester course and Chapters 112 which cover the material for one semester.
31
Also Available: College Accounting Chapters 1-12 with Study Guide and Working Papers, 12/e ISBN 10: 0132772175 ISBN 13: 9780132772174 984pp 2013 Paper
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21.
Accounting Concepts and Procedures Debits and Credits: Analyzing and Recording Business Transactions Beginning the Accounting Cycle The Accounting Cycle Continued The Accounting Cycle Completed Banking Procedure and Control of Cash Calculating Pay and Payroll Taxes: The Beginning of the Payroll Process Paying, Recording, and Reporting Payroll and Payroll Taxes: The Conclusion of the Payroll Process Sales and Cash Receipts Purchases and Cash Payments Preparing a Worksheet for a Merchandise Company Completion of the Accounting Cycle for a Merchandise Company Accounting for Bad Debts Notes Receivable and Notes Payable Accounting for Merchandise Inventory Accounting for Property, Plant, Equipment, and Intangible Assets Partnership Corporations: Organizations and Stock Corporations: Stock Values, Dividends, Treasury Stocks, and Retained Earnings Corporations and Bonds Payable Statement of Cash Flows
Lakeside Company: Case Studies in Auditing, 12/e

John M. Trussel J. Douglas Frazer
For undergraduate/graduate courses in auditing. The cases in The Lakeside Company create a realistic view of auditing by putting the abstract concepts into practice.
Basic Approach
MYOB AccountRight Enterprise v19: A Hands On Approach, 5/e

Mark Vallely ISBN 10: 1442545860 ISBN 13: 9781442545861 252pp 2011 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM
Basic Approach
The aim of MYOB A Hands on Approach is for students to acquire an introductory understanding of the MYOB programme and an appreciation of the power of integrated accounting information systems to produce the information that managers and owners of small to medium sized businesses need to make sound business decisions. This very comprehensive and practical book steps students through the entire process of setting up and using MYOB AccountRight Enterprise Version 19. Designed for students of introductory accounting or accounting information systems, this material has been successfully class tested with the authors own students over a number of semesters.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
Getting Started. Installing MYOB AccountRight Enterprise v19 File Creation, Security and Maintenance Tax Codes and the Accounts List The Expenditure Cycle: Cash Disbursements and Purchasing The Expenditure Cycle: The Set Up of Inventory and Other Items The Expenditure Cycle: Purchasing and Supplier Payments The Revenue Cycle: Sales and Cash Collections Bank reconciliations and adjusting entries The Human Resource and Payroll Cycle Integrated MYOB and End of Month Process
32
Karen Van Peursem Michael Pratt Carolyn Cordery
Auditing: Theory and Practice in New Zealand, 6/e
Now in its 6th edition, Auditing: Theory and Practice in New Zealand continues to provide tertiary students of auditing with a comprehensive introduction to the conceptual issues and application of audit theory to practice. This new edition has been substantially revised, condensed and fully updated. There is a greater focus on subsystems and an increased number of review exercises, diagrams and updates to the standards, law and case studies. Structured learning outcomes, exercises and review questions promote and encourage student engagement with the topic.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25.
Introduction to audit and assurance services Theories of auditing Audit concepts and standards The role of auditors through history Statutory law and public sector audit The profession and ethics The courts and the auditors role: the legal liability of auditors Audit risk Judgment and materiality Audit evidence and audit testing The audit process: an overview Practical aspects of audit planning Principles of internal control Internal control and the auditor Assurance services and internal audit Specific analytical procedures Audit sampling Auditing computerised accounting systems Audit firms: quality control, working papers and computer tools Risk-based auditing of the sales subsystem Risk-based auditing of the expenditure subsystems Risk-based auditing of the warehousing subsystem Risk-based auditing of financing and fixed asset cycles Completion and review Communication: Audit report and opinion
Pauline Weetman
Financial Accounting: An Introduction, 5/e
Basic Approach
The fifth edition of this revised and fully updated text continues to provide students with a clear and wellstructured introduction to financial accounting within a sound conceptual framework. The book retains all of the classic features that have contributed to the books success: clarity of expression, the focus on the accounting equation, student activities and real-life commentaries running through each chapter, and the inclusion of the Safe and Sure Annual Report as an example of a listed company. There is a strong emphasis on the Conceptual Framework of the International Accounting Standards Board and on the 'why' rather than simply the 'what' of the subject. The underpinning conceptual framework focuses on the needs of users of financial information.
Table of Contents
PART 1: A CONCEPTUAL FRAMEWORK: SETTING THE SCENE 1. Who needs accounting? 2. A system approach to financial reporting: the accounting equation 3. Financial statements from the accounting equation 4. Ensuring the quality of financial statements PART 2: REPORTING THE TRANSACTIONS OF A BUSINESS 5. Accounting information for service businesses 6. Accounting information for trading businesses PART 3: RECOGNITION IN FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 7. Published financial statements 8. Non-current (fixed) assets 9. Current assets 10. Current Liabilities
33
11. Provisions and non-current (long-term) liabilities 12. Ownership interest PART 4: ANALYSIS AND ISSUES IN REPORTING 13. Ratio Analysis 14. Reporting corporate performance 15. Reporting cash flows Glossary of financial accounting terms Appendices 1: Information extracted from annual report of Safe and Sure plc, used throughout Financial Accounting 2: Solutions to numerical and technical questions in Financial Accounting
Financial & Management Accounting, 5/e

Pauline Weetman ISBN 10: 027376196X ISBN 13: 9780273761969 2011 Kit/Package/ShrinkWrap
This revised and fully updated edition continues to provide students with a clear and well-structured introduction to financial and management accounting. The fifth edition of Weetman's Financial & Management Accounting retains all of the classic features that have contributed to the books success such as, clarity of expression, the focus on the accounting equation, student activities, real-life commentaries running through each chapter, and the inclusion of the Safe and Sure Annual Report as a real world example of a listed company.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
PART 1: A CONCEPTUAL FRAMEWORK: SETTING THE SCENE 1. Who needs accounting? 2. A systematic approach to financial reporting: the accounting equation 3. Financial statements from the accounting equation 4. Ensuring the quality of financial statements PART 2: REPORTING THE TRANSACTIONS OF A BUSINESS 5. Accounting information for service businesses 6. Accounting information for trading businesses PART 3: RECOGNITION IN FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 7. Published financial statements 8. Non-current (fixed) assets 9. Current assets 10. Current liabilities 11. Provisions and non-current (long-term) liabilities 12. Ownership interest PART 4: ANALYSIS AND ISSUES IN REPORTING 13. Ratio analysis 14. Reporting corporate performance 15. Reporting cash flows MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING PART 5: SETTING THE SCENE AND DEFINING THE BASIC TOOLS OF MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING 16. Functions of management accounting 17. Classification of costs 18. Product costs: materials, labour and overheads PART 6: JOB COSTS AND STOCK VALUATION 19. Job costing PART 7: DECISION MAKING 20. Breakeven analysis and short-term decision making 21. Preparing a budget 22. Standard costs 23. Performance evaluation and feedback reporting PART 9: CAPITAL INVESTMENT APPRAISAL AND BUSINESS STRATEGY 24. Capital investment appraisal 25. Business strategy and management accounting Appendices I Information extracted from annual report of Safe and Sure Group plc, used throughout Financial Accounting II Solutions to numerical and technical questions in Financial Accounting III Solutions to numerical and technical questions in Management Accounting Index
34
Taxation
Prentice Hall's Federal Taxation 2013 Corporations, Partnerships, Estates and Trusts, 26/e
Kenneth E. Anderson Thomas R. Pope John L. Kramer
ISBN 10: 0132891549 ISBN 13: 9780132891547 984pp 2013 Cloth For any first course in Federal Taxation at the undergraduate or MBA level. The most recent federal taxation mandates with the highest level of readability and relevancy for students. The Pope/Anderson/Kramer series is unsurpassed in blending the technical content of the most recent federal taxation mandates with the highest level of readability and relevancy for students.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
1. Tax Research 2. Corporate Formations and Capital Structure 3. The Corporate Income Tax 4. Corporate Nonliquidating Distributions 5. Other Corporate Tax Levies 6. Corporate Liquidating Distributions 7. Corporate Acquisitions and Reorganizations 8. Consolidated Tax Returns 9. Partnership Formation and Operation 10. Special Partnership Issues 11. S Corporations 12. The Gift Tax 13. The Estate Tax 14. Income Taxation of Trusts and Estates 15. Administrative Procedures 16. U.S. Taxation of Foreign-Related Transactions Appendix A: Tax Research Working Paper File Appendix B: Completed Tax Forms Appendix C: MACRS Tables Appendix D: Glossary Appendix E: AICPA Statements on Standards for Tax Services No. 1-7 (November 2009) Appendix F: Comparison of Tax Attributes for C Corporations, Partnerships, and S Corporations Appendix G: Reserved Appendix H: Actuarial Tables Appendix I: Index of Code Sections Appendix J: Index of Treasury Regulations Appendix K: Index of Government Promulgations Appendix L: Index of Court Cases Appendix M: Subject Index
Thomas R. Pope Kenneth E. Anderson John L. Kramer
Prentice Hall's Federal Taxation 2013 Comprehensive, 26/e
ISBN 10: 0132891646 ISBN 13: 9780132891646 1600pp 2013 Cloth For any first course in Federal Taxation at the undergraduate or MBA level. The most recent federal taxation mandates with the highest level of readability and relevancy for students. The Pope/Anderson/Kramer series is unsurpassed in blending the technical content of the most recent federal taxation mandates with the highest level of readability and relevancy for students.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
INDIVIDUALS 1. An Introduction to Taxation 2. Determination of Tax 3. Gross Income: Inclusions 4. Gross Income: Exclusions 5. Property Transactions: Capital Gains and Losses 6. Deductions and Losses 7. Itemized Deductions 8. Losses and Bad Debts 9. Employee Expenses and Deferred Compensation
35
10. Depreciation, Cost Recovery, Amortization, and Depletion 11. Accounting Periods and Methods 12. Property Transactions: Nontaxable Exchanges 13. Property Transactions: Section 1231 and Recapture 14. Special Tax Computation Methods, Tax Credits, and Payment of Tax CORPORATIONS 1. Tax Research 2. Corporate Formations and Capital Structure 3. The Corporate Income Tax 4. Corporate Nonliquidating Distributions 5. Other Corporate Tax Levies 6. Corporate Liquidating Distributions 7. Corporate Acquisitions and Reorganizations 8. Consolidated Tax Returns 9. Partnership Formation and Operation 10. Special Partnership Issues 11. S Corporations 12. The Gift Tax 13. The Estate Tax 14. Income Taxation of Trusts and Estates 15. Administrative Procedures Tables: 2011 Tax Tables and Rate Schedules Appendix A: Tax Research Working Paper File Appendix B: Completed Tax Forms Appendix C: MACRS Tables Appendix D: Glossary Appendix E: AICPA Statements on Standards for Tax Services No. 1-7 (November 2009) Appendix F: Comparison of Tax Attributes for C Corporations, Partnerships, and S Corporations Appendix G: Reserved Appendix H: Actuarial Tables Appendix I: Index of Code Sections Appendix J: Index of Treasury Regulations Appendix K: Index of Government Promulgations Appendix L: Index of Court Cases Appendix M: Subject Index
Thomas R. Pope Kenneth E. Anderson John L. Kramer
Prentice Hall's Federal Taxation 2013 Individuals, 26/e
For any first course in Federal Taxation at the undergraduate or MBA level. The most recent federal taxation mandates with the highest level of readability and relevancy for students. The Pope/Anderson/Kramer series is unsurpassed in blending the technical content of the most recent federal taxation mandates with the highest level of readability and relevancy for students.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
1. An Introduction to Taxation 2. Determination of Tax 3. Gross Income: Inclusions 4. Gross Income: Exclusions 5. Property Transactions: Capital Gains and Losses 6. Deductions and Losses 7. Itemized Deductions 8. Losses and Bad Debts 9. Employee Expenses and Deferred Compensation 10. Depreciation, Cost Recovery, Amortization, and Depletion 11. Accounting Periods and Methods 12. Property Transactions: Nontaxable Exchanges 13. Property Transactions: Section 1231 and Recapture 14. Special Tax Computation Methods, Tax Credits, and Payment of Tax 15. Tax Research 16. Corporations 17. Partnerships and S Corporations 18. Taxes and Investment Planning Tables: 2011 Tax Tables and Rate Schedules Appendix A: Tax Research Working Paper File Appendix B: 2011 Tax Forms Appendix C: MACRS Tables Appendix D: Glossary Appendix E: AICPA Statements on Standards for Tax Services
36
Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix
F: Index of Code Sections G: Index of Treasury Regulations H: Index of Government Promulgations I: Index of Court Cases J: Subject Index
37
CIS
Jump Right In: Essential Computer Skills Using Microsoft Office 2010
Jean Andrews
ISBN 10: 013297570X ISBN 13: 9780132975704 800pp 2013 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM
Basic Approach
A computer literacy approach completely reinvented for the needs of today's 21st century student Best-selling author and expert teacher Jean Andrews reinvented the basic approach to teaching computer literacy for today's students. Andrews focuses on how computers are really used in personal life, academics, and technical careers. She teaches the #1 competency students need most: the ability to keep learning new skills on their own. Every feature in this book is designed to make learning quick and easy. The book covers core computer skills using real-world projects that help students learn how to use these tools to perform the most common personal and business tasks:
Using and managing Windows 7 computers Using the Internet to access and share information, and to do business Using the Web for academic research Capturing and organizing information with OneNote 2010 Using Word 2010 to communicate information and apply for a job Using PowerPoint 2010 to persuade an audience, present a compelling story, or deliver important information Using Excel 2010 to organize data, solve problems, make decisions, and transform data into knowledge Making informed computer buying decisions Keeping computers reliable, fast, and safe
Table of Contents
PART I: GETTING STARTED 1. Using Windows 7 to Manage Applications and Data 2. Finding and Using Information on the Web 3. Creating Documents with Microsoft Word PART II: FUNDAMENTAL COMPUTER COMPETENCY 4. Using the Web for Research 5. Writing Papers Using Microsoft Word Templates and Tools 6. Communicating with Others Using the Internet PART III: ENHANCING YOUR PRODUCTIVITY 7. Finding a Job Using the Web, a Rsum, and a Business Letter 8. Persuading an Audience using a PowerPoint Presentation 9. Adding Action and Sound to a Presentation using PowerPoint 10. Managing Numbers and Text using Excel 11. Organizing and Making Sense of Data using Excel PART IV: BUYING AND CARING FOR YOUR OWN COMPUTER 12. Connecting to the Internet and Securing a Computer 13. Maintaining a Computer and Fixing Computer Problems 14. Buying Your Own Personal Computer SOLUTIONS APPENDIX (STEP-BY-STEP INSTRUCTIONS FOR MASTERING PROJECTS) 1. Using Windows 7 to Manage Applications and Data 2. Finding and Using Information on the Web 3. Creating Documents with Microsoft Word 4. Using the Web for Research 5. Writing Papers Using Microsoft Word Templates and Tools 6. Communicating with Others Using the Internet 7. Finding a Job Using the Web, a Rsum, and a Business Letter 8. Persuading an Audience using a PowerPoint Presentation 9. Adding Action and Sound to a Presentation using PowerPoint 10. Managing Numbers and Text using Excel 11. Organizing and Making Sense of Data using Excel 12. Connecting to the Internet and Securing a Computer 13. Maintaining a Computer and Fixing Computer Problems 14. Buying Your Own Personal Computer
38
George Beekman, Oregon State University Ben Beekman ISBN 10: 0132737515 ISBN 13: 9780132737517 672pp 2012 Paper
Digital Planet: Tomorrow's Technology and You, Complete, 10/e
Basic Approach
For introductory courses in computer concepts often include instruction in Microsoft Office. Explores the promises and challenges of information technology, along with its effect on businesses, people, society, and the future. Digital Planet: Tomorrows Technology and You explores information technology on three levels: Explanations: Clearly explains what a computer is and what it can (and cant) do; it clearly explains the basics of information technology, from multimedia PCs to the Internet and beyond. Applications: Illustrates how computers and networks areand will beused as practical tools to solve a wide variety of problems. Implications: Puts technology in a human context, illustrating how digital devices and networks affect our lives, our world, and our future. Also Available: Digital Planet: Tomorrow's Technology and You, Introductory, 10/e ISBN 10: 0132737523 ISBN 13: 9780132737524 480pp 2012 Paper
Table of Contents
1. Exploring Our Digital Planet 2. Hardware Basics: Inside the Box 3. Hardware Basics: Peripherals 4. Software Basics: The Ghost in the Machine 5. Productivity Applications 6. Graphics, Digital Media, and Multimedia 7. Database Applications and Privacy Implications 8. Networking and Digital Communication 9. The Evolving Internet 10. Computer Security and Risks 11. Computers at Work, School, and Home 12. Information Systems in Business 13. E-Commerce and E-Business The Evolving Internet Economy 14. Systems Design and Development 15. Is Artificial Intelligence Real? Appendix A Basics
Alan R. Evans Kendall Martin Mary Anne S. Poatsy, Montgomery County Community College ISBN 10: 0132928388 ISBN 13: 9780132928380 736pp 2013 Paper
Technology In Action Complete, 9/e
Basic Approach
For introductory courses in computer concepts or computer literacy, often including instruction in Microsoft Office. A Computer Concepts Text Focused on Todays Student! Technology in Action engages students by covering topics in a progressive approach and providing rich companion media. Also Available: Technology In Action Introductory, 9/e ISBN 10: 0132924528 ISBN 13: 9780132924528 550pp 2013 Paper
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
How Will You Save the World? Looking at Computers: Understanding the Parts Using the Internet: Making the Most of the Webs Resources Application Software: Programs That Let You Work and Play Using System Software: The Operating System, Utility Programs, and File Management Understanding and Assessing Hardware: Evaluating Your System Networking: Connecting Computing Devices Digital Lifestyle: Managing Digital Data and Devices
39
9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
Securing Your System: Protecting Your Digital Data and Devices Behind the Scenes: Software Programming Behind the Scenes: Databases and Information Systems Behind the Scenes: Networking and Security in the Business World Behind the Scenes: How the Internet Works
Computer Literacy for IC3 Unit 2: Using Productivity Software

Robert L. Ferrett, Eastern Michigan University John Preston Sally Preston ISBN 10: 0132861070 ISBN 13: 9780132861076 640pp 2012 Spiralbound with CD-ROM
For introductory courses in computer literacy. Written to provide all students with an opportunity to learn and demonstrate computer and Internet literacy. Computer Literary for IC3 was written to align with a certification called Internet and Computing Core Certification (IC3). This certification is for users who want to demonstrate critical computer and Internet skills valued in todays academic and professional environments. The Computer Literacy for IC3 text is written to meet the certification standards and provide students with a broad understanding of the key components of computer literacy in order to prepare for the exam. This certification has 3 units: Unit 1: Computing Fundamentals (computer concepts) Unit 2: Using Productivity Software Unit 3: Living Online (the Internet) Each of these units is available as a separate Computer Literacy for IC3 text. This text contains: Unit 2: Using Productivity Software Microsoft Office 2010 and covers productivity software based on Microsoft Office 2010 including common program functions, word processing functions, spreadsheet functions, and presentation software functions. The third edition of Computer Literacy for IC3 has been revised to keep up with the IC3 programs evolution, which reflects the recent changes in computers and technology. Instead of publishing one large, comprehensive text, the three units are now available as separate, smaller texts.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
IC3-2009 UNIT 2USING PRODUCTIVITY SOFTWARE OUTLINE 1. Starting with Office Applications 2. Creating a New Word Document and Inserting Graphics and Tables 3. Format and Organize Paragraphs and Documents 4. Formatting Informational Documents 5. Work with Collaborative Tools 6. Creating a Formatting a Worksheet 7. Managing Money Using Formulas and Functions 8. Giving Meaning to Data Using Charts 9. Creating a Presentation 10. Enhancing a Presentation 11. Creating a Customized Database 12. Retrieving Information from Your Database
Robert L. Ferrett, Eastern Michigan University John Preston Sally Preston ISBN 10: 0132873974 ISBN 13: 9780132873970 100pp 2012 Spiral Bound
Computer Literacy for IC3 Update for Windows 7
Basic Approach
For introductory courses in computer literacy. Written to provide all students with an opportunity to learn and demonstrate computer and Internet literacy. Computer Literary for IC3 was written to align with a certification called Internet and Computing Core Certification (IC3). This certification is for users who want to demonstrate critical computer and Internet skills valued in todays academic and professional environments. The Computer Literacy for IC3 text is written to meet the certification standards and provide students with a broad understanding of the key components of computer literacy in order to prepare for the exam. ** This is a one-chapter supplement. **
Table of Contents
Learning Outcomes Identify the taskbar and its uses Identify desktop icons and their uses Identify windows and their uses Identify dialog and warning boxes and their uses
40
Add a gadget to the Windows desktop Identify how to use a mouse or trackball Identify how to minimize, maximize, and restore down windows Identify how to resize, move, and scroll windows Identify how to shut down and restart the computer Identify how to log off and switch users Identify how to put the computer in sleep mode Identify how to put the computer in lock mode Identify how to shut down nonresponsive programs Identify how to use the Start menu Identify how to use online help Pin a shortcut to the Start menu Move between programs Understand folders Use folders on the desktop Display properties Rename and delete desktop shortcut icons Identify file types Create folders and change views Sort files Create, copy, move, and delete folders Select, copy, move, and delete files Search for files and folders Restore files from the recycle bin Name folders and files with standard conventions Manage files and folders Open problem files
Debra Geoghan
Visualizing Technology, Complete
Basic Approach
For introductory courses in Computer Concepts or computer literacy often including instruction in Microsoft Office. Visualizing Technology is the new Computer Concepts book that enables instructors to see Computer Concepts through their students' eyes! This book covers all of the traditional topics taught in a Computer Concepts course but in a non-traditional way that is more appealing to visual and kinesthetic learners.
Also Available:
Visualizing Technology, Introductory ISBN 10: 013137625X ISBN 13: 9780131376250 432pp 2012 Paper
Table of Contents
1. What Is a Computer? 2. Hardware 3. File Management 4. Digital Devices and Multimedia 5. Application Software 6. System Software 7. The Internet and World Wide Web 8. Communicating and Sharing: The Social Web 9. Networks and Communication 10. Security and Privacy 11. Databases 12. Software and Application Development Appendix 1: Blogger Appendix 2: Mindmaps Appendix 3: Google Docs
Practical Computing, 3/e
Lynn Hogan, University of Northern Alabama Amy Rutledge ISBN 10: 0132839962 ISBN 13: 9780132839969 400pp 2013 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM
41
Basic Approach
For all beginning-level courses in computing. Practical Computing addresses the unique challenges novices face in mastering PCs. It combines user-friendly design, creative multimedia tools, and a focus on useful skills students can apply immediately, either at home or in the workplace.
Table of Contents
1. Understanding Computer Applications 2. Understanding the Operating System and File Management 3. Navigating the Internet 4. Working with PowerPoint 5. Working with Word 6. Working with Excel 7. Understanding Networking and Computer Security 8. Exploring Online Communication and Cloud Computing 9. Exploring Digital Entertainment and Multimedia Applications Appendix
Computers Are Your Future Complete, 12/e

Cathy LaBerta ISBN 10: 0132818310 ISBN 13: 9780132818315 672pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For introductory courses in computer concepts or computer literacy often including instruction in Microsoft Office. Engages students with a refreshing and easy to learn from style, while maintaining an encyclopedic approach and popular magazine-style format. Todays students want a practical what it is and how it works approach to computers and computing, with less explanation of when and why. Computers Are Your Future serves as a valuable computer technology reference tool without being overwhelming or intimidating. Also Available: Computers Are Your Future, Introductory, 12/e ISBN 10: 0132545187 ISBN 13: 9780132545181 504PP 2012 Paper
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
Computers and You Inside the System Unit Input/Output and Storage System Software Application Software: Tools for Productivity The Internet & the World Wide Web Networks: Communicating and Sharing Resources Wired and Wireless Communication Privacy, Crime, and Security Careers and Certification Programming Languages and Program Development Databases and Information Systems Systems Analysis and Design Enterprise Computing
Diane Coyle
Next Series: Web 2.0, 2/e
Basic Approach
For introductory courses on Computer Concepts or Microsoft Office Applications. The NEXT Series making it easy to teach whats next! New software applications with the potential to transform our everyday lives are constantly emerging onto the market. With this in mind, Introduction to Web 2.0 provides innovative instructors an opportunity to incorporate more than just the basic Office applications into their course. As part of an academic series written on alternative technology, this text presents key information on Web 2.0 and encourages hands-on learning throughout the material.
42
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Introduction to Web 2.0 Social Networks Blogs Podcasts Wikis Additional Collaboration Tools
Michael Miller
Next Series: Best Practices in using Office 2010
Michael Miller
Next Series: Introduction to Google Apps, Personal Apps
Basic Approach
Revolutionary new software applications are constantly emerging onto the market. As part of an academic series written on alternative technology, this text presents key information on Google Applications Comprehensive and encourages hands-on learning throughout the material.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.
Creating and Managing a Google Account Using Google Search Using Other Google Search Tools Using iGoogle Using Google Books Using Google Maps and Google Earth Using Google Translate Using Gmail Using Google Buzz Using Google Calendar Using Google Groups Using Google Reader Using Blogger Using Google Talk Using Picasa Using YouTube Using the Google Chrome Browser
Next Series: Introduction to Google Apps, Productivity Apps

Michael Miller ISBN 10: 0132725185 ISBN 13: 9780132725187 320pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Revolutionary new software applications are constantly emerging onto the market. As part of an academic series written on alternative technology, this text presents key information on Google Applications Productivity Apps and encourages hands-on learning throughout the material.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Creating and Managing a Google Account Using Google Docs Using Google Docs for Advanced Operations Using Google Spreadsheets Using Google Spreadsheets Advanced Operations Using Google Presentations Using Google Presentations Advanced Operations Using Gmail
43
9. 10. 11. 12.
Using Using Using Using
Google Talk Google Calendar Google Sites the Google Chrome Browser
Learning Microsoft Office 2010

Suzanne Weixel Faithe Wempen
Prepare students for Microsoft Office 2010! Learning Microsoft office 2010 series features a student-friendly, step-by-step format with clear, full-screen shots to engage students and help them work independently. In the Series: Learning Microsoft Office Word 2010, Student Edition ISBN 10: 0135112265 ISBN 13: 9780135112267 608pp 2012 Spiralbound with CD-ROM Learning Microsoft Office Excel 2010, Student Edition ISBN 10: 0135112109 ISBN 13: 9780135112106 608pp 2012 Spiralbound with CD-ROM Learning Microsoft Office PowerPoint 2010, Student Edition ISBN 10: 0135112095 ISBN 13: 9780135112090 392pp 2012 Spiralbound with CD-ROM Learning Microsoft Office Publisher 2010, Student Edition ISBN 10: 0135108993 ISBN 13: 9780135108994 384pp 2012 Spiralbound with CD-ROM
Basic Approach
Exploring
Robert T. Grauer, University of Miamo
Basic Approach
The goal of the Exploring series has been to move students beyond the point and click, helping them understand the why and how behind each skill. The Exploring series for Office 2010 also enables students to extend the learning beyond the classroom. Students go to college now with a different set of skills than they did five years ago. With this in mind, the Exploring series seeks to move students beyond the basics of the software at a faster pace, without sacrificing coverage of the fundamental skills that everybody needs to know. A lot of learning takes place outside of the classroom, and the Exploring series provides learning tools that students can access anytime, anywhere. In the Series: Exploring Microsoft Office 2010, Volume 1 ISBN 10: 0132873605 ISBN 13: 9780132873604 1176pp 2013 Spiralbound with CD-ROM Exploring Microsoft Office 2010 Getting Started with VBA ISBN 10: 0132140136 ISBN 13: 9780132140133 2166pp 2012 Paper
44
Exploring Microsoft Office 2010 Getting Started with Web Apps ISBN 10: 0132140136 ISBN 13: 9780132149624 192pp 2012 Paper
Exploring Getting Started with Internet Explorer 9 ISBN 10: 0132886219 ISBN 13: 9780132886215 2013 Sprialbound
Exploring Getting Started with Programming ISBN 10: 0132896540 ISBN 13: 9780132896542 96pp 2013 Sprialbound
Exploring Microsoft SharePoint 2010 ISBN 10: 0138007373 ISBN 13: 9780138007379 456pp 2012 Sprialbound
Exploring Getting Started with SharePoint 2010 ISBN 10: 0132882086 ISBN 13: 9780132882088 96pp 2012 Sprialbound
IT Project Library Project #1 ISBN 10: 0132766884 ISBN 13: 9780132766883 2013 Sprialbound
45
GO!
Shelley Gaskin, Pasadena City College
Basic Approach
Teach the course YOU want in LESS TIME! The primary goal of the GO! Series, aside from teaching computer applications, is ease of implementation, with an approach that is based on clearly-defined projects for students and a one of a kind supplements package. In the Series: GO! with Office 2010 Volume 1 ISBN 10: 0132840162 ISBN 13: 9780132840163 928pp 2013 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM GO! with Microsoft Excel 2010 Introductory ISBN 10: 0132743787 ISBN 13: 9780132743785 608pp 2011 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM GO! with Office 2010 Integrated Projects ISBN 10: 0132843307 ISBN 13: 9780132843300 344pp 2012 Paper GO! with Microsoft Office Web Apps Getting Started ISBN 10: 0132544849 ISBN 13: 9780132544849 72pp 2012 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM Go! All in One: Computer Concepts and Applications ISBN 10: 0132844125 ISBN 13: 9780132844123 864pp 2013 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM
GO! with Internet Explorer 9 Getting Started ISBN 10: 013293454X ISBN 13: 9780132934541 80pp 2012 Paper GO! with Microsoft OneNote 2010 Getting Started ISBN 10: 0132542994 ISBN 13: 9780132542999 72pp 2012 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM GO! with Microsoft Outlook 2010 Comprehensive ISBN 10: 0132791285 ISBN 13: 9780132791281 352pp 2012 SpiralBound w/CD-ROM GO! with Microsoft Outlook 2010 Getting Started ISBN 10: 0132702536X ISBN 13: 9780137025367 88pp 2012 Paper GO! with Microsoft Publisher 2010 Comprehensive ISBN 10: 0132791722 ISBN 13: 9780132791724 368pp 2012 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM GO! with Microsoft SharePoint 2010 Getting Started ISBN 10: 0132543028 ISBN 13: 9780132543026 64pp 2012 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM
46
GO! with Microsoft Windows 7 Comprehensive ISBN 10: 013237575 ISBN 13: 9780132375757 720pp 2012 SpiralBound w/CD-ROM GO! with Microsoft Windows Live and Windows Live Essentials Getting Started ISBN 10: 013254329X ISBN 13: 9780132543293 72pp 2012 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM GO! with Office 365 Getting Started ISBN 10: 013295574 ISBN 13: 9780132955744 100pp 2013 Paper
Skills for Success
Kris Townsend, Spokane Falls Community College
Basic Approach
Skills for Success is written with todays students in mind. The book provides step-by-step guidance in an easy-to-use format. Each skill is presented on a two-page spread with clearly numbered steps and clear instruction. Key skills required to get started with Microsoft Office are covered, giving students a complete introduction to the core tools. In the Series: Skills for Success with Office 2010, Volume 1 ISBN 10: 0132840324 ISBN 13: 9780132840323 656pp 2013 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM Skills for Success with Office 2010 Web Applications Getting Started ISBN 10: 0132550040 ISBN 13: 9780132550048 80pp 2013 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM
Skills for Success with Concepts Getting Started ISBN 10: 013508834 ISBN 13: 9780135088340 104pp 2012 Paper Skills for Success with Internet Explorer 9 Getting Started ISBN 10: 0132934558 ISBN 13: 9780132934558 48pp 2012 Paper Skills for Success with Windows 7 Comprehensive ISBN 10: 0132375761 ISBN 13: 9780132375764 352pp 2012 SprialBound w/CD-ROM
Your Office
Amy S. Kinser, Indiana University
Your Office series is the Office Applications textbook written for instructors who want more than a skill & drill book that enables students to learn discreet tasks but fails to illustrate the big picture of how these skills work together. Your Office series bridges the gap between skill and application, and empowers students to master Office as a tool to solve problems and make decisions. Our cases progress students from learning the skills in each Office series to using the applications as tools to
Basic Approach
47
make business decisions. Our unique modular structure provides a strong foundation for students through practice in each workshop and then synthesizes the objectives covered over two workshops, challenging students to really retain what they learned as opposed to learning and then forgetting soon after. Our series scenario introduces a large global business (the resort and spa) made up of smaller businesses (golf pro shop, spa, restaurants, event planning, etc) featured in the cases that run throughout all four applications. This approach gives students a solid understanding of how an organization works by exposing them to how individuals in all facets of a business interact with tools like Microsoft Office and use information to make decisions. In the Series: Your Office: Microsoft Office 2010, Volume 1 ISBN 10: 0132604299 ISBN 13: 9780132604291 1088pp 2012 Spiral Bound Your Office: Microsoft Excel 2010 Comprehensive ISBN 10: 0132610442 ISBN 13: 9780132610445 736pp 2012 Spiral Bound
Your Office: Microsoft Access 2010 Comprehensive ISBN 10: 0132560887 ISBN 13: 9780132560887 736pp 2012 Spiral Bound
Your Office: Getting Started with Advanced Cases for Microsoft Office 2010 ISBN 10: 0132675498 ISBN 13: 9780132675499 100pp 2013 Paper
Your Office: Getting Started with Business Communication ISBN 10: 013267548X ISBN 13: 9780132675482 100pp 2013 Spiral Bound
Your Office: Getting Started with Computing Concepts ISBN 10: 0132625350 ISBN 13: 9780132625357 100pp 2013 Spiral Bound
Your Office: Getting Started with Outlook 2010 ISBN 10: 0132675463 ISBN 13: 9780132675468 96pp 2012 Spiral Bound
Your Office: Getting Started with Web 2.0 ISBN 10: 0132675455 ISBN 13: 9780132675451 100pp 2013 Spiral Bound
Your Office: Getting Started with Windows 7 ISBN 10: 0132675471 ISBN 13: 9780132675475 100pp 2012 Spiral Bound
48
Business Information Systems: Technology, Development and Management, 5/e

Paul Bocij Andrew Greasley Simon Hickie ISBN 10: 0273736450 ISBN 13: 9780273736455 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
A comprehensive introduction to the technology, development and management of business information systems. The book assumes no prior knowledge of IS or IT, so that new concepts and terms are defined as clearly as possible, with explanations in the text, and definitions at the margin. In this fast-moving area, the book covers both the crucial underpinnings of the subject as well as the most recent business and technology applications. It is written for students on any IS, BIS or MIS course from undergraduate to postgraduate and MBA level within a Business or Computer Science Department.
Corporate Computer Security, 3/e

Randy J. Boyle Raymond R. Panko
Basic Approach
For introductory courses in IT Security. A strong business focus through a solid technical presentation of security tools. Boyle/Panko provides a strong business focus along with a solid technical understanding of security tools. This text gives students the IT security skills they need for the workplace. This edition is more business focused and contains additional hands-on projects, coverage of wireless and data security, and case studies.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
The Threat Environment Planning and Policy Cryptography Secure Networks Access Control Firewalls Host Hardening Application Security Data Protection Incident and Disaster Response
Managing Information Technology, 7/e

Carol V. Brown Daniel W. DeHayes Jeffrey A. Hoffer Wainright E. Martin William C. Perkins
Basic Approach
For graduate and executive level MIS students, and practicing IS managers. A thorough and practical guide to IT management practices and issues. Managing Information Technology provides comprehensive coverage of IS management practices and technology trends for advanced students and managers. Through an approach that offers up-to-date chapter content and full-length case studies, this text presents a unique set of materials that educators can customize to their students needs. The sixth edition has been thoroughly updated and streamlined to reflect current IS practices.
Table of Contents
PART I: INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY 1. Managing IT in a Digital World 2. Computer Systems 3. Telecommunications and Networking 4. The Data Resource PART II: APPLYING INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY 5. Enterprise Systems
49
6. Managerial Support Systems 7. E-Business Systems PART III: ACQUIRING INFORMATION SYSTEMS 8. Basic Systems Concepts and Tools 9. Methodologies for Custom Software Development 10. Methodologies for Purchased Software Packages 11. IT Project Management PART IV: THE INFORMATION MANGEMENT SYSTEM 12. Planning Information Systems Resources 13. Leading the Information Systems Function 14. Information Security 15. Legal, Ethical, and Social Issues
E-Business and E-Commerce Management: Strategy, Implementation and Practice, 5/e

Dave Chaffey ISBN 10: 0273752014 ISBN 13: 9780273752011 768pp 2011 Paper
Basic Approach
This bestselling textbook offers a comprehensive introduction to the theory and practice of e-business and ecommerce management. The author, Dave Chaffey, brings his trademarks of authority, clarity of expression and teaching expertise to bear on a subject in which he actively lectures and consults. Popular for its cutting-edge and contemporary coverage, this text offers an international approach and a good balance between the technical and managerial topics of central importance to developing an understanding of this subject. It is an engaging read, packed with real-life examples and case studies. Developed for students studying e-business or e-commerce at undergraduate or postgraduate level, and also used by many business managers, this is the essential text to keep pace with technology, strategy and implementation. Table of Contents I: INTRODUCTION 1. Introduction to e-business and e-commerce 2. E-commerce fundamentals 3. E-business infrastructure 4. E-environment II: STRATEGY AND APPLICATIONS 5. E-business strategy 6. Supply chain management 7. E-procurement 8. E-marketing 9. Customer relationship management III: IMPLEMENTATION 10. Change management 11. Analysis and design 12. Implementation and maintenance
SharePoint for Students

Carey Cole Steve Fox David M. Kroenke
For any course that teaches the basics of Microsoft SharePoint along with how businesses might use it to be more successful. The SharePoint skills needed for workplace success. In todays online working environment, many businesses use SharePointthe industrys leading collaboration tool. To help students gain the SharePoint skills that these businesses are looking for from future employees, SharePoint for Students teaches the fundamental concepts and skills needed to successfully collaborate and solve business problems.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Why Use SharePoint SharePoint Sites SharePoint Libraries SharePoint Lists Sharing Team Knowledge: Survey, Wikis, and Blogs Customizing a SharePoint Site
50
7. 8. 9.
Creating and Using Workflow in SharePoint Business Intelligence and SharePoint SharePoint in the Business World
Steve Conger
Hands-On Database
Basic Approach
For Introductory Database courses that focus on hands-on experience. Define and develop a database through a scenario approach. Hands-On Database uses a scenario-based approach that shows students how to build a database by providing them with the context of a running case throughout each step of the process.
Table of Contents
1. Who Needs a Database? 2. Gathering Information 3. Requirements and Business Rules 4. Database Design 5. Normalization and Design Review 6. Physical Design 7. SQL 8. Is it Secure? Appendix 1: Using Microsoft Access with the Book Appendix 2: SQL Server Express Appendix 3: Visio Appendix 4: Common Relational Patterns
Business Driven Data Communications

Michael Gendron ISBN 10: 0131564978 ISBN 13: 9780131564978 432pp 2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in data communications, telecommunications, and networking. A business-driven approach to understanding data communications. Explaining the why and how of data communications, Michael Gendrons new textbook, Business Driven Data Communications, takes a business-driven infrastructure design approachrather than solely focusing on a technical networking approach. Overall, this text presents technical material within the focus of business process support and infrastructure design.
Table of Contents
UNIT 1: ICT INFRASTRUCTURE COMPONENTS; A TECHNICAL OVERVIEW 1. ICT Infrastructure Introductory Concepts 2. Building the Local Area Network Using Ethernet 3. Extending the LAN through WAN Connections 4. Wrapping up Service, User and Enterprise User Components UNIT 2: ADDITIONAL ICT CONCEPTS 5. Obtaining Services Through Cloud Computing 6. Security UNIT 3: UNDERSTANDING THE BUSINESS OF INFRASTRUCTURE DESIGN 7. Infrastructure and the Enterprise 8. Business Processes 9. Assessing the Business Value of ICT Resource Investments UNIT 4: STEPS TO THE STRATEGIC ALIGNMENT OF IT 10. Analyzing the Organization and its Environment 11. Designing ICT: Documenting Process and Technology Recommendations 12. Summarizing the Business Driven Infrastructure Design Cycle: Analysis, Design, Implementation and Post-Implementation
51
Jeffrey A. Hoffer Ramesh Venkataraman Heikki Topi
Modern Database Management, 11/e
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate database management courses. Provide the latest information in database development. Focusing on what leading database practitioners say are the most important aspects to database development, Modern Database Management presents sound pedagogy and includes topics that are critical for the practical success of database professionals. This text also continues to guide students into the future by presenting research that could reveal the next big thing in database management. This edition reflects the major trends in information systems and helps students acquire the skills the need to be successful in todays database management field.
Strategies for E-Business: Concepts and Cases

Tawfik Jelassi Albrecht Enders
ISBN 10: 0273757873 ISBN 13: 9780273757870 2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
Ideal for MBA students and upper level undergraduates, this book utilises extensive research, strategic frameworks, a methodological toolset and original real-world case studies to link e-business to overall corporate strategy. It builds awareness and sharpens students' analytical understanding of how companies have developed and implemented electronic and mobile commerce strategies in the real world and the issues and challenges that e-commerce strategies and applications present.
Experiencing MIS, 3/e

David M. Kroenke ISBN 10: 0132570173 ISBN 13: 9780132570176 672pp 2012 Paper
For undergraduate Introduction to Management Information Systems courses. Flexible modules for instructors, real-world lessons for students. Help your students see why MIS is the most important course in the business school with Experiencing MIS. This modular text shows students how businesses useand needinformation systems to accomplish their goals, objectives, and competitive strategy. The third edition focuses on the latest innovation in MIS and addresses todays changing student experience.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
PART 1: MIS AND YOU 1. The Importance of MIS 2. Business Processes, Information, and Information Systems 3. Organizational Strategy, Information Systems, and Competitive Advantage PART 2: INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY 4. Hardware and Software 5. Database Processing 6. Data Communication PART 3: USING IS FOR COMPETITIVE STRATEGY 7. Enterprise Systems 8. E-Commerce, Web 2.0, and Social Networking 9. Business Intelligence and Information Systems for Decision Making PART 4: INFORMATION SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT 10. Information Systems Development 11. Information Systems Management 12. Information Security Management
52
David M. Kroenke
MIS Essentials, 2/e
For undergraduate Introduction to Management Information Systems courses. A brief text that covers the basics of using IS to solve business problems. Help your students see why MIS is the most important course in the business school with MIS Essentials. This brief text shows students how businesses useand needinformation systems to accomplish their goals, objectives, and competitive strategy. The second edition focuses on the latest innovation in MIS and addresses todays changing student experience.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
PART 1: MIS AND YOU 1. The Importance of MIS 2. Business Processes, Information, and Information Systems 3. Organizational Strategy, Information Systems, and Competitive Advantage PART 2: INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY 4. Hardware and Software 5. Database Processing 6. Data Communication PART 3: USING IS FOR COMPETITIVE STRATEGY 7. Enterprise Systems 8. E-Commerce, Web 2.0, and Social Networking 9. Business Intelligence and Information Systems for Decision Making PART 4: INFORMATION SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT 10. Information Systems Development 11. Information Systems Management 12. Information Security Management
Using MIS, 5/e

David Kroenke ISBN 10: 0273766481 ISBN 13: 9780273766483 528pp 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate Introductory Management Information Systems courses. An engaging introduction to how people use IS to solve business problems. Using MIS explains why MIS is the most important course in the business school by showing students how businesses use information systems and technology to accomplish their goals, objectives, and competitive strategy.
Table of Contents
PART 1: WHY MIS? 1. The Importance of MIS 2. Collaboration Information Systems 3. Strategy and Information Systems PART 2: INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY 4. Hardware and Software 5. Database Processing 6. Data Communication and the Cloud PART 3: USING IS FOR COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE 7. Structured Processes and Information Systems 8. Social Media Information Systems 9. Business Intelligence Systems PART 4: INFORMATION SYSTEMS MANAGEMENT 10. Business Process and Information Systems Development 11. Information Systems Management 12. Information Security Management
53
Database Concepts, 6/e

David M. Kroenke David Auer
For undergraduate database management students or business professionals. Understand, create, and manage small databases. Written by two of the world's leading database authorities, Database Concepts introduces the essential concepts students need to create and use small databases. The fifth edition has been thoroughly revised to reflect the changes in Microsoft Access 2010, as well as other database management software.
Basic Approach
Database Processing, 12/e

David M. Kroenke David Auer
Basic Approach
For undergraduate database management courses. Get students straight to the point of database processing. Database Processing reflects a new teaching method that gets students straight to the point with its thorough and modern presentation of database processing fundamentals. The twelfth edition has been thoroughly updated to reflect the latest software.
Table of Contents
PART 1: GETTING STARTED 1. Introduction 2. Introduction to Structured Query Language PART 2: DATABASE DESIGN 3. The Relational Model and Normalization 4. Database Design Using Normalization 5. Data Modeling and the Entity-Relationship Model 6. Transforming Data Models in Database Designs PART 3: DATABASE IMPLEMENTATION 7. SQL for Database Construction and Application Processing 8. Database Redesign PART 4: MULTIUSER DATABASE PROCESSING 9. Managing Multiuser Databases 10. Managing Databases with SQL Server 2008 R2 ONLINE CHAPTERS: 10A: Managing Databases with Oracle 11g 10B: Managing Databases with MySQL 5.1 PART 5: DATABASE ACCESS STANDARDS 11. The Web Server Environment 12. Database Processing with XML 13. Database Processing for Business Intelligence Systems
Experiencing MIS, 2/e

David Kroenke Deborah Bunker David Wilson
ISBN 10: 1442533145 ISBN 13: 9781442533141 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Real World Lessons Excellent Support Whatever students do in business, they will experience MIS. What kind of experience will your students have with MIS? Will they be helpless users who say, I just dont know anything about computers, and I dont want to? Or will they be managers who say I know theres a way to use information systems to get a competitive edge for my business? Will they find innovative applications of information technology in the marketplace to raise their own profile or that of their company? Or will they be business professionals who just dont get it? By presenting a running case narrative throughout, this book will show your students how businesses use - and
54
need - information systems to accomplish their goals and objectives and develop their competitive strategy. Experiencing MIS 2e is designed to help your students experience MIS right now, at university, where they can exercise their enquiring minds and build their skills in unlocking the potential of information systems for business. The text has been designed to be approachable, easy-to-use, sometimes humorous, with an upbeat and in-yourface attitude, but always with the goal of underlining the importance of MIS to all business people in the 21st Century. Experiencing MIS offers basic topic coverage of MIS in its 12 chapters and more in-depth, expanded coverage in its 13 chapter extensions. This modular organisation allows you to pick and choose among those topics to tailor-fit your course. The Australian adaptation brings your students experience of MIS closer to home with new local examples, case studies and trends.
Table of Contents
1. IS in the life of business professionals 2. Business processes, information and information systems 3. Organisational strategy, information systems, and competitive advantage 4. Hardware and software 5. Database processing 6. Data communications 7. Business Process Management 8. E-Commerce and Web 2.0 9. Business intelligence and information systems for decision making 10. Information systems development 11. Information systems management 12. Information security management Chapter Extension 1 Improving Your Collaboration Skills Chapter Extension 2 Using Collaboration Information Systems Chapter Extension 3 Information Systems and Decision Making Chapter Extension 4 Knowledge Management and Expert Systems Chapter Extension 5 Introduction to Microsoft Excel Chapter Extension 6 Preparing a Computer Budget using Excel Chapter Extension 7 Using Microsoft Access 2010 Chapter Extension 8 Using Excel and Access Together Chapter Extension 9 How the Internet Works Chapter Extension 10 Systems Development for Small Business Chapter Extension 11 Systems Development Project Management Chapter Extension 12 Outsourcing Chapter Extension 13 Financing and Accounting for IT Projects
Processes, Systems, and Information: An Introduction to MIS

David M. Kroenke Earl McKinney
Basic Approach
A business process approach to the introductory class. David M. Kroenke and Earl McKinneys new textbook Processes, Systems, and Information: An Introduction to MIS is the first introductory MIS textbook to emphasize business processes while also presenting the key topics usually associated with an intro course.
Table of Contents
PART 1: MIS AND YOU 1. Introduction to MIS 2. Business Processes, Information Systems, and Information PART 2: INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY 3. Hardware, Software, and Networks 4. Database Processing PART 3: OPERATIONAL PROCESSES 5. Using IS to Improve Processes 6. Supporting Processes with ERP Systems 7. Supporting the Procurement Process with SAP Chapter 7 Appendix: SAP Procurement Tutorial 8. Chapter 8: Supporting The Sales Process with SAP Chapter 8 Appendix: SAP Sales Tutorial PART 4: DYNAMIC PROCESSES AND INFORMATION SYSTEMS 9. Collaboration Processes and Information Systems 10. The Impact of Web 2.0 and Social Media on Business Processes 11. Business Intelligence PART 5: MIS MANAGEMENT PROCESSES 12. MIS Management Processes: Process Management, Systems Development, and Security
55
Essentials of MIS, 10/e

Kenneth Laudon Jane Laudon
For undergraduate and graduate MIS courses. An in-depth look at how today's businesses use information technologies. Many businesses look for candidates who know how to use information systems, making a general understanding of information systems an asset to any business student. Laudon and Laudon continue to define the MIS course for all business majors by emphasizing how business objectives shape the application of new information systems and technologies.
Basic Approach
Kenneth Laudon Jane Laudon
Management Information Systems, 12/e
For undergraduate and graduate Management Information Systems courses. Laudon and Laudon continue to define the MIS course with their latest comprehensive text. Management Information Systems provides comprehensive and integrative coverage of essential new technologies, information system applications, and their impact on business models and managerial decision making in an exciting and interactive manner. The twelfth edition focuses on the major changes that have been made in information technology over the past two years, and includes new opening, closing, and Interactive Session cases.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
PART 1: ORGANIZATIONS, MANAGEMENT, AND THE NETWORKED ENTERPRISE 1. Information Systems in Global Business Today 2. Global E-Business and Collaboration 3. Information Systems, Organizations, and Strategy 4. Ethical and Social Issues in Information Systems PART 2: INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY INFRASTRUCTURE 5. IT Infrastructure and Emerging Technologies 6. Foundations of Business Intelligence: Databases and Information Management 7. Telecommunications, the Internet, and Wireless Technology 8. Securing Information Systems PART 3: KEY SYSTEM APPLICATIONS FOR THE DIGITAL AGE 9. Achieving Operational Excellence and Customer Intimacy: Enterprise Applications 10. E-Commerce: Digital Markets, Digital Goods 11. Managing Knowledge 12. Enhancing Decision Making PART 4: BUILDING AND MANAGING SYSTEMS 13. Building Information Systems 14. Managing Projects 15. Managing Global Systems
E-Commerce 2012, 8/e

Kenneth Laudon Carol Guercio Traver
For the undergraduate and graduate e-commerce course in any business discipline. The market-leading text for E-commerce. This comprehensive, market-leading text emphasizes the three major driving forces behind E-commerce technology change, business development, and social issuesto provide a coherent conceptual framework for understanding the field.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION TO E-COMMERCE 1. The Revolution is Just Beginning
56
2. E-Commerce Business Models and Concepts PART 2: TECHNOLOGY INFRASTRUCTURE FOR E-COMMERCE 3. E-Commerce Infrastructure: The Internet, Web, and Mobile Platform 4. Building an E-Commerce Presence: Web Sites, Mobile Sites, and Apps 5. E-Commerce Security and Payment Systems PART 3: BUSINESS CONCEPTS AND SOCIAL ISSUES 6. E-Commerce Marketing Concepts: Social, Mobile, and Local 7. E-Commerce Marketing Communications 8. Ethical, Social, and Political Issues in E-Commerce PART 4: E-COMMERCE IN ACTION 9. Online Retail and Services 10. Online Content and Media 11. Social Networks, Auctions, and Portals 12. B2B E-commerce: Supply Chain Management and Collaborative Commerce
IT Strategy: Issues and Practices, 2/e

James D. McKeen Heather Smith
Basic Approach
For undergraduate or graduate courses in IT Strategy or Management. Using IT to deliver business value. IT Strategy: Issues and Practices provide a critical issues perspective that shows students how to use and manage IT to deliver business value. This edition has been overhauled in order to reflect the most important issues facing IT managers today.
Table of Contents
SECTION I: DELIVERING VALUE WITH IT 1. Developing and Delivering on the IT Value Proposition 2. Developing IT Strategy for Business Values 3. Communicating with Business Managers 4. Building a Strong Relationship with the Business 5. Developing IT Professionalism Section I Mini-Cases Delivering Business Value with IT at Hefty Hardware Investing in TUFS IT Planning at ModMeters SECTION II: IT GOVERNANCE 6. Information Management: The Nexus of Business and IT 7. The IT Budgeting Process 8. Creating and Evolving a Technology Roadmap 9. Delivering IT Functions: A Decision Framework 10. IT Sourcing 11. Application Portfolio Management Section II Mini-Cases Building Shared Services at RR Communications Creating a Process-Driven Organization at AgCredit IT Investment at North American Financial SECTION III: INFORMATION-ENABLED INNOVATION 12. Strategic Experimentation with IT 13. Enabling Collaboration with IT 14. Social Computing: How Should it be Managed? 15. Information Delivery: ITs Evolving Role 16. Master Data Management Section III Mini-Cases Information Management at Homestyle Hotels Innovation at International Foods CRM at Minitrex Customer Service at Datatronics SECTION IV: IT CAPABILITY MANAGEMENT 17. Developing IT Capabilities 18. Building Better IT Leaders from the Bottom Up 19. Managing IT-based Risk 20. The Identity Management Challenge 21. Linking IT to Business Metrics Section IV Mini-Cases Leveraging IT Vendors at SleepSmart Project Management at MM Managing Technology at Genex Fuels
57
Enterprise Systems for Management, 2/e

Luvai Motiwalla Jeffrey Thompson
ISBN 10: 0132570165 ISBN 13: 9780132570169 384pp2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and MBA-level Enterprise Systems courses. An approach to understanding and implementing ERP systems for success in todays organizations. Motiwalla teaches students the components of an ERP system, and the process of implementing ERP systems within a corporation to increase the overall success of the organization. This text also places major importance on the strategic role of ERP systems in providing a platform for improved business operations and productivity. The second edition reflects the nature of todays enterprise systems.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
Introduction to Enterprise Systems for Management Systems Integration Enterprise Systems Architecture Development Life Cycle Implementation Strategies Software and Vendor Selection Operations and Post-implementation Program and Project Management Organizational Change and Business Process Reengineering Global, Ethics, and Security Management Supply Chain Management Customer Relationship Management
Business Data Networks and Security, 9/e

Raymond Panko Julia Panko
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate business data communications and networking courses. Understand the exciting and complex field of networking. Business Data Networks and Telecommunications guides students through the details of networking with its clear writing style, job-ready detail, and focus on the technologies that are used in todays marketplace. This edition provides students with the methods of preparation for dealing with specific network standards.
Electronic Commerce 2012: A Managerial and Social Networks Perspectives, 7/e

Efraim Turban David King
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate electronic commerce courses. Explore the many aspects of electronic commerce through a managerial perspective. Electronic Commerce provides a thorough explanation of what EC is, how its being conducted and managed, and how to assess its opportunities, limitations, issues, and risksall from a managerial perspective. By presenting EC through a managerial approach, this text makes the subject matter practical, relevant, and beneficial to majors and non-majors alike. To keep pace with todays ever-changing technology, the seventh edition has been streamlinedremoving material thats no longer relevant, while still providing students with information on the hottest topics in the field.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Overview of Electronic Commerce E-Commerce: Mechanisms, Infrastructure, and Tools Retailing in Electronic Commerce: Products and Services B2B E-Commerce Innovative EC Systems: From E-Government to E-Learning, Collaborative Commerce, and C2C Commerce Mobile Commerce and Ubiquitous Computing
58
7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.
Social Commerce Marketing and Advertising in E-Commerce E-Commerce Security and Fraud Protection Electronic Commerce Payment Systems Order Fulfillment along the Supply Chain EC Strategy, Globalization, and SMEs Implementing EC Systems: From Justification to Successful Performance E-commerce: Regulatory, Ethical, and Social Environments Launching a Successful Online Business and EC Projects
Introduction to Electronic Commerce, 4/e

Efraim Turban David King Judy Lang
Basic Approach
For undergraduate-level courses in Electronic Commerce. Explore the essential concepts of electronic commerce. Written by experienced authors who share academic as well as real-world practices, this text features exceptionally comprehensive yet manageable coverage of a broad spectrum of EC essentials from a global point of view. This edition pays special attention to the most recent developments in online behavior in our business, academic, and personal lives.
IT Project Management
Ganesh Vaidyanathan ISBN 10: 0132807181 ISBN 13: 9780132807180 600pp 2013 Paper
Essentials of Systems Analysis and Design, 5/e

Joseph Valacich Joey George Jeff A. Hoffer
Basic Approach
For courses in systems analysis and design. A clear presentation, organized around the systems development life cycle model. Essentials of Systems Analysis and Design is a briefer version of the authors successful Modern System Analysis and Design, designed for courses seeking a streamlined approach to the material due to course duration, lab assignments, or special projects. This text also features the systems development life cycle model, which is used to organize the information throughout the text. The fifth edition emphasizes current changes in systems analysis and design.
Table of Contents
PART I: FOUNDATIONS FOR SYSTEMS DEVELOPMENT 1. The Systems Development Environment 2. The Sources of Software 3. Managing the Information Systems Project PART II: SYSTEMS PLANNING AND SELECTION 4. Systems Planning and Selection PART III: SYSTEMS ANALYSIS 5. Determining System Requirements 6. Structuring System Requirements: Process Modeling 7. Structuring System Requirements: Conceptual Data Modeling PART IV: SYSTEMS DESIGN 8. Designing the Human Interface 9. Designing Databases PART V: SYSTEMS IMPLEMENTATION AND OPERATION 10. Systems Implementation and Operation
59
Information Systems Today, 5/e

Joe Valacich Christoph Schneider
Basic Approach
For undergraduate Introduction to Management Information Systems courses. Bring current, real-world IS concepts into your classroom. One of the greatest challenges in teaching IS courses is keeping pace with whats happening in the real-world. Information Systems Today shows students how information technology and systems are continuing to expand within all aspects of todays organizations and society. The fifth edition focuses on how information systems are fueling globalizationmaking the world smaller and more competitivein virtually every industry and at an ever-increasing pace.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Managing in the Digital World Gaining Competitive Advantage through Information Systems Managing the Information Systems Infrastructure and Services Enabling Commerce Using the Internet Enhancing Collaboration Using Web 2.0 Enhancing Business Intelligence Using Information Systems Enhancing Business Processes Using Enterprise Information Systems Improving Supply Chains and Strengthening Customer Relationships Using Enterprise Information Systems 9. Developing and Acquiring Information Systems 10. Securing Information Systems Technology Briefing: Foundations of Information Systems Infrastructure
Information Systems in Organizations

Patricia Wallace ISBN 10: 0136115624 ISBN 13: 9780136115625 480pp 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
The freshest, most contemporary overview of information systems.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
Information Systems and People Information Systems and Strategy Information and Communications Technologies: The Enterprise Architecture Managing Information Resources with Databases Information Systems for the Enterprise The Web and E-Commerce Business Intelligence and Decision Support Collaborating with Technology Knowledge Management and E-Learning Ethics, Privacy and Security Systems Development and Procurement Project Management and Strategic Planning
60
Decision Science
Global Franchising Operations Management: Cases in International and Emerging Markets Operations, 1/e
Ilon Alon
ISBN10: 0132884143 ISBN13: 9780132884143 224pp 2012 Cloth
Basic Approach
Franchising represents more than 10% of the US economy and 50% of US retail sales, and this winning business model is now showing exceptional promise outside the US as well. Both franchisors and franchisees are beginning to discover immense opportunities to extend operations or build new franchises in emerging markets. Of course, success will depend on their ability to execute and extending successful franchising operations outside their home markets requires significant new skills, knowledge, and expertise. In this book, the field's leading expert and author brings together an unprecedented collection of in-depth cases that illuminate the field's unexplored opportunities, key pitfalls, and proven best practices. Ilan Alon thoroughly covers the key challenges of global franchise operations from both the franchisor and franchisee perspective, illuminating the experiences of pioneers such as Marks and Spencer, Ruth's Chris Steakhouse, Athlete's Foot, Kodak, and Sari Organic. Alon addresses these and other pivotal issues:
Should a franchisor or franchisee move into global markets? What marketing challenges accompany extending a franchise beyond its borders? How do Master Franchisee and Micro-Franchising strategies work, and how can their risks be managed? What are the best ways to manage logistics, supply chains, operations, and demand management in new markets?
Table of Contents
1. Introduction PART I: TO FRANCHISE OR NOT TO FRANCHISE 2. San Francisco Coffee House: An American Style Franchise in Croatia 3. Trying To Create a Stir: Opening a Coffee Shop in Korea 4. International Marketing and Franchising at Marks & Spencer PART II: IN SEARCH OF GLOBAL OPPORTUNITIES 5. Estimating Demand in Emerging Markets for Kodak Express 6. Ruths Chris Steak House: The High Stakes of International Expansion PART III: FRANCHISING IN EMERGING MARKETS AND DEVELOPING COUNTRIES 7. Master International Franchising in China: The Athlete's Foot, Inc. (A) 8. Master International Franchising in China: The Athlete's Foot, Inc. (B) 9. Social Entrepreneurship and Sustainable Farming in Indonesia 10. Final Reflections and Epilogues
Managing Business Process Flows, 3/e

Ravi Anupindi Sunil Chopra, Northwestern University Sudhakar D. Deshmukh Jan A. Van Mieghem Eitan Zemel ISBN 10: 0132811367 ISBN 13: 9780132811361 360pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For graduate level courses in Operations Management or Business Processes. A structured, data-driven approach to understanding core operations management concepts. Anupindi shows how managers can design and manage process structure and process drivers to improve the performance of any business process. The third edition retains the general process view paradigm while providing a sharper, more streamlined presentation of the development of ideas in each chapterall of which are illustrated with contemporary examples from practice.
Table of Contents
PART I: PROCESS MANAGEMENT AND STRATEGY 1. Products, Processes, and Performance 2. Operations Strategy and Management PART II: PROCESS FLOW METRICS 3. Process Flow Measures 4. Flow-Time Analysis 5. Flow Rate and Capacity Analysis 6. Inventory Analysis PART III: PROCESS FLOW VARIABILITY 7. Managing Flow Variability: Safety Inventory
61
8. Managing Flow Variability: Safety Capacity 9. Managing Flow Variability: Process Control and Capability PART IV: PROCESS INTEGRATION 10. Lean Operations: Process Synchronization and Improvement
Managerial Decision Modeling with Spreadsheets, 3/e

Nagraj Balakrishnan Barry Render, Graduate School of Business, Rollins College Ralph M. Stair ISBN 10: 0132969440 ISBN 13: 9780132969444 608pp 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses on decision modeling through the use of spreadsheets. The perfect balance between decision modeling and spreadsheet use. Its important that textbooks support decision modeling courses by combining students ability to logically model and analyze diverse decision-making scenarios with software-based solution procedures. Balakrishnan offers the perfect balance of the decision modeling process and the use of spreadsheets to set up and solve decision models. The third edition has been updated to reflect the latest version of Excel.
Table of Contents
1. Introduction to Managerial Decision Modeling 2. Linear Programming Models: Graphical and Computer Methods 3. Linear Programming Modeling Applications with Computer Analyses in Excel 4. Linear Programming Sensitivity Analysis 5. Transportation, Assignment, and Network Models 6. Integer, Goal, and Nonlinear Programming Models 7. Project Management 8. Decision Analysis 9. Queuing Models 10. Simulation Modeling 11. Forecasting Models 12. ONLINE Chapter Inventory Control Models APPENDIX A Probability Concepts and Applications APPENDIX B Useful Excel 2010 Commands and Procedures for Installing ExcelModules APPENDIX C Areas Under the Standard Normal Curve APPENDIX D Brief Solutions to All Odd-Numbered End-of-Chapter Problems
Basic Business Statistics, 12/e

Mark L. Berenson David M. Levine Timothy C. Krehbiel David F. Stephan
Basic Approach
For courses in Business Statistics. Berenson shows students how statistics is used in each functional area of business. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.
Introduction Organizing and Visualizing Data Numerical Descriptive Measures Basic Probability Discrete Probability Distributions The Normal Distribution and Other Continuous Distributions Sampling and Sampling Distributions Confidence Interval Estimation Fundamentals of Hypothesis Testing: One-Sample Tests Two-Sample Tests Analysis of Variance Chi-Square Tests and Nonparametric Tests Simple Linear Regression Introduction to Multiple Regression Multiple Regression Model Building Time-Series Forecasting
62
17. Statistical Applications in Quality Management 18. A Road Map for Analyzing Data
Introduction to Operations and Supply Chain Management, 3/e

Cecil Bozarth Robert B. Handfield
Basic Approach
For the core course in Operations Management with coverage of supply chain management. Introduction to Operations and Supply Chain Management provides an integrated and comprehensive treatment of both operations and supply chain management.
Table of Contents
PART I: CREATING VALUE THROUGH OPERATIONS AND SUPPLY CHAINS 1. Introduction to Operations and Supply Chain Management 2. Operations and Supply Chain Strategies PART II: ESTABLISHING THE OPERATIONS ENVIRONMENT 3. Process Choice and Layout Decisions in Manufacturing and Services 4. Business Processes 5. Managing Quality 6. Managing Capacity PART III: ESTABLISHING SUPPLY CHAIN LINKAGES 7. Supply Management 8. Logistics PART IV: PLANNING AND CONTROLLING OPERATIONS AND SUPPLY CHAINS 9. Forecasting 10. Sales and Operations Planning (Aggregate Planning) 11. Managing Inventory throughout the Supply Chain 12. Managing Production across the Supply Chain 13. JIT/Lean Production PART V: PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND PRODUCT/SERVICE DEVELOPMENT 14. Managing Projects 15. Developing Products and Services
Quantitative Methods for Business and Management

John Buglear ISBN 10: 0273736280 ISBN 13: 9780273736288 480pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Quantitative Methods for Business and Management Students takes you on a journey though the techniques required to succeed in business and management. With a user-friendly and accessible writing style, John Buglear presents these techniques simply and provides numerous examples to enable you to relate the theory to real-life applications.
Table of Contents
1. Rules of the road: The basic techniques 2. Straight ahead - linear models 3. Around the bend - dealing with the curves 4. Filling up - fuelling quantitative analysis 5. Good visibility - pictorial presentation of data 6. General directions - summarising data 7. Two-way traffic - investigating relationships between two variables using correlation and regression 8. Counting the cost - summarising money variables over time 9. Long distance - analysing time series data 10. Is it worth the risk - introducing probability 11. Finding the right way - analysing decisions 12. Accidents and incidence - discrete probability distributions and simulation 13. Smooth running - continuous probability distributions and basic queuing theory 14. Getting from A to B - project planning using networks 15. Taking short cuts - sampling methods 16. Test driving - sampling theory, estimation and hypothesis testing 17. High performance - statistical inference for comparing population means and bivariate data 18. Going off-road - managing quantitative research for projects and dissertations# Appendix 1 Statistical and Accounting tables Appendix 2 Answers to review questions
63
Supply Chain Management, 5/e

Sunil Chopra ISBN 10: 0273765221 ISBN 13: 9780273765226 528pp 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate supply chain management courses. Illustrating the key drivers in effective supply chain management. Supply Chain Management illustrates the key drivers of good supply chain management in order to help students understand what creates a competitive advantage. This text also provides strong coverage of analytic skills so students can gauge the effectiveness of the techniques described in the text.
Table of Contents
PART I: BUILDING A STRATEGIC FRAMEWORK TO ANALYZE SUPPLY CHAINS 1. Understanding the Supply Chain 2. Supply Chain Performance: Achieving Strategic Fit and Scope 3. Supply Chain Drivers and Metrics PART II: DESIGNING THE SUPPLY CHAIN NETWORK 4. Designing Distribution Networks and Applications to e-Business 5. Network Design in the Supply Chain 6. Designing Global Supply Chain Networks PART III: PLANNING AND COORDINATING DEMAND AND SUPPLY IN A SUPPLY CHAIN 7. Demand Forecasting in a Supply Chain 8. Aggregate Planning in a Supply Chain 9. Sales and Operations Planning: Planning Supply and Demand in a Supply Chain 10. Coordination in a Supply Chain PART IV: PLANNING AND MANAGING INVENTORIES IN A SUPPLY CHAIN 11. Managing Economies of Scale in a Supply Chain: Cycle Inventory 12. Managing Uncertainty in a Supply Chain: Safety Inventory 13. Determining the Optimal Level of Product Availability PART V: DESIGNING AND PLANNING TRANSPORTATION NETWORKS 14. Transportation in a Supply Chain PART VI: MANAGING CROSS-FUNCTIONAL DRIVERS IN A SUPPLY CHAIN 15. Sourcing Decisions in a Supply Chain 16. Pricing and Revenue Management in a Supply Chain 17. Information Technology in a Supply Chain 18. Sustainability and the Supply Chain
Strategic Supply Management: Principles, Theories and Practice, 2/e

Paul Cousins Richard Lamming Benn Lawson Brian Squire ISBN 10: 0273761900 ISBN 13: 9780273761907 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
Drawing on international research this text blends established theory and current practice to provide acomprehensive strategic coverage of this wide and constantly developing area.
Inbound Logistics Management: Storage and Supply of Materials for the Modern Supply Chain, 7/e
Barry Crocker David Jessop Alex Morrison
Basic Approach
This well-established text provides an authoritative and comprehensive overview of the practice and supporting systems relating to the storage and supply of materials, from elementary principles and simplest methods to the most advanced automated operations. It is an invaluable guide to inbound logistics for both students and practitioners.
Table of Contents
1. 2.
The supply function Identification of materials
64
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.
Receipt and inspection Issue and dispatch Records and systems Materials accounting Approaches to the provision of materials Stock control techniques Stock checking and stocktaking Storehouses and stockyards Stores operations Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) Storage equipment Materials handling Procedures manuals
Business Statistics
Robert A. Donnelly ISBN 10: 0132145391 ISBN 13: 9780132145398 984pp 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For one or two semester courses in business statistics. The text that speaks to students. Robert A. Donnellys new textbook Business Statistics removes the intimidation factor from learning business statistics by presenting a writing style that students feel comfortable with. Through this straightforward, conversational approach, Donnelly effectively explains the key concepts students need to know, and why they need to know them.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.
Introduction to Business Statistics Displaying Descriptive Statistics Calculating Descriptive Statistics Introduction to Probabilities Discrete Probability Distributions Continuous Probability Distributions Sampling and Sampling Distributions Confidence Intervals Hypothesis Testing with One Population Hypothesis Testing with Two Population Analysis of Variance Chi-Square Tests One and Two Population Variance Tests Correlation and Simple Regression Multiple Regression Forecasting
Business Analytics
James R. Evans ISBN 10: 0133051714 ISBN 13: 9780133051711 600pp 2013 Paper
Statistics, Data Analysis, and Decision Modeling, 5/e

James R. Evans ISBN 10: 0273768220 ISBN 13: 9780273768227 576pp 2012 Paper Bound with PIN
For undergraduate and graduate level courses that combines introductory statistics with data analysis or decision modeling. A pragmatic approach to statistics, data analysis and decision modeling.
Basic Approach
65
Statistics, Data Analysis, and Decision Modeling focuses on the practical understanding of its topics, allowing readers to develop conceptual insight on fundamental techniques and theories. Evans dedication to present material in a simple and straightforward fashion is ideal for student comprehension.
Table of Contents
PART I: STATISTICS AND DATA ANALYSIS 1. Data and Business Decisions 2. Displaying and Summarizing Data 3. Probability Distributions and Applications 4. Sampling and Estimation 5. Hypothesis Testing and Statistical Inference 6. Regression Analysis 7. Forecasting 8. Statistical Quality Control PART II: DECISION MODELING AND ANALYSIS 9. Building and Using Decision Models 10. Risk Analysis and Monte Carlo Simulation 11. Decisions, Uncertainty, and Risk 12. Queues and Process Simulation Modeling 13. Linear Optimization 14. Integer and Nonlinear Optimization Appendix
Purchasing and Supply Chain Management, 8/e

Brian Farrington Kenneth Lysons
Basic Approach
The publication of Purchasing and Supply Chain Management, Eighth Edition marks the 28th anniversary since the first edition was published, and it continues its claim to be the most comprehensive textbook on purchasing and supply chain management currently available. It is also of value to professionals and those specialists in other fields who need an understanding of the role and influence of this vital area of business performance. The authors have used extensive knowledge of real life events to bring the subject matter to life and to provide a truly international focus on purchasing and supply chain. The economic climate is a massive influence on the need for effective purchasing and supply chain management. Similarly, natural events such as the Japanese earthquakes present the profession with unique challenges. The content of the book will help focus attention in the appropriate risk areas of business. This new edition has been fully revised, covering new developments in the purchasing and supply chain field. There is an increased emphasis on key decisions, supplier relationships, pricing control and negotiation.
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION AND STRATEGY 1. What is purchasing? 2. Strategy and strategic procurement 3. Logistics and supply chains 4. Structure and supply chains 5. Purchasing structure and design 6. Purchasing procedures PART 2: STRATEGY, TACTICS AND OPERATIONS (1): KEY FACETS 7. Supplier relationships 8. Purchasing: product innovation, supplier involvement and development 9. Specifying and managing product quality 10. Matching supply with demand 11. Sourcing and the management of suppliers (including contractual risk management) 12. Buying at the right price PART 3: STRATEGY, TACTICS AND OPERATIONS (2): SITUATIONS 13. Contrasting approaches to supply 14. Buying for the public sector (new) PART 4: STRATEGY, TACTICS AND OPERATIONS (3): NEGOTIATION, SUPPORT TOOLS AND PERFORMANCE 15. Negotiation 16. Support tools 17. Purchasing research, performance and ethics Appendix 1: Personal ethical code of the Chartered Institute of Purchasing and Supply (CIPS) Appendix 2: Principles and standards of purchasing practice (ISM)
66
Managing Quality: Integrating the Supply Chain, 5/e

S. Thomas W. Foster ISBN 10: 0273768255 ISBN 13: 9780273768258 544pp 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate Quality Management courses. Understanding quality management through a unifying framework. Managing Quality is a comprehensive introduction to the field of quality management that presents a supply chain theme as the unifying framework for quality improvement.
Hillel Glazer
High Performance Operations: Leverage Compliance to Lower Costs, Increase Profits, and Gain Competitive Advantage, 1/e
Basic Approach
Companies in highly regulated industries face unique challenges in optimizing business performance and profitability while maintaining strong governance and regulatory adherence. In this start-to-finish guidebook, leading business performance consultant Hillel Glazer shows how to achieve these goals through the successful integration of lean and systems thinking. Written for operations managers, process professionals, and lean systems managers, Glazer shows how to systematically incorporate compliance into planning for overall performance, value, and profitability, rather than viewing compliance as an end in itself. High Performance Operations will help operations professionals and managers: Clarify the competing interests that challenge them, and implement pre-conditions for success. Learn how a systems-thinking approach can promote achieve operational excellence. Uncover the "secret sauce" that enables great organizations to scale their successes, eliminate single points of failure, and get more of "what went right". Define what value and operational excellence look like in their organizations, and all the costs of achieving them. Create solutions, establish proof-of-performance, justify investments, measure performance, and implement continuous improvement.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.
Flying a Business The Approach: An Overview The Bureaucracy of Compliance High Performance of Excellence Regulation and Compliance The Man Versus The Money Focusing on the Wrong Target Secret Sauce Value, Customer Satisfaction, Profit The Solution: Defining and Sustaining Value Operational Excellence Services The Price Systems Thinking and Process Engineering Operational Excellence, Take 2 Sanity Checks and Fringe Concepts Finishing Touches Back to the Future: A Retrospective
David Grant
Logistics Management
Basic Approach
This new book, Logistics Management, blends traditional logistics activities with the current developments in business that has made logistics a critical element for business success. It adopts a customer or marketing focus
67
to the subject of logistics, and the wider concept of supply chain management, by recognizing that customer satisfaction is the primary output of logistics activities. The theme of global logistics integrated throughout the current edition will also continue and will be enhanced by discussion of the dichotomy that the European market represents both a common and global environment.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
Logistics and supply chain management Customer Service Purchasing and Procurement Transportation Warehousing and materials handling Inventory management Production and operations management Logistics information systems and technology Logistics financial performance and metrics Logistics human resources International and global logistics Reverse and sustainable logistics Logistics strategy
Arthur V. Hill
Encyclopedia of Operations Management, The: A Field Manual and Glossary of Operations Management Terms and Concepts, 1/e
ISBN10: 0132883708 ISBN13: 9780132883702 408pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
This is the perfect "field manual" for every supply chain or operations management practitioner and student. The field's only single-volume reference, it's uniquely convenient and uniquely affordable. With nearly 1,500 wellorganized definitions, it can help students quickly map all areas of operations and supply chain management, and prepare for case discussions, exams, and job interviews. For instructors, it serves as an invaluable desk reference and teaching aid that goes far beyond typical dictionaries. For working managers, it offers a shared language, with insights for improving any process and supporting any training program. It thoroughly covers: accounting, customer service, distribution, e-business, economics, finance, forecasting, human resources, industrial engineering, industrial relations, inventory management, healthcare management, Lean Sigma/Six Sigma, lean thinking, logistics, maintenance engineering, management information systems, marketing/sales, new product development, operations research, organizational behavior/management, personal time management, production planning and control, purchasing, reliability engineering, quality management, service management, simulation, statistics, strategic management, systems engineering, supply and supply chain management, theory of constraints, transportation, and warehousing. Multiple figures, graphs, equations, Excel formulas, VBA scripts, and references support both learning and application.
Hospital Operations: Applying the Principles of Operations Management to Improve Health Care Systems, 1/e
Wallace Hopp William Lovejoy
Basic Approach
By one estimate, the U.S. wastes $480 billion annually on healthcare expenditures that don't improve care. Worse, because of faulty systems -- not personnel -- up to 98,000 people die every year due to preventable medical errors -- and that doesn't count non-terminal events such as hospital-acquired infections. In Hospital Operations, two leading operations management experts and four senior physicians demonstrate how to apply new OM advances and metrics to substantially improve any hospital's operational, clinical, and financial performance. Replete with examples, Hospital Operations shows how to diagram and optimize hospital flows and trace interconnections, and offers specific guidance on improving emergency departments, operating rooms, hospital floors, and diagnostic units; and successfully applying metrics. Coverage includes: Reducing ER overcrowding and enhancing patient safety Improving OR scheduling, enhancing organizational learning, and responding to stakeholders' perspectives Improving bed availability, optimizing nurse schedules, and creating seamless patient handoffs Reducing lab turnaround time, improving imaging responsiveness, and decreasing lab errors The authors conclude by previewing the "Hospital of the Future," addressing issues ranging from prevention and self-care to the evolution of technology and evidence-based medicine.
68
Service Operations Management: Improving Service Delivery, 4/e

Robert Johnston Graham Clark Michael Shulver
Basic Approach
This international market-leading book, aimed at both students and practising managers, provides a comprehensive and balanced introduction to service operations management. Building on the basic principles of operations management, the authors examine the operations decisions that managers face in controlling their resources and delivering services to their customers.
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION 1. Introducing Service Operations Management 2. Understanding the Challenges for Operations Managers PART 2: FRAME 3. Developing and Using the Service Concept PART 3: CONNECT 4. Understanding Customers and Relationships 5. Managing Customer Expectations and Perceptions 6. Managing Supply Networks and Supplier Relationships PART 4: DELIVER 7. Designing the Customer Experience 8. Designing the Service Process 9. Measuring, Controlling and Managing 10. Managing People 11. Managing Service Resources PART 5: IMPROVE 12. Driving Continuous Improvement 13. Learning from Problems 14. Learning from Other Operations PART 6: IMPLEMENT 15. Creating and Implementing the Strategy 16. Understanding and Influencing Culture 17. Building a World-class Service Organisation
Operations Management: Processes and Supply Chains, 10/e

Lee J. Krajewski Larry P. Ritzman Manoj K Malhotra
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate Operations Management courses Creating value through Operations Management. Operations Management provides students with a comprehensive framework for addressing operational process and supply chain issues. This text uses a systemized approach while focusing on issues of current interest. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART 1: CREATING VALUE THROUGH OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT 1. Using Operations To Compete Supplement A: Decision Making 2. Project Management PART 2: MANAGING PROCESSES 3. Process Strategy 4. Process Analysis 5. Quality And Performance 6. Capacity Planning Supplement B: Waiting Lines 7. Constraint Management 8. Lean Systems PART 3: MANAGING SUPPLY CHAINS 9. Supply Chain Inventory Management Supplement C: Special Inventory Models 10. Supply Chain Design 11. Supply Chain Location Decisions 12. Supply Chain Integration
69
13. Supply Chain Sustainability And Humanitarian Logistics 14. Forecasting 15. Operations Planning And Scheduling 16. Resource Planning Supplement D: Linear Programming Appendix 1 Normal Distribution Appendix 2 Table Of Random Numbers
Business Statistics: A First Course, 6/e

David M. Levine Timothy C. Krehbiel, Miami University, Ohio Mark L Berenson David F Stephan ISBN 10: 0273770926 ISBN 13: 9780273770923 624pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For one semester courses in business statistics. A student-friendly approach that shows how statistics work in each area of business. Students need a frame of reference when learning statistics, especially when its not their major. Business Statistics: A First Course teaches students how statistics are used in each functional area of business in a briefer, one-semester format. The sixth edition has been updated to reflect the latest data and information, and now includes a new problemsolving framework to help guide students through the material.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
Introduction Organizing and Visualizing Data Numerical Descriptive Measures Basic Probability Discrete Probability Distributions The Normal Distribution Sampling and Sampling Distributions Confidence Interval Estimation Fundamentals of Hypothesis Testing: One-Sample Tests Two-Sample Tests and One-Way ANOVA Chi-Square Tests Simple Linear Regression Multiple Regression
Quantitative Approaches in Business Studies, 8/e

Clare Morris ISBN 10: 0273738720 ISBN 13: 9780273738725 2012 Kit/Package/ShrinkWrap
Basic Approach
Quantitative Approaches in Business Studies provides a clear and accessible introduction to these methods, ideal for students of business and management on undergraduate, Masters and professional courses. This 8th edition is supported by MyMathLabGlobal, an unrivalled online tutorial and assessment system. This resource generates a personalised study plan and provides extensive practice questions exactly where you need them.
Table of Contents
Introduction: Why quantitative methods? PART 1: NUMBERS HOW WE HANDLE THEM 1. Tools of the trade: basic numeracy skills PART 2: NUMBERS A MEANS OF COMMUNICATION 2. Obtaining the figures: data and data collection 3. Presenting the figures: tables and diagrams 4. Summarising the figures: measures of location and spread 5. Measuring changes: index numbers PART 3: NUMBERS A BASIS FOR DEDUCTION 6. A firm foundation: elementary probability 7. Patterns of probability: some distributions 8. Estimating from samples: inference 9. Checking a theory: hypothesis testing 10. Making it better: statistics and quality improvement 11. Looking for connections: correlation 12. Spotting the relationship: line fitting 13. Multiple regression PART 4: NUMBERS A TOOL OF PLANNING
70
14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19.
Planning an inventory policy: stock control and simulation Forecasting: time-series, semi-log graphs and exponential smoothing Allowing for interest: financial mathematics Planning production levels: linear programming Planning a project: network analysis Quantitative methods in the student research project
Paul Newbold William Carlson Betty Thorne
Statistics for Business and Economics, 8/e
Basic Approach
For courses in Business Statistics. A classic text for accuracy and statistical precision. Statistics for Business and Economics enables students to conduct serious analysis of applied problems rather than running simple canned applications. This text is also at a mathematically higher level than most business statistics texts and provides students with the knowledge they need to become stronger analysts for future managerial positions. The eighth edition of this book has been revised and updated to provide students with improved problem contexts for learning how statistical methods can improve their analysis and understanding of business and economics. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.
Describing Data: Graphical Describing Data: Numerical Probability Discrete Random Variables and Probability Distributions Continuous Random Variables and Probability Distributions Sampling and Sampling Distributions Estimation: Single Population Estimation: Additional Topics Hypothesis Testing: Single Population Hypothesis Testing: Additional Topics Simple Regression Multiple Regression Additional Topics in Regression Analysis Analysis of Categorical Data Analysis of Variance Time-Series Analysis and Forecasting Additional Topics in Sampling
Project Management: Achieving Competive Advantage, 3/e

Jeffrey K. Pinto ISBN 10: 0273767429 ISBN 13: 9780273767428 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in project management. The fundamentals of project management with a wide assortment of business applications. Project Management takes a decision-making, business-oriented approach to the management of projects, which is reinforced throughout the text with current examples of project management in action. And because understanding project management is central to operations in various industries, this text also addresses project management within the context of a variety of successful organizations, whether publicly held, private, or not-forprofit. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
71
Quantitative Analysis for Management, 11/e

Barry Render Ralph M. Stair Michael E. Hanna
Basic Approach
For courses in Management Science or Decision Modeling. A solid foundation in quantitative methods and management science. Render/Stair/Hanna puts an emphasis on model building and computer applications to show students how the techniques presented in the text are used in business. This texts use of software also allows instructors to focus on the managerial problem, while spending less time on the mathematical details of the algorithms. In the eleventh edition, Excel 2010 has been incorporated throughout the text and an even greater emphasis on modeling is provided.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.
Introduction to Quantitative Analysis Probability Concepts and Applications Decision Analysis Regression Models Forecasting Inventory Control Models Linear Programming Models: Graphical and Computer Methods Linear Programming Applications Transportation and Assignment Models Integer Programming, Goal Programming, and Nonlinear Programming Network Models Project Management Waiting Lines and Queuing Theory Models Simulation Modelling Markov Analysis Statistical Quality Control
Operations and Process Management: Principles and Practice for Strategic Impact, 3/e
Nigel Slack Alistair Brandon-Jones Robert Johnston Alan Betts
ISBN 10: 0273768808 ISBN 13: 9780273768807 2011 Kit/Package/ShrinkWrap Written by best-selling authors in their field, Operations and Process Management 3e inspires a critical and applied mastery of the core principles and processes fundamental to managing business operations. Approaching the subject from a truly managerial perspective, this brand new text provides clear and concise coverage. The book is supported by a fully interactive e-Text, which provides an opportunity to practice and further explore the concepts and techniques introduced.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.
Operations and processes Operations strategy Supply network design Process design 1 - Positioning Process design 2 - Analysis Product and service design processes Supply chain management Capacity management Inventory management Resource planning and control Lean synchronization Quality management Improvement Risk and resilience Project management
72
Essentials of Operations Management

Nigel Slack Robert Johnston Alistair Brandon-Jones
Basic Approach
Essentials of Operations Management is a brand new concise version of the market-leading text Operations Management. It has been developed for students on short courses in operations management for example, doing an initial course at undergraduate, postgraduate or post-experience level. In these books the author team has set the standards in Operations Management which other textbooks seek to emulate: Expert authorship, an engaging writing style, and an interesting collection of cases combine to communicate the importance of managing operations and processes within a successful organisation.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
Operations management Operations strategy Social, environment and economic performance The design of products and services Process design Location, layout and flow Supply network management Capacity management Inventory planning and control Planning and control Lean synchronization Quality management Operations improvement
Creating a Sustainable Organization: Approaches for Enhancing Corporate Value Through Sustainability, 1/e
Peter A. Soyka ISBN10: 0132874407 ISBN13: 9780132874403 432pp 2012 Cloth
Basic Approach
Organizations that prioritize environmental, health, and safety (EHS) issues are well placed to attract better customers, better talent, and today's growing number of socially responsible investors. But, to gain these benefits, companies must choose the right sustainability strategies, and then manage and measure them well. Now, leading business sustainability consultant Peter Soyka offers a complete and actionable guide to driving greater value through sustainability. Soyka bridges the disparate worlds of the EHS/sustainability professional and the investor/analyst, covering all this and more: What the evidence says about linkages between sustainability and value Key stakeholder relationships influencing corporate behavior related to EHS and social equity Best practices for managing sustainability throughout the business How sustainability posture and performance can be evaluated by investors, markets, and managers How to maximize the influence of organizational actors focused on sustainability This book will be invaluable for all environmental, health, and safety decision-makers and professionals concerned with improving sustainability and value; for executives and strategists seeking competitive advantage; for analysts evaluating investments; and for researchers and MBA candidates currently studying the techniques and potential of corporate sustainability.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
Introduction Background and Context Environmental, Social, and Governance (ES&G) Issues and How they Affect the Business Enterprise Stakeholder Interests and Influences and the Social License to Operate Managing ES&G Issues Within the Organization Investors and the Power of Markets Financial Impacts of Effective (or Ineffective) ES&G/Sustainability Management Defining, Measuring, and Reporting ES&G Performance Making It Happen in Your Organization
73
Introduction to Management Science, 11/e

Bernard W. Taylor ISBN 10: 0273766406 ISBN 13: 9780273766407 840pp 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate courses in Management Science. A simple, straightforward approach to modeling and solution techniques. Introduction to Management Science shows students how to approach decision-making problems in a straightforward, logical way. Through the use of clear explanations and examples, this text helps students learn how to solve problems and make decisions based on the results. The eleventh edition reflects the latest version of Excel, and provides many new problems for instructors to assign. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
Management Science Linear Programming: Model Formulation and Graphical Solution Linear Programming: Computer Solution and Sensitivity Analysis Linear Programming: Modeling Examples Integer Programming Transportation, Transshipment, and Assignment Problems Network Flow Models Project Management Multicriteria Decision Making Nonlinear Programming Probability and Statistics
Services Management: An Integrated Approach, 3/e

Bart Van Looy Paul Gemmel Roland Van Dierdonck
Basic Approach
Over 75% of graduates currently find work in the service industries, but there are very few books that deal specifically with the subject of service management. This third edition of Services Management provides a comprehensive insight into the industry and its importance in today's economies. The book is based on three central strands of services management: customers, employees and operations. The final part of the book addresses the issue of performance management and service strategy. Based on a series of research workshops with academics and practitioners at the Service Management Centre, De Vlerick School of Management, University of Ghent, the authors have produced in-depth case studies and survey research to help students to develop a thorough understanding of the specific challenges and issues of service management today. Services Management third edition is ideal for Service Management students within a Business or Tourism degree, but also of great interest to operations, management, marketing and general business students
Table of Contents
PART 1: DEFINING SERVICES MANAGEMENT 1. Nature of services 2. Nature of services management 3. The service concept PART 2: DESIGNING SERVICES MANAGEMENT 4. Services as processes 5. The role of people: structure and competences 6. The role of technology: e-services and technology-based services 7. The role of physical evidence: the Servicescape 8. Service guarantees and service-level agreements 9. Pricing PART 3: DELIVERING SERVICES MANAGEMENT 10. Process-oriented services 11. Employee-based services 12. Customer-oriented services 13. Integrated performance management and communication PART 4: DEVELOPING SERVICES MANAGEMENT 14. Service innovation 15. Growth strategies for service firms
74
16. Servitisation: a growth path for manufacturing firms 17. Service internationalisation
Quantitative Methods for Business, 5/e

Donald Waters ISBN 10: 0273739476 ISBN 13: 9780273739470 624pp 2011 Paper
Basic Approach
Quantitative Methods for Business has been thoroughly revised and updated for this 5th edition, and continues to provide a simple and practical introduction to an area that students can find difficult. The book takes a non-threatening approach to the subject, avoiding excessive mathematics and abstract theory. It shows how to apply quantitative ideas to the real problems faced by managers. The book includes numerous exercises and examples that help students understand the relevance of quantitative ideas to business. Assuming no previous knowledge, the text provides complete coverage for a first course in quantitative methods.
Table of Contents
PART ONE BACKGROUND 1. Managers and numbers 2. Calculations and equations 3. Drawing graphs PART TWO COLLECTING AND SUMMARISING DATA 4. Collecting data 5. Diagrams for presenting data 6. Using numbers to describe data 7. Describing changes with index numbers PART THREE SOLVING MANAGEMENT PROBLEMS 8. Finance and performance 9. Regression and curve tting 10. Forecasting 11. Linear programming PART FOUR INTRODUCING STATISTICS 12. Uncertainty and probabilities 13. Probability distributions 14. Using samples 15. Testing hypotheses PART FIVE MANAGEMENT PROBLEMS WITH UNCERTAINTY 16. Making decisions 17. Quality management 18. Inventory management 19. Project networks 20. Queues and simulation
75
Economics
Essential Foundations of Economics, 6/e
Robin Bade Michael Parkin
Basic Approach
A practice-oriented learning system that breaks the traditional textbook mold. To help the student focus on the most important conceptsand effectively practice application of those concepts Essential Foundations of Economics is structured around a Checklist/Checkpoint system. The result is a patient, confidence-building textbook that prepares the student to use economics in their everyday life, regardless of what their future career will be.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.
Getting Started The U.S. and Global Economies The Economic Problem Demand and Supply Elasticities of Demand and Supply Efficiency and Fairness of Markets Government Influences on Markets Global Markets in Action Externalities: Pollution, Education, and Health Production and Cost Perfect Competition Monopoly Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly GDP: A Measure of Total Production and Income Jobs and Unemployment The CPI and the Cost of Living Potential GDP and Economic Growth Money and the Monetary System Aggregate Supply and Aggregate Demand Fiscal Policy and Monetary Policy
Foundations of Economics, 6/e

Robin Bade Michael Parkin
Basic Approach
A practice-oriented learning system that breaks the traditional textbook mold. To help the student focus on the most important conceptsand effectively practice application of those concepts Foundations of Microeconomics is structured around a Checklist/Checkpoint system. The result is a patient, confidence-building textbook that prepares the student to use economics in their everyday life, regardless of what their future career will be. Also Available: Foundations of Macroeconomics, 6/e ISBN 10: 0133029522 ISBN 13: 9780133029529 576pp 2013 Paper Foundations of Microeconomics, 6/e ISBN 10: 0132830884 ISBN 13: 9780132830881 600pp 2013 Cloth
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION 1. Getting Started 2. The U.S. and Global Economies
76
3. The Economic Problem 4. Demand and Supply PART 2: A CLOSER LOOK AT MARKETS 5. Elasticities of Demand and Supply 6. Efficiency and Fairness of Markets PART 3: HOW GOVERNMENTS INFLUENCE THE ECONOMY 7. Government Actions in Markets 8. Taxes 9. Global Markets in Action PART 4: MARKET FAILURE AND ITS SOLUTIONS 10. Externalities 11. Public Goods and Common Resources 12. Markets with Private Information PART 5: A CLOSER LOOK AT DECISION MAKERS 13. Consumer Choice and Demand 14. Production and Cost PART 6: PRICES, PROFITS, AND INDUSTRY PERFORMANCE 15. Perfect Competition 16. Monopoly 17. Monopolistic Competition 18. Oligopoly PART 7: INCOMES AND INEQUALITY 19. Markets for Factors of Production 20. Economic Inequality PART 8: MONITORING THE MACROECONOMY 21. GDP: A Measure of Total Production and Income 22. Jobs and Unemployment 23. The CPI and the Cost of Living PART 9: THE REAL ECONOMY 24. Potential GDP and the Natural Unemployment Rate 25. Economic Growth 26. Finance, Saving, and Investment PART 10: THE MONEY ECONOMY 27. The Monetary System 28. Money, Interest, and Inflation PART 11: ECONOMIC FLUCTUATIONS 29. Aggregate Supply and Aggregate Demand 30. Aggregate Expenditure Multiplier 31. The Short-Run Policy Tradeoff PART 12: MACROECONOMIC POLICY 32. Fiscal Policy 33. Monetary Policy 34. International Finance
Macroeconomics: A European Perspective

Olivier Blanchard Francesco Giavazzi Alessia Amighini Olivier Blanchard
Basic Approach
Macroeconomics: A European Perspective will give students a fuller understanding of the subject and has been fully updated to provide broad coverage of the financial crisis. In particular, this new edition provides: NEW chapters and updated text across all chapters NEW data on Europe and the financial crisis And what has always been the strength of the book: A unified view of macroeconomics, enabling students to make the connections between the short, medium, and long run. "This is a truly outstanding textbook that beautifully marries theory, empirics and policy. It is surely destined to become the gold standard against which all other texts must be measured." Charles Bean Deputy Governor, Bank of England Refreshingly original for an undergraduate text. Relevant applications to European economies and elsewhere are plentiful, and the breadth of topics covered is truly impressive. Unlike many texts at this level, the authors do not avoid potentially tricky, yet important topics; they do their utmost to relate textbook theory to real-world economics. Relative to competing texts, I think students would find this more engaging. Paul Scanlon Trinity College Dublin Up-to-date material on the Euro, especially in light of the current crisis; strong open economy emphasis; and lots of examples from European countries. There is so much new material on the monetary union that there is much less need for supplementary reading. Pekka Ilmakunnas Aalto University School of Economics
77
Table of Contents
1. A Tour of the World 2. A Tour of the Book 3. The Goods Market 4. Financial Markets 5. Goods and Financial Markets: The ISLM Model 6. The IS-LM model in an Open Economy 7. The Labour Market 8. Putting All Markets Together: The ASAD Model 9. The Natural Rate of Unemployment and the Phillips Curve 10. Inflation, Activity, and Nominal Money Growth 11. The Facts of Growth 12. Saving, Capital Accumulation, and Output 13. Technological Progress and Growth 14. Expectations: the Basic Tools 15. Financial Markets and Expectations 16. Expectations, Consumption, and Investment 17. Expectations, Output, and Policy 18. Output, the interest rate and the exchange rate 19. Exchange Rate Regimes 20. The crisis of 2007-2010 21. High Debt 22. High Inflation 23. Policy and Policymakers: What Do We Know? 24. Monetary and Fiscal Policy Rules 25. European Economic and Monetary Integration 26. The Euro: The Ins and the Outs Appendix 1: A maths refresher Appendix 2: An introduction to econometrics
Principles of Economics, 10/e

Karl E. Case Ray C. Fair Sharon M. Oster
Basic Approach
For the 2-semester principles of economics course. Reviewers tell us that Case/Fair/Oster is one of the all-time bestselling POE texts because they trust it to be clear, thorough and complete. Case/Fair/Oster readers also come away with a basic understanding of how market economies function, an appreciation for the things they do well, and a sense of things they do poorly. Readers begin to learn the art and science of economic thinking and begin to look at some policy and even personal decisions in a different way. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States. Also Available: Principles of Macroeconomics, 10/e ISBN 10: 0273754823 ISBN 13: 9780273754824 480pp 2012 Paper Principles of Microeconomics, 10/e ISBN 10: 0273754696 ISBN 13: 9780273754695 504pp 2012 Paper
Table of Contents
PART I: INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS 1. The Scope and Method of Economics 2. The Economic Problem: Scarcity and Choice 3. Demand, Supply, and Market Equilibrium 4. Demand and Supply Applications 5. Elasticity PART II: THE MARKET SYSTEM: CHOICES MADE BY HOUSEHOLDS AND FIRMS 6. Household Behavior and Consumer Choice 7. The Production Process: The Behavior of Profit-Maximizing Firms 8. Short-Run Costs and Output Decisions 9. Long-Run Costs and Output Decisions 10. Input Demand: The Labor and Land Markets 11. Input Demand: The Capital Market and the Investment Decision 12. General Equilibrium and the Efficiency of Perfect Competition PART III: MARKET IMPERFECTIONS AND THE ROLE OF GOVERNMENT 13. Monopoly and Antitrust Policy 14. Oligopoly
78
15. Monopolistic Competition 16. Externalities, Public Goods, and Social Choice 17. Uncertainty and Asymmetric Information 18. Income Distribution and Poverty 19. Public Finance: The Economics of Taxation PART IV: CONCEPTS AND PROBLEMS IN MACROECONOMICS 20. Introduction to Macroeconomics 21. Measuring National Output and National Income 22. Unemployment, Inflation, and Long-Run Growth PART V: THE CORE OF MACROECONOMIC THEORY 23. Aggregate Expenditure and Equilibrium Output 24. The Government and Fiscal Policy 25. The Money Supply and the Federal Reserve System 26. Money Demand and the Equilibrium Interest Rate 27. Aggregate Demand in the Goods and Money Markets 28. Aggregate Supply and the Equilibrium Price Level 29. The Labor Market In the Macroeconomy PART VI: FURTHER MACROECONOMICS ISSUES 30. Financial Crises, Stabilization, and Deficits 31. Household and Firm Behavior in the Macroeconomy: A Further Look 32. Long-Run Growth Alternative Views in Macroeconomics 33. Alternative Views in Macroeconomics PART VII: THE WORLD ECONOMY 34. International Trade, Comparative Advantage, and Protectionism 35. Open-Economy Macroeconomics: The Balance of Payments and Exchange Rates 36. Economic Growth in Developing and Transitional Economies
Robert D. Cooter, University of California at Berkeley Thomas Ulen, University of Illinois, Urbana-Champaign ISBN 10: 0132846152 ISBN 13: 9780132846158 576pp 2012 Paper
Law and Economics, 6/e
Basic Approach
Law and Economics has become a central course in U.S. legal education and for students majoring in topics like economics, political science, and philosophy. Cooter and Ulen provide a clear introduction to economic analysis and its application to legal rules and institutions that is accessible to any student who has taken principles of microeconomics. The books structure is flexible, beginning with an introductory overview of economic tools followed by paired chapters in five core areas of law: property, contracts, torts, legal process, and crime. Students leave the course understanding how microeconomic theory can be used to critically evaluate law and public policy.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
An Introduction to Law and Economics A Brief Review of Microeconomic Theory A Brief Introduction to Law and Legal Institutions An Economic Theory of Property Topics in the Economics of Property Law An Economic Theory of Tort Law Topics in the Economics of Tort Liability An Economic Theory of Contract Law Topics in the Economics of Contract Law An Economic Theory of the Legal Process Topics in the Economics of the Legal Process An Economic Theory of Crime and Punishment Topics in the Economics of Crime and Punishment
Modern Labor Economics: Theory and Public Policy, 11/e

Ronald G. Ehrenberg Robert S. Smith
Basic Approach
For one semester courses in labor economics at the undergraduate and graduate levels. A clear, comprehensive introduction to labor market behavior. In addition to presenting core theory, Ehrenberg/Smith summarizes empirical evidence for or against each hypothesis, and illustrates the usefulness of theory for public policy analysis. The authors continue to make this text a comprehensive resource in the eleventh edition, through a focus on
79
factual information about the labor market and professional literature in labor economics.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.
Introduction Overview of the Labor Market The Demand for Labor Labor Demand Elasticities Frictions in the Labor Market Supply of Labor to the Economy: the Decision to Work Labor Supply: Household Production, the Family, and the Life Cycle Compensating Wage Differentials and Labor Markets Investments in Human Capital: Education and Training Worker Mobility: Migration, Immigration, and Turnover Pay and Productivity: Wage Determination within the Firm Gender, Race, and Ethnicity in the Labor Market Unions and the Labor Market Unemployment Inequality in Earnings The Labor Market Effects of International Trade and Production Sharing
Saul Estrin Michael Dietrich David Laidler
Microeconomics, 6/e
Basic Approach
This new edition builds a comprehensive picture of the microeconomic tools required to solve a wide range of problems by using an innovative combination of written, illustrative and mathematical analysis. It helps the reader to think like an economist - in particular demonstrating how individuals, firms and policy-makers decide their best course of action.
Table of Contents 1. Introduction PART 1: THE THEORY OF CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR 2. The basic theory of consumer choice 3. Money income and real income 4. Utility PART II: CONSUMER THEORY: FURTHER TOPICS 5. Intertemporal choice 6. Choice in the face of risk 7. Decision Making: further analysis PART III: PRODUCTION AND COSTS 8. Production 9. Costs 10. Production functions, cost functions, and the demand for factors of production PART IV: BASIC THEORY OF THE FIRM 11. Perfect competition 12. Monopoly 13. Product differentiation and monopolistic competition PART V: OLIGOPOLY AND STRATEGIC INTERACTION 14. Imperfect Competition an introduction 15. Oligopoly and strategic interaction 16. Game theory 17. Game Theory II PART VI: FACTOR MARKETS 18. Factor demand 19. Factor supply 20. Labour markets trade unions and bargaining PART VII: GENERAL EQUILIBRIUM AND WELFARE 21. The exchange economy 22. General equilibrium with production 23. Welfare economics PART VIII: MISSING MARKETS 24. Externalities, public goods and Taxes 25. Economics of information 26. Public choice
80
Sherman Folland, Oakland University Allen C. Goodman, Wayne State University Miron Stano, Oakland University ISBN 10: 013295480X ISBN 13: 9780132954808 624pp2013 Paper
Economics of Health and Health Care, The, 7/e
Basic Approach
For courses in Health Economics, U.S. Health Policy/Systems, or Public Health, taken by health services students or practitioners. The text that makes economics concepts the backbone of the health care coverage. Folland is the bestselling Health Care Economics text that teaches through core economic themes, rather than concepts unique to the health care economy.
Table of Contents
PART I: BASIC ECONOMICS TOOLS 1. Introduction 2. Microeconomic Tools for Health Economics 3. Statistical Tools for Health Economics 4. Economic Efficiency and Cost-Benefit Analysis PART II: SUPPLY AND DEMAND 5. Production of Health 6. The Production, Cost, and Technology of Health Care 7. Demand for Health Capital 8. Demand and Supply of Health Insurance 9. Consumer Choice and Demand PART III: INFORMATION AND INSURANCE MARKETS 10. Asymmetric Information and Agency 11. The Organization of Health Insurance Markets 12. Managed Care 13. Nonprofit Firms PART IV: KEY PLAYERS IN THE HEALTH CARE SECTOR 14. Hospitals and Long-Term Care 15. The Physicians Practice 16. Health Care Labor Markets and Professional Training 17. The Pharmaceutical Industry PART V: SOCIAL INSURANCE 18. Equity, Efficiency, and Need 19. Government Intervention in Health Care Markets 20. Government Regulation: Principal Regulatory Mechanisms 21. Social Insurance 22. Comparative Health Care Systems 23. Health System Reform PART VI: SPECIAL TOPICS 24. The Health Economics of Bads 25. Epidemiology and Economics: HIV/AIDS in Africa
Macroeconomics: Theories and Policies, 10/e

Richard T. Froyen ISBN 10: 0273765981 ISBN 13: 9780273765981 2013
Basic Approach
For courses in Intermediate Macroeconomics. Macroeconomics traces the history, evolution, and challenges of Keynesian economics, presenting a comprehensive, detailed, and unbiased view of modern macroeconomic theory.
Gloria Gonzalez-Rivera
Forecasting for Economics and Business
Basic Approach
For junior/senior undergraduates in a variety of fields such as economics, business administration, applied mathematics and statistics, and for graduate students in quantitative masters programs such
81
as MBA and MA/MS in economics. A student-friendly approach to understanding forecasting. Knowledge of forecasting methods is among the most demanded qualifications for professional economists, and business people working in either the private or public sectors of the economy. The general aim of this textbook is to carefully develop sophisticated professionals, who are able to critically analyze time series data and forecasting reports because they have experienced the merits and shortcomings of forecasting practice.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.
Introduction and Context A Review of Basic Statistics Concepts and the Linear Regression Model Statistics and Time Series Tools of the Forecaster Understanding Linear Dependence: A Link to Economic Models Forecasting with Moving Average (MA) Processes Forecasting with AutoRegressive (AR) Processes Forecasting Practice: Modeling San Diego House Price Index Assessment of Forecasts and Combination of Forecasts Forecasting the Long Run: Deterministic and Stochastic Trends Forecasting with a System of Equations: Vector AutoRegression Forecasting the Long Run and the Short Run Jointly: Cointegration and Error Correction Models Forecasting Volatility I Forecasting Volatility II Financial Applications of Time-varying Volatility Forecasting with Nonlinear Models
Robert J. Gordon
Macroeconomics, 12/e
Basic Approach
Macroeconomics is widely praised for its ability to present theory as a way of evaluating key macro questions, such as why some countries are rich and others are poor. Students have a natural interest in what is happening today and what will happen in the near future. Macroeconomics capitalizes on their interest by beginning with business cycles and monetary-fiscal policy in both closed and open economy. After that, Gordon presents a unique dynamic analysis of demand and supply shocks as causes of inflation and unemployment, followed by a dual approach to economic growth in which theory and real-world examples are used to compare rich and poor countries.
Table of Contents
1. What Is Macroeconomics? 2. The Measurement of Income, Prices, and Unemployment 3. Income and Interest Rates: The Keynesian Cross Model and the IS Curve 4. Strong and Weak Policy Effects in the IS-LM Model 5. Financial Markets, Financial Regulation, and Economic Instability 6. The Government Budget, the Government Debt, and Limitations of Fiscal Policy 7. International Trade, Exchanges Rates, and Macroeconomic Policy 8. Aggregate Demand, Aggregate Supply, and the Great Depression 9. Inflation: Its Causes and Cures 10. The Goals of Stabilization Policy: Low Inflation and Low Unemployment 11. The Theory of Economic Growth 12. The Big Questions of Economic Growth 13. Money, Banks, and the Federal Reserve 14. The Goals, Tools, and Rules of Monetary Policy 15. The Economics of Consumption Behavior 16. The Economics of Investment Behavior 17. New Classical Macro and New Keynesian Macro 18. Conclusion: Where We Stand APPENDIXES A Time Series Data for the U.S. Economy: 18752010 B International Annual Time Series Data for Selected Countries: 19602010 C Data Sources and Methods
Hugh Gravelle Ray Rees
Microeconomics, 4/e
82
Basic Approach
This is a standard text for upper level undergraduate/postgraduate microeconomics. The book begins at the intermediate level and ends at a level appropriate for the graduate student. This well informed book provides a comprehensive exposition of modern microeconomic theory, covering many of the issues currently being researched and debated. The book offers very rigorous, mathematical treatment of the topics discussed making it appropriate for graduate as well as able intermediate level students. The writing style is clear and concise and the book is particularly liked for the thoroughness with which the concepts are dealt.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21.
The economic and social framework The theory of the consumer Consumer theory : duality Production Cost Supply and firm objectives The theory of a competitive market Monopoly Input markets Capital markets General equilibrium Welfare economics Market failure and government failure Game theory Oligopoly Choice under uncertainty Production under uncertainty Insurance, risk spreading and risk pooling Agency and contract theory General equilibrium under uncertainty and incomplete markets
William H. Greene
Econometric Analysis, 7/e
Basic Approach
For first-year graduate courses in Econometrics for Social Scientists. This text serves as a bridge between an introduction to the field of econometrics and the professional literature for graduate students in the social sciences, focusing on applied econometrics and theoretical concepts. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART I: THE LINEAR REGRESSION MODEL 1. Econometrics 2. The Linear Regression Model 3. Least Squares 4. The Least Squares Estimator 5. Hypothesis Tests and Model Selection 6. Functional Form and Structural Change 7. Nonlinear, Semiparametric, and Nonparametric Regression Models 8. Endogeneity and Instrumental Variable Estimation PART II: GENERALIZED REGRESSION MODEL AND EQUATION SYSTEMS 9. The Generalized Regression Model and Heteroscedasticity 10. Systems of Equations 11. Models for Panel Data PART III: ESTIMATION METHODOLOGY 12. Estimation Frameworks in Econometrics 13. Minimum Distance Estimation and the Generalized Method of Moments 14. Maximum Likelihood Estimation 15. Simulation-Based Estimation and Inference 16. Bayesian Estimation and Inference PART IV: CROSS SECTIONS, PANEL DATA, AND MICROECONOMETRICS 17. Discrete Choice 18. Discrete Choices and Event Counts 19. Limited Dependent VariablesTruncation, Censoring, and Sample Selection PART V: TIME SERIES AND MACROECONOMETRICS 20. Serial Correlation 21. Models with Lagged Variables 22. Time-Series Models 23. Nonstationary Data PART VI: APPENDICES Appendix A: Matrix Algebra
83
Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix Appendix
B: Probability and Distribution Theory C: Estimation and Inference D: Large-Sample Distribution Theory E: Computation and Optimization F: Data Sets Used in Applications G: Statistical Tables
Alan Griffiths Stuart Wall
Applied Economics, 12/e
Basic Approach
Applied Economics equips you with the skills and knowledge to apply economic analysis to the current economic problems happening in the world today. Highly praised for its clear presentation, broad coverage of topics, and unique blend of theory and application, Applied Economics brings the subject to life, helping you to understand the relevance of economics in the real world.
Table of Contents
1. Changes in the economic structure PART I: THEORY OF THE FIRM 2. Financial reports as a source of corporate information 3. Firm objectives and firm behaviour 4. Entrepreneurship and small/medium-sized enterprises (SMEs) 5. Mergers and acquisitions in the growth of the firm 6. Oligopoly 7. The multinational corporation 8. Privatization and deregulation 9. Beyond markets: critical approaches to microeconomics PART II: ENVIRONMENTAL, REGIONAL AND SOCIAL ECONOMICS 10. The economics of the environment 11. Transport 12. Health economics 13. Distribution of income and wealth 14. Trade unions, wages and collective bargaining 15. Corporate social and ethical responsibility PART III: MACROECONOMICS 16. Consumption and saving 17. Investment 18. Public expenditure 19. Taxation 20. Money and monetary policy 21. Financial institutions and markets 22. Inflation 23. Unemployment PART IV: INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS 24. Globalization 25. Exchange rates and trade performance 26. Free trade, regional trading blocs and protectionism 27. The European Union 28. The BRIC economies: Brazil, Russia, India and China 29. Growth and development 30. Managing the global economy: post credit crunch
Economics for Business and Management, 3/e

Alan Griffiths Stuart Wall
Basic Approach
An exciting introduction to the principles and applications of microeconomics and macroeconomics to the global business problems faced by todays decision makers What are the characteristics for successful entry into new international markets? How can sustainability affect decision making within businesses? Why are todays global investors so concerned about national debt issues? In what ways does an awareness of cultural differences improve decision making by international
84
marketing and human resource strategists? What strategies can companies such as BP use to repair damaged global reputations?
Table of Contents
PART I: MICRO BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT 1. Markets and resource allocation 2. Demand, revenue and consumer behaviour 3. Supply, production and cost 4. Business organisation, objectives and behaviour 5. Firm size, mergers and the public interest 6. Market structures 7. Labour and other factor markets 8. Market failure, regulation and competition PART II: MACRO BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT 9. National income determination 10. Government policies: instruments and objectives 11. Political, legal, ecological and technological environment 12. Functions of management: domestic business environment 13. International business environment 14. Strategies in a globalised business environment Appendix 1 Indifference curves, budget lines and the 'law of demand' Appendix 2 Isoquants, isocosts and production
Nigel Grimwade
International Trade
ISBN 10: 0273718886 ISBN 13: 9780273718888 2013 Paper
Making of the Economic Society, The, 13/e

Robert L. Heilbroner, New School for Social Research William Milberg ISBN 10: 0132822385 ISBN 13: 9780132822381 224pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses on Economics and Society, Economic History, Economic History of the West, and The History of Capitalism. Heilbroner/Milberg is the only introductory level text that traces the development of our economic society from the Middle Ages to the present, offering a balanced perspective on why our economy is the way it is and where it may be headed.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
The Economic Problem The Premarket Economy The Emergence of Market Society The Industrial Revolution The Impact of Industrial Technology The Great Depression The Rise of the Public Sector Modern Capitalism Emerges in Europe The Golden Age of Capitalism The Rise and Fall of Socialism Why Some Nations Remain Poor, Emerging Markets and the Persistence of Global Poverty The Great Recession in Historical Perspective Problems and Possibilities
Macroeconomics, 2/e
Glenn Hubbard Anne Garnett Phil Lewis Tony O'Brien
ISBN 10: 1442533714 ISBN 13: 9781442533714 2012 Paper
85
Basic Approach
Real examples. Real companies. Real business decisions. The key questions students of first year economics ask themselves are: `Why am I here? and Will I ever use this?. Hubbard Macroeconomics answers these questions by demonstrating that real businesses use economics to make real decisions every day. Each chapter of the text: opens with a case study featuring a real business or real business situation, refers to the study throughout the chapter, and concludes with An Inside Looka news article format which illustrates how a key principle covered in the chapter relates to real business situations or was used by a real company to make a real business decision. While the core ideas of economics remain unchanged, the new 2nd edition of Macroeconomics helps students make sense of changing economic realities, such as policy debate on health care, immigration and the environment, the global financial crisis, and the effectiveness of economics policies aimed at minimising the impact of the financial crisis. Hubbard Macroeconomics presents economics as a dynamic, relevant discipline for students. PART 1: INTRODUCTION 1. Economics: Foundations and models 2. Choices and trade-offs in the market PART 2: HOW THE MARKET WORKS 3. Where prices come from: The interaction of demand and supply PART 3: MACROECONOMIC FOUNDATIONS AND ECONOMIC GROWTH 4. GDP: Measuring total production, income and economic growth 5. Economic growth, the financial system and business cycles 6. Long-run economics growth: sources and policies PART 4: SHORT-RUN FLUCTUATIONS 7. Aggregate expenditure and output in the short run 8. Aggregate demand and aggregate supply analysis PART 5: UNEMPLOYMENT AND INFLATION 9. Unemployment 10. Inflation PART 6: MONETARY AND FISCAL POLICY 11. Money, banks and the Reserve Bank of Australia 12. Monetary policy 13. Fiscal policy PART 7: THE INTERNATIONAL ECONOMY 14. Macroeconomics in an open economy 15. The international financial system
Table of Contents
Microeconomics, 2/e
Glenn Hubbard Anne Garnett Phil Lewis Tony O'Brien
ISBN 10: 1442531770 ISBN 13: 9781442531772 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Real examples. Real companies. Real business decisions. The key questions students of first year economics ask themselves are: `Why am I here? and Will I ever use this?. Hubbard Microeconomics answers these questions by demonstrating that real businesses use economics to make real decisions every day. Each chapter of the text: opens with a case study featuring a real business or real business situation, refers to the study throughout the chapter, and concludes with An Inside Looka news article format which illustrates how a key principle covered in the chapter relates to real business situations or was used by a real company to make a real business decision. This new edition of Microeconomics has been revised to provide students with the most up-to-date and relevant content they need to succeed in the field of economics. Once again all chapters contain examples to demonstrate the practicality and relevance of economics to decision making that students may be currently involved with. Hubbard Microeconomics presents economics as a dynamic, relevant discipline for students.
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION 1. Economics: Foundations and models APPENDIX Using graphs and formulae 2. Choices and trade-offs in the market PART 2: HOW THE MARKET WORKS 3. Where prices come from: The interaction of demand and supply 4. Elasticity: The responsiveness of demand and supply 5. Economic efficiency, government price setting and taxes APPENDIX Quantitative demand and supply analysis PART 3: CONSUMERS AND FIRMS 6. Consumer choice and behavioural economics APPENDIX Using indifference curves and budget lines to understand consumer behaviour 7. Technology, production and costs APPENDIX Using isoquants and isocosts to understand production and costs PART 4: MARKET STRUCTURE AND FIRM STRATEGY 8. Firms in perfectly competitive markets
86
9. Monopoly market APPENDIX Price discrimination 10. Monopolistic competition 11. Oligopoly: Firms in less competitive markets APPENDIX Traditional models of oligopoly PART 5: MARKETS FOR FACTORS OF PRODUCTION 12. The markets for labour and other factors of production PART 6: INTERNATIONAL MARKETS 13. International trade PART 7: THE ROLE OF GOVERNMENT 14. Government intervention in the market 15. Externalities, environmental policy and public goods 16. The distribution of income and social policy
R. Glenn Hubbard Anthony Patrick O'Brien ISBN 10: 0273771302 ISBN 13: 9780273771302 1176pp 2012 Paper
Economics, 4/e
For the two-semester Principles of Economics courses at four- and two-year colleges and universities. Learn economics through real business examples. The number-one question students of economics ask themselves is, "Why am I here, and will I ever use this?". Hubbard/O'Brien answers this question by demonstrating that real businesses use economics to make real decisions everyday. This is something all students can connect to, whether they're business majors or not, because students encounter businesses in their daily lives. And regardless of their future career pathopening an art studio, doing social work, trading on Wall Street, working for the government, or bartending at the local pubstudents will benefit from understanding the economic forces behind their work. Also Available: Macroeconomics, 4/e ISBN 10: 0273771523 ISBN 13: 9780273771524 728pp 2012 Paper Microeconomics, 4/e ISBN 10: 0273771604 ISBN 13: 9780273771609 720pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION 1. Economics: Foundations and Models 2. Trade-offs, Comparative Advantage, and the Market System 3. Where Prices Come From: The Interaction of Demand and Supply 4. Economic Efficiency, Government Price Setting, and Taxes PART 2: MARKETS IN ACTION 5. Externalities, Environmental Policy, and Public Goods 6. Elasticity: The Responsiveness of Demand and Supply PART 3: FIRMS IN THE DOMESTIC AND INTERNATIONAL ECONOMIES 7. The Economics of Health Care 8. Firms, the Stock Market, and Corporate Governance PART 4: MICROECONOMIC FOUNDATIONS: CONSUMERS AND FIRMS 9. Comparative Advantage and the Gains from International Trade 10. Consumer Choice and Behavioral Economics PART 5: MARKET STRUCTURE AND FIRM STRATEGY 11. Technology, Production, and Costs 12. Firms in Perfectly Competitive Markets 13. Monopolistic Competition: The Competitive Model in a More Realistic Setting 14. Oligopoly: Firms in Less Competitive Markets 15. Monopoly and Antitrust Policy PART 6: MARKETS FOR FACTORS OF PRODUCTION 16. Pricing Strategy PART 7: INFORMATION, TAXES, AND THE DISTRIBUTION OF INCOME 17. The Markets for Labor and Other Factors of Production 18. Public Choice, Taxes, and the Distribution of Income PART 8: MACROECONOMIC FOUNDATIONS AND LONG-RUN GROWTH 19. GDP: Measuring Total Production and Income 20. Unemployment and Inflation 21. Economic Growth, the Financial System, and Business Cycles 22. Long-Run Economic Growth: Sources and Policies PART 9: SHORT-RUN FLUCTUATIONS 23. Aggregate Expenditure and Output in the Short Run 24. Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply Analysis
87
PART 10: MONETARY AND FISCAL POLICY 25. Money, Banks, and the Federal Reserve System 26. Monetary Policy 27. Fiscal Policy 28. Inflation, Unemployment, and Federal Reserve Policy PART 11: THE INTERNATIONAL ECONOMY 29. Macroeconomics in an Open Economy 30. The International Financial System
Essentials of Economics, 3/e

R. Glenn Hubbard Anthony Patrick O'Brien ISBN 10: 0133035867 ISBN 13: 9780133035865 744pp 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For Survey of Economics courses at four- and two-year colleges and universities. Learn economics through real business examples. The number-one question students of economics ask themselves is, "Why am I here, and will I ever use this?". Hubbard/O'Brien answers this question by demonstrating that real businesses use economics to make real decisions everyday. This is something all students can connect to, whether they're business majors or not, because students encounter businesses in their daily lives. And regardless of their future career pathopening an art studio, doing social work, trading on Wall Street, working for the government, or bartending at the local pub students will benefit from understanding the economic forces behind their work.
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION 1. Economics: Foundations and Models Appendix: Using Graphs and Formulas 2. Trade-offs, Comparative Advantage, and the Market System 3. Where Prices Come From: The Interaction of Demand and Supply PART 2: MARKETS IN ACTION: POLICY AND APPLICATIONS 4. Market Efficiency and Market Failure 5. The Economics of Healthcare PART 3: MICROECONOMIC FOUNDATIONS: CONSUMERS AND FIRMS 6. Firms, the Stock Market, and Corporate Governance 7. Consumer Choice and Elasticity 8. Technology, Production, and Costs PART 4: MARKET STRUCTURE AND FIRM STRATEGY 9. Firms in Perfectly Competitive Markets 10. Monopoly and Antitrust 11. Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly PART 5: MACROECONOMIC FOUNDATIONS 12. GDP: Measuring Total Production and Income 13. Unemployment and Inflation PART 6: LONG-RUN AND SHORT-RUN FLUCTUATIONS 14. Economic Growth, the Financial System and Business Cycles 15. Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply Analysis Appendix: Schools of Macro Thought PART 7: MONETARY AND FISCAL POLICY 16. Money, Banks, and the Federal Reserve System 17. Monetary Policy 18. Fiscal Policy 19. Comparative Advantage, International Trade, and Exchange Rates
Money, Banking, and the Financial System

R. Glenn Hubbard, Columbia University Anthony Patrick O'Brien ISBN 10: 0132722011 ISBN 13: 9780132722018 640pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Make the link between theory and real-world easier for students with the most up-to-date Money and Banking text on the market Today! Hubbard/O'Brien's new text presents Money, Banking, and the Financial System in the context of contemporary events, policy, and business with an integrated explanation of todays financial crisis. Reviewers tell us that Hubbard/O'Brien helps make the link between theory and real-world easier for students!
88
Table of Contents
PART 1: FOUNDATIONS 1. Introducing Money and the Financial System 2. Money and the Payments System PART 2: FINANCIAL MARKETS 3. Interest Rates and Rates of Return 4. Determining Interest Rates 5. The Risk Structure and Term Structure of Interest Rates 6. The Stock Market, Information, and Financial Market Efficiency 7. Derivatives and Derivative Markets PART 3: FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS 8. The Market for Foreign Exchange 9. Transactions Costs, Asymmetric Information, and the Structure of the Financial System 10. The Economics of Banking 11. Investment Banks, Mutual Funds, Hedge Funds, and the Shadow Banking System 12. Financial Crises and Financial Regulation PART 4: MONETARY POLICY 13. The Federal Reserve and Central Banking 14. The Federal Reserves Balance Sheet and the Money Supply Process 15. Monetary Policy 16. The International Financial System and Monetary Policy PART 5: THE FINANCIAL SYSTEM AND THE MACROECONOMY 17. Monetary Theory I: The Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply Model 18. Monetary Theory II: The ISMP Model
R. Glenn Hubbard Anthony Patrick O'Brien Matthew Rafferty ISBN 10: 0273762176 ISBN 13: 9780273762171 656pp 2012 Paper
Macroeconomics
Basic Approach
Make the link between theory and real-world easier for students with the most up-to-date Intermediate Macroeconomics text on the market Today! Hubbard, O'Brien, and Rafferty realize that most students enrolled in today's intermediate macroeconomics courses are either undergraduate or masters students who are likely to become entrepreneurs, managers, bankers, stock brokers, accountants, lawyers, or government officials. Very few students will pursue a Ph.D. in economics. Given this student profile, Hubbard, O'Brien, and Rafferty's new text presents Intermediate Macroeconomics in the context of contemporary events, policy, and business with an integrated explanation of today's financial crisis. Student and instructor feedback tells us that Hubbard, O'Brien, and Rafferty helps make the link between theory and real-world easier for students!
Table of Contents
PART I: INTRODUCTION 1. The Long and Short of Macroeconomics 2. Measuring Total Production and Income 3. The Financial System PART II: MACROECONOMICS IN THE LONG RUN: ECONOMIC GROWTH 4. Aggregate Production and Potential GDP 5. Long-Run Economic Growth 6. Money and Inflation 7. The Labor Market PART III: MACROECONOMICS IN THE SHORT RUN: THEORY AND POLICY 8. Business Cycles 9. IS-MP: A Short-Run Macroeconomic Model 9 Appendix: IS-LM: An Alternative Short-Run Macroeconomic Model 10. Monetary Policy 11. Fiscal Policy 12. Aggregate Demand, Aggregate Supply, and Monetary Policy PART IV: EXTENSIONS 13. Long-Run Implications of Fiscal Policy 14. Consumption and Investment 15. Balance of Payments, Exchange Rates, and Macroeconomic Policy
International Economics, 9/e

Steve Husted Michael Melvin
ISBN 10: 027376828X ISBN 13: 9780273768289 2013 Paper
89
Basic Approach
For students taking a course in International Economics. Capture students attention with the issues and real data of todays most recent policy controversies. International Economics is an accessible, comprehensive and relevant guide for studying international economics. Using real data and issues that motivate theoretical discussions, this text captures students attention and equips them with a practical understanding of major policy questions. In this edition, there have been extensive updates to data sets and figures, and coverage on a number of current issues has been expanded. In addition, more examples and real-world applications have been provided to improve students comprehension and deepen their analysis of challenging theories and applications.
Mathematics for Economics and Business, 7/e

Ian Jacques ISBN 10: 0273763563 ISBN 13: 9780273763567 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
Do you need to brush up on your mathematical skills to truly excel in your economics or business course? If you want to increase your confidence in mathematics, then this is the perfect book for you. With its friendly and informal style, this market leading text breaks down topics into short sections making each new technique you learn seems less daunting. Offering you the chance at every opportunity to stop and check your understanding by working through the practice problems, you can relax and learn at your own pace.
International Economics, 9/e

Paul R. Krugman Maurice Obstfeld Marc Melitz
Basic Approach
Nobel Prize winning economist Paul Krugman and renowned researcher Maurice Obstfeld set the standard for International Economics courses with the text that remains the market leader in the U.S. and around the world. International Economics: Theory and Policy is a proven approach in which each half of the book leads with an intuitive introduction to theory and follows with self-contained chapters to cover key policy applications. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
1. Introduction PART 1: INTERNATIONAL TRADE THEORY 2. World Trade: An Overview 3. Labor Productivity and Comparative Advantage: The Ricardian Model 4. Specific Factors and Income Distribution 5. Resources and Trade: The Heckscher-Ohlin Model 6. The Standard Trade Model 7. External Economies of Scale and the International Location of Production 8. Firms in the Global Economy: Export Decisions, Outsourcing, and Multinational Enterprises PART 2: INTERNATIONAL TRADE POLICY 9. The Instruments of Trade Policy 10. The Political Economy of Trade Policy 11. Trade Policy in Developing Countries 12. Controversies in Trade Policy PART 3: EXCHANGE RATES AND OPEN-ECONOMY MACROECONOMICS 13. National Income Accounting and the Balance of Payments 14. Exchange Rates and the Foreign Exchange Market: An Asset Approach 15. Money, Interest Rates, and Exchange Rates 16. Price Levels and the Exchange Rate in the Long Run 17. Output and the Exchange Rate in the Short Run 18. Fixed Exchange Rates and Foreign Exchange Intervention PART 4: INTERNATIONAL MACROECONOMIC POLICY 19. International Monetary Systems: An Historical Overview 20. Optimum Currency Areas and the European Experience 21. Financial Globalization: Opportunity and Crisis 22. Developing Countries: Growth, Crisis, and Reform
90
Roger LeRoy Miller
Economics Today, 16/e
Students learn best when they see concepts applied to examples from their everyday lives. With an abundance of relentlessly current examples, Economics Today appeals to todays diverse student population by presenting ideas clearly, at an accessible level, and in the context of newsworthy applications. Each chapter begins and ends with an Issues and Applications feature, which introduces a timely issue in the chapter opener and analyzes the issue using the economic tools learned in that chapter at the end. This text is supported by MyEconLab, which includes assessment questions that tie to these Issues and Applications, as well as ABC News video clips. Also Available: Economics Today: The Macro View, 16/e ISBN 10: 0132554518 ISBN 13: 9780132554510 528pp 2012 Paper Economics Today: The Micro View, 16/e ISBN 10: 0132554410 ISBN 13: 9780132554411 552pp 2012 Paper PART I: INTRODUCTION 1. The Nature of Economics 2. Scarcity and the World of Trade-Offs 3. Demand and Supply 4. Extensions of Demand and Supply Analysis 5. Public Spending and Public Choice 6. Funding the Public Sector PART 2: INTRODUCTION TO MACROECONOMICS AND ECONOMIC GROWTH 7. The Macroeconomy: Unemployment, Inflation and Deflation 8. Measuring the Economys Performance 9. Global Economic Growth and Development PART 3: REAL GDP DETERMINATION AND FISCAL POLICY 10. Real GDP and the Price Level in the Long Run 11. Classical and Keynesian Macro Analyses 12. Consumption, Real GDP, and the Multiplier 13. Fiscal Policy 14. Deficit Spending and the Public Debt PART 4: MONEY, STABILIZATION, AND GROWTH 15. Money, Banking, and Central Banking 16. Domestic and International Dimensions of Monetary Policy 17. Stabilization in an Integrated World Economy 18. Policies and Prospects for Global Economic Growth PART 5: DIMENSIONS OF MICROECONOMICS 19. Demand and Supply Elasticity 20. Consumer Choice 21. Rents, Profits, and the Financial Environment of Business PART 6: MARKET STRUCTURE, RESOURCE ALLOCATION, AND REGULATION 22. The Firm: Cost and Output Determination 23. Perfect Competition 24. Monopoly 25. Monopolistic Competition 26. Oligopoly and Strategic Behavior 27. Regulation and Antitrust Policy in a Globalized Economy PART 7: LABOR RESOURCES AND THE ENVIRONMENT 28. The Labor Market: Demand, Supply, and Outsourcing 29. Unions and Labor Market Monopoly Power 30. Income, Poverty, and Health Care Environmental Economics 31. Environmental Economics PART 8: GLOBAL ECONOMICS 32. Comparative Advantage and the Open Economy 33. Exchange Rates and the Balance of Payments
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
91
Economics of Macro Issues, The, 5/e

Roger LeRoy Miller Daniel K. Benjamin
Basic Approach
For principles of economics and social issues courses. Brief, relevant readings that spark independent thinking and classroom discussions. The Economics of Macro Issues is a collection of brief, relevant readings that spark independent thinking and classroom discussions in Principles of Economics and Social Issues. The text encourages students to apply theoretical discussions to todays important issues and to gain a deeper understanding of current macroeconomic policy concerns.
Table of Contents
PART ONE: THE MIRACLE OF ECONOMIC GROWTH 1. Rich Nation, Poor Nation (importance of institutions in promoting economic growth) 2. Going Underground (how the underground economy sustains prosperity) 3. Outsourcing and Economic Growth (impact of competition and voluntary exchange on wealth) 4. Poverty, Capitalism, and Growth (does a rising tide lift all boats?) 5. The Threat to Growth (why higher taxes can mean less prosperity) PART TWO: THE BUSINESS CYCLE, UNEMPLOYMENT, AND INFLATION 6. Is GDP What We Want? (is there a better measure than GDP?) 7. Whats in a Word? Plenty, If Its the R Word (how is a recession defined and why we care) 8. The Great Recession (why it happened and why it was a big deal) 9. The Case of the Disappearing Workers (misleading measures of unemployment) 10. Poverty, Wealth, and Equality (are the rich getting richer and the poor getting poorer?) 11. Will It Be Inflation or Deflation? (why rising prices are more likely than falling prices, and why you should care) 12. Is it Real, or is it Nominal? (why record-high prices arent always what they seem) PART THREE: FISCAL POLICY 13. Are You Stimulated Yet? (why stimulus packages door dontwork) 14. Health Care Reform (why spending more will get you less) 15. The Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac Flimflam (your money at waste) 16. Big Bucks for Bailouts (if its too big to fail, its too big to save) 17. The Pension Crisis (the future is coming and its going to crush us) 18. Higher Taxes Are in Your Future (why you can expect to pay higher and higher taxes in the future) 19. The Myths of Social Security (its not what government says it is, nor will it ever be) PART FOUR: MONETARY POLICY AND FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS 20. The Fed and Financial Panics (why the Fed was founded, and what it learned from its failures) 21. The Fed Feeding Frenzy (why monetary policy no longer looks like it used to) 22. Deposit Insurance and Financial Markets (economic implications of subsidized deposit insurance) 23. Credit Card Crunch (how Fed rules on credit cards may keep you from getting one) PART FIVE: GLOBALIZATION AND INTERNATIONAL FINANCE 24. The Opposition to Globalization (why people object to globalization) 25. The $750,000 Job (economic consequences of attempts to restrict free trade) 26. The Trade Deficit (it sounds bad and it looks ugly, but its not necessarily either) 27. The Value of the Dollar (why exchange rates move and what it means for America)
Roger LeRoy Miller Daniel K. Benjamin Douglass C. North
Economics of Public Issues, The, 17/e
Basic Approach
For principles of economics, public policy, and social issues courses. Brief, relevant readings that spark independent thinking and classroom discussions. The Economics of Public Issues is a collection of brief, relevant readings that spark independent thinking and classroom discussions in Principles of Economics and Social Issues courses. This text encourages students to apply theoretical discussions to todays important issues and to gain a deeper understanding of current economic policy concerns.
Table of Contents
PART ONE: THE FOUNDATIONS OF ECONOMIC ANALYSIS 1. Death by Bureaucrat (when bureaucratic choices mean life for some peopleand death for others) 2. The Economics of Oil Spills (why they happen and who should pay) 3. Supersize It (the economics of obesity) 4. Flying the Friendly Skies? (how safe is commercial air travel? How safe should it be?) 5. The Mystery of Wealth (why some nations are rich and others are poor) PART TWO: SUPPLY AND DEMAND
92
Sex, Booze, and Drugs (the unintendedand often harmfulconsequences of prohibiting voluntary exchange) 7. Kidneys for Sale (does a market for human organs make sense?) 8. Are We Running Out of Water? (on a planet thats two-thirds water, how can we be running out of the stuff?) 9. The (Dis)incentives of High Taxes (how high taxes illustrate the old adage, there is no free lunch) 10. Bankrupt Landlords, from Sea to Shining Sea (when governments lower rents, tenants can suffer) PART THREE: LABOR MARKETS 11. (Why) Are Women Paid Less? (why are women paid less, while men are working less?) 12. The Effects of the Minimum Wage (how a living wage can ruin the lives of minority youngsters) 13. Immigration, Superstars, and Poverty (are the rich getting richer and the poor getting poorer?) 14. The Underground World (how informal labor markets are raising wealth around the globe) PART FOUR: MARKET STRUCTURES 15. Patent Trolls and Seed Monopolies (do patents make us better off?) 16. Contracts, Combinations, and Conspiracies (why the NCAA and OPEC have more in common than fourletter names) 17. Coffee, Tea, or Tuition-Free? (who wins and who loses from price discrimination) 18. Keeping the Competition Out (when the government steps in, the competition steps out) PART FIVE: POLITICAL ECONOMY 19. Health Care Reform (big bucks make bad policy) 20. The Pension Crisis (our promises are coming home to roost) 21. Mortgage Meltdown (how Congress got us into the subprime mortgage mess) 22. Raising Less Corn and More Hell (how your tax dollars end up in farmers pockets) 23. The Graying of America (America is getting older, and you will foot the bill) PART SIX: PROPERTY RIGHTS AND THE ENVIRONMENT 24. Save that Species (saving a species is easywith a little bit of economics) 25. Greenhouse Economics (the economics of global climate change) 26. Ethanol Madness (environmental policy gone bad) 27. The Trashman Cometh (the costs and benefits of recycling) PART SEVEN: GLOBALIZATION AND ECONOMIC PROSPERITY 28. Globalization and the Wealth of America (is globalization all bad?) 29. The $750,000 Steelworker (the economic consequences of restricting international trade) 30. 30: The Lion, the Dragon, and the Future (do China, India, and other modernizing nations spell the demise of America?)
6.
Economics of Money, Banking and Financial Markets, The: The Business School Edition, 3/e
Frederic S. Mishkin ISBN 10: 0133047938 ISBN 13: 9780133047936 720pp 2013 Paper
The Economics of Money, Banking, and Financial Markets set the standard for money and banking courses when it published in its first edition, and it continues to be the worldwide market leader. For professors who teach with less emphasis on monetary theory and prefer to focus more time on financial institutions, theBusiness School Edition is an ideal alternative. The historic economic events and financial crises of late 2008 have changed the entire landscape of money and banking. Having just served as Governor of the Federal Reserve, only Mishkin has the unique insider's perspective needed to present the current state of money and banking and explain the latest debates and issues for todays students. By applying a unified analytical framework to the models, Mishkin makes theory intuitive for students, and the rich array of current, real-world events keeps students motivated. Authoritative, comprehensive, and flexible, the text is easy to integrate into a wide variety of syllabi, and its ancillaries provide complete support when teaching the course.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION 1. Why Study Money, Banking, and Financial Markets? 2. An Overview of the Financial System 3. What Is Money? PART 2: FINANCIAL MARKETS 4. Understanding Interest Rates 5. The Behavior of Interest Rates 6. The Risk and Term Structure of Interest Rates 7. The Stock Market, the Theory of Rational Expectations, and the Efficient Market Hypothesis PART 3: FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS 8. An Economic Analysis of Financial Structure 9. Financial Crises 10. Banking and the Management of Financial Institutions 11. Economic Analysis of Financial Regulation 12. Banking Industry: Structure and Competition 13. Nonbank Finance 14. Financial Derivatives 15. Conflicts of Interest in the Financial Industry
93
PART 4: CENTRAL BANKING AND THE CONDUCT OF MONETARY POLICY 16. Central Banks and the Federal Reserve System 17. The Money Supply Process 18. The Tools of Monetary Policy 19. The Conduct of Monetary Policy: Strategy and Tactics PART 5: INTERNATIONAL FINANCE AND MONETARY POLICY 20. The Foreign Exchange Market 21. The International Financial System PART 6: MONETARY THEORY 22. Quantity Theory, Inflation, and the Demand for Money 23. Aggregate Demand and Supply Analysis 24. Monetary Policy Theory 25. Transmission Mechanisms of Monetary Policy
The Economics of Money, Banking and Financial Markets, 10/e

The Economics of Money, Banking, and Financial Markets set the standard for money and banking courses when it published in its first edition, and it continues to be the worldwide market leader. By applying a unified analytical framework to the models, Mishkin makes theory intuitive for students, and the rich array of current, real-world events keeps students motivated. Authoritative, comprehensive, and flexible, the text is easy to integrate into a wide variety of syllabi, and its ancillaries provide complete support when teaching the course. This edition continues to expand on the discussion of the current financial crisis. This Global Edition has been edited to include enhancements making it more relevant to students outside the United States.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION 1. Why Study Money, Banking, and Financial Markets? 2. An Overview of the Financial System 3. What Is Money? PART 2: FINANCIAL MARKETS 4. Understanding Interest Rates 5. The Behavior of Interest Rates 6. The Risk and Term Structure of Interest Rates 7. The Stock Market, the Theory of Rational Expectations, and the Efficient Market Hypothesis PART 3: FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS 8. An Economic Analysis of Financial Structure 9. Financial Crises 10. Banking and the Management of Financial Institutions 11. Economic Analysis of Financial Regulation 12. Banking Industry: Structure and Competition PART 4: CENTRAL BANKING AND THE CONDUCT OF MONETARY POLICY 13. Central Banks and the Federal Reserve System 14. The Money Supply Process 15. The Tools of Monetary Policy 16. The Conduct of Monetary Policy: Strategy and Tactics PART 5: INTERNATIONAL FINANCE AND MONETARY POLICY 17. The Foreign Exchange Market 18. The International Financial System PART 6: MONETARY THEORY 19. Quantity Theory, Inflation, and the Demand for Money 20. The IS Curve 21. The Monetary Policy and Aggregate Demand Curves 22. Aggregate Demand and Supply Analysis 23. Monetary Policy Theory 24. The Role of Expectations in Monetary Policy 25. Transmission Mechanisms of Monetary Policy
Macroeconomics: Policy and Practice

94
Basic Approach
Gain Hands on Insight, Make the Connections, Analyze the Theory, and Tailor the Material to Your Course! Building on his expertise in macroeconomic policymaking at the Federal Reserve, Mishkins Macroeconomics: Policy and Practice text clearly provides a theoretical framework that illustrates the most current and relevant policy debates in the field. This new and exciting has everything you need to Teach Your Course Your Way and still provide your students with the most current and locally relevant theories in Macroeconomics today! This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART ONE: INTRODUCTION 1. The Policy and Practice of Macroeconomics 2. Measuring Macroeconomic Data PART TWO: MACROECONOMIC BASICS 3. Aggregate Production and Productivity 4. Saving and Investment in Closed and Open Economies 5. Money and Inflation PART THREE: LONG-RUN ECONOMIC GROWTH 6. The Sources of Growth and the Solow Model 7. Drivers of Growth: Technology, Policy, and Institutions PART FOUR: BUSINESS CYCLES: THE SHORT RUN 8. Business Cycles: An Introduction 9. The IS Curve 10. Monetary Policy and Aggregate Demand 11. Aggregate Supply and the Phillips Curve 12. The Aggregate Demand and Supply Model 13. Macroeconomic Policy and Aggregate Demand and Supply Analysis PART FIVE: FINANCE AND THE MACROECONOMY 14. The Financial System and Economic Growth 15. Financial Crises and the Economy 16. Financial Crises in Emerging Market Economies PART SIX: MACROECONOMIC POLICY 17. Fiscal Policy and the Government Budget 18. Exchange Rates and International Economic Policy PART SEVEN: MICROECONOMIC FOUNDATIONSOF MACROECONOMICS 19. Consumption and Saving 20. Investment 21. The Labor Market, Employment, and Unemployment PART EIGHT: MODERN BUSINESS CYCLE ANALYSIS AND MACROECONOMIC POLICY 22. The Role of Expectations in Macroeconomic Policy 23. Modern Business Cycle Theory
Economics: Principles, Applications and Tools, 7/e

Arthur O'Sullivan, Oregon State University Steven Sheffrin Stephen Perez ISBN 10: 0132722003 ISBN 13: 9780132722001 792pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For Principles of Economics courses. Questions that drive interest, applications that illustrate concepts, and the tools to test and solidify comprehension. Students come into their first Economics course thinking they will gain a better understanding of the economy around them. Unfortunately, they often leave with many unanswered questions. To ensure students actively internalize economics, O'Sullivan/Sheffrin/Perez use chapter-opening questions to spark interest on important economic concepts, applications that vividly illustrate those concepts and chapter-ending tools that test and solidify understanding. Also Available: Macroeconomics: Principles, Applications and Tools, 7/e ISBN 10: 0132555492 ISBN 13: 9780132555494 480pp 2012 Paper Microeconomics: Principles, Applications and Tools, 7/e ISBN 10: 0132555514 ISBN 13: 9780132555517 480pp 2012 Paper
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION AND KEY PRINCIPLES 1. Introduction: What Is Economics? 2. The Key Principles of Economics
95
3. Exchange and Markets 4. Demand, Supply, and Market Equilibrium PART 2: THE BASIC CONCEPTS IN MACROECONOMICS 5. Measuring a Nations Production and Income 6. Unemployment and Inflation PART 3: THE ECONOMY IN THE LONG RUN 7. The Economy at Full Employment 8. Why Do Economies Grow? PART 4: ECONOMIC FLUCTUATIONS AND FISCAL POLICY 9. Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply 10. Fiscal Policy 11. The Income-Expenditure Model 12. Investment and Financial Markets PART 5: MONEY, BANKING, AND MONETARY POLICY 13. Money and the Banking System 14. The Federal Reserve and Monetary Policy PART 6: INFLATION, UNEMPLOYMENT, AND ECONOMIC POLICY 15. Modern Macroeconomics: From the Short Run to the Long Run 16. The Dynamics of Inflation and Unemployment 17. Macroeconomic Policy Debates PART 7: THE INTERNATIONAL ECONOMY 18. International Trade and Public Policy 19. The World of International Finance PART 8: A CLOSER LOOK AT DEMAND AND SUPPLY 20. Elasticity: A Measure of Responsiveness 21. Market Efficiency and Government Intervention 22. Consumer Choice Using Utility Theory PART 9: MARKET STRUCTURES AND PRICING 23. Production Technology and Cost 24. Perfect Competition 25. Monopoly and Price Discrimination 26. Market Entry and Monopolistic Competition 27. Oligopoly and Strategic Behavior 28. Controlling Market Power: Antitrust and Regulation PART 10: EXTERNALITIES AND INFORMATION 29. Imperfect Information: Adverse Selection and Moral Hazard 30. Public Goods and Public Choice 31. External Costs and Environmental Policy PART 11: THE LABOR MARKET AND INCOME DISTRIBUTION 32. The Labor Market, Income, and Poverty 33. Unions, Monopsony, and Imperfect Information
Survey of Economics: Principles, Applications and Tools, 5/e

Arthur O'Sullivan, Oregon State University Steven Sheffrin Stephen Perez ISBN 10: 0132727684 ISBN 13: 9780132727686 480pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For one semester Principles of Economics courses. Questions that drive interest, applications that illustrate concepts, and the tools to test and solidify comprehension. Students come into their first Economics course thinking they will gain a better understanding of the economy around them. Unfortunately, they often leave with many unanswered questions. To ensure students actively internalize economics, O'Sullivan/Sheffrin/Perez use chapter-opening questions to spark interest on important economic concepts, applications that vividly illustrate those concepts and chapter-ending tools that test and solidify understanding.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.
Introduction Key Principles of Economics Demand, Supply, and Market Equilibrium Elasticity: A Measure of Responsiveness Production and Cost Perfect Competition: Short Run and Long Run Monopoly Monopolistic Competition, Oligopoly, and Antitrust Market Failure: Imperfect Information, Pollution, and Public Goods The Labor Market Measuring a Nations Production and Income Unemployment and Inflation Why Do Economies Grow Aggregate Demand and Supply Fiscal Policy Money and the Banking System
96
17. Monetary Policy and Inflation 18. International Trade and Finance
Economics, 10/e
Michael Parkin ISBN 10: 0273754211 ISBN 13: 9780273754213 864pp 2012 Paper
Get students to think like an Economist using the latest policy and data while incorporating Global Issues. From our global food shortage to global warming, economic issues permeate our everyday lives. Parkin brings critical issues to the forefront. Each chapter begins with one of todays key issues, and additional issues appear throughout the chapter to show the real-world applications of the theory being discussed. When the chapter concludes, students read between the lines to think critically about a news article relating to the issue, demonstrating how thinking like an economist helps make informed decisions. Parkin is so committed to currency that he uploads news articles almost daily to MyEconLab, the online assessment and tutorial system that accompanies the text. Assessment questions based on the Economics in the News articles will be uploaded periodically so that instructors can assign recent articles within MyEconLab. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States. Also Available: Macroeconomics, 10/e ISBN 10: 0273753584 ISBN 13: 9780273753582 456pp 2012 Paper Microeconomics, 10/e ISBN 10: 0273753983 ISBN 13: 9780273753988 552pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
PART I: PRINCIPLES ENDURE IN TIMES OF TURMOIL 1. The New World of Marketing Communication 2. Integrated Brand Communication 3. Brand Communication and Society PART II: PRINCIPLE: BE TRUE TO THY BRAND 4. How Brand Communication Works 5. Segmenting and Targeting the Audience 6. Strategic Research 7. Strategic Planning PART III: PRACTICE: WHERE IS CREATIVE HEADED? 8. Creative Strategy 9. Copywriting 10. Visual Communication PART IV: PRACTICE: WHERE ARE MEDIA HEADING? 11. Media Basics 12. Traditional Media 13. Digital Media 14. Media Planning and Buying PART V: PRACTICE: IMC AND TOTAL COMMUNICATION 15. Public Relations 16. Direct-Response 17. Promotions 18. The IMC Umbrella 19. Evaluation of Effectiveness
Economics European Edition, 8/e

Michael Parkin Melanie Powell Kent Matthews
Basic Approach
Economics touches almost every aspect of life, from climate change to terrorism, taxes to house prices, wages, to how much time to spend studying. Thinking like an economist will enable you to evaluate economic policies, understand human behaviour, and make more informed decisions.
97
Table of Contents
PART 1: THE SCOPE OF ECONOMICS 1. What Is Economics? 2. The Economic Problem PART 2: HOW MARKETS WORK 3. Demand and Supply 4. Elasticity 5. Efficiency and Equity 6. Government Action in Markets 7. Global Markets in Action PART 3: HOUSEHOLDS, FIRMS AND MARKETS 8. Households Choices 9. Organizing Production 10. Output and Costs 11. Perfect Competition 12. Monopoly 13. Monopolistic Competition 14. Oligopoly PART 4: COPING WITH MARKET FAILURE 15. Public Choices and Public Goods 16. Economics of the Environment PART 5: FACTOR MARKETS, INEQUALITY AND UNCERTAINTY 17. Markets for Factors of Production 18. Economic Inequality 19. Uncertainty and Information PART 6: MONITORING MACROECONOMIC PERFORMANCE 20. Measuring GDP and Economic Growth 21. Monitoring Jobs and Inflation PART 7: MACROECONOMIC TRENDS 22. Economic Growth 23. Finance, Saving, and Investment 24. Money, the Price Level, and Inflation 25. The Exchange Rate and the Balance of Payments PART 8: MACROECONOMIC FLUCTUATIONS 26. Aggregate Supply and Aggregate Demand 27. Expenditure Multipliers: The Keynesian Model 28. Inflation, Unemployment, and Business Cycle PART 9: MACROECONOMIC POLICY 29. Fiscal Policy 30. Monetary Policy
Essentials of Economics
Michael Parkin Melanie Powell Kent Matthews
Basic Approach
Rarely has the benefit of a deeper understanding of economics been so important, relevant, topical and exciting. Since the recent global financial crisis moved economics from the business report to the front page, fear has gripped producers, consumers, financial institutions and governments. If you want to start thinking about these events as an economist would, this is the book for you. Michael Parkins books are read by over a million students around the world, so youll be in safe hands as you learn how to explore difficult policy problems - and even to make more informed decisions in your own economic life. This text covers the most important economic topics for a business or non-specialist student and presents the material with the same rigour found in a specialist economics text. It is an undiluted presentation of economic principles and models that will serve as a compass as you navigate the unknown future terrain through which your business life will take you.
Table of Contents
PART 1: THE SCOPE OF ECONOMICS 1. What is Economics? 2. The Economic Problem PART 2: HOW MARKETS WORK 3. Demand and Supply 4. Efficiency and Equity 5. Government Actions in Markets PART 3: BUSINESS DECISIONS AND STRATEGIES 6. Output and Costs 7. Competitive Markets 8. Monopoly 9. Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly PART 4: MONITORING BUSINESS CONDITIONS 10. Real GDP
98
11. Monitoring Jobs and Inflation PART 5: FINANCE AND MONEY 12. Financial Markets 13. Money and Banking PART 6: MACROECONOMIC PERFORMANCE AND POLICY 14. Aggregate Supply and Aggregate demand 15. Growth, Inflation and Cycles 16. Fiscal Policy and Monetary Policy
Microeconomics, 6/e
Jeffrey M. Perloff ISBN 10: 0273754602 ISBN 13: 9780273754602 800pp 2012 Paper
Students need to learn two skills in this course: they need to master the requisite micro theory, and at the same time develop their problem-solving skills. Microeconomics has become a market leader because Perloff presents theory in the context of real, data-driven examples, and then develops intuition through his hallmark Solved Problems. Students gain a practical perspective, seeing how models connect to real-world decisions being made in todays firms and policy debates. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States. For a calculus-based microeconomics course, consider Perloffs new text, Microeconomics: Theory and Applications with Calculus.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.
Introduction Supply and Demand Applying the Supply-and-Demand Model Consumer Choice Applying Consumer Theory Firms and Production Costs Competitive Firms and Markets Applying the Competitive Model General Equilibrium and Economic Welfare Monopoly Pricing and Advertising Oligopoly and Monopolistic Competition Game Theory Factor Markets Interest Rates, Investments, and Capital Markets Uncertainty Externalities, Open-Access, and Public Goods Asymmetric Information Contracts and Moral Hazards
Natural Resource and Environmental Economics, 4/e

Roger Perman Yue Ma Michael Common David Maddison James McGilvray
Basic Approach
Now in its fourth edition, this book is a comprehensive and contemporary analysis of the major areas of natural resource and environmental economics. All chapters have been fully updated in light of new developments and changes in the subject, and provide a balance of theory, applications and examples to give a rigorous grounding in the economic analysis of the resource and environmental issues that are increasingly prominent policy concerns. This text has been written primarily for the specialist market of second and third year undergraduate and postgraduate students of economics.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4.
An introduction to natural resource and environmental economics The origins of the sustainability problem Ethics, economics and the environment Welfare economics and the environment
99
5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19.
Pollution control: targets Pollution control: instruments Pollution policy with imperfect information Economy-wide modelling International environmental problems Trade and the Environment Cost-benefit analysis Valuing the environment Irreversibility, risk and uncertainty The efficient and optimal use of natural resources The theory of optimal resource extraction: non-renewable resources Stock pollution problems Renewable resources Forest resources Accounting for the environment
Health Economics, 5/e

Charles E. Phelps ISBN 10: 0132948532 ISBN 13: 9780132948531 648pp 2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
Health Economics combines current economic theory, recent research, and health policy problems into a comprehensive overview of the field. This thorough update of a classic and widely used text follows author Charles E. Phelpss thirteen years of service as Provost of the University of Rochester. Accessible and intuitive, early chapters use recent empirical studies to develop essential methodological foundations. Later chapters build on these core concepts to focus on key policy areas, such as the structure and effects of Medicare reform, insurance plans, and new technologies in the health care community.
Microeconomics, 8/e
Robert Pindyck Daniel Rubinfeld
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate economics majors who are enrolled in an Intermediate Microeconomics course. A book that provides a treatment of microeconomic theory that stresses the relevance and application to managerial and public policy decision making.
Table of Contents
PART I. INTRODUCTION: MARKETS AND PRICES 1. Preliminaries 2. The Basics of Supply and Demand PART II. PRODUCERS, CONSUMERS, AND COMPETITIVE MARKETS 3. Consumer Behavior 4. Individual and Market Demand 5. Uncertainty and Consumer Behavior 6. Production 7. The Cost of Production 8. Profit Maximization and Competitive Supply 9. The Analysis of Competitive Markets PART III. MARKET STRUCTURE AND COMPETITIVE STRATEGY 10. Mark et Power: Monopoly and Monopsony 11. Pricing with Market Power 12. Monopolistic Competition and Oligopoly 13. Game Theory and Competitive Strategy 14. Markets for Factor Inputs 15. Investment, Time, and Capital Markets PART IV. INFORMATION, MARKET FAILURE, AND THE ROLE OF GOVERNMENT 16. General Equilibrium and Economic Efficiency 17. Markets with Asymmetric Information 18. Externalities and Public Goods
100
Economics and the Business Environment, 3/e

John Sloman Elizabeth Jones
Basic Approach
Economics and the Business Environment presents the essential principles of microeconomics and macroeconomics applied to the world of business while also looking at wider, topical business issues, such as business strategy, corporate social responsibility, ethics and the state of the global environment in which we live. "The best basic economics book available for post graduate level." Professor Claus Westh Department of Business, Business Academy Copenhagen North, Denmark
Table of Contents
PART A - INTRODUCTION 1. Business and the economic environment PART B - MARKETS, DEMAND AND SUPPLY 2. The working of competitive markets 3. Demand and the consumer 4. Supply decisions in a perfectly competitive market PART C - THE MICROECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT OF BUSINESS 5. Pricing and output decisions in imperfectly competitive markets 6. Business growth and strategy 7. Multinational corporations and business strategy in a global economy 8. Labour and employment 9. Government, the firm and the market PART D - THE MACROECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT OF BUSINESS 10. The economy and business activity 11. National macroeconomic policy 12. The global trading environment 13. The global financial environment
Economics, 8/e
John Sloman Alison Wride Dean Garratt
Basic Approach
Now in its 8th edition, Economics by Sloman et al is known and loved for its active learning, student-friendly approach and unmatched lecturer and student support. Retaining all the hall mark features of previous editions, it continues to provide a balanced, comprehensive and completely up-to-date introduction to the world of economics.
Table of Contents
PART A: INTRODUCTION 1. Introducing Economics PART B: FOUNDATIONS OF MICROECONOMICS 2. Supply and Demand 3. Markets in Action PART C: MICROECONOMIC THEORY 4. Background to Demand 5. Background to Supply 6. Profit Maximising under Perfect Competition and Monopoly 7. Profit Maximising under Imperfect Competition 8. Alternative Theories of the Firm 9. The Theory of Distribution of Income PART D: MICROECONOMIC POLICY 10. Inequality, Poverty and Policies to Redistribute Income 11. Markets, Efficiency and the Public Interest 12. Environmental Policy 13. Government Policy towards Business PART E: FOUNDATIONS OF MACROECONOMICS 14. The National Economy 15. Macroeconomic Issues and Analysis: an Overview PART F: MACROECONOMICS 16. The Roots of Modern Macroeconomics 17. Short-run Macroeconomic Equilibrium 18. Money and Interest Rates
101
19. The Relationship between the Money and Goods Markets 20. Fiscal and Monetary Policy 21. Aggregate Supply, Unemployment and Inflation 22. Long-term Economic Growth 23. Supply-side Policies PART G: THE WORLD ECONOMY 24. International Trade 25. The Balance of Payments and Exchange Rates 26. Global and Regional Interdependence 27. Economic Problems of Developing Countries Appendix 1: Some Techniques of Economic Analysis Appendix 2: Websites
Essential Mathematics for Economics Analysis, 4/e

Knut Sydsater Peter Hammond
ISBN 10: 0273760688 ISBN 13: 9780273760689 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
This text provides an invaluable introduction to the mathematical tools that undergraduate economists need. The coverage is comprehensive, ranging from elementary algebra to more advanced material, whilst focusing on all the core topics that are usually taught in undergraduate courses on mathematics for economists.
Environmental & Natural Resources Economics, 9/e

Tom Tietenberg Lynne Lewis
Basic Approach
Environmental & Natural Resource Economics is the best-selling text for this course, offering a policyoriented approach and introducing economic theory in the context of debates and empirical work from the field. Students leave the course with a global perspective of both environmental and natural resource economics.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22.
Visions of the Future The Economic Approach: Property Rights, Externalities and Environmental Problems Evaluating Trade-offs: Benefit-Cost Analysis and other Decision-Making Metrics Valuing the Environment: Methods Dynamic Efficiency and Sustainable Development Depletable Resource Allocation: The Role of Longer Time Horizons, Substitutes and Extraction Cost Energy: The Transition from Depletable to Renewable Resources Recyclable Resources: Minerals, Paper, Bottles, and E-Waste Replenishable but Depletable Resources: Water A Locationally Fixed, Multipurpose Resource: Land Reproducible Private-Property Resources: Agriculture and Food Security Storable, Renewable Resources: Forests Common-Pool Resources: Fisheries and Other Commercially Valuable Species Economics of Pollution Control: An Overview Stationary-Source Local and Regional Air Pollution Climate Change Mobile-Source Air Pollution Water Pollution Toxic Substances and Environmental Justice The Quest for Sustainable Development Population and Development Visions of the Future Revisited
102
Economic Development, 11/e

Michael Todaro Stephen C. Smith
Basic Approach
Economic Development is the leading textbook in this field, providing a complete and balanced introduction to the requisite theory, the driving policy issues, and the latest research. Todaro and Smith take a policy-oriented approach, presenting economic theory in the context of critical policy debates and country-specific case studies so students see how theory relates to the problems and prospects of developing countries. I: PRINCIPLES AND CONCEPTS 1. Economics, Institutions, and Development: A Global Perspective 2. Comparative Economic Development 3. Classic Theories of Economic Growth and Development 4. Contemporary Models of Development and Underdevelopment II: PROBLEMS AND POLICIES: DOMESTIC 5. Poverty, Inequality, and Development 6. Population Growth and Economic Development: Causes, Consequences, and Controversies 7. Urbanization and Rural-Urban Migration: Theory and Policy 8. Human Capital: Education and Health in Economic Development 9. Agricultural Transformation and Rural Development 10. The Environment and Development 11. Development Policymaking and the Roles of Market, State, and Civil Society III: PROBLEMS AND POLICIES: INTERNATIONAL AND MACRO 12. International Trade Theory and Development Strategy 13. Balance of Payments, Developing-Country Debt, and the Macroeconomic Stabilization Controversy 14. Foreign Finance, Investment, and Aid: Controversies and Opportunities 15. Finance and Fiscal Policy for Development 16. Some Critical Issues for the Twenty-First Century
Table of Contents
Industrial Organization: Theory and Practice, 4/e

Don E. Waldman, Colgate University Elizabeth J. Jensen, Hamilton College ISBN 10: 0132770989 ISBN 13: 9780132770989 736pp 2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
Written solely for the undergraduate audience, Industrial Organization: Theory and Practicewhich features early coverage of Antitrustpunctuates its modern introduction to industrial organization with relevant empirical data and case studies to show students how to apply theoretical tools.
Table of Contents
PART I: THE BASICS OF INDUSTRIAL ORGANIZATION 1. Introduction 2. The Firm and Its Costs 3. Competition and Monopoly 4. Market Structure 5. Monopoly Practices 6. Empirical Industrial Organization PART II: MODERN INDUSTRIAL ORGANIZATION: GAME THEORY AND STRATEGIC BEHAVIOR 7. Game Theory: A Framework for Understanding Oligopolistic Behavior 8. The Development of Theory 9. Collusion: The Great Prisoners Dilemma 10. Cartels in Action 11. Oligopoly Behavior: Entry and Pricing to Deter Entry 12. Oligopoly Behavior: Entry and Nonpricing Strategies to Deter Entry PART III: BUSINESS PRACTICES 13. Product Differentiation 14. Advertising 15. Technological Change and Research and Development 16. Price Discrimination 17. Vertical Integration and Vertical Relationships 18. Regulation and Deregulation
103
Dormonomics: Today's Students Discuss Today's Issues

Stephen M. Walters John J. Walters Christopher Appel Crystal Callahan Nick Centanni Steven Maex Dan O'Neill
Economic Growth, 3/e

David N. Weil ISBN 10: 0273769294 ISBN 13: 9780273769293 592pp 2013 Paper
Why are some countries rich and others poor? David N. Weil, one of the top researchers in economic growth, introduces students to the latest theoretical tools, data, and insights underlying this pivotal question. By showing how empirical data relate to new and old theoretical ideas, Economic Growth provides students with a complete introduction to the discipline and the latest research. With its comprehensive and flexible organization, Economic Growth is ideal for a wide array of courses, including undergraduate and graduate courses in economic growth, economic development, macro theory, applied econometrics, and development studies.
Basic Approach
104
Finance
Essentials of Corporate Financial Management, 2/e
Glen Arnold ISBN 10: 027375887X ISBN 13: 9780273758877 600pp 2013 Paper
Essentials of Corporate Financial Management supports courses designed to cover the core topics of finance in 15 to 30 hours of lectures. The book is primarily aimed at undergraduate students studying finance as part of a business related degree, MBA students and others studying finance at business schools. It also provides the foundation elements needed by students going on to study more advanced finance. The step-by-step learning approach enables students to achieve a high level of financial knowledge without assuming a prior knowledge of finance. Selected core topics and key concepts are delivered with depth, allowing students to gain an understanding of the topical debates within this field, where disagreement or alternative perspectives lead to lively discussion.
Basic Approach
Modern Financial Markets and Institutions: A Practical Perspective

Glen Arnold ISBN 10: 0273730355 ISBN 13: 9780273730354 792pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Modern Financial Markets and Institutions provides a comprehensive and authoritative introduction to the workings of modern financial systems, the efficiency of money markets and the role of investment bankers, illustrating how they impact our everyday lives. By drawing on numerous real-world examples, this text is essential reading for students of banking, finance, investment, business studies and economics. It will be invaluable for those looking to entering banking, insurance, fund management and other financial services industries.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.
The value of the financial system Banking: retail and corporate Investment banking and other banking Insurance, pensions and collective investments Money markets Bond markets Central banking Equity markets Raising share capital Futures markets Options and swaps Foreign exchange markets Trade, shipping, commodities and gold Hedge funds and private equity Regulation of the financial sector The financial crisis
Financial Management for Decision Makers, 6/e

Peter Atrill ISBN 10: 0273756931 ISBN 13: 9780273756934 640pp 2011 Paper
Basic Approach
With an innovative, open-learning approach, Atrill's Financial Management for Decision Makers 6e introduces the the main principles of financial management in an accessible, non-technical way. Its unique focus on the practical application of financial management and its role in decision making make it an ideal text for students with minimal experience in the financial world taking their first course in either financial management or business finance.
105
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
The world of financial management Financial planning Analysing and interpreting financial statements Making capital investment and decisions Making capital investment decisions: further issues Financing a business 1: sources of finance Financing a business 2: raising long-term finance The cost of capital and the capital structure decision Making distributions to shareholders Managing working capital Mearsuring and managing for shareholder value Business mergers and share valuation
International Financial Management, 2/e

Geert Bekaert, Columbia University Robert J. Hodrick, Columbia University ISBN 10: 013284298X ISBN 13: 9780132842983 816pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate students enrolled in an international finance course. An approach that blends theory and practice with real-world data analysis. International Financial Management seamlessly blends theory with the analysis of data, examples, and practical case situations. Overall, Bekaert/Hodrick equips future business leaders with the analytical tools they need to understand the issues, make sound international financial decisions, and manage the risks that businesses may face in todays competitive global environment. All data in this edition has been updated to reflect the most recent information, including coverage on the latest research, global financial crisis, and emerging markets.
Table of Contents
PART I: INTRODUCTION TO FOREIGN EXCHANGE MARKETS AND RISKS 1. Globalization and the Multinational Corporation 2. The Foreign Exchange Market 3. Forward Markets and Transaction Exchange Risk 4. The Balance of Payments 5. Exchange Rate Systems PART II: INTERNATIONAL PARITY CONDITIONS AND EXCHANGE RATE DETERMINATION 6. Interest Rate Parity 7. Speculation and Risk in the Foreign Exchange Market 8. Purchasing Power Parity and Real Exchange Rates 9. Measuring and Managing Real Exchange Risk 10. Exchange Rate Determination and Forecasting PART III: INTERNATIONAL CAPITAL MARKETS 11. International Debt Financing 12. International Equity Financing 13. International Capital Market Equilibrium 14. Political and Country Risk PART IV: INTERNATIONAL CORPORATE FINANCE 15. International Capital Budgeting 16. Additional Topics in International Capital Budgeting 17. Risk Management and the Foreign Currency Hedging Decision 18. Financing International Trade 19. Managing Net Working Capital PART V: FOREIGN CURRENCY DERIVATIVES 20. Foreign Currency Futures and Options 21. Interest Rate and Foreign Currency Swaps
Fundamentals of Corporate Finance, 2/e

Jonathan Berk Peter DeMarzo Jarrad Harford
Basic Approach
For undergraduate corporate finance or financial management courses. The core concepts you expect. The new ideas you want. The pedagogy your students need to succeed. Fundamentals of Corporate Finances applied perspective cements students understanding of the modern-
106
day core principles by equipping students with a problem-solving methodology and profiling real-life financial management practicesall within a clear valuation framework. The second edition focuses on new topics and includes an increased emphasis on valuation. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART I: INTRODUCTION 1. Corporate Finance and the Financial Manager 2. Introduction to Financial Statement Analysis PART II: INTEREST RATES AND VALUING CASH FLOWS 3. Time Value of Money: An Introduction 4. Time Value of Money: Valuing Cash Flow Streams 5. Interest Rates 6. Bond Valuation 7. Stock Valuation PART III: VALUATION AND THE FIRM 8. Investment Decision Rules 9. Fundamentals of Capital Budgeting 10. Stock Valuation: A Second Look PART IV: RISK AND RETURN 11. Risk and Return in Capital Markets 12. Systematic Risk and the Equity Risk Premium 13. The Cost of Capital PART V: LONG-TERM FINANCING 14. Raising Capital 15. Debt Financing PART VI: CAPITAL STRUCTURE AND VALUATION 16. Capital Structure 17. Payout Policy PART VII: FINANCIAL PLANNING 18. Financial Modeling and Pro Forma Analysis 19. Working Capital Management 20. Short-Term Financial Planning PART VIII: SPECIAL TOPICS 21. Option Applications and Corporate Finance 22. Mergers and Acquisitions 23. International Corporate Finance
Financial Management: Core Concepts, 2/e

Raymond Brooks ISBN 10: 0273768476 ISBN 13: 9780273768470 684pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For students taking an undergraduate corporate finance or financial management course. You've got the know-how. We've got the how-to. Brooks uses a tools-based approach that presents the key concepts of finance (or tools) early on in the text, followed by an application of those concepts to various finance problems. By introducing key finance concepts with personal and business-related finance examples, this text helps students understand how the tools of finance can help them in any career or business situation. This edition features strengthened material on financial statements, a discussion on yield curves, new and advanced spreadsheet problems, and updated material.
Table of Contents
PART 1: FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS AND BASIC TOOLS OF FINANCE 1. Financial Management 2. Financial Statements 3. The Time Value of Money (Part 1) 4. The Time Value of Money (Part 2) 5. Interest Rates PART 2: VALUING STOCKS AND BONDS AND UNDERSTANDING RISK AND RETURN 6. Bonds and Bond Valuation 7. Stocks and Stock Valuation 8. Risk and Return PART 3: CAPITAL BUDGETING 9. Capital Budgeting Decision Models 10. Cash Flow Estimation 11. The Cost of Capital PART 4: FINANCIAL PLANNING AND EVALUATING PERFORMANCE 12. Forecasting and Short-Term Financial Planning 13. Working Capital Management 14. Financial Ratios and Firm Performance PART 5: OTHER SELECTED FINANCE TOPICS
107
15. Raising Capital 16. Capital Structure 17. Dividends, Dividend Policy, and Stock Splits 18. International Financial Management Appendix 1: Future Value Interest Factors Appendix 2: Present Value Interest Factors Appendix 3: Future Value Interest Factors of an Annuity Appendix 4: Present Value Interest Factors of an Annuity Appendix 5: Answers to Prepping for Exam Questions
Financial Crisis: Causes, Context and Consequences

Adrian Buckley ISBN 10: 027373511X ISBN 13: 9780273735113 360pp 2011 Paper
A fascinating close-up analysis of the causes of the 2007/8 financial crisis and its consequences - Financial Crisis places the world of finance under the microscope, bringing together evidence of the involvement of banks, governments and regulators.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.
An overview of the financial crisis 2007/8 Governments and the financial crisis Personal finance, housing and the financial crisis The business of banking Subprime lenders and borrowers Credit default swaps and toxic assets Bank lending and control systems Regulation The business cycle, booms, busts, bubbles and frauds Finance theories Other academic theories Bank failures in the USA Bank failures in the UK Bank failures in Europe The great depression Government responses to the crisis Lessons and major issues
International Finance: A Practical Perspective

Adrian Buckley ISBN 10: 0273731866 ISBN 13: 9780273731863 688pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
International Finance: A Practical Perspective is a complete and authoritative text on the theory and practice of finance in the international arena. The book offers a user-friendly, European orientated, approach to this sometimes complex topic and moves from the basics to the advanced with clarity and conciseness.
Table of Contents
PART A: ESSENTIAL BACKGROUND 1. Introduction 2. The international monetary system PART B: FOREIGN EXCHANGE 3. Exchange rates: the basic equations 4. Foreign exchange markets 5. The balance of payments 6. Theories and empiricism on exchange rate movements 7. Definitions of foreign exchange risk TEST BANK 1 PART C: HEDGING 8. Does foreign exchange exposure matter? 9. Principles of exposure management 10. Internal techniques of exposure management 11. External techniques of exposure management TEST BANK 2 PART D: DERIVATIVES
108
12. Swaps 13. Financial futures and foreign exchange 14. Options 15. Currency options 16. Interest rate risk 17. Financial engineering PART E: FINANCIAL CRISIS 2007-8 18. Credit default swaps 19. The financial crisis of 2007-8: a synopsis TEST BANK 3 PART F: INTERNATIONAL CAPITAL BUDGETING 20. The internationalisation process 21. Exchange controls and corporate tax in international investment 22. The international capital budgeting framework 23. The international capital budgeting model 24. International investment: what discount rate? 25. Country risk analysis and political risk 26. International capital budgeting: the practicalities TEST BANK 4 PART G: INTERNATIONAL FINANCING 27. 27 Financing the multinational and its overseas subsidiaries 28. 28 Financing international trade and minimising credit risk 29. 29 Practical problems in hedging PART H MISCELLANEOUS 30. Miscellaneous issues in international finance TEST BANK 5 Suggested answers to end of chapter questions Suggested answers to selected exercises Solutions to multiple choice questions Appendix 1 Present value of $1 Appendix 2 Present value of $1 received annually for n years Appendix 3 Table of areas under the normal curve Appendix 4 Black and Scholes value of call option expressed as a percentage of the share price Appendix 5 Present value of $1 with a continuous discount rate, r, for T periods. Values of ert Appendix 6 Selections from ISO 4217 currency code list, a.k.a. SWIFT codes
Introduction to Banking, 2/e

Barbara Casu Claudia Girardone Philip Molyneux
Basic Approach
Provides a comprehensive introduction to theoretical and applied issues relating to the global banking industry. The text is organised into four main sections: Introduction to Banking; Central Banking and Bank Regulation; Issues in Bank Management and Comparative Banking Markets. Over the recent years there has been a lack of a comprehensive yet accessible textbook that deals with a broad spectrum of introductory banking issues. This text fills that gap. This book is suitable for all undergraduate students taking courses in banking. It is also great background reading for postgraduate students.
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION TO BANKING 1. Whats special about banks? 2. Types of banking 3. What do banks do? 4. International banking PART 2: CENTRAL BANKING AND BANK REGULATION 5. Theory of central banking 6. Central banking in practice 7. Bank regulation and supervision PART 3: ISSUES IN BANK MANAGEMENT 8. Banks b/s and income structure 9. Managing banks 10. Banking risks 11. Banking risks management PART 4: COMPARATIVE BANKING MARKETS 12. UK banking 13. European banking 14. Banking in emerging and transition economies 15. Banking in the US 16. Banking in Japan PART 5: CURRENT ISSUES IN BANKING 17. Banks and markets
109
18. Bank mergers and acquisitions 19. Bank competition and financial stability
Introduction to Risk Management and Insurance, 10/e

Mark S. Dorfman, University of North Carolina at Charlotte David Cather ISBN 10: 0131394126 ISBN 13: 9780131394124 576pp 2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For upper level undergraduate/graduate courses in Principles of Insurance and Risk Management. Drawing from the authors 35-plus years of teaching experience, this book introduces students to basic insurance concepts from the consumers point of view and equips them with the tools to make intelligent, informed insurance purchasing decisions.
Multinational Business Finance, 13/e

David K. Eiteman Arthur I. Stonehill Michael H. Moffettt
ISBN 10: 0273765531 ISBN 13: 9780273765530 2013
Basic Approach
For courses on International Finance. Authoritative, comprehensive coverage of contemporary international finance. Renowned for its authoritative, comprehensive coverage of contemporary international finance, this marketleading text trains the leaders of tomorrows multinational enterprises to recognize and capitalize on the unique characteristics of global markets. Because the job of a manager is to make financial decisions that increase firm value, the authors have embedded real-world mini-cases throughout to apply chapter concepts to the types of situations managers of multinational firms face. This is a Pearson Global Edition. The Pearson Editorial team worked closely with educators around the world to include content especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Bond Markets, Analysis and Strategies, 8/e

Frank J. Fabozzi ISBN 10: 0273766139 ISBN 13: 9780273766131 704pp 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For students enrolled in Fixed Income Securities Courses or Bond Markets Courses. An applied approach to understanding bond markets. Through its applied approach, Fabozzi's Bond Markets prepares students to analyze the bond market and manage bond portfolios without getting bogged down in the theory. This edition has been streamlined and updated with new content, and features overall enhancements based on previous editions reader and instructor feedback. This is a Pearson Global Edition. The Pearson Editorial team worked closely with educators around the world to include content especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
Introduction Pricing of Bonds Measuring Yield Bond Price Volatility Factors Affecting Bond Yields and the Term Structure of Interest Rates Treasury and Federal Agency Securities Corporate Debt Instruments Municipal Securities International Bonds Residential Mortgage Loans Agency Mortgage Pass-Through Securities Agency Collateralized Mortgage Obligations and Stripped Mortgage-Backed Securities Nonagency Residential Mortgage-Backed Securities
110
14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29.
Commercial Mortgage Loans and Commercial Mortgage-Backed Securities Asset-Backed Securities Interest Rate Models Analysis of Bonds with Embedded Options Analysis of Residential Mortgage-Backed Securities Analysis of Convertible Bonds Corporate Bond Credit Analysis Credit Risk Modeling Bond Portfolio Management Strategies Bond Portfolio Construction Liability-Driven Strategies Bond Performance Measurement and Evaluation Interest-Rate Futures Contracts Interest Rate Options Interest-Rate Swaps, Caps, and Floors Credit Default Swaps
Alexo Frino Zhian Chen Amelia Hill
Introduction to Corporate Finance, 5/e
ISBN 10: 1442542489 ISBN 13: 9781442542488 2012 Paper
The only Introductory Finance text with a keep it simple decision-making approach and unique industry perspective. The continuing instability in global financial markets highlights the critical importance of making informed decisions that maximise corporate value while minimising risk. Introduction to Corporate Finance takes a unique industry approach that gives students a concise and complete overview of the financial decisions that corporations make, and the actual tools and analysis they use to do so. This Australian text has been developed for one semester, undergraduate and postgraduate introductory finance courses. It is clear, concise and easy for students to follow, whilst still providing a rigorous and comprehensive introduction to the fundamentals of the finance industry. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
Preliminary concepts A review of financial mathematics Valuation of shares and bonds Capital budgeting: Basic techniques Capital budgeting: Further issues Risk and return Capital asset pricing model Company cost of capital Australian equities market The pricing efficiency of capital markets Dividend policy Capital structure policy Risk management Working Capital (NEW)
Financial Times Handbook of Financial Engineering: Tools and Techniques for Managing Derivatives, Options, Swaps and Risk, 3/e
Lawrence Galitz ISBN10: 027374240X ISBN13: 9780273742401 480pp 2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
Today's #1 guide to managing derivatives, options, swaps, and risk: how today's financial engineering tools work, and how to use them safely. Fully updated for today's instruments, market environments, and rules. Clearly explains how to create new financial products that reduce or eliminate risk and restructure financial exposure. Includes recommended tactics and techniques, all tested with recent data. Packed with up-to-date, fully-worked, practical examples.
Table of Contents
PART ONE TOOLS
111
1. Introduction 2. The Cash Markets 3. Forward Rates 4. FRAs 5. Financial Futures 6. Short-Term Interest Rate Futures 7. Bond and Stock Index Futures 8. Swaps 9. Pricing and Valuing Swaps 10. Options - From Basics to Greeks 11. Options - From Building Blocks to Portfolios 12. Interest Rate and Exotic Options 13. Credit Derivatives PART TWO TECHNIQUES 14. Applications for Financial Engineering 15. Managing Currency Risk 16. Managing Interest-Rate Risk using FRAs, Futures and Swaps 17. Managing Interest-Rate Risk - Using Options and Option-Based Instruments 18. Managing Equity Risk 19. Commodity Risk 20. Managing Credit Risk 21. Structured Finance
Fundamentals of Investing, 3/e

Lawrence Gitman Michael Joehnk Roger H. Juchau Donald G. Ross Sue Wright
ISBN 10: 1442532882 ISBN 13: 9781442532885 2012 Paper Bound with PIN
Basic Approach
What are the best investments for me?... What about risk?... Do I need professional help with my investments and can I afford it? Mastering the language, concepts, vehicles and strategies of investing can be challenging. Fundamentals of Investing shows how to make informed investment decisions, understand the risks inherent in investing and how to confidently shape a sound investment strategy. Fundamentals of Investing 3rd edition is completely updated and introduces core concepts and tools used by Australian investors, providing a firm understanding of the fundamental principles of investments. Focusing on both individual securities and portfolios, students learn how to develop, implement and monitor investment goals after considering the risk and return of both markets and investment vehicles. Fundamentals of Investing is suitable for introductory investments courses offered at university undergraduate or post-graduate level, as well as colleges, professional certification programs and continuing education courses.
Table of Contents
PART ONE: PREPARING TO INVEST 1. The Investment Environment 2. Markets and Transactions 3. Investment Information and Securities Transactions PART TWO: IMPORTANT CONCEPTUAL TOOLS 4. Return and Risk 5. The Time Value of Money 6. Modern Portfolio Concepts PART THREE: INVESTING IN SHARES 7. Shares 8. Analysing Shares 9. Share Valuation 10. Technical Analysis, Market Efficiency and Behavioural Finance PART FOUR: INVESTING IN FIXED-INCOME SECURITIES 11. Fixed-Income Securities 12. Bond Valuation PART FIVE: PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT 13. Managed Funds: Professionally Managed Portfolios 14. Managing Your Own Portfolio PART SIX: DERIVATIVE SECURITIES 15. Options: Puts and Calls Commodities and Financial Futures Appendix A Financial Tables A-1 Index I-1 Credits C-1 WEB CHAPTERS (at www.pearson.com.au/myfinancelab or www.pearson.com.au/9781442532885) 16. Investing in Preference Shares 525 17. Real Estate and Other Tangible Investments
112
Lawrence J. Gitman, San Diego State University Chad J. Zutter, University of Pittsburgh ISBN 10: 0273754289 ISBN 13: 9780273754282 944pp 2012 Paper
Principles of Managerial Finance, 13/e
Gitmans proven Learning Goal Systema hallmark feature of Principles of Managerial Financeweaves pedagogy into concepts and practice, providing students with a road map to guide them through the text and supplementary tools. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION TO MANAGERIAL FINANCE 1. The Role of Managerial Finance 2. The Financial Market Environment PART 2: FINANCIAL TOOLS 3. Financial Statements and Ratio Analysis 4. Cash Flow and Financial Planning 5. Time Value of Money PART 3: VALUATION OF SECURITIES 6. Interest Rates and Bond Valuation 7. Stock Valuation PART 4: RISK AND THE REQUIRED RATE OF RETURN 8. Risk and Return 9. The Cost of Capital PART 5: LONG-TERM INVESTMENT DECISIONS 10. Capital Budgeting Techniques 11. Capital Budgeting Cash Flows and Risk Refinements 12. Risk and Refinements in Capital Budgeting PART 6: LONG-TERM FINANCIAL DECISIONS 13. Leverage and Capital Structure 14. Payout Policy PART 7: SHORT-TERM FINANCIAL DECISIONS 15. Working Capital and Current Assets Management 16. Current Liabilities Management Part 8: Special Topics in Managerial Finance 17. Hybrid and Derivative Securities 18. Mergers, LBOs, Divestitures, and Business Failure 19. International Managerial Finance
Lawrence J. Gitman, San Diego State University Chad J. Zutter, University of Pittsburgh ISBN 10: 0132701065 ISBN 13: 9780132701068 704pp 2012 Paper
Principles of Managerial Finance, Brief, 6/e
For introduction to Managerial Finance courses. Guide students through the material with a proven learning goal system. Gitmans proven Learning Goal Systema hallmark feature of Principles of Managerial Finance, Brief weaves pedagogy into concepts and practice, providing students with a road map to guide them through the text and supplementary tools. The Brief edition provides an alternative solution for instructors who are especially pressed for time. Just as thorough and effective as Principles of Managerial Finance, the Brief edition introduces a streamlined version of the fundamental concepts, tools, techniques, and practices.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION TO MANAGERIAL FINANCE 1. The Role of Managerial Finance 2. The Financial Market Environment PART 2: FINANCIAL TOOLS 3. Financial Statements and Ratio Analysis 4. Cash Flow and Financial Planning 5. Time Value of Money PART 3: VALUATION OF SECURITIES 6. Interest Rates and Bond Valuation 7. Stock Valuation PART 4: RISK AND THE REQUIRED RATE OF RETURN 8. Risk and Return
113
9. The Cost of Capital PART 5: LONG-TERM INVESTMENT DECISIONS 10. Capital Budgeting Techniques 11. Capital Budgeting Cash Flows and Risk Refinements PART 6: LONG-TERM FINANCIAL DECISIONS 12. Leverage and Capital Structure 13. Payout Policy PART 7: SHORT-TERM FINANCIAL DECISIONS 14. Working Capital and Current Assets Management 15. Current Liabilities Management
Corporate Governance: Principles and Perspectives

Robert Goddard ISBN 10: 027375940X ISBN 13: 9780273759409 2013 Paper
Excel Modeling in Corporate Finance, 4/e

Craig W. Holden ISBN 10: 0205235220 ISBN 13: 9780205235223 240pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in corporate finance or financial management. An approach to building and estimating models through the use of Excel. Excel Modeling in Corporate Finance focuses on active learning by showing students how to build and estimate financial models using Excel. This approach shows the steps involved in building models, rather than solely providing students with completed spreadsheets. This edition contains updated information and data on the Excel model in Corporate Financial Planning, chapter on Estimating the Cost of Capital, and the Excel model used to estimate firm valuation.
Table of Contents
PART 1: TIME VALUE OF MONEY 1. Single Cash Flow 2. Annuity 3. NPV Using Constant Discounting 4. NPV Using General Discounting 5. Loan Amortization PART 2: VALUATION 6. Bond Pricing 7. Estimating the Cost of Capital 8. Stock Valuation 9. Firm and Project Valuation 10. The Yield Curve 11. US Yield Curve Dynamics PART 3: CAPITAL STRUCTURE 12. Capital Structure PART 4: CAPITAL BUDGETING 13. Project NPV 14. Cost-Reducing Project 15. Break-Even Analysis PART 5: FINANCIAL PLANNING 16. Corporate Financial Planning 17. Du Pont System Of Ratio Analysis 18. Life-Cycle Financial Planning PART 6: INTERNATIONAL CORPORATE FINANCE 19. International Parity PART 7: OPTIONS AND CORPORATE FINANCE 20. Binomial Option Pricing 21. Real Options 22. Black-Scholes Option Pricing 23. Debt And Equity Valuation PART 8: EXCEL SKILLS 24. Useful Excel Tricks
114
Excel Modeling in Investments, 4/e

Craig W. Holden ISBN 10: 0132497875 ISBN 13: 9780132497879 240pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in corporate finance or financial management. An approach to building and estimating models through the use of Excel. Excel Modeling in Investments focuses on active learning by showing students how to build and estimate financial models using Excel. This approach shows the steps involved in building models, rather than solely providing students with completed spreadsheets. This edition contains new content on investments. Table of Contents PART 1: BONDS/FIXED INCOME SECURITIES 1. Bond Pricing 2. The Yield Curve 3. Affine Yield Curve Models PART 2: PORTFOLIO MANAGEMENT 4. Portfolio Optimization 5. Constrained Portfolio Optimization 6. Portfolio Diversification Lowers Risk PART 3: SECURITY ANALYSIS 7. Stock Valuation 8. DuPont System Of Ratio Analysis PART 4: STOCKS 9. Asset Pricing 10. Market Microstructure 11. Life-Cycle Financial Planning PART 5: INTERNATIONAL INVESTMENTS 12. International Parity 13. Swaps PART 6: OPTIONS, FUTURES, AND OTHER DERIVATIVES 14. Option Payoffs and Profits 15. Option Trading Strategies 16. Put-Call Parity 17. Binomial Option Pricing 18. Black-Scholes Option Pricing 19. Futures 20. Pricing By Simulation CONTENTS ON CD 21. Corporate Bonds PART 7: EXCEL SKILLS 22. Useful Excel Tricks
John C. Hull
Options, Futures, and Other Derivatives and DerivaGem CD Package, 8/e
ISBN 10: 0273759078 ISBN 13: 9780273759072 888pp 2012 Paper Bound w/CDROM
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in derivatives, options and futures, financial engineering, financial mathematics, and risk management. Bridge the gap between theory and practice. Designed to bridge the gap between theory and practice, this introductory text on the futures and options markets is ideal for those with a limited background in mathematics. The eighth edition has been updated and improvedfeaturing a new chapter on securitization and the credit crisis, and increased discussion on the way commodity prices are modeled and commodity derivatives valued. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Introduction Mechanics of Futures Markets Hedging Strategies Using Futures Interest Rates Determination of Forward and Futures Prices Interest Rate Futures Swaps
115
8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36.
Securitization and the Credit Crisis of 2007 Mechanics of Options Markets Properties of Stock Options Trading Strategies Involving Options Binomial Trees Wiener Processes and Itos Lemma The Black-Scholes-Merton Model Employee Stock Options Options on Stock Indices and Currencies Options on Futures Greek Letters Volatility Smiles Basic Numerical Procedures Value at Risk Estimating Volatilities and Correlations Credit Risk Credit Derivatives Exotic Options More on Models and Numerical Procedures Martingales and Measures Interest Rate Derivatives: The Standard Market Models Convexity, Timing, and Quanto Adjustments Interest Rate Derivatives: Models of the Short Rate Interest Rate Derivatives: HJM and LMM Swaps Revisited Energy and Commodit Derivatives Real Options Derivatives Mishaps and What We Can Learn from Them Derivatives markets in developing countries
Personal Finance: Turning Money into Wealth, 6/e

Arthur J. Keown, Virginia Polytechnic Instit. and State University ISBN 10: 0132941287 ISBN 13: 9780132941280 648pp 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For introductory Personal Finance course. Through the presentation of the Ten Fundamental Principles of Personal Finance, this text empowers students with the knowledge they need to successfully make and carry out a plan for their own financial future.
Table of Contents
PART 1: FINANCIAL PLANNING 1. The Financial Planning Process 2. Measuring Your Financial Health and Making a Plan 3. Understanding and Appreciating the Time Value of Money 4. Tax Planning and Strategies PART 2: MANAGING YOUR MONEY 5. Cash or Liquid Asset Management 6. Using Credit Cards: The Role of Open Credit 7. Using Consumer Loans: The Role of Planned Borrowing 8. The Home and Automobile Decision PART 3: PROTECTING YOURSELF WITH INSURANCE 9. Life and Health Insurance 10. Property and Liability Insurance PART 4: MANAGING YOUR INVESTMENTS 11. Investment Basics 12. Securities Markets 13. Investing in Stocks 14. Investing in Bonds and Other Alternatives 15. Mutual Funds: An Easy Way to Diversify PART 5: LIFE CYCLE ISSUES 16. Retirement Planning 17. Estate Planning: Saving Your Heirs Money and Headaches
116
Robert L. McDonald, Northwestern University ISBN 10: 0321543084 ISBN 13: 9780321543080 896pp 2013 Cloth
Derivatives Markets, 3/e
Basic Approach
To be financially literate in todays market, business students must have a solid understanding of derivatives concepts and instruments and the uses of those instruments in corporations. This edition has an accessible mathematical presentation, and more importantly, helps students gain intuition by linking theories and concepts together with an engaging narrative that emphasizes the core economic principles underlying the pricing and uses of derivatives.
Business Finance: Theory and Practice, 9/e

Eddie McLaney ISBN 10: 0273750453 ISBN 13: 9780273750451 536pp 2011 Paper
Taking a user-friendly approach, McLaney's Business Finance explores the type of investments a business should make and how they should be financed. The text successfully blends the theoretical, analytical and practical aspects of finance and investments. The new edition has a real world flavour, exploring the theories surrounding financial decision making and relating these theories to what happens in the real business world.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
PART 1: THE BUSINESS FINANCE ENVIRONMENT 1. Introduction 2. A framework for financial decision making 3. Financial (accounting) statements and their interpretation PART 2: INVESTMENT DECISIONS 4. Investment appraisal methods 5. Practical aspects of investment appraisal 6. Risk in investment appraisal 7. Portfolio theory and its relevance to real investment decisions PART 3: FINANCING DECISIONS 8. Sources of long-term finance 9. The secondary capital market (the stock exchange) and its efficiency 10. Cost of capital estimations and the discount rate 11. Gearing, the cost of capital and shareholders wealth 12. The dividend decision PART 4: INTEGRATED DECISIONS 13. Management of working capital 14. Corporate restructuring (including takeovers and divestments) 15. International aspects of business finance 16. Small businesses
Financial Markets and Institutions, 7/e

Frederic S. Mishkin Stanley Eakins
Basic Approach
In Financial Markets and Institutions, best-selling authors Mishkin and Eakins provide a practical introduction to prepare students for todays changing landscape of financial markets and institutions. A unifying framework uses a few core principles to organize students thinking then examines the models as real-world scenarios from a practitioners perspective. By analysing these applications, students develop the critical-thinking and problemsolving skills necessary to respond to challenging situations in their future careers. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART ONE: INTRODUCTION 1. Why Study Financial Markets and Institutions?
117
2. Overview of the Financial System PART TWO: FUNDAMENTALS OF FINANCIAL MARKETS 3. What Do Interest Rates Mean and What Is Their Role in Valuation? 4. Why Do Interest Rates Change? 5. How Do Risk and Term Structure Affect Interest Rates? 6. Are Financial Markets Efficient? PART THREE: FUNDAMENTALS OF FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS 7. Why Do Financial Institutions Exist? 8. Why Do Financial Crises Occur and Why Are They So Damaging to the Economy? PART FOUR: CENTRAL BANKING AND THE CONDUCT OF MONETARY POLICY 9. Central Banks: A Global Perspective 10. Conduct of Monetary Policy: Tools, Goals, Strategy, and Tactics PART FIVE: FINANCIAL MARKETS 11. The Money Markets 12. The Bond Market 13. The Stock Market 14. The Mortgage Markets 15. The Foreign Exchange Market 16. The International Financial System PART SIX: THE FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS INDUSTRY 17. Banking and the Management of Financial Institutions 18. Financial Regulation 19. Banking Industry: Structure and Competition 20. The Mutual Fund Industry Insurance Companies and Pension Funds 21. Insurance Companies and Pension Funds 22. Investment Banks, Security Brokers and Dealers, and Venture Capital Firms
Fundamentals of Multinational Finance, 4/e
Michael H. Moffett, Thunderbird The Garvin School of International Management Arthur I. Stonehill, University of Hawaii at Manoa David K. Eiteman, University of California, Los Angeles ISBN 10: 0132829916 ISBN 13: 9780132829915 544pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate International Financial Management, International Business Finance, or International Finance courses. A focused, streamlined approach to creating a global financial management strategy. Tomorrows business leaders will be expected to comprehend global markets and lead their organizations through a constantly changing global environment. By grounding concepts in the context of illuminating case studies and real-world examples, Fundamentals of Multinational Finance familiarizes students with the fundamental concepts and tools necessary to implement an effective global financial management strategy. This edition includes the many new financial management challenges faced by todays business leaderswhile still providing students with a streamlined text that gets straight to the important concepts.
Table of Contents
PART I: GLOBAL FINANCIAL ENVIRONMENT 1. Globalization and the Multinational Enterprise 2. Financial Goals and Corporate Governance 3. The International Monetary System 4. The Balance of Payments 5. Current Multinational Financial Challenges Part II: FOREIGN EXCHANGE THEORY AND MARKETS 6. The Foreign Exchange Market 7. International Parity Conditions 8. Foreign Currency Derivatives and Swaps 9. Foreign Exchange Rate Determination and Forecasting PART III: FOREIGN EXCHANGE EXPOSURE 10. Transaction and Translation Exposure 11. Operating Exposure PART IV: FINANCING THE GLOBAL FIRM 12. Global Cost and Availability of Capital 13. Sourcing Equity and Debt PART V: FOREIGN INVESTMENT DECISIONS 14. International Portfolio Theory and Diversification 15. Foreign Direct Investment and Political Risk 16. Multinational Capital Budgeting PART VI: MANAGING MULTINATIONAL OPERATIONS 17. Multinational Tax Management 18. Working Capital Management 19. International Trade Finance
118
Financial Management, 6/e

J. William Petty Sheridan Titman Arthur J. Keown Peter Martin John D. Martin Michael Burrow Hoa Nguyen
ISBN 10: 1442539178 ISBN 13: 9781442539174 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
The sixth edition of Financial Management provides students with an overview of financial management suited to the first course in finance. The focus of the text is on the big picture, providing an introduction to financial decision making grounded in current financial theory and the current state of world economic conditions. Attention is paid to both valuation and capital markets, as well as their influence on corporate financial decisions. The 10 basic principles of finance are introduced in the first chapter and woven throughout the text, to give students a solid foundation from which to build their knowledge of finance. The goal of this text is to go beyond teaching the tools of a discipline or a trade and help students gain a complete understanding of the subject. This will give them the ability to apply what they have learnt to new and as yet unforeseen problemsin short, to educate students in finance.
Table of Contents
PART 1: SCOPE AND ENVIRONMENT OF FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT 1. The role of financial management 2. The tax environment 3. The financial markets 4. The time value of money PART 2: FINANCIAL PLANNING AND ANALYSIS AND WORKING-CAPITAL MANAGEMENT 5. Evaluating a firms financial performance 6. Financial forecasting, planning and budgeting 7. Working-capital management and short-term financing 8. Current asset management PART 3: VALUATION AND MANAGEMENT OF LONG-TERM INVESTMENT 9. Risk and rates of return 10. Valuation of bonds and shares 11. Capital budgeting: concepts and methods 12. Capital budgeting: cash-flow identification and project ranking conflicts 13. Risk in capital budgeting 14. Cost of capital PART 4: CAPITAL-STRUCTURE AND DIVIDEND POLICY 15. Analysis and impact of leverage 16. Capital-structure policy 17. Dividend policy and internal financing PART 5: LONG-TERM FINANCING 18. Long-term debt finance 19. Shares and convertible securities PART 6: SPECIAL TOPICS IN FINANCE 20. International business finance 21. Corporate risk management 22. Mergers and acquisitions (available on this page)
Corporate Finance and Investment: Decision and Strategies, 7/e

Richard Pike Bill Neale Philip Linsley
Basic Approach
Corporate Finance and Investments, now in its seventh edition, is a popular and well-regarded text for students of corporate finance. The text takes a practical approach, focusing on the strategic issues of finance in a business setting. With clear and accessible language and an international perspective, the seventh edition will provide students with both essential knowledge of corporate finance and the tools to apply it.
Table of Contents
PART I: A FRAMEWORK FOR FINANCIAL DECISIONS 1. An overview of financial management 2. The financial environment 3. Present values, and bond and share valuation PART II: INVESTMENT DECISIONS AND STRATEGIES 4. Investment appraisal methods 5. Project appraisal applications
119
6. Investment strategy and process PART III: VALUE, RISK AND THE REQUIRED RETURN 7. Analysing investment risk 8. Relationships between investments: portfolio theory 9. Setting the risk premium: the Capital Asset Pricing Model 10. The required rate of return on investment 11. Enterprise value and equity value 12. Identifying and rating options PART IV: SHORT-TERM FINANCING AND POLICIES 13. Risk and treasury management 14. Short-term asset management 15. Short- and medium-term finance PART V: STRATEGIC FINANCIAL DECISIONS 16. Long-term finance 17. Returning value to shareholders: the divident decision 18. Capital structure and the required return 19. Does capital structure really matter? 20. Acquisitions and restructuring PART VI: INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT 21. Managing currency risk 22. Foreign investment decision 23. Key issues in modern finance: a review Appendix A Solutions to self-assessment activities Appendix B Solutions to selected questions Appendix C Present value interest factor (PVIF) Appendix D Present value interest factor for an annuity (PVIFA)
Modern Financial and Investment Planning, 2/e

Tom Valentine Callum Scott
ISBN 10: 144254354X ISBN 13: 9781442543546 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
The most rigorous Australian financial and investment planning resource on the market. Modern Financial and Investment Planning 2nd edition equips university students with the theory, regulations and policies required to satisfy the strict educational requirements imposed by industry. This includes requirements outlined within the Financial Services Act and ASIC requirements for individual specialist knowledge areas. It also covers the requirements for a Diploma of Financial Services (Financial Planning). Finance and investment theories are comprehensively covered, including investment risk, asset valuation, risk profiling, managed fund performance and portfolio construction and an exciting new chapter on real-estate investing. A wealth of real-life case studies at the beginning and end of each chapter illustrate theories in action and encourage students to analyse the concepts presented therein. This completely updated second edition reflects current legislation and covers recent developments in the finance industry such as changes to superannuation and the impact of the Global Financial Crisis.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
The Financial Planning Profession Saving, Financial Markets and Financial Institutions Interest Rates and Debt Securities Shares and Share Markets Wealth Hazards Investing Directly in Property: Bricks and Mortar Managed Funds Superannuation and retirement planning Social security aspects of financial planning Estate planning and asset protection Taxation issues for investors Principles of Investment: risk vs return Derivatives in investment management A financial plan
120
General Business
Foundations of Business Thought
Calvin Boardman Alan N. Sandomir Harris Sondak
Business in Action, 6/e
Courtland L. Bovee, Professor of Business Communication, C. Allen Paul Distinguished Chair, Grossmont College John V. Thill, Communication Specialists of America ISBN 10: 0132828782 ISBN 13: 9780132828789 576pp 2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For courses in Introduction to Business. An introduction to business text can be complete without being complex and overwhelmingand this text proves it! Business in Action is uniquely positioned to help todays students become tomorrows focused, highly productive business professionals. It is the only introduction to business text that emphasizes efficient, focused, objectivesdriven learning in every aspect.
Communication in Business: Strategies and Skills, 5/e

Judith Dwyer ISBN 10: 1442548487 ISBN 13: 9781442548480 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
Communication in Business: Strategies and Skills is a comprehensive how-to guide that will help readers understand communication principles and apply them to the business environment. The goal of this book is to provide a global communication tool that both expands our knowledge of what we can do to interact effectively and provide us with working models to practise and refine how well we do it. In this fourth edition Judith Dwyer continues to combine business communication theory and practice in a text that is a valuable resource for both academic study and workplace reference.
Business Essentials, 9/e

Ronald J. Ebert Ricky W. Griffin
Basic Approach
For Introduction to Business Courses. Business Essentials continues to provide a solid foundation of the essential topics that first-semester business students need to understand. Its focus on practical skills, knowledge of the basics and important developments in business makes for a brief book, but a rich experience. The recent events in domestic and global economies are presenting unprecedented challenges, excitement, and disappointments for businessand a need for a change in the Introduction to Business course and text. This text captures the widespread significance of these developments and presents their implications on businesses today.
Table of Contents
PART 1: THE CONTEMPORARY BUSINESS WORLD 1. The U.S. Business Environment 2. Business Ethics and Social Responsibility 3. Entrepreneurship, New Ventures, and Business Ownership 4. The Global Context of Business
121
PART 2: THE BUSINESS OF MANAGING 5. Business Management 6. Organizing the Business 7. Operations Management and Quality PART 3: PEOPLE IN ORGANIZATIONS 8. Employee Behavior and Motivation 9. Leadership and Decision Making 10. Human Resource Management and Labor Relations PART 4: PRINCIPLES OF MARKETING 11. Marketing Processes and Consumer Behavior 12. Pricing, Distributing, and Promoting Products PART 5: MANAGING INFORMATION 13. Information Technology for Business 14. The Role of Accountants and Accounting Information PART 6: FINANCIAL ISSUES 15. Money and Banking 16. Managing Finances
Impact: A Guide to Business Communication, Canadian Edition, 8/e

Margot Northey, Queen's University, School of Business Joan McKibbin, Far Barn Publishing ISBN 10: 013257439X ISBN 13: 9780132574396 256pp 2012 Kit/Package/ShrinkWrap
Basic Approach
A concise, practical guide to writing effectively in the world of business. This eighth edition of Impact: A Guide to Business Communication continues to offer a direct, concrete approach and an opportunity for hands-on application of effective writing strategies. Now supported by MyCanadianBusCommLab, which gives access to an eText, writing samples, interactive document makeover exercises, and videos of real-life workplace communication. Impact will help readers build confidence and competence to speak in public, create and give oral presentations, handle a job interview, or run a meeting. It offers advice on writing, including letters, memos, and reports and specific strategies for attacking common business-writing problems. Its practical approach covers tips for collaboration and teamwork and contains explanations and exercises to give its users better results.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
Thinking About Communication Strategies in Planning for Writing and Speaking Writing with Impact Routine and Good-News Correspondence Bad-News Correspondence Persuasive Writing Informal Reports Formal Reports and Proposals Presentations and Meetings Job Search
Better Business, 2/e
Michael R. Solomon, Contributing Editor Mary Anne S. Poatsy, Montgomery County Community College Kendall Martin ISBN 10: 0132599058 ISBN 13: 9780132599054 640pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For Introduction to Business courses. Better Businessa better experience for students and instructors! Better Business offers the business content students need, but in a better way. By presenting the material in a stimulating Q&A format, Better Business encourages students to come to class prepared to have better conversations and a truly engaging classroom experience. The second edition features new and updated material, including coverage of social media.
Table of Contents
PART 1: LOOKING AT THE BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT 1. Business Basics 2. Economics and Banking 3. Ethics in Business 4. Business in a Global Economy Mini 1: Special Issues in Online Business PART 2: STARTING AND STRUCTURING A BUSINESS
122
5. Small Business and the Entrepreneur 6. Forms of Business Ownership Mini 2: Constructing an Effective Business Plan PART 3: MANAGING A BUSINESS AND EMPLOYEES 7. Business Management and Organization 8. Motivation, Leadership, and Teamwork 9. Human Resource Management 10. Business Technology 11. Production and Operations Management Mini 3: Business Communications PART 4: PRINCIPLES OF MARKETING 12. Marketing and Consumer Behavior 13. Product Development and Pricing Strategies 14. Promotion and Distribution Mini 4: Finding a Job PART 5: PRINCIPLES OF FINANCE 15. Financing and Tracking Business Operations 16. Securities and Investments Mini 5: Personal Finance
Business: A Practical Introduction

Brian K. Williams Stacey C. Sawyer Susan Berston
For Introduction to Business courses. No two Introduction to Business courses are completely aliketheyre as different and unique as the educational professionals teaching them. And now, in order to help you create a course based on your personal teaching interests, the new textbook Business: A Practical Introduction offers a way to make the choice all yours. With just a few clicks, the solid Introduction to Business fundamentals of this course can be enhanced to reflect your personal interests. So regardless of whether your interests lie in sustainability or ethics, business skills or social media and technology, you can have a textbook and media solution suited to you and your course needs.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
PART 1: TODAYS BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT 1. Starting Out 2. Ethics & Social Responsibility 3. Economics 4. Globalization PART 2: STARTING & GROWING A SUCCESSFUL BUSINESS 5. Forms of Ownership 6. The Entrepreneurial Spirit PART 3: MANAGEMENT: ACHIEVING SUPERIOR RESULTS IN THE WORKPLACE 7. Management & Leadership 8. The Effective Organization 9. Operations Management 10. Motivating Employees 11. Human Resource Management PART 4: MARKETING 12. Marketing 13. Product & Pricing Strategies 14. Distribution & Promotion Strategies PART 5: FINANCIAL RESOURCES 15. Accounting & Finance 16. Financial Management 17. Securities Markets
123
Business Communication
Business Communication Essentials, 5/e
Courtland L. Bovee, Professor of Business Communication, C. Allen Paul Distinguished Chair, Grossmont College John V. Thill, Communication Specialists of America ISBN 10: 0132564807 ISBN 13: 9780132564809 528pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For Business Communication courses. Prepare students for the demands theyll face on the job. Only Bove/Thill texts thoroughly address the new-media skills that employees are expected to have in todays business environment. Business Communication Essentials presents these technologies in the context of proven communication strategies and essential business English skills. The fifth edition includes updated and new content on social media and technology.
Table of Contents
PART 1: BUSINESS COMMUNICATION FOUNDATIONS 1. Understanding Business Communication in Todays Workplace 2. Mastering Team Skills and Interpersonal Communication PART 2: THE THREE-STEP WRITING PROCESS 3. Planning Business Messages 4. Writing Business Messages 5. Completing Business Messages PART 3: BRIEF BUSINESS MESSAGES 6. Crafting Messages for Electronic Media 7. Writing Routine and Positive Messages 8. Writing Negative Messages 9. Writing Persuasive Messages PART 4: LONGER BUSINESS MESSAGES 10. Understanding and Planning Reports and Proposals 11. Writing and Completing Reports and Proposals 12. Developing Oral and Online Presentations PART 5: EMPLOYMENT MESSAGES AND JOB INTERVIEWS 13. Building Careers and Writing Rsums 14. Applying and Interviewing for Employment Appendix A: Format and Layout of Business Documents Appendix B: Documentation of Report Sources Appendix C: Correction Symbols
Business Communication Today, 11/e

Courtland Bovee John V. Thill
Basic Approach
For Business Communication courses in any curriculum. Real-world training for the business world of today and tomorrow. The fields leading text for more than two decades, Business Communication Today continues to provide the cutting-edge coverage that students can count on to prepare them for real business practice. Other textbooks release new editions that dont reflect their copyright year, training students in practices from last decade Bove/Thill provides real-world training for the business world of today and tomorrow. This edition includes up-to-date coverage of the social communication model thats redefining business communication and reshaping the relationships between companies and their stakeholders. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART 1: Understanding the Foundations of Business Communication 1. Achieving Success through Effective Business Communication 2. Mastering Interpersonal Communication 3. Communicating in a World of Diversity PART 2: Applying the Three-Step Writing Process 4. Planning Business Messages 5. Writing Business Messages 6. Completing Business Messages PART 3: Crafting Brief Messages 7. Crafting Messages for Electronic Media
124
8. Writing Routine and Positive Messages 9. Writing Negative Messages 10. Writing Persuasive Messages PART 4: Supporting Messages with Quality Information 11. Finding, Evaluating, and Processing Information 12. Designing Visual Communication PART 5: Planning, Writing, and Completing Reports and Proposals 13. Planning Reports and Proposals 14. Writing Reports and Proposals 15. Completing Reports and Proposals PART 6: Designing and Delivering Oral and Online Presentations 16. Developing Oral and Online Presentations 17. Enhancing Presentations with Slides and Other Visuals PART 7: Writing Employment Messages and Interviewing for Job 18. Building Careers and Writing Rsums 19. Applying and Interviewing for Employment Appendix A: Format and Layout of Business Documents Appendix B: Documentation of Report Source Appendix C: Correction Symbols
Keys to Business Communication

Carol Carter ISBN 10: 0132598973 ISBN 13: 9780132598972 608pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For Business Communication courses. Nurturing business communication skills through a personal and practical approach. Clear and effective communication skills are necessary in every facet of students livespersonal, academic, and professional. To help create well-rounded, successful communicators Keys to Business Communication provides the information students need so they can learn how to express themselves with confidence, clarity, and ease.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.
Building Your Communication Skills Learning Teamwork and Leadership Skills in a Competitive World Connecting Across Cultures and Generations Preparing to Write Writing, Revising, and Editing Messages Designing, Proofreading, and Delivering Messages Positive Everyday Messages: Letters, Memos, and Electronic Communications Negative (Bad News) Messages Persuasive Messages: Using the Right Words at the Right Time Reports and Proposals Business Presentations Using Effective Visual Aids in Presentations The Job Search The Tools for Finding a Job: Cover Letter, Resume, and Portfolio Interviewing and Closing the Deal Writing Your Success Story: Becoming a World-Class Employee
Guide to Managerial Communication, 9/e

Mary M. Munter, Series Editor ISBN 10: 0132719878 ISBN 13: 9780132719872 204pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and MBA courses in Management Communication, Writing, and Oral Presentations. Also a useful reference for Executive Seminars/Workshops. A brief, professional, reader-friendly guide to improving managerial communication. Guide to Managerial Communication is a clear, concise, practical text for cultivating effective written and oral communication in a managerial, business, government, or professional context. The ninth edition has been updated based on user feedback while still maintaining the brevity, easy-to-follow organization, and professional orientation of previous editions.
Table of Contents
I. II.
Communication Strategy Writing: Composing Efficiently
125
III. Writing: Macro Issues IV. Writing: Micro Issues V. Speaking: Verbal Structure VI. Speaking: Visual Aids VII. Speaking: Nonverbal Skills Appendix A: Inclusive Language Appendix B: Grammar and Usage Appendix C: Punctuation
Guide to PowerPoint Version 2010

Mary M. Munter, Series Editor David Paradi, thinkoutsidetheslide.com ISBN 10: 0132568888 ISBN 13: 9780132568883 204pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For anyone who has to make presentations. A brief, professional, reader-friendly guide to creating effective presentations. Guide to PowerPoint, Version 2010, with its clear, concise, and practical information, helps readers achieve results with PowerPoint presentations.
Table of Contents
PART I. PRESENTATION STRATEGY 1. From Strategy to Structure 2. From Structure to Slides PART II. SLIDE MASTER DESIGN 3. Slide Master Colors 4. Slide Master Fonts 5. Other Design Elements PART III. INDIVIDUAL SLIDES 6. Charts to Show How Much 7. Concept Diagrams to Show How 8. Text Slides to Show Why or How 9. Other Slide Enhancements PART IV. PRESENTATION DELIVERY 10. Nonverbal Delivery 11. PowerPoint Delivery
Management Communication, 5/e

James S. O'Rourke, University of Notre Dame
Basic Approach
For managerial communication courses. Strategic communication methods that support the development of ethical and effective managers at all levels of business. For professors who know students need effective communication skills to be successful in the business world, this text provides a strategic, yet practical view of managerial communication.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
Management Communication in Transition Communication and Strategy Communication Ethics Speaking Writing Persuasion Technology Listening and Feedback Nonverbal Communication Intercultural Communication Managing Conflict Business Meetings That Work Dealing with the News Media
126
Business Communication: Polishing Your Professional Presence

Barbara Shwom Lisa Gueldenzoph Snyder ISBN 10: 0132599031 ISBN 13: 9780132599030 600pp 2012 Paper
For courses in Business Communication. Polishing your professional presence. Students career success depends on their ability to be professional, adaptable, and strategic about their communication choices. By providing concise, student-centered information on how to develop a strong foundation in business communication, Business Communication: Polishing Your Professional Presence helps students enhance their professional and personal success.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
PART 1: UNDERSTANDING THE FOUNDATIONS OF BUSINESS COMMUNICATION 1. Becoming a Successful Business Communicator 2. Working with Others: Interpersonal, Intercultural, and Team Communication 3. Managing the Communication Process PART 2: DELIVERING EFFECTIVE MESSAGES 4. Communicating Routine Messages and Building Goodwill 5. Communicating Persuasive Messages 6. Communicating Negative Messages PART 3: PROPOSING AND REPORTING 7. Finding and Evaluating Business Information 8. Preparing Persuasive Proposals 9. Reporting Business Information 10. Delivering Business Presentations PART 4: PERSUADING AN EMPLOYER TO HIRE YOU 11. Creating Cover Letters and Resumes 12. Getting the Job: Interviewing Skills Appendix: Grammar Handbook
Excellence in Businees Communication, 10/e

John V. Thill Courtland L. Bovee
Basic Approach
For undergraduate business communication courses. Learn Business Communication Skills by Example. Students need to have excellent, effective, and practical business communication skills in order to succeed in todays business world. Excellence in Business Communication delivers an abundance of the most realistic model documents and tools, helping students learn business communication skills by example. The tenth edition is a more efficient, rigorously revised textbook that maintains solid coverage of fundamentals while focusing on todays social media revolution and the impact it will have on students future careers.
Table of Contents
PART 1: UNDERSTANDING THE FOUNDATIONS OF BUSINESS COMMUNICATION 1. Achieving Success Through Effective Business Communication 2. Mastering Team and Interpersonal Skills 3. Communicating in a World of Diversity PART 2: APPLYING THE THREE-STEP WRITING PROCESS 4. Planning Business Messages 5. Writing Business Messages 6. Completing Business Messages PART 3: CRAFTING BRIEF MESSAGES 7. Crafting Messages for Electronic Media 8. Writing Routine and Positive Business Messages 9. Writing Negative Messages 10. Writing Persuasive Messages PART 4: PREPARING REPORTS AND ORAL PRESENTATIONS 11. Planning Reports and Proposals 12. Writing Reports and Proposals 13. Completing Reports and Proposals 14. Developing Oral Presentations PART 5: WRITING EMPLOYMENT MESSAGES AND INTERVIEWING FOR JOBS 15. Building Careers and Writing Rsums 16. Applying and Interviewing for Employment
127
Management
Performance Management, 3/e
Herman Aguinis ISBN 10: 0132974355 ISBN 13: 9780132974356 336pp 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Performance Appraisal, Compensation Management, and Training and Development. Discover where the real success in business can be found. What makes some businesses more successful than others? The answer: people. Organizations with motivated, talented employees that offer outstanding customer service are more likely to pull ahead of the competition. Performance Management is the first text to emphasize this key competitive advantage, showing students that success in todays globalized business world can be found, not in technology and products, but in an organizations people. The third edition includes updated and current information, and features over forty new cases.
Table of Contents
PART I: STRATEGIC AND GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS 1. Performance Management and Reward Systems in Context 2. Performance Management Process 3. Performance Management and Strategic Planning PART II: SYSTEM IMPLEMENTATION 4. Defining Performance and Choosing a Measurement Approach 5. Measuring Results and Behaviors 6. Gathering Performance Information 7. Implementing a Performance Management System PART III: EMPLOYEE DEVELOPMENT 8. Performance Management and Employee Development 9. Performance Management Skills PART IV: REWARD SYSTEMS, LEGAL ISSUES, AND TEAM PERFORM-ANCE MANAGEMENT 10. Reward Systems and Legal Issues 11. Managing Team Performance
Lydia E. Anderson, Fresno City College Sandra B. Bolt, Fresno City College ISBN 10: 0132624664 ISBN 13: 9780132624664 352pp 2013 Cloth
Professionalism: Skills for Workplace Success, 3/e
Basic Approach
For courses in Career/Workforce Readiness, Capstone and Internship/Externship related coursework, Human Relations, Professional and Career Development and Resume, Job Search and Interview Skills. Professionalism: Skills for Workplace Success extends beyond a typical resume/job search text to seamlessly emphasize the relationship between resume development, job search skills, and human relations. Developed with input from industry leaders, it addresses topics students need to know when transitioning from campus to the workplace using case examples, activities, exercises, online video, and an interactive website. Updated to reflect the latest in technology tools and the business climate, this third edition sets the standard by skillfully merging self-management topics, workplace basics, relationships and career planning tools.
Table of Contents
MODULE I: SELF-MANAGEMENT 1. Attitude, Personality, Goal Setting and Life Management 2. Personal Financial Management 3. Time and Stress Management/Organization Skills MODULE 2: WORKPLACE BASICS 4. Etiquette/Dress 5. Ethics, Politics, and Diversity 6. Accountability and Workplace Relationships 7. Quality Organizations and Service 8. Human Resource Policies and Resources MODULE 3: RELATIONSHIPS 9. Communication 10. Electronic Communications 11. Motivation, Leadership and Teams 12. Conflict and Negotiation MODULE 4: CAREER PLANNING TOOLS 13. Job Search Skills
128
14. Resum Package 15. Interview Techniques 16. Career Changes
The Psychology of People in Organisations

Melanie Ashleigh Angela Mansi
Basic Approach
A genuinely student-friendly and engaging introduction to work psychology and organisational behaviour. Packed with real life examples and ethical dilemmas to start debate and get students thinking critically, The Psychology of People in Organisations offers authoritative content presented in a refreshingly accessible way.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
What is Work Psychology? Ethical Issues and the Nature of Research in Organisations Individual Differences and Emotions at Work Personality at Work and the Dark Side of Personality WorkLife Balance: Well-Being at Work and the Tyranny of Technology Selection and Assessment Perception, Attitudes and Discrimination Motivation and Learning at Work Working in Teams and Groups Leadership Organisational Change and Development
Strategic Management and Competitive Advantage, 4/e

Jay B. Barney William S. Hesterly
For courses in strategy and strategic management. Core strategic management concepts without the excess. Just the essentialsStrategic Management and Competitive Advantage strips out excess by only presenting material that answers the question: does this concept help students analyze cases and real business situations? This carefully crafted approach provides students with all the tools necessary for strategic analysis. The fourth edition features several new and updated cases. Also Available: Strategic Management and Competitive Advantage: Concepts, 4/e ISBN 10: 0132560445 ISBN 13: 9780132560443 408pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
PART 1: THE TOOLS OF STRATEGIC ANALYSIS 1. What Is Strategy and the Strategic Management Process? 2. Evaluating a Firms External Environment 3. Evaluating a Firms Internal Capabilities End-of-Part 1 Cases PART 2: BUSINESS-LEVEL STRATEGIES 4. Cost Leadership 5. Product Differentiation End-of-Part 2 Cases PART 3: CORPORATE STRATEGIES 6. Vertical Integration 7. Corporate Diversification 8. Organizing to Implement Corporate Diversification 9. Strategic Alliances 10. Mergers and Acquisitions 11. International Strategies End-of-Part 3 Cases
129
Bruce R. Barringer Duane Ireland
Entrepreneurship: Successfully Launching New Ventures, 4/e
Basic Approach
For undergraduate courses in Entrepreneurship and New Venture Creation. Inspirational and informativeintroduce students to the process of entrepreneurial success. There has never been a more exciting and opportunistic time to study entrepreneurship. Around the world, the current economic crisis is not just negatively affecting business; this crisis is also generating business opportunities for the creative and daring. Show your class how to take advantage with Entrepreneurship: Successfully Launching New Venturesthe text that introduces students to the process of entrepreneurial success and shows them how to be effective every step of the way.
Table of Contents
PART 1: DECISION TO BECOME AN ENTREPRENEUR 1. Introduction to Entrepreneurship PART 2: DEVELOPING SUCCESSFUL BUSINESS IDEAS 2. Recognizing Opportunities and Generating Ideas 3. Feasibility Analysis 4. Writing a Business Plan 5. Industry and Competitor Analysis 6. Developing an Effective Business Model PART 3: MOVING FROM AN IDEA TO AN ENTREPRENEURIAL FIRM 7. Preparing the Proper Ethical and Legal Foundation 8. Assessing a New Ventures Financial Strength and Viability 9. Building a New-Venture Team 10. Getting Financing or Funding PART 4: MANAGING AND GROWING AN ENTREPRENEURIAL FIRM 11. Unique Marketing Issues 12. The Importance of Intellectual Property 13. Preparing for and Evaluating the Challenges of Growth 14. Strategies for Firm Growth 15. Franchising
Legal and Taxation Aspects of Your Small Business (Revised), 3/e

Ian Birt ISBN 10: 1442552654 ISBN 13: 9781442552654 2011 Paper
Written from a small business operators viewpoint, Ian Birts Small Business Success series examines the challenges faced when establishing, operating and marketing a small business, and provides practical tips and strategies to make it a success. Ian Birts student friendly approach, clear explanations and useful underpinning knowledge makes complex business issues easy to understand. Legal and Taxation Aspects of Your Small Business (Revised) summaries, without jargon, the main legal and taxation requirements for establishing and running a small business. Practical tips and business strategies are also provided to minimise any legal problems occurring in a business. This 2011 edition has been revised to address the recent changes in legislation. The chapter updates include: Chapter 7 Specific Contracts New requirements for lay-by agreements under the Australian Consumer Law (ACL). Chapter 12 Unfair Trading Deals with the new Australian Consumer Law (ACL) prohibiting both general and specific types of unfair business conduct. Addresses the main statutory consumer protection guarantees under the ACL applying to businesses supplying goods or services. Covers the new ACL product safety and information requirements for products and product-related services. Also covers regulation by various legislation of unsolicited marketing practices including door-to-door selling, telephone selling, sending letterbox junk mail and spamming.
Basic Approach
130
Efffective Training, 5/e

P. Nick Blanchard James Thacker
ISBN 10: 0273768379 ISBN 13: 9780273768371 2013 Paper
For students in training courses and practitioners interested in developing training programs. Seamlessly integrate training theory and application into your course. Effective Training discusses the training process within an overarching framework that shows readers how training activities meet organizational needs that are both strategic and tactical in nature. This edition adds new material, enhancing the ease of reading and understanding.
Basic Approach
Essentials of Management: A Concise Introduction

David Boddy ISBN 10: 027373928X ISBN 13: 9780273739289 392pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
This concise, readable book offers an unparalleled introduction to the theory and practice of management. Packed with examples and questions to arouse your interest, it shows how ideas and theories of management relate to the real world. Essentials of Management introduces the themes and functions of management, showing them within the clear framework of planning, organising, leading and controlling. It incorporates the latest research, and uses recent and topical examples of management in practice to bring the topic to life. This textbook is relevant to students from all subject areas. Whether you are specialising in business, or an engineering student taking a single module in the area, this book will offer you an engaging and clear introduction to management.
Table of Contents
PART 1: AN INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT 1. Managing in organisations 2. Models of management PART 2: THE ENVIRONMENT OF MANAGEMENT 3. Organisation cultures and contexts 4. Managing internationally 5. Corporate responsibility PART 3: PLANNING 6. Planning 7. Decision making 8. Managing strategy PART 4: ORGANISING 9. Organisation structure 10. Information systems and e-business 11. Managing change and innovation PART 5: LEADING 12. Influencing 13. Motivating 14. Communicating 15. Working in teams PART 6: CONTROLLING 16. Managing operations and quality 17. Performance measurement and control
Managing People in Organisations

Nikos Bozionelos
ISBN 10: 027372679X ISBN 13: 9780273726791 2013 Paper
131
Understanding Cross-Cultural Management, 2/e

MarieJoelle Browaeys Roger Price
Basic Approach
Managing effectively across national and cultural boundaries is critical to the success of todays organizations, given the global environment of business and increasing diversity of workforces. A keen awareness and a high degree of cross-cultural competence in management are therefore key to the career success of both present and aspiring managers/professionals. Understanding Cross-Cultural Management explores the key themes and issues in one of the most challenging and fascinating areas of organizational life, and enables you to sharpen your insights and practical skills. It offers a selective but broad view of classic and contemporary thinking on cultural management and encourages you to apply theories and ideas to practice - and to relate them to your own experience - through various examples and cases from the business world, and a range of practical activities.
Table of Contents
PART ONE: CULTURE AND MANAGEMENT 1. Determinants of Culture 2. Dimensions of Culture and Business 3. Traditional models of culture 4. Contemporary and developing models of culture 5. Cultural Dimensions and Dilemmas 6. Cultures and Styles of Management PART TWO: CULTURE AND ORGANISATIONS 7. Culture and Corporate Structures 8. Culture and Leadership 9. Culture and Strategy 10. Culture Changes in Organisations 11. Culture and Marketing 12. Culture Diversity in Organisations PART THREE: CULTURE AND COMMUNICATION 13. Business Communication Across Cultures 14. Barriers to Intercultural Communication 15. Negotiating Internationally 16. Working with International teams 17. Conflicts and cultural differences 18. Developing Intercultural Relationships
Management: A Faith-Based Perspective

Michael E. Cafferky ISBN 10: 0136058345 ISBN 13: 9780136058342 648pp 2012 Cloth
For principles of management courses looking for a faith-based perspective. Explore management issues through a faith-based perspective. Management: A Faith-Based Perspective offers students the opportunity to explore management issues through a faith-based perspective. By presenting the biblical record on major management issues and contemporary management scholarship findings, this text encourages the integration of a perspective founded on the values and teachings common to Christian denominations.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
1. Introduction to Management 2. Management History 3. External and Internal Environment 4. Cross-Cultural Management 5. The Manager and Moral and Social Responsibility 6. Planning and Decision Making 7. Strategic Thinking 8. Organization 9. Human Resources Management 10. Communication 11. Motivation 12. Leadership 13. Change, Power, and Conflict 14. Managerial Control and Accountability 15. Spirituality, Faith, and Management Chapter Appendix: Assumptions in the Field of Management
132
Appendix A: Selected Hebrew and Greek Words Relevant to Managers Appendix B: Occupations Mentioned in the Bible Appendix C: Technology in the Bible Appendix D: The Christian as Manager and Leader: A Small-Group Study Guide Cases: Case 1 The J.M. Smucker Company Culture Case 2 The Burger War: In-N-Out Burger Case 3 eHarmony.com Case 4 The New Fitness Club Case 5 R. W. Beckett Corporation: Corporate Culture Case 6 Cardone Industries: Chaplain Program Case 7 Ethics, Decision-Making, and Responsibility: Tough Call Knowing Someone Loses Case 8 Coping with Scandal: Individual Redemption and Organizational Recovery Case 9 Choice of an Executive Assistant Case 10 How Gay Friendly Should Your Workplace Be?
Tom Cannon
Corporate Responsibility: Governance, Compliance and Ethics in a Sustainable Environment, 2/e
Basic Approach
This new edition of Corporate Responsibility starts with a fundamental shift in perspective from the previous edition by highlighting the shift from corporate responsibility being a vital business issue, to being the vital issue facing business. In the process the author brings together a comprehensive guide to the subject to addressing contemporary developments in both theory and practice. A distinct intellectual framework is developed which highlights the ways the issues at the heart of Corporate Responsibility hang together. This links the ethics which underpin the values of corporations and their leadership to the way they exercise their responsibilities as stewards not just of their business but of the natural, human and built environment which they affect. Up-to-the minute research is integrated with case studies that allow the teacher, student and researcher to access the body of contemporary knowledge while responding to a rapidly changing landscape.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
Corporate Social responsibility: the emerging agenda The corporate and social/economic challenge Defining corporate social responsibility The role and function of business in society Business ethics Codes of behaviour The nature and evolution of corporate governance Standards, safety and security The greening of economies and corporations the sustainability challenge Sustainability the opportunities and challenges Managing a sustainable business Embedding CSR practice The built environment Ways forward and conclusions
Management Skills for Everyday Life, 3/e

Paula Caproni ISBN 10: 0132479079 ISBN 13: 9780132479073 464pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate level Management Skills, and Organizational Behavior courses, as well as for Executive Education for beginning through mid-level managers and professionals. This text's engaging and practical, yet research-based style is designed to help students achieve the success they desire. Specifically, the ideas, tools, and techniques help students enhance their effectiveness (ability to achieve results), career potential (e.g., marketability, salaries, promotions, job satisfaction and job choice), and general well-being (e.g., happiness, health, work-life "balance").
Table of Contents
1.
What Predicts Success?
133
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
Developing Self-Awareness Building Trust Communicating Effectively Gaining and Using Sustainable, Ethical Power and Influence Managing Relationships with Your Direct Reports, Bosses, and Peers Managing Cultural Diversity Creating High-Performing Teams Diverse Teams and Virtual Teams: Managing Differences and Distances Crafting a Life: Your Guide to the Good Life
Developing Management Skills: A Comprehensive Guide for Leaders, 5/e

James Carlopio Graham Andrewartha David Whetten Kim Cameron
ISBN 10: 1442547626 ISBN 13: 9781442547629 2012 Paper Develop the personal, interpersonal and group skills vital to achieving outstanding success in todays workplace with Developing Management Skills: A Comprehensive Guide for Leaders. Carlopios hallmark five-step learning approachself-assessment, learning, analysis, practice and application and its modular structure help you tailor your study to the areas you need to focus on. This practical, hands-on style resource incorporates in-text exercises and role-playing assignments and is further supported by a Companion Website that includes self-assessment exercises and additional online chapters on communication skills. Developing Management Skills 5th Edition is suitable for undergraduate or post-graduate courses with a specific focus on managerial skills such as capstone courses, leadership or communication skills. It is also well suited to corporate professional development training courses or simply as a resource for professionals seeking to become better managers. "Overall, it is an excellent mix of theory and practical reality. I congratulate the authors for their valuable and ongoing contribution to management education and development in the Asia-Pacific region." Peter J. Dowling, PhD Professor of International Management and Strategy La Trobe University , Melbourne
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
1. Management essentials 2. Developing self-awareness 3. Managing stress 4. Solving problems analytically and creatively 5. Communicating supportively 6. Motivating others 7. Managing conflict 8. Empowering and delegating 9. Building effective teams 10. Managing change ONLINE: 11. Making oral and written presentations 12. Conducting interviews
Managing Change in Organizations, 6/e

Colin Carnall ISBN 10: 0273736418 ISBN 13: 9780273736417 384pp 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
Managing Change in Organizations provides a practical and thorough overview of how effective change can be achieved in organizations. The text is ideal for advanced undergraduates, MBA and postgraduate students on courses in managing change and organisational change. Colin Carnall takes a strategic approach, outlining guidance and techniques for planning and implementing, evaluating and learning from major organizational change. Reviewing traditional and more recent critical theories, he also presents models and frameworks for change that are apt for the complex and fast-moving challenges of contemporary organizations.
134
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19.
The challenge of change Organization structures: choice and leadership The transformation perspective Theories of change: traditional models Theories of change: critical perspectives Theories of change: strategic management models Organizations in the twenty-first century: the value-added organization Sustaining organizational effectiveness Leadership in practice The learning organization Strategies for change Diagnosing change Managing major changes Change architecture A strategy for organizational effectiveness Learning from change Culture models and organization change Strategic convergence: a new model for organizational change Strategies for corporate transformation
Labor Relations and Collective Bargaining: Private and Public Sectors, 10/e
Michael R. Carrell, Northern Kentucky University Christina Heavrin, J.D., Labor Negotiator and Special Counsel to the Mayor, Lousiville/Jefferson County Metro Government ISBN 10: 0132730014 ISBN 13: 9780132730013 600pp 2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in labor relations and collective bargaining. Bring your best case to the table by putting theory into practice with this guide to labor relations, unions, and collective bargaining. Labor Relations and Collective Bargaining: Private and Public Sectors introduces students to collective bargaining and labor relations. This text is concerned with application, as well as coverage of labor history, laws, and practices.
Table of Contents
Part I: Labor Relations Overview 1. Introduction to Labor Relations 2. History and Law of Labor Relations in the Private Sector 3. Public Sector Labor Relations: History & Laws Part II: The Collective Bargaining Process 4. Establishing a Bargaining Unit and the Organizing Campaign 5. Negotiation Models, Strategies, and Tactics 6. Negotiating a Collective Bargaining Agreement Part III: Cost of Labor Contracts 7. Wage and Salary Issues 8. Employee Benefits 9. Job Security and Seniority Part IV: The Labor Relations Process in Action 10. Unfair Labor Practices and Contract Enforcement 11. Grievance and Disciplinary Procedures 12. The Arbitration Process 13. Comparative Global Industrial Relations
Enterprise and Small Business: Principles, Practice and Policy, 3/e

Sara Carter Dylan Jones-Evans
Basic Approach
This highly successful book provides a comprehensive introduction to entrepreneurship, enterprise and small business for the undergraduate and postgraduate student. With over 30 specialist contributors from academic institutions in the UK, Europe and the USA, this third edition while building on the foundations of the first two editions has been extensively revised and updated.
Table of Contents
1. Introduction
135
PART 1: ENTREPRENEURSHIP 2. The Evolution of Entrepreneurship Theory 3. Entrepreneurship and Economic Development 4. Government and Small Business 5. The Real World of the Entrepreneur PART 2: THE ENTREPRENEURIAL PROCESS 6. The Entrepreneurial Process 7. Entrepreneurial Opportunities 8. Effectuation and Entrepreneurship 9. The Psychology of the Entrepreneur 10. Entrepreneurial Failure PART 3: TYPES OF ENTREPRENEURSHIP 11. Ethnicity and Entrepreneurship 12. Gender and Entrepreneurship 13. Family Business 14. Habitual Entrepreneurs 15. Technology Entrepreneurship 16. Social Entrepreneurship 17. Community Entrepreneurship PART 4: ENTREPRENEURIAL MANAGEMENT 18. Entrepreneurial Marketing 19. Entrepreneurial Networks and the Small Business 20. Finance and the Small Business 21. Strategy and the Small Firm 22. Growth and Development in the Small Firm 23. Internationalization and Entrepreneurial Businesses
Framework of International Business, A

S. Tamer Cavusgil Gary Knight John Riesenberger
For International Business courses. A concise but thorough review of essential concepts and techniques. The Cavusgil/Knight/Riesenberger author teams new textbook A Framework of International Business concentrates on new realities in international business, emerging markets, and small and medium-sized enterprises.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
PART I: FOUNDATION CONCEPTS 1. Introduction: What Is International Business? 2. Theories of International Trade and Investment 3. Organizational Participants that Make International Business 4. Culture and Ethics in International Business PART II: THE INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT 5. Political and Legal Systems in International Business 6. The International Monetary Environment and Financial Management in the Global Firm 7. Emerging Markets, Developing Economies, and Advanced Economies PART III: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS STRATEGY AND IMPLEMENTATION 8. Strategy and Organization in the International Firm 9. Global Market Opportunity Assessment 10. Exporting and Countertrade 11. Foreign Direct Investment and Collaborative Ventures 12. Licensing, Franchising, and Other Contractual Strategies 13. Global Sourcing 14. Marketing in the Global Firm 15. Human Resource Management in the Global Firm
International Business: The New Realities, 2/e

S. Tamer Cavusgil Gary Knight John Riesenberger
Basic Approach
For courses in International Business. An innovative teaching and learning system that captures the spirit of International Business.
136
Based on the authors collective teaching and working experienceas well as discussions with hundreds of practitioners, students, and facultyInternational Business: The New Realities is a complete teaching and learning system that seamlessly integrates cases, exercises, and videos. To reflect the major changes that have occurred in the global marketplacedue to the financial crisis, and change in dynamic among international business participantsthis edition now includes extensive new and updated material, as well as a new chapter on ethics.
Table of Contents
PART 1: FOUNDATION CONCEPTS 1. Introduction: What Is International Business? 2. Globalization of Markets and the Internationalization of the Firm 3. Organizational Participants that Make International Business Happen PART 2: THE ENVIRONMENT OF INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS 4. The Cultural Environment of International Business 5. Ethics and International Business 6. Theories of International Trade and Investment 7. Political and Legal Systems in National Environments 8. Government Intervention in International Business 9. Regional Economic Integration 10. Emerging Markets, Developing Economies, and Advanced Economies 11. The International Monetary and Financial Environment PART 3: STRATEGY AND OPPORTUNITY ASSESSMENT 12. Strategy and Organization in the International Firm 13. Global Market Opportunity Assessment PART 4: ENTERING AND OPERATING IN INTERNATIONAL MARKETS 14. Exporting and Countertrade 15. Foreign Direct Investment and Collaborative Ventures 16. Licensing, Franchising, and Other Contractual Strategies 17. Global Sourcing PART 5: FUNCTIONAL AREA EXCELLENCE 18. Marketing in the Global Firm 19. Human Resource Management in the Global Firm 20. Financial Management and Accounting in the Global Firm
International Business: The New Realities, Australasian Edition

S. Tamer Cavusgil Gary Knight John Riesenberger Hussain G. Rammal Susan Freeman
ISBN 10: 1442533560 ISBN 13: 9781442533561 2012 Paper Remarkable change is the new reality of International Business. The accelerating cross-border flow of products, services, capital, ideas, technology and people are driving businesses--large and small--to internationalise. International Business 1st Australasian edition is a rigorous resource which motivates and prepares future managers to operate in multi-national settings, by delivering a teaching system that works. Based on the authors collective teaching and working experienceas well as discussions with practitioners, students, and faculty staffthis is a complete teaching and learning system where cases, exercises and management skill builders are seamlessly integrated and matched to the topics in each chapter. Case studies from a wide variety of markets relevant to Australasian businesses, including ASEAN countries (e.g. Singapore, Malaysia, Indonesia) as well as China, India, Japan, South Korea, Pakistan, Europe and the Middle East, provide a real-world perspective to theories and examine the latest trends in international business. International Business is accompanied by a rich and flexible set of teaching and learning resources, including Instructors Manual, Companion Website and a wide range of case studies to encourage critical thinking and reflection. For undergraduate students majoring in international business or post-graduate courses in international business.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.
Introduction: What is International Business? Globalisation of Markets and the Internationalisation of the Firm Organisational participants that make business happen The cultural environment of international business Ethics and International Business Theories of International Trade and Investment Political and Legal Systems in National Environments Government Intervention in International Business Regional Economic Integration Understanding Emerging Markets The International Monetary and Financial Environment Strategy and Organisation in the international firm Global Market Opportunity Assessment Exporting and Countertrade Foreign Direct Investment and Collaborative Ventures
137
16. 17. 18. 19. 20.
Licensing, Franchising, and Other Contractual Strategies Global Sourcing Marketing in the Global Firm Human Resource Management in the Global Firm Financial Management and Accounting in the Global Firm
Modern Management: Concept and Skills, 12/e

Samuel C. Certo S. Trevis Certo
Basic Approach
For undergraduate Principles of Management courses. Core concepts, cutting-edge skill training: transform students into managers. Modern Management is a traditionally organized principles of management text that integrates core concepts with cutting-edge skill trainingall while keeping the focus on application. This edition provides the latest concepts and empirical research as well as the most recent examples of management in todays business world.
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION TO MODERN MANAGEMENT 1. Introducing Modern Management: Concepts and Skills 2. Managing: History and Current Thinking PART 2: MODERN MANAGEMENT CHALLENGES 3. Corporate Social Responsibility, Ethics, and Sustainability 4. Management and Diversity 5. Managing in the Global Arena 6. Management and Entrepreneurship PART 3: PLANNING 7. Principles of Planning 8. Making Decisions 9. Strategic Planning: Strategies, Tactics, and Competitive Dynamics 10. Plans and Planning Tools PART 4: ORGANIZING 11. Fundamentals of Organizing 12. Responsibility, Authority, and Delegation 13. Managing Human Resources 14. Organizational Change: Stress and Conflict PART 5: INFLUENCING 15. Influencing and Communication 16. Leadership 17. Motivation 18. Groups and Teams 19. Managing Organization Culture 20. Creativity and Innovation PART 6: CONTROLLING 21. Controlling, Information, and Technology 22. Production Management and Control
James G. Clawson, University of Virginia Darden Graduate School of Bus. Admin. ISBN 10: 0132556413 ISBN 13: 9780132556415 464pp 2012 Paper
Level Three Leadership: Getting Below the Surface, 5/e
Basic Approach
For undergraduate, graduate, and executive courses in leadership, organizational behavior, and management. A flexible approach to understanding and applying leadership. Level Three Leadership (L3L) uses a flexible leadership model to help students and practicing managers understand and apply the principles of leadership. This text focuses on what managers can do to influence the thinking and feeling of othersrather than focusing on changing behavior. The fifth edition has been significantly enhanced with additions based on the recommendations of reviewers and users.
Table of Contents
SECTION ONE: INTRODUCTION 1. The Leadership Point of View
138
2. The Diamond Model of Leadership in Organizations 3. Levels of Leadership SECTION TWO: STRATEGIC FRAMES 4. The Changing Context of Leadership 5. Strategic Thinking 6. The Ethical Imperative of Level Three Leadership 7. Innovation and Leadership 8. Personal, Work Group, and Organizational Charters SECTION THREE: SELF 9. Self Leadership 10. A Leaders Guide to Why People Behave the Way They Do 11. The Reb Model 12. Leadership and Intelligence 13. Resonance, Leadership, and the Purpose of Life 14. The Global Leader SECTION FOUR: LEADING OTHERS 15. Leading Others 16. The Appeal of Level One Leadership 17. The Limits of Level Two Leadership 18. The Focus and Impact of Level Three Leadership 19. Six Steps to Effective Leadership 20. The Language of Leadership 21. Leading Teams SECTION FIVE: LEADING DESIGN 22. Leading by Design 23. Human Resource Management Systems 24. Leading Change SECTION SIX: CONCLUSION 25. Conclusion SECTION SEVEN: WORKBOOK, EXERCISES, BIBLIOGRAPHY, APPENDIX 26. Workbook
Strategic Management in Action, 6/e

Mary Coulter ISBN 10: 0132620677 ISBN 13: 9780132620673 336pp 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in Strategic Management. Current theories and practice in an interesting, engaging, and easy-to-read format. Strategic Management in Action presents current strategic management theories and practice in an engaging and easy-to-read format. Coulter effectively blends theory with plenty of opportunity to practice throughout the text, providing students with the ideologies, ethical dilemmas, and unique strategies of today's real managers and organizations in action. This edition continues its commitment to currency and includes new and updated cases and examples featuring well-known companies.
John Daniels Lee Radebaugh Daniel Sullivan
International Business, 14/e
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate International Business courses. This classic best-seller discusses the differences faced in international environments, the overall strategies companies can take, and the functional alternatives for operating abroad. It takes a balanced approach to all functions of business. It features an abundance of colorful maps, strong engaging opening and closing cases, and classic and contemporary examples. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
I. BACKGROUND FOR INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS. 1. International Business: An Overview. II. COMPARATIVE ENVIRONMENTAL FRAMEWORKS. 2. The Cultural Environments Facing Business. 3. The Political and Legal Environments Facing Business.
139
4. The Economic Environment. III. THEORIES AND INSTITUTIONS: TRADE AND INVESTMENT. 5. International Trade Theory. 6. Government Influence on Trade. 7. Regional Economic Integration and Cooperative Agreements. 8. Factor Mobility and Foreign Direct Investment. IV. WORLD FINANCIAL ENVIRONMENT. 9. The Foreign-Exchange Market. 10. The Determination of Exchange Rates. V. THE DYNAMICS OF INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS-GOVERNMENT RELATIONSHIPS. 11. Government Attitudes Toward Foreign Direct Investment. 12. International Business Negotiations and Diplomacy. VI. OPERATIONS: OVERLAYING TACTICAL ALTERNATIVES. 13. Country Evaluation and Selection. 14. Collaborative Strategies. 15. Control Strategies. VII. OPERATIONS: MANAGING BUSINESS FUNCTIONS INTERNATIONALLY. 16. Marketing. 17. Export and Import Strategies. 18. Global Manufacturing and Supply Chain Management. 19. Multinational Accounting and Tax Functions. 20. The Multinational Finance Function. 21. Human Resource Management.
Strategic Management: A Competitive Advantage Approach, Concepts and Cases, 14/e

Fred R. David ISBN 10: 0273767488 ISBN 13: 9780273767480 688pp 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in strategy. A skills-oriented, practitioner perspective on strategy, thoroughly updated with current research and concepts. In todays economy, gaining and sustaining a competitive advantage is harder than ever. Strategic Management captures the complexity of the current business environment and delivers the latest skills and concepts with unrivaled clarity, helping students develop their own cutting-edge strategy through skill-developing exercises and cases. The fourteenth edition explores the current global recession and shows how it has affected the business environment, providing students with up-to-date coverage in every chapter. Also Available: Strategic Management: Concepts, 14/e ISBN 10: 0273767607 ISBN 13: 9780273767602 416pp 2013 Paper
Table of Contents
PART 1: OVERVIEW OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT 1. The Nature of Strategic Management PART 2: STRATEGY FORMULATION 2. The Business Vision and Mission 3. The External Assessment 4. The Internal Assessment 5. Strategies in Action 6. Strategy Analysis and Choice PART 3: STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION 7. Implementing Strategies: Management and Operations Issues 8. Implementing Strategies: Marketing, Finance/Accounting, R&D, and MIS Issues PART 4: STRATEGY EVALUATION 9. Strategy Review, Evaluation, and Control PART 5: KEY STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT TOPICS 10. Business Ethics/Social Responsibility/Environmental Sustainability 11. Global/International Issues PART 6: STRATEGIC-MANAGEMENT CASE ANALYSIS
140
Strategy: A View From The Top, 4/e

Cornelis A. De Kluyver John A. Pearce
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate strategy courses. Gain a strategic edge in todays business world. This short, up-to-date, practitioner-oriented guide was meant to effectively prepare practicing executives, and MBA and EMBA students for top management responsibilities. The fourth edition includes new content, reordered topics to improve the flow of the subject matter, and numerous updated examples and vignettes.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
What is Strategy? Strategy and Performance Analyzing the External Strategic Environment Analyzing an Industry Analyzing an Organizations Strategic Resource Base Formulating Business Unit Strategy Business Unit Strategy: Contexts and Special Dimensions Global Strategy Formulation Corporate Strategy: Shaping the Portfolio Corporate Strategy: Managing the Portfolio
Sustainable Venturing
Thomas Dean ISBN 10: 0136044891 ISBN 13: 9780136044895 256pp 2013 Paper
Phillip Delves-Broughton ISBN10: 0273761986 ISBN13: 9780273761983 256pp 2012 Paper
Financial Time Guide to Management: The Art and Science of Being an Effective Manager, 1/e
Basic Approach
Your authoritative guide to the art and science of being an effective manager. This is an indispensable guide to management success, whether you are taking on you first management role or are already well on your way to the top. Practical, realistic, incisive and easy-to-read it offers a realistic touchstone for anyone who is aspiring to progress up the career ladder and wants to excel in a management role. The Financial Times Guide to Management addresses the key issues that every manager faces and shows you not only how to become competent in them but also how to add value. This is a wide-ranging, jargon-free companion for todays managers, showing you how to get the balance right between knowing enough and not getting bogged down in the details.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Managing Managing Managing Managing Managing Managing
Yourself Others the Numbers Processes for change beyond the market
141
Beverly DeMarr Suzanne De Janasz
Negotiation and Dispute Resolution
Basic Approach
For courses in Negotiation/Dispute Resolution. Complete and broad in coverage, this book addresses negotiations and dispute resolution in a wide variety of settings. Because skill development is an important part of becoming a masterful negotiator, concepts are augmented with numerous exercises, activities, role plays, and self-assessments. By combining theoretical foundations with experiential exercises, the book helps students develop their ability to negotiate and resolve conflicts in both personal and professional settings.
Table of Contents
PART ONE: FOUNDATIONS OF NEGOTIATION AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION 1. Introduction 2. The Language of Negotiation PART TWO: NEGOTIATION PROCESSES 3. Distributive Negotiations 4. Integrative Negotiations 5. Conflict and Dispute Resolution PART THREE: INTERPERSONAL/CONTEXTUAL CHARACTERISTICS 6. Understanding Yourself and How that Impacts Negotiation 7. Communication in Negotiation 8. The Role and Importance of Persuasion in Negotiation 9. The Nature of the Relationship in Negotiating and Resolving Disputes 10. International Negotiations 11. Team and Multi-Party Negotiations PART FOUR: NEGOTIATION AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION APPLICATIONS 12. Negotiating in the Workplace 13. Negotiating the Purchase or Sale of an Automobile 14. Real Estate Negotiations: Commercial and Residential 15. Negotiating Your Future APPENDICES: APPENDIX A: Negotiating with Organized Labor APPENDIX B: Resumes and Cover Letters
International Management, 2/e

Helen Deresky Elizabeth Christopher
ISBN 10: 1442539674 ISBN 13: 9781442539679 2012 Paper
International Management explores the dynamic global environment of business management by examining the political, legal, technological, competitive, and cultural factors that shape corporations worldwide. With its hallmark clear and concise approach, International Management places fundamental management theories in an international context. Students will gain a comprehensive understanding of the practices, cultural skills and sensitivities needed to operate successfully in a wide range of cross-national situations. The second Australian edition of International Management focuses on the expanding economics of Australasia, China, India and their increasing trade amongst themselves, the European Union and the Americas. International Management 2nd edition incorporates up-to-date research, increased coverage of ethics, a wide range of case studies and examines recent trends affecting international business managers in todays hypercompetitive global environment. International Management is suitable for undergraduate and post graduate students majoring in international business, general management or cross cultural studies.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
PART 1: OVERVIEW 1. Assessing the environment: political, social, economic, legal and technological 2. International social responsibility: the ethics of interdependence PART 2: THE CULTURAL CONTEXT OF GLOBAL MANAGEMENT 3. Understanding the role of culture 4. Communicating across cultures 5. Cross-cultural negotiations and decisions PART 3: STRATEGIES FOR INTERNATIONAL OPERATIONS 6. Strategic planning 7. Structures and controls for overseas expansion Business relationships PART 4 : INTERNATIONAL STAFFING POLICIES AND PRACTICES
142
8. International patterns of employment 9. The roles of women and minorities in international business: 10. discrimination and prejudice in industry and government 11. Motivating and leading Comprehensive Case Appendix
Framework for Human Resource Management, A, 7/e

Gary Dessler, Florida International University ISBN 10: 0132576147 ISBN 13: 9780132576147 422pp 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in human resource management. A concise yet thorough review of essential HR management concepts. A Framework for Human Resource Management provides students and practicing managers with a concise yet thorough review of essential HR management conceptsincluding fundamental practices, methods, topics, and relevant legal findingsin a highly readable and accessible format. Apart from an improved visual experience, many new exercises and features enhance this edition.
Fundamentals of Human Resource Management, 2/e

Basic Approach
For introductory courses in Human Resource Management. A brief format, ideal for instructors who want flexibility while maintaining the integrity of the material. Fundamentals of Human Resource Management covers a wide range of HR topics and shows students the importance of human resource management within the restraints of a compact semester. Offering a wealth of functional examples and applications, this text emphasizes the notion that all managers need basic human resource management skills. This edition is the first text on the market to build its core around the talent management processwhich the author defines as the goal-oriented and integrated process of planning, recruiting, developing, managing, and compensating employees.
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION 1. Managing Human Resources Today 2. Managing Equal Opportunity and Diversity 3. Strategic Human Resource Management PART 2: STAFFING AND TALENT MANAGEMENT 4. Recruiting and Talent Management 5. Selecting Employees 6. Training and Developing Employees 7. Performance and Talent Management 8. Compensating Employees PART 3: EMPLOYEE AND LABOR RELATIONS 9. Ethics, Employee Rights, and Fair Treatment at Work 10. Working with Unions and Resolving Disputes 11. Improving Occupational Safety, Health, and Security PART 4: SPECIAL ISSUES IN HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT 12. Managing Human Resources in Entrepreneurial Firms 13. Managing HR Globally 14. Building High-Performance Work
Gary Dessler
Human Resource Management, 13/e
143
Basic Approach
For courses in Human Resources Management. Authoritative and current information on Human Resource Management that ALL managers can use. This best-selling HRM text is designed to provide authoritative and accurate information on HR-related responsibilities and personnel management by focusing on practical applications, concepts, and techniques that ALL managers can use in business. More than 100 new topics can be found throughout this edition, along with new features and video cases. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART ONE: INTRODUCTION 1. Introduction to Human Resource Management 2. Equal Opportunity and the Law 3. The Managers Role in Strategic Human Resource Management PART TWO: RECRUITMENT AND PLACEMENT 4. Job Analysis 5. Personnel Planning and Recruiting 6. Employee Testing and Selection 7. Interviewing Candidates PART THREE: TRAINING AND DEVELOPMENT 8. Training and Developing Employees 9. Performance Management and Appraisal 10. Coaching, Careers, and Talent Management PART FOUR: COMPENSATION 11. Establishing Strategic Pay Plans 12. Pay for Performance and Financial Incentives 13. Benefits and Services PART FIVE: EMPLOYEE RELATIONS 14. Ethics, Justice, and Fair Treatment in HR Management 15. Labor Relations and Collective Bargaining 16. Employee Safety and Health 17. Managing Global Human Resources 18. Managing Human Resources in Entrepreneurial Firms
Supervision and Leadership in a Changing World

Basic Approach
For courses in Supervision. Offering a new approach to supervision, this book moves beyond just order-giving strategies to address leadership techniques that work with todays workers and teams. Throughout the book, readers learn how to supervise a diverse workforce that is often set in dispersed, self-managing teams. The link between supervision and leadership is explored as well as common supervisory tasks such as planning and setting goals; organizing jobs and work; interviewing and screening employees; and appraising and managing performance.
Table of Contents
PART I: UNDERSTANDING SUPERVISION AND LEADERSHIP IN A CHANGING WORLD 1. The Supervisor's Role in a Changing World 2. Leading a Diverse Workforce PART II: SETTING UP THE WORK 3. Solving Problems and Making Decisions 4. Planning and Setting Goals 5. Understanding Budgets and How to Control Work Processes 6. Organizing Jobs and Work PART IV: GETTING EMPLOYEES STARTED 7. The Supervisor and Equal Employment 8. Interviewing and Screening Employees 9. Orienting and Training Employees PART V: LEADING AND MOTIVATING EMPLOYEES 10. Using Motivation and Incentives 11. Leading the Team Effort 12. Coaching and Communicating at Work PART VI: APPRAISING AND SUPERVISING EMPLOYEES 13. Appraising and Managing Performance 14. Supervising Discipline, Ethics, and Fair Treatment at Work 15. Handling Grievances and Labor Relations 16. Supervising Health and Safety at Work
144
Human Relations: Interpersonal Job-Oriented Skills, 11/e

Andrew J. DuBrin ISBN 10: 0132680033 ISBN 13: 9780132680035 432pp 2012 Paper
For undergraduate courses in Human Relations, Applied Psychology, Human Relations in the Workplace, Career Development; also appropriate for a course in Interpersonal Skills Training. Accomplished author and national speaker, Andrew J. DuBrin brings his expertise of Human Relations and Business Psychology to this exciting eleventh edition. Focusing on todays work environment, the book takes a two-pronged approach that improves interpersonal skills by first presenting basic concepts and then by featuring a heavy component of skill development and self-assessment. This edition features a new chapter on interpersonal skills for the digital world and fresh cases, exercises and skill builders that prepare students for todays business environment.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.
A Framework for Interpersonal Skill Development Understanding Individual Differences Building Self-Esteem and Self-Confidence Interpersonal Communication Interpersonal Skills for the Digital Age Developing Teamwork Skills Group Problem Solving and Decision Making Cross-Cultural Relations and Diversity Resolving Conflicts with Others Becoming an Effective Leader Motivating Others Helping Others Develop and Grow Positive Political Skills Customer Satisfaction Skills Enhancing Ethical Behavior Stress Management and Personal Productivity Job Search and Career Management Skills
Human Relations for Career and Personal Success, Canadian Edition, 4/e
Andrew J. DuBrin Terri M. Geerinck, Sir Standford Fleming College ISBN 10: 0138127875 ISBN 13: 9780138127879 456pp 2012 Paper
Now updated to emphasize developing effective human relations skills in the new economy! Human Relations for Career and Personal Success successfully combines social science research findings with practical and accessible work-related features, making it an essential text for developing the foundations of individual effectiveness and healthy successful relationships in the workplace. Human Relations for Career and Personal Success shows you how you can become more effective in your work and personal life through knowledge of and skill in human relations. Updated and expanded to emphasize developing human relations skills for the workplace in the new economy. New topics covered include material on life challenges, teamwork, and the impact of new technologies such as social networking. The fourth Canadian edition also features expanded Canadian content, including new statistics from the latest Canadian census, new Canadian research, and new Canadian illustrations and photographs.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
PART 1: UNDERSTANDING AND MANAGING YOURSELF 1. Human Relations and Yourself 2. Self-Motivation and Goal-Setting 3. Problem Solving and Creativity 4. Achieving Wellness and Managing Stress 5. Dealing with Life-Changes and Personal Problems 6. Finding Happiness and Enhancing Your Personal Life PART 2: DEALING EFFECTIVELY WITH PEOPLE 7. Communicating with People 8. Developing Intercultural Competence 9. Handling Conflict and Being Assertive PART 3: DEVELOPING CAREER THRUST 10. Getting Along with Your Manager or Team Leader 11. Getting Along with Co-workers and Customers 12. Developing Self-Confidence and Leadership Skills 13. Choosing a Career and Developing a Portfolio Career 14. Conducting a Job Search
145
15. Developing Good Work Habits 16. Getting Ahead in Your Career
Business Ethics and Values, 4/e

Collin Fisher Alan Lovell
ISBN 10: 0273757911 ISBN 13: 9780273757917 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
A comprehensive look at the fascinating and complex subject of ethics in business that is both theoretically rich and engaging. Fisher and Lovell focus on developing ethical awareness and give as much importance to individual conscience at work as they do to socially responsible behaviour at the corporate level and within the global business world. Business Ethics and Values is suitable for any Business related Ethics, Sustainability or Corporate Social Responsibility course at an upper level undergraduate or Masters level.
Margaret Foot Caroline Hook
Introducing Human Resource Management, 6/e
Basic Approach
This is an accessible and lively introduction to the human resource management, focusing on the frameworks of people management strategies, and covering the basic operational areas and practices of HRM. The sixth edition continues to explore ideas and themes in an engaging style with reference to real-life examples, and offers student-friendly features and activities. This edition includes new coverage of well-being, equality and diversity, and offers a greater international perspective throughout. It is aimed at students taking an HRM option on a Business Degree, or those studying for an HND, Foundation Degree or CIPD qualification.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
Introducing human resource management Human resource strategy and planning High performance working: employee engagement through involvement and participation The employment relationship Equality and diversity Recruitment Selection: shortlisting, interviews and beyond (NEW combined single chapter covering all aspects of selection) Retention and talent management (NEW) Performance management and appraisal Learning and development Payment systems Health, safety and welfare Discipline and grievance Dismissal, redundancy and outplacement
Jennifer M. George Gareth R. Jones
Understanding and Managing Organizational Behavior, 6/e
For one-semester, undergraduate/graduate level courses in Organizational Behavior. Vivid examples, thought-provoking activitiesget students engaged in OB. George/Jones uses real-world examples, thought- and discussion-provoking learning activities to help students become more engaged in what they are learning. This text also provides the most contemporary and up-to-date account of the changing issues involved in managing people in organizations. The sixth edition features new cases, material addressing the economic crisis, and expanded coverage of ethics and workplace diversity.
Basic Approach
146
This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
1. Introduction to Organizational Behavior PART 1: INDIVIDUALS IN ORGANIZATIONS 2. Individual Differences: Personality and Ability 3. Values, Attitudes, and Moods and Emotions 4. Perception, Attribution, and the Management of Diversity 5. Learning and Creativity 6. The Nature of Work Motivation 7. Creating a Motivating Work Setting 8. Pay, Careers, and Changing Employment Relationships 9. Managing Stress and Work-Life Balance PART 2: GROUP AND TEAM PROCESSES 10. The Nature of Work Groups and Teams 11. Effective Work Groups and Teams 12. Leaders and Leadership 13. Power, Politics, Conflict, and Negotiation 14. Communicating Effectively in Organizations 15. Decision Making and Organizational Learning PART 3: ORGANIZATIONAL PROCESSES 16. Organizational Design and Structure 17. Organizational Culture and Ethical Behavior 18. Organizational Change and Development
International Corporate Governance

Marc Goergen ISBN 10: 0273751255 ISBN 13: 9780273751250 336pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
International Corporate Governance provides a thorough introduction to the state of the art of corporate governance research and practice. It covers a wide range of topics, including corporate control, regulation, behavioural issues and the role of stakeholders in corporate governance. The text not only reflects the multidisciplinary nature of corporate governance, but it also adopts an international perspective by highlighting the major differences in corporate control and corporate governance practice across the world. While rigorous, the text avoids needless jargon and uses language that is accessible to a wider audience. It also makes a critical assessment of current regulation, practice and research findings.
Table of Contents
PART I INTRODUCTION TO CORPORATE GOVERNANCE 1. Defining corporate governance and key theoretical models 2. Corporate control across the world 3. Control versus ownership rights PART II INTERNATIONAL CORPORATE GOVERNANCE 4. Taxonomies of corporate governance systems 5. Incentivising managers and the disciplining of badly performing managers 6. Corporate governance, types of financial systems and economic growth 7. Corporate governance regulation in an international context PART III CORPORATE GOVERNANCE AND STAKEHOLDERS 8. Corporate social responsibility and socially responsible investment 9. Debtholders 10. Employee rights and voice across corporate governance systems 11. The role of gatekeepers in corporate governance PART IV IMPROVING CORPORATE GOVERNANCE 12. Corporate governance in emerging markets 13. Contractual corporate governance 14. Corporate governance in initial public offerings 15. Behavioural biases and corporate governance PART V CONCLUSIONS 16. Learning from Diversity and Future Challenges for Corporate Governance PART VI GLOSSARY
147
Luis R. GomezMejia, Arizona State University David Balkin ISBN 10: 0132604337 ISBN 13: 9780132604338 552pp 2012 Paper
Management
Basic Approach
For Principles of Management courses. The basics of managementand beyond. Students often assume the role of a manager is no different than that of a traditional bosssomeone who hires/fires, doles out raises/promotions, and tells employees what to do. Management takes students beyond these preconceived notions by exposing them to the full spectrum of management practices and concepts that will help them succeed as managers in todays business world.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.
Management and its evolution Managing in a global environment Ethics and social responsibility Culture and change Managing the planning process Decision making Strategic Management Entrepreneurship and innovation Organization structure Human Resource Management Managing Employee Diversity Leadership and Motivation Managing teams Managing communication Operations management and control
Luis Gomez-Mejia David Balkin Robert Cardy
Managing Human Resources, 7/e
Basic Approach
For undergraduate or graduate level human resource management courses. A non-functional approach that shows the relevance of HR topics to all employees. Managing Human Resources prepares all future managers with a business understanding of human resource management skills. The non-functional HR approach used in this text also makes human resources relevant to anyone who has to deal with HR issues, even those who do not hold the title of manager. All materials have been thoroughly updated in this edition including more than 800 new references.
Table of Contents
PART I. INTRODUCTION 1. Meeting Present and Emerging Strategic Human Resource Challenges Part II. The Contexts of Human Resource Management 2. Managing Work Flows and Conducting Job Analysis 3. Understanding Equal Opportunity and the Legal Environment 4. Managing Diversity PART III. STAFFING 5. Recruiting and Selecting Employees 6. Managing Employee Separations, Downsizing, and Outplacement PART IV. EMPLOYEE DEVELOPMENT 7. Appraising and Managing Performance 8. Training the Workforce 9. Developing Careers PART V. COMPENSATION 10. Managing Compensation 11. Rewarding Performance 12. Designing and Administering Benefits PART VI. GOVERNANCE 13. Developing Employee Relations 14. Respecting Employee Rights and Managing Discipline 15. Working with Organized Labor 16. Managing Workplace Safety and Health 17. International HRM Challenge
148
Jerald Greenberg
Managing Behavior in Organizations, 6/e
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and MBA courses in Organizational Behavior and Industrial/Organizational Psychology. Get students right to the point while teaching your course, your way. Managing Behavior in Organizations provides a brief tour of the scientific and practical highlights of organizational behavior (OB). This text focuses on the essential concepts and practices that students need to know while offering instructors an array of material that can be tailored to their style of teaching. The latest edition of this text contains completely new topics as well as updated material from earlier editions.

Ricky W. Griffin Michael W. Pustay
Basic Approach
For International Business courses. Successfully prepare students for the international marketplace. International Business illustrates how successful managers must function in a competitive world. Packed with current examples that reflect the vibrancy of the international business field, this student-friendly text offers a managerial approach that keeps an emphasis on skills development, emerging markets and geographical literacy. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART 1: THE WORLDS MARKETPLACES 1. An Overview of International Business 2. Global Marketplaces and Business Centers 3. Legal, Technological, Accounting, and Political Environments 4. The Role of Culture 5. Ethics and Social Responsibility in International Business PART 2: THE INTERNATIONAL ENVIRONMENT 6. International Trade and Investment 7. The International Monetary System and the Balance of Payments 8. Foreign Exchange and International Financial Markets 9. Formulation of National Trade Policies 10. International Cooperation Among Nations PART 3: MANAGING INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS 11. International Strategic Management 12. Strategies for Analyzing and Entering Foreign Markets 13. International Strategic Alliances 14. International Organization Design and Control 15. Leadership and Employee Behavior in International Business PART 4: MANAGING INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS OPERATIONS 16. International Marketing 17. International Operations Management 18. International Financial Management 19. International Human Resource Management and Labor Relations
Daniel B. Griffith, Syracuse University Cliff B. Goodwin ISBN 10: 0132741059 ISBN 13: 9780132741057 384pp 2013 Paper
Conflict Survival Kit: Tools for Resolving Conflict at Work, 2/e
Basic Approach
For courses in Organizational Leadership and Supervision, Human Resources Management, Communications and Conflict Studies. Taking a front-line view, The Conflict Survival Kit: Tools for Resolving Conflict at Work focuses on topics
149
supervisors, team leads and managers need to know to address conflict in organizations. Each chapter succinctly explains conflict theories, frameworks and models, while focusing on important interpersonal and management skills. This classroom text and on-the-job guide presents strategies that can be used immediately in the workplace and provides hands-on practice throughout. Fully updated in this edition, it includes a new section on cultural communication differences, more on mediation, strategies for staying calm during confrontation and a section on managing bullying in the workplace.
Table of Contents
1. The Nature of Conflict PART I: THE THEORY AND CONTEXT FOR MANAGING CONFLICT IN THE WORKPLACE 2. Preventing Conflict 3. Approaches to Conflict 4. Working Toward Collaboration PART II: INTERPERSONAL COMMUNICATION SKILLS FOR RESOLVING CONFLICT 5. The Three Channels of Communication 6. Listening to Resolve Conflict and Build Lasting Relationships 7. The Communication Continua PART III: PREPARING TO RESOLVE CONFLICTS 8. Are You Capable? 9. Opening the Doors to Conflict Resolution PART IV: APPLICATION AND PRACTICE 10. The Building Blocks of Collaboration 11. Integrative Negotiation: Negotiating as Partners 12. Overcoming Barriers to Integrative Negotiation 13. Mediating Conflicts Between Parties 14. Decision-Making Choices for the Manager 15. Handling Conflicts Requiring Direct Confrontation 16. Special Situations: "Opportunistic" Employees, Workplace Violence, Terminations, and Bullying 17. Achieving Effectiveness as a Conflict Manager
Carol Harvey M. June Allard
Understanding and Managing Diversity, 5/e
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in human resources. A diverse approach to understanding and managing diversity. Understanding and Managing Diversity uses applications to clarify the complexity of a diverse workforce, and explains how it can be used as an organizational asset. This text also provides students with a wide range of expertisefrom the perspective of experienced interdisciplinary instructors (business, psychology, economics, theology, law, politics, history, etc.) to practitioners (diversity trainers, corporate managers, etc.). This edition has been substantially updated to reflect the changing diversity issues in todays workplaceincluding 18 new and 15 revised articles/cases/exercises.
Table of Contents
SECTION I: UNDERSTANDING INDIVIDUAL PERSPECTIVES OF DIVERSITY 1. DIVERSITY! 2. Understanding Attribution Theory by Using Visual Literacy 3. I AM 4. Diversity Awareness Quiz 5. Thriving in a Multicultural Classroom 6. Body Ritual Among the Nacirema 7. Increasing Multicultural Understanding: Uncovering Stereotypes 8. White Privilege and Male Privilege: A Personal Account of Coming to See Correspondences through Work in Womens Studies 9. The Emotional Connection of Distinguishing Differences and Conflict 10. The Best of the Best 11. The Pitney Bowes Case: A Legacy of Diversity Management 12. Exploring Diversity in Your Organization SECTION II: UNDERSTANDING PRIMARY ASPECTS OF DIVERSITY: RACE AND ETHNICITY 13. World View of Cultural Diversity 14. We Have an African American President: How Could Racism Still be a Major Problem? 15. To Be Asian in America 16. Inventing Hispanics: A Diverse Minority Resists Being Labeled 17. Immigration: Cultural Transmission Today 18. Negotiating: The Top Ten Ways that Culture Can Effect Your Negotiation 19. Global Call Center Exercise: Learning to Negotiate 20. The Coca-Cola Company: Then and Now 21. Being an Only SECTION III: UNDERSTANDING PRIMARY DIVERSITY: GENDER, SEXUAL ORIENTATION, AGE, AND PHYSICAL CHALLENGE 22. Women in Leadership Positions: Why Arent They There Yet? 23. The Paradox of Male Privilege
150
24. Are We Equal Yet? Making Sense of Lesbian, Gay, Bisexual, and Transgender Issues in the Workplace 25. Generational Diversity in the Workplace 26. How Old Should You Be to Drive a Bus? Exploring Ageism 27. Musical Chairs 28. The Best Buy Case: Committed to the Inclusion of People with Disabilities 29. Sexual Harassment 30. The Cracker Barrel Restaurants SECTION IV. UNDERSTANDING SECONDARY ASPECTS OF DIVERSITY, SOCIAL CLASS, RELIGION, APPEARANCE, AND MILITARY EXPERIENCE 31. Social Class: The Fiction of American Meritocracy 32. Does Social Class Make a Difference? 33. Religion in the U.S. Workplace 34. Appearance and Weight Inclusion Issues in the Workplace 35. Military Veterans 36. Choosing the Board 37. Fairfax Metropolitan Hospital SECTION V: MANAGING DIVERSITY: ETHICAL, LEGAL, COMMUNICATION, AND MARKETING ISSUES 38. The Ethics of Workplace Diversity 39. Ethics and Diversity: Legal Applications in the Workplace 40. How Canada Promotes Workplace Diversity 41. Media Messages: The Shaping of Culture 42. Improving Communication in Todays Diverse Workplace 43. Changing Consumer Markets: The Business Case for Diversity 44. The Bar Exam 45. The UBS Diversity Case SECTION VI: MANAGING ORGANIZATIONAL CHANGE AND DIVERSITY 46. Leadership, Employee Resource Groups, and Social Responsibility: What Organizations Can Do to Manage Diversity 47. Work-Life Balance Issues: Changing When and How the Work Gets Done 48. Diversity Training: Ideological Frameworks and Social Justice Implications 49. The Diversity Awards: What Do They Mean? 50. Evaluating Diversity Management: Conducting a Diversity Audit 51. The U.S. Air Force Academy Case
Management of Organizational Behavior, 10/e

Paul H. Hersey Kenneth H. Blanchard Dewey E. Johnson
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate-level courses in Organizational Behavior, Leadership, and Organizational Development. Forty years in the making, Management of Organizational Behavior is a readable text that makes behavioral sciences come alive through real life examples and progressive ideology.
Management, 3/e
Michael A. Hitt Stewart Black Lyman W. Porter
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate Principles of Management courses. This text connects theory with practice, incorporating the latest research findings to make management relevant and exciting to aspiring managers. PART 1. MANAGING ETHICALLY AND GLOBALLY 1. The Nature of Management 2. Social Responsibility and Managerial Ethics 3. International Management and Globalization PART 2. PLANNING AND ORGANIZING 4. Strategic Management 5. Planning 6. Organizational Structure and Design 7. Managing Diverse Human Resources
Table of Contents
151
PART 3. LEADING 8. Leadership 9. Motivation 10. Groups and Teams 11. Communication and Negotiation 12. Individual and Group Decision Making PART 4. CONTROLLING 13. Operations Management 14. Control 15. Organizational Change and Development
Fundamentals of Strategy, 2/e

Gerry Johnson Kevan Scholes Richard Whittington
Basic Approach
Fundamentals of Strategy is a concise version of the market-leading text Exploring Strategy. It has been developed for students on short courses in strategy for example, doing an initial course at undergraduate, postgraduate or post-experience level, or studying strategy as part of a wider degree in the arts, sciences or engineering. The book comprises 10 chapters, and focuses on the analysis and formulation of strategy.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
Introducing strategy The environment Strategic capabilities Strategic purpose Business strategy Corporate strategy and diversification International strategy Innovation strategies Mergers, acquisitions and alliances Strategy in action
Gareth R. Jones
Organizational Theory, Design, and Change, 7/e
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in Organization Theory, Organizational Design, and Organizational Change/Development. Business is changing at break-neck speed so managers must be increasingly active in reorganizing their firms to gain a competitive edge. Organizational Theory, Design, and Change continues to provide students with the most up-to-date and contemporary treatment of the way managers attempt to increase organizational effectiveness. By making organizational change the centerpiece in a discussion of organizational theory and design, this text stands apart from other books on the market. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART 1: THE ORGANIZATION AND ITS ENVIRONMENT 1. Organizations and Organizational Effectiveness 2. Stakeholders, Managers, and Ethics 3. Organizing in a Changing Global Environment PART 2: ORGANIZATIONAL DESIGN 4. Basic Challenges of Organizational Design 5. Designing Organizational Structure: Authority and Control 6. Designing Organizational Structure: Specialization and Coordination 7. Creating and Managing Organizational Culture 8. Organizational Design and Strategy in a Changing Global Environment 9. Organizational Design, Competences, and Technology PART 3: ORGANIZATIONAL CHANGE 10. Types and Forms of Organizational Change 11. Organizational Transformations: Birth, Growth, Decline, and Death 12. Decision Making, Learning, Knowledge Management, and Information Technology
152
13. Innovation, Intrapreneurship, and Creativity 14. Managing Conflict, Power, and Politics
Innovation Acceleration: Transforming Organizational Thinking

Donald F. Kuratko Jeffrey S. Hornsby Michael G. Goldsby
Basic Approach
For collegiate or executive education in Entrepreneurial Innovation. The fundamentals of creating an innovative climate within an organization. Innovation Acceleration: Transforming Organizational Thinking helps students develop an understanding of innovative organizations, the specific processes involved in corporate innovation, and how to assess an organizations readiness for entrepreneurial activity and innovation.
Table of Contents
PART I: THE INNOVATIVE ORGANIZATION (I-ORGANIZATION) 1. Understanding the Innovative Mindset 2. The Process of Corporate Innovation PART II: INDIVIDUAL INNOVATION SKILLS (I-SKILLS) 3. Unleashing Individual Creativity 4. Managerial Skills for the Innovation Process PART III: THE DESIGN FUNCTION IN INNOVATION (I-DESIGN) 5. The Design Thinking Process 6. Design-Driven Innovation PART IV: ORGANIZATIONAL INNOVATION (I-TEAMS) 7. Auditing Organizational Innovation 8. Human Resource Management in Corporate Innovation 9. Teams-Based Innovation PART V: IMPLEMENTATION OF INNOVATION (I-PLANS) 10. Innovation to Commercialization 11. Effective Innovation Plans 12. Accelerating MomentumThe I-Solution
Managing Strategy and Measuring Value: A Financial Perspective

Graham Leask Malcolm Arnold
ISBN 10: 0273736248 ISBN 13: 9780273736240 2013 Paper
Strategic Management, 6/e

Richard Lynch ISBN 10: 0273750925 ISBN 13: 9780273750925 880pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Strategic Management is one of the worlds leading strategy textbooks. It covers all the major topics, particularly from a global perspective. It delivers comprehensive coverage of all the main elements of the subject in an easy-to-read style with extensive examples and a range of free support material that will help you learn actively and effectively.
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION 1. Strategic management 2. A review of theory and practice PART 2: STRATEGIC ANALYSIS AND PURPOSE 3. Analysing the strategic environment 4. Analysing resources and capabilities 5. Strategy dynamics 6. Prescriptive purpose delivered through mission, objectives and ethics 7. Purpose emerging from knowledge, technology and innovation
153
PART 3: DEVELOPING THE STRATEGY 8. Developing business level strategy options 9. Developing corporate level strategy options 10. Strategy evaluation and development: the prescriptive process 11. Finding the strategic route forward: emergent and prescriptive approaches 12. Organisational structure, style and people issues PART 4: THE IMPLEMENTATION PROCESS 13. Implementing and controlling the strategic plan 14. Developing and implementing customer-driven strategy 15. Managing strategic change PART 5: DIFFERENT STRATEGY CONTEXTS AND BUILDING A COHESIVE STRATEGY 16. Strategic leadership 17. Entrepreneurial strategy 18. Government, public sector and not-for-profit strategies 19. International expansion and globalisation strategies 20. Building a cohesive corporate strategy PART 6: CASE STUDIES Case study 1 Competing against the budget airlines Case study 2 World market for beer: what now for SAB Miller? Case study 3 Heineken's global strategy? Case study 4 Global automotive vehicles Case study 5 Tata Motors goes global Case study 6 Toyota competes with Volkswagen for world leadership Case study 7 What can companies learn from Chainsaw Al? Case study 8 Solving Sony's problems Case study 9 Thinking outside the box at IBM Case study 10 Emergent strategy: competition and innovation in the world PC market Case study 11 Public sector strategy: how Galileo ended up in trouble Case study 12 Emergent strategy: who will topple Apples iPod?
Entrepreneurship and Small Business Management

Steve Mariotti, Network for Teaching Entrepreneurship Caroline Glackin, Shepherd University ISBN 10: 0135030315 ISBN 13: 9780135030318 736pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Entrepreneurship and Small Business Management. Written by award-winning experts, Steve Mariotti and Caroline Glackin, Entrepreneurship and Small Business Management presents complex economic, financial and business concepts in a manner easily understood by a variety of students. Based on a proven curriculum from the Network for Teaching Entrepreneurship (NFTE), it is organized to follow the life-cycle of an entrepreneurial venturefrom concept through implementation to harvesting or replication. Filled with examples from a broad range of industries, it moves further into the entrepreneurial processdiscussing the business plan and also the unique aspects of managing and growing entrepreneurial ventures and small businesses.
Table of Contents
UNIT 1: WHAT BUSINESS DO YOU WANT TO START? 1. Entrepreneurs Recognize Opportunities 2. Franchising 3. Finding Opportunity in an Existing Business 4. The Business Plan: Road Map to Success Unit 1 Case Study: FastSigns UNIT 2: WHO ARE YOUR CUSTOMERS? 5. Creating Business from Opportunity 6. Exploring Your Market Unit 2 Case Study: Nicole Miller Ltd. UNIT 3: INTEGRATED MARKETING 7. Developing the Right Marketing Mix and Plan 8. Pricing and Credit Strategies 9. Integrated Marketing Communications 10. Marketing Globally 11. Smart Selling and Effective Customer Service Unit 3 Case Study: Ken Done Galleries UNIT 4: FINDING, SECURING, AND MANAGING FINANCIAL RESOURCES 12. Understanding and Managing Start-Up, Fixed, and Variable Costs 13. Using Financial Statements to Guide a Business 14. Cash Flow and Taxes 15. Financing Strategy: Debt, Equity, or Both? Unit 4 Case Study: Bridgecreek Development UNIT 5: OPERATING A SMALL BUSINESS EFFECTIVELY 16. Addressing Legal Issues and Managing Risk 17. Operating for Success 18. Location, Facilities and Layout 19. Human Resources and Management
154
Unit 5 Case Study: Mos Chowder UNIT 6: LEADERSHIP, ETHICS, AND EXITS 20. Leadership and Ethical Practices 21. Franchising, Licensing, and Harvesting: Cashing in the Brand Unit 6 Case Study: Avocent
Steve Mariotti, Network for Teaching Entrepreneurship Caroline Glackin, Shepherd University ISBN 10: 0132784084 ISBN 13: 9780132784085 592pp 2013 Cloth
Entrepreneurship: Starting and Operating a Small Business, 3/e
Basic Approach
For courses in Entrepreneurship, Small Business Management, and How to Start Your Own Business Courses in Continuing Education. Entrepreneurship: Starting and Operating A Small Business, Third Edition, demystifies the process of starting a business by presenting difficult economic, financial and business concepts in a manner easily understood by beginning business students. This edition is based on a proven curriculum from the Network For Teaching Entrepreneurship (NFTE) and includes new case studies, a new Honest Tea Business Plan, and more on topics such as cash flow and e-marketing. Drawing on the experience of Steve Mariotti and Caroline Glackin, students will begin building their business plan as soon as they open the text! In a step by step process students will learn how to start a small business, operate a small business and turn their ideas into viable business opportunities.
Table of Contents
UNIT I: ENTREPRENEURIAL PATHWAYS 1. Entrepreneurs Recognize Opportunities 2. The Business Plan: Road Map to Success The Honest Tea Business Plan 3. Creating Business from Opportunity Unit I Case Study: Nicole Miller Company UNIT II: INTEGRATED MARKETING 4. Exploring Your Market 5. Developing the Right Marketing Mix and Plan 6. Smart Selling and Effective Customer Service Unit II Case Study: Ken Done Studios UNIT III: SHOW ME THE MONEY: FINDING, SECURING, AND MANAGING IT 7. Understanding and Managing Start-Up, Fixed, and Variable Costs 8. Using Financial Statements to Guide a Business 9. Cash Flow and Taxes 10. Financing Strategy: Debt, Equity, or Both? Unit III: Case Study: FASTSIGNS UNIT IV: OPERATING A SMALL BUSINESS EFFECTIVELY 11. Addressing Legal Issues and Managing Risk 12. Operating for Success 13. Management, Leadership and Ethical Practices Unit III: Case Study: Mo's Chowder 14. Franchising, Licensing, and Harvesting: Cashing in Your Brand Unit IV: Case Study: Avocent APPENDIX I: HONEST TEA SAMPLE BUSINESS PLANANNOTATED APPENDIX II: SAMPLE STUDENT BUSINESS PLAN APPENDIX III: BIZBUILDER BUISINESS PLAN APPENDIX IV: RESOURCES FOR ENTREPRENEURS APPENDIX V: USEFUL FORMULAS AND EQUATIONS APPENDIX VI: ACCOUNTING JOURNAL DISTRIBUTION GUIDE APPENDIX VII: USING BUSINESS PLAN PRO APPENDIX VIII: GLOSSARY
Joseph J. Martocchio
Strategic Compensation: A Human Resource Management Approach, 7/e
For graduate and undergraduate courses in compensation, staffing, and human resources. The art and science of compensation practice. Strategic Compensation: A Human Resource Management Approach illustrates the art and science of
Basic Approach
155
compensation practice and its role in promoting a companys competitive advantage. The seventh edition was thoroughly revised, and now includes current statistics and a new chapter offering the latest information to compensation professionals.
Table of Contents
PART I: SETTING THE STAGE FOR STRATEGIC COMPENSATION 1. Strategic Compensation: A Component of Human Resource Systems 2. Contextual Influences on Compensation Practice PART II: BASES FOR PAY 3. Traditional Bases for Pay: Seniority and Merit 4. Incentive Pay 5. Person-Focused Pay PART III: DESIGNING COMPENSATION SYSTEMS 6. Building Internally Consistent Compensation Systems Workforce 7. Building Market-Competitive Compensation Systems 8. Building Pay Structures That Recognize Employee Contributions PART IV: EMPLOYEE BENEFITS 9. Discretionary Benefits 10. Employer-Sponsored Retirement Plans and Health Insurance Programs 11. Legally Required Benefits PART V: COMPENSATION CHALLENGES FOR STRATEGIC EMPLOYEE GROUPS 12. Compensating Executives 13. Compensating the Flexible: Contingent Employees and Flexible Work Schedules PART VI: COMPENSATION ISSUES AROUND THE WORLD 14. Compensating Expatriates 15. Pay and Benefits outside the United States EPILOGUE: 16. Challenges Facing Compensation Professionals
Management: A Focus on Leaders

Annie McKee ISBN 10: 0132478803 ISBN 13: 9780132478809 720pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For Principles of Management courses. We need leadership now. Financial crises, catastrophic disasters, and business scandals are constantly making todays headlines. Annie McKee, author of the new textbook Management: A Focus on Leaders, believes that amidst these issues we are experiencing a unique opportunity to add new fervor to the way we prepare students for the future. Directly addressing the challenges and opportunities in our changing world, Management: A Focus on Leaders shows future managers how to lead in a complex, yet exciting, global environment.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.
Managing and Leading Today: The New Rules The Leadership Imperative: Its Up to You Motivation and Meaning: What Makes People Want to Work? Communication: The Key to Resonant Relationships Planning and Strategy: Bringing the Vision to Life The Human Side of Planning: Decision Making and Critical Thinking Change: A Focus on Adaptability and Resiliency Workplace Essentials: Creativity, Innovation, and a Spirit of Entrepreneurship Organizing for a Complex World: Structure and Design Teams and Team Building: How to Work Effectively with Others Working in a Virtual Word: Technology as a Way of Life Organizational Controls: People, Processes, Quality, and Results Culture: Its Powerful Globalization: Managing Effectively in a Global Economic Environment Sustainability and Corporate Social Responsibility: Ensuring the Future Managing and Leading for Tomorrow: A Focus on Your Future
The Strategy Process, 5/e

Henry Mintzberg Sumantra Ghoshal
ISBN 10: 027371628X ISBN 13: 9780273716280 2013 Paper
156
Basic Approach
Strategic Management at all levels. Also courses in strategic marketing, organization theory, decision theory, public administration, and political science departments. Breaking away from the traditional formulation, implementation approach that dominates strategy textbooks, this text sees strategy analysis as taking place in a wider organizational and managerial context.
R. Wayne Mondy
Basic Approach
For undergraduate courses in Human Resources Management. The most student accessible HRM text on the market! There is no greater asset to a company than its employeeswhich is why Human Resource Management shows readers how to maximize a firms potential through identifying and keeping an ideal workforce. The twelfth edition addresses the changes in HR that have happened since the 2008 recession, as well as the expansive growth of social media. Over 900 new sources went into the development of this edition.
Table of Contents
PART ONE. INTRODUCTION 1. Strategic Human Resource Management: An Overview PART TWO. ETHICAL, SOCIAL, AND LEGAL CONSIDERATIONS 2. Business Ethics and Corporate Social Responsibility 3. Workforce Diversity, Equal Employment Opportunity, and Affirmative Action PART THREE. STAFFING 4. Job Analysis, Strategic Planning, and Human Resource Planning 5. Recruitment 6. Selection PART FOUR. HUMAN RESOURCE DEVELOPMENT 7. Training and Development Appendix 7Career Planning and Development 8. Performance Management and Appraisal PART FIVE. COMPENSATION 9. Direct Financial Compensation 10. Indirect Financial Compensation (Benefits) and Nonfinancial Compensation PART SIX. SAFETY AND HEALTH 11. A Safe and Healthy Work Environment PART SEVEN. EMPLOYEE AND LABOR RELATIONS 12. Labor Unions and Collective Bargaining Appendix 12History of Unions in the United States 13. Internal Employee Relations PART EIGHT. OPERATING IN A GLOBAL ENVIRONMENT 14. Global Human Resource Management
Essentials of Organisational Behaviour, 3/e

Laurie J. Mullins ISBN 10: 0273757342 ISBN 13: 9780273757344 528pp 2011 Paper
Basic Approach
This concise introduction to Organisational Behaviour has been developed specifically for short courses and/or non-specialist business students. It focuses on the core topics of the discipline in a detailed and engaging way, providing a readable introduction to the key theory and offering real-life examples to show its application in practice. Written for students on undergraduate and postgraduate degree programmes, this text is particularly suitable for students of non-business disciplines (e.g. engineering, IT, social sciences and others) who are taking an introductory module in business.
Table of Contents
PART 1: THE ORGANISATIONAL SETTING 1. Nature of Organisational Behaviour 2. Approaches to Organisation and Management PART 2: THE INDIVIDUAL 3. Individual Differences and Diversity 4. Perception and Communication 5. Work Motivation and Job Satisfaction
157
PART 3: GROUPS, TEAMS AND LEADERSHIP 6. Work Groups and Teams 7. Nature of Leadership 8. Nature of Management PART 4: THE ORGANISATION 9. Strategy and Structure 10. Control and Power 11. Corporate Responsibility and Ethics 12. Culture and Change
Afsaneh Nahavandi
Art and Science of Leadership, The, 6/e
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in leadership. Nahavandis text has an application emphasis with a cross cultural perspective on leadership.
Table of Contents
PART I: BUILDING BLOCKS 1. Definition and Significance of Leadership 2. The Global and Cultural Contexts 3. Early Theories: The Foundations of Modern Leadership 4. Individual Differences and Traits 5. Power PART II: CONTEMPORARY CONCEPTS 6. New Models of Leadership: Neo-Charisma, Inspiration and the Relationship with Followers 7. Other Leadership Perspectives: Upper Echelon and Leadership of Nonprofits PART III: LEADING 8. Participative Management and Leading Teams 9. Leading Change 10. Developing Leaders
Chris Neck Charles Manz
Mastering Self Leadership: Empowering Yourself for Personal Excellence, 6/e
Basic Approach
For courses in leadership or anyone interested in honing their leadership skills. It starts with youfollow the best path to effectively leading others. Mastering Self-Leadership is a comprehensive self-help guide thats thoroughly grounded in sound principles and research. The powerful advice and tools found in this text emphasize that proper self-leadership is a precursor for the effective leadership of others. This edition features new real-life examples and fresh coverage on corporate and entrepreneurial applications, social responsibility, emotional intelligence, and self-leadership.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
The Journey Mapping the Route Rough Roads, Detours, and Roadblocks Scenic Views, Sunshine, and the Joys of Traveling Travel Thinking Travel Thinking Continued... Team Self-Leadership Reviewing Travel Tales of Previous Journeys The Destination Fitness and Self-Leadership Finding the Path to Uniqueness The Journey Completed
158
Joyce S. Osland, San Jose State University Marlene E. Turner, San Jose State University David Kolb ISBN 10: 0132374730 ISBN 13: 9780132374736 736pp 2013 Paper
Organizational Behavior: An Experiential Approach, 9/e
Basic Approach
For courses in Organizational Behavior, Individual Behavior in Organizations, and Industrial Psychology. Reflecting the state of the art in the practice of experiential learning, Organizational Behavior: An Experiential Approach shows students the general psychological principles and how to apply those principles to social and organizational situations. It also teaches students how to become continuous learners, capable of responding to demands for change and new skills throughout their career.
Strategic Staffing, 2/e

Jean Phillips Stan Gully
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in Human Resources, Staffing, and HRM. Where the strategy of staffing and business align. Strategic Staffing prepares all current and future managers to take a strategic and modern approach to the identification, attraction, selection, deployment, and retention of talent. Grounded in research but full of realworld examples, this text describes how organizations can develop a staffing strategy that reinforces business strategy, leverages staffing technology, and evaluates and improves staffing systems. This edition includes new and relevant topics on staffing that students will be able to immediately apply in their future careersincluding a discussion on how Twitter and Facebook can be used for sourcing and managing staffing systems.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
Strategic Staffing Business and Staffing Strategies The Legal Context Strategic Job Analysis and Competency Modeling Forecasting and Planning Sourcing: Identifying Recruits Recruiting Measurement Assessing External Candidates Assessing Internal Candidates Choosing and Hiring Candidates Managing Workforce Flow Staffing System Evaluation and Technology
Management, 6/e
Stephen Robbins Rolf Bergman Ian Stagg Mary Coulter
ISBN 10: 1442538600 ISBN 13: 9781442538603 2012 Paper Inspire with Robbins Management 6e! We live in dynamic times and business as usual is no longer an option. Management students must be well prepared to manage modern, ever-changing organisations. The new 6th edition of Management is once again a resource at the leading edge of thinking and research for this dynamic discipline. Blending management theory with inspiring and innovative management practices, Robbins shows managers and organisations how to meet their economic, environmental and social responsibilities. Management 6e is accompanied by a flexible and completely revised suite of instructor and student resources designed to encourage critical thinking, make management concepts meaningful, and excite students about the possibilities of a career in management.
Basic Approach
159
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION 1. Introduction to organisations and management 2. Management yesterday and today PART 2: DEFINING THE MANAGERS TERRAIN 3. Environment and organisational culture: The constraints 4. Managing in a global environment 5. Social responsibility and managerial ethics 6. Managing change and innovation PART 3: PLANNING 7. Decision making: The essence of a managers job 8. Foundations of planning 9. Strategic management PART 4: ORGANISING 10. Organisational structure and design 11. Managers and communication 12. Human resource management PART 5: LEADING 13. Understanding individual behaviour 14. Understanding groups and teams 15. Motivating employees 16. Leadership PART 6: CONTROLLING 17. Foundations of control 18. Managing operations
Stephen P. Robbins Mary Coulter
Management, 11/e
Basic Approach
For Principles of Management courses. REAL Managers, REAL Experiences: Bring management theories to life! This bestselling principles text vividly illustrates management theories by incorporating the perspectives of reallife managers. Throughout this text, students will see and experience management in action, helping them understand how the concepts theyre reading about work in todays business world. The eleventh edition contains two new chapters on diversity and change, as well as updated information and scenarios featuring REAL managers at work. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
Part I: INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT 1. Management and Organizations Management History Module 2. Understanding Managements Context: Constraints and Challenges Part II: INTEGRATIVE MANAGERIAL ISSUES 3. Managing in a Global Environment 4. Managing Diversity 5. Managing Social Responsibility and Ethics 6. Managing Change and Innovation Part III: PLANNING 7. Managers as Decision Makers 8. Foundations of Planning Planning Tools and Techniques Module 9. Strategic Management Part IV: ORGANIZING 10. Basic Organizational Design 11. Adaptive Organizational Design 12. Managing Human Resources Managing Your Career Module 13. Managing Teams Part V: LEADING 14. Understanding Individual Behavior 15. Managers and Communication 16. Motivating Employees 17. Managers as Leaders Part VI: CONTROLLING 18. Introduction to Controlling 19. Managing Operations
160
Stephen Robbins David A. De Cenzo Mary Coulter
Fundamentals of Management, 8/e
Basic Approach
For Principles of Management courses. The practical tools of management presented through in-depth practice. Robbins/DeCenzo/Coulter is a brief, paperback text that gives students more depth and breadth with practical tools to practice their management skills than any other textbook. The eighth edition provides a self-contained section on developing management skills and includes new exercises, modules, and boxes.
Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION 1. Managers and Management Module: A Brief History of Management's Roots 2. The Management Environment 3. Integrative Managerial Issues PLANNING 4. Foundations of Decision Making Module: Quantitative Decision-Making Aids 5. Foundations of Planning ORGANIZING 6. Organization Structure 7. Managing Human Resources Module: Managing Your Career 8. Managing Change and Innovation LEADING 9. Foundations of Individual Behavior 10. Understanding Groups and Managing Work Teams 11. Motivating and Rewarding Employees 12. Leadership and Trust 13. Managing Communication and Information CONTROLLING 14. Foundations of Control 15. Operations Management Module: Managing Entrepreneurial Ventures
Stephen Robbins David A. DeCenzo Mary Coulter Megan Woods
Management: The Essentials
ISBN 10: 1442533625 ISBN 13: 9781442533622 2012 Paper Making Management Manageable This brand new text covers essential Management concepts in a fresh, lively format thats perfectly suited to a typical university semester. Management: The Essentials is packed with examples from Australasian businesses big and small, private and public and promises: a rigorous and engaging introduction to the essential management principles, theories and practices an understanding of why these principles are important and relevant to you (whether or not you ever become a manager) a clear, easy-to-read design which breaks material into manageable sections designed for maximum comprehension a clear set of examples and exercises designed to help you start developing the skills to become the manager you want to be.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION 1. Managers and management History module A brief history of management theory 2. The external management environment PART 2: PLANNING 3. Foundations of decision making 4. Foundations of planning Entrepreneurship module Managing entrepreneurial ventures PART 3: ORGANISING 5. Organisational structure and culture
161
6. Managing human resources 7. Managing change and innovation PART 4: LEADING 8. Foundations of individual behaviour 9. Understanding groups and managing work teams 10. Motivating and rewarding employees 11. Leadership and trust 12. Communication and interpersonal skills PART 5: CONTROLLING 13. Foundations of control
Stephen P. Robbins, San Diego State University David A. DeCenzo, Coastal Carolina University Robert Wolter ISBN 10: 0132784033 ISBN 13: 9780132784030 504pp 2013 Cloth
Supervision Today!, 7/e
Basic Approach
Appropriate for Supervision, Supervision Management, and Intro to Management. Supervision Today has earned a reputation of being the one of the most effective supervision books because it blends traditional and contemporary topics, as well as theories and experiential skills. Offering a three-tier learning system, it focuses on building readers knowledge, improving their comprehension and applying concepts directly to skill development. Known for its lively tone and four-color design, it captures the latest in supervision literature and includes cases to invigorate any lecture. This edition includes new information on contingent workforces, entrepreneurship, employee theft, work/life balance, IM, texting, and workplace diversity.
Table of Contents
PART I: DEFINING SUPERVISION AND SUPERVISORY CHALLENGES 1. Supervision Definitions 2. Supervision Challenges PART II: PLANNING, ORGANIZING, STAFFING, CONTROLLING, AND DECISION-MAKING 3. Planning and Goal Setting 4. Organizing 5. Staffing and Recruiting 6. Controlling 7. Problem Analysis an Decision Making PART III: MOTIVATING, LEADING, COMMUNICATING, AND DEVELOPING 8. Motivating Followers 9. Leading Followers 10. Communicating Effectively 11. Developing Groups PART IV: APPRAISAL, SAFETY, NEGOTIATION, CHANGE, AND LABOR RELATIONS 12. Performance Appraisal 13. Workplace Health and Safety 14. Conflict, Politics, Discipline, and Negotiation 15. Change Management 16. Supervision and Labor POSTSCRIPT: PERSONAL DEVELOPMENT
Stephen P. Robbins, San Diego State University Phillip L. Hunsaker ISBN 10: 0132778432 ISBN 13: 9780132778435 416pp 2012 Paper
Training in Interpersonal Skills: TIPS for Managing People at Work, 6/e
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in organizational behavior and human resources. An applied approach to developing and practicing interpersonal skills. By developing and practicing the material in Training in Interpersonal Skills, students can learn how to build productive relationships for any situation. This text also helps students master the skills necessary for personal and organizational effectiveness such as self-management, communication, teaming, and problem solving. The sixth edition includes several new pedagogical toolssuch as self-assessment quizzes, exercises, cases, etc. and information on the importance and usage of social networking.
Table of Contents
PART I: SELF-AWARENESS 1. Skills: An Introduction 2. Self-Awareness: A Point of Departure 3. Self-Management: Clarifying Values, Setting Goals, and Planning
162
4. Applying Emotional Intelligence PART II: COMMUNICATING 5. Sending Interpersonal Messages 6. Listening and Reading Nonverbal Messages 7. Providing Feedback 8. Communicating Across Cultures PART III: MOTIVATING 9. Goal Setting 10. Coaching, Counseling, and Mentoring 11. Empowering People Through Delegation PART IV: LEADING 12. Politicking 13. Persuading 14. Applying Leadership Style 15. Managing Change PART V: TEAMING 16. Facilitating Teamwork 17. Valuing Diversity PART VI: PROBLEM SOLVING 18. Ethical Decision Making 19. Creative Problem Solving 20. Resolving Conflicts 21. Negotiating PART VII: INTEGRATING EXERCISES
Essentials of Organizational Behavior, 11/e

Stephen P. Robbins Timothy A. Judge
Basic Approach
For one-semester undergraduate and graduate level courses in Organizational Behavior. Concise fundamentals for students. Ultimate flexibility for instructors. This bestselling, brief alternative for the OB course covers all the key concepts needed to understand, predict, and respond to the behavior of people in real-world organizations. This text also includes cutting-edge topics and streamlined pedagogy to allow maximum flexibility in designing and shaping your course. The eleventh edition contains expanded and updated coverage on international issues, as well as new sections on the management of information, safety and emotions at work, risk aversion, self-determination theory, managing information, and downsizing. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART 1: PROLOGUE 1. Introduction to Organizational Behavior PART 2: THE INDIVIDUAL IN THE ORGANIZATION 2. Attitudes and Job Satisfaction 3. Emotion and Moods 4. Personality and Values 5. Perception and Individual Decision Making 6. Motivation Concepts 7. Motivation: From Concept to Application PART 3: GROUPS IN THE ORGANIZATION 8. Foundations of Group Behavior 9. Understanding Work Teams 10. Communication 11. Leadership 12. Power and Politics 13. Conflict and Negotiation PART 4: THE ORGANIZATION SYSTEM 14. Foundations of Organization Structure 15. Organizational Culture 16. Organizational Change and Stress Management
163
Organizational Behavior, 15/e

Stephen P. Robbins Timothy A. Judge
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in Organizational Behavior. Captivate the class with a clear writing style, cutting-edge content, and compelling pedagogy. Robbins/Judge provides the research you want, in the language your students understand. This text continues its tradition of making current, relevant research come alive for students. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART 1: INTRODUCTION 1. What Is Organizational Behavior? PART 2: THE INDIVIDUAL 2. Diversity in Organizations 3. Attitudes and Job Satisfaction 4. Emotions and Moods 5. Personality and Values 6. Perception and Individual Decision Making 7. Motivation Concepts 8. Motivation: From Concepts to Applications PART 3: THE GROUP 9. Foundations of Group Behavior 10. Understanding Work Teams 11. Communication 12. Leadership 13. Power and Politics 14. Conflict and Negotiation PART 4: THE ORGANIZATION SYSTEM 15. Foundations of Organization Structure 16. Organizational Culture 17. Human Resource Policies and Practices 18. Organizational Change and Stress Management
Organisational Behaviour and Analysis: An Integrated Approach, 5/e

Derek Rollinson ISBN 10: 0273756680 ISBN 13: 9780273756682 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
A comprehensive introduction to Organisational Behaviour, steering a neutral path through the sociological, psychological and managerial approaches to the discipline. It balances coverage of the micro (organisational behaviour) with the macro (organisational analysis) level issues, with a cross-cultural theme running through the book. It is written for students on undergraduate and postgraduate degree programmes in business, or business-related disciplines.

Alan M. Rugman Simon Collinson
Basic Approach
International Business provides students with a comprehensive introduction to International Business from authors at the forefront of research in international and strategic management. Taking a regional approach, this text challenges some of the underlying assumptions behind globalization and focuses on both the dominant economies the EU, the US and Japan as well as emerging markets in world trade, such as Brazil, India and China. The book also integrates analysis of the competitive environment and the internal resources of the firm to provide a strategic view of international business.
164
The book is written for students on undergraduate and postgraduate degree programmes in business, or business-related disciplines.
Table of Contents
PART ONE: THE WORLD OF INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS 1. Regional and Global Strategy 2. The Multinational Enterprise 3. The Triad and International Business PART TWO: THE ENVRIRONMENT OF INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS 4. International Politics 5. International Culture 6. International Trade 7. International Financial Markets and Institutions PART THREE: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS STRATEGIES 8. Multinational Strategy 9. Organizing Strategy 10. Corporate Strategy and National Competitiveness 11. Innovation, Entrepreneurship and "Born Global" Firms PART FOUR: FUNCTIONAL AREA STRATEGIES 12. Production Strategy 13. Marketing Strategy 14. Human Resource Management Strategy 15. Political Risk and Negotiation Strategy 16. International Financial Management PART FIVE: REGIONAL STRATEGIES 17. European Union 18. Japan 19. North America 20. Emerging Economics 21. China 22. Corporate Ethics and the Natural Environment
Doing Research in Business & Management: An Essential Guide to Planning Your Project
Mark N.K. Saunders Philip Lewis
Basic Approach
Doing Research in Business & Management brings the theory and techniques of research methods to life and covers all of the areas of research, from a review of secondary data or literature, or writing a research proposal, to completing an entire research project. The book is written for students on undergraduate and postgraduate degree programmes in business, management or related disciplines.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Choosing your research topic Reviewing the literature Managing the research process Using secondary data Choosing your research design Collecting data Analysing data Writing and presenting the research proposal
Research Methods for Business Students, 6/e

Mark N.K. Saunders Philip Lewis Adrian Thornhill
Basic Approach
A comprehensive introduction to research methods in business for students planning or undertaking a dissertation or extensive research project in business and management. The sixth edition of Research Methods for Business Students brings the theory, philosophy and techniques of research to life and enables students to understand the practical relevance of the research methods. A highly accessible style and logical structure have made this the student choice and run-away market leader. The book is written for students on undergraduate and postgraduate degree programmes in business, or business-related disciplines.
165
Table of Contents
1. Business and management research, reflective diaries and the purpose of this book Case 1: Reporting evidence from Business and Management research 2. Formulating and clarifying the research topic Case 2: Self-service technology: Does co-production harm value creation 3. Critically reviewing the literature Case 3: Individual workplace performance: systematically reviewed 4. Understanding research philosophies and approaches Case 4: Organisational learning in an English regional theatre 5. Formulating the research design Case 5: Sangitas career 6. Negotiating access and research ethics Case 6: The impact of colour on childrens brand choices 7. Selecting samples Case 7:Comparing UK and French perceptions and expectations of online supermarket shopping 8. Using secondary data Case 8: Trust repair in a major finance company 9. Collecting primary data through observation Case 9: Strategy options in a mature market 10. Collecting primary data using semi-structured, in-depth and group interviews Case 10: Organisations in a flash? 11. Collecting primary data using questionnaires Case 11: A quantitative evaluation of students desire for self employment 12. Analysing quantitative data Case 12: Food miles, carbon footprints and supply chains 13. Analysing qualitative data Case 13: Creating environmentally friendly office spaces 14. Writing and presenting your project report Case 14: Clares research project presentation
Norman M. Scarborough ISBN 10: 0132378159 ISBN 13: 9780132378154 888pp 2012 Paper
Effective Small Business Management, 10/e
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate courses in entrepreneurship and/or small business management. Discover how to successfully launch and manage a small business. Open your students minds to the possibilities, challenges, and rewards of becoming a small business owner with Effective Small Business Management. This text provides students with the tools they need in order to launch and manage a small business. This edition features new and current examples, updated information on ethics and social responsibility, and several new pedagogical features.
Table of Contents
SECTION 1: THE CHALLENGE OF ENTREPRENEURSHIP 1. Entrepreneurs: The Driving Force behind Small Business SECTION 2: BUILDING THE BUSINESS PLAN: BEGINNING CONSIDERATIONS 2. Strategic Management and the Entrepreneur 3. Choosing a Form of Ownership 4. Franchising and the Entrepreneur 5. Buying an Existing Business 6. Conducting a Feasibility Analysis and Crafting a Winning Business Plan SECTION 3: BUILDING A BUSINESS PLAN: FINANCIAL ISSUES 7. Creating a Solid Financial Plan 8. Managing Cash Flow SECTION 4: BUILDING A BUSINESS PLAN: MARKETING YOUR COMPANY 9. Building a Guerrilla Marketing Plan 10. Creative Use of Advertising and Promotion 11. Pricing and Credit Strategies 12. Global Marketing Strategies 13. E-Commerce and Entrepreneurship SECTION 5: PUTTING THE BUSINESS PLAN TO WORK: FINDING FINANCING 14. Sources of Equity Financing 15. Sources of Debt Financing SECTION 6: LOCATION AND LAYOUT 16. Location, Layout, and Physical Facilities SECTION 7: MANAGING A SMALL BUSINESS: TECHNIQUES FOR ENHANCING PROFITABILITY 17. Supply Chain Management 18. Managing Inventory SECTION 8: MANAGING PEOPLE: A COMPANYS MOST VALUABLE RESOURCE 19. Staffing and Leading a Growing Company SECTION 9: LEGAL ASPECTS OF SMALL BUSINESS: SUCCESSION, ETHICS, AND GOVERNMENT REGULATION
166
20. Management Succession and Risk Management Strategies in the Family Business 21. Ethics and Social Responsibility: Doing the Right Thing 22. The Legal Environment: Business Law and Government Regulation
Managing Across Cultures, 3/e

Susan Schneider Jean-Louis Barsoux Eric Davoine
ISBN 10: 0273746324 ISBN 13: 9780273746324 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
MBA and executive International Management; MBA and executive International Business; MBA/postgraduate modules in cross-cultural management, intercultural communication or intercultural management; undergraduate and postgraduate degree programs in international business or management. This very accessible book draws upon a broad and growing literature on culture and management to discover national differences in management practice. It clearly relates cultural differences to daily business practice by using many and varied examples. Diverse range of topics covered, from structure and strategy to social responsibility and ethics.
Implementing Organizational Change: Theory into Practice, 3/e

Bert Spector, Northeastern University ISBN 10: 0132970171 ISBN 13: 9780132970174 208pp 2013 Paper
For both practitioners and students of change management. Learn how to be a leader in business by spearheading change in your organization, a vital skill for every executive. Implementing Organizational Change: Theory into Practice provides a framework upon which readers can understand and analyze effective change management. This edition has been significantly enhanced based on recommendations for reviewers and users, and includes new research, a new chapter, and several new cases.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Organizational Change Theories of Effective Change Implementation Mutual Engagement and Shared Diagnosis Organizational Redesign People Alignment Reinforcing New Behaviors Leading Change Going Green
Larry Suffield, Lambton College Andrew Templer, University of Windsor ISBN 10: 0132626322 ISBN 13: 9780132626323 400pp 2012 Paper
Labour Relations, 3/e
Basic Approach
Appropriate for labour relations, industrial relations, and collective bargaining courses. An excellent resource for anyone intending to pursue Certified Human Resources Professional (CHRP) Certification, this new edition now links the content directly to the Required Professional Capabilities (PCs) necessary for certification. Exploring the complex world of labour contracts and negotiations while balancing practical techniques with cotemporary analysis of the newest changes in the field, this new edition makes learning about labour relations easy and interesting. Numerous real-life examples, cases, practical strategies and comprehensive analysis provide you with the skills necessary to make sense of labour relations today.
Table of Contents
1.
Introduction to Labour Relations
167
2. The Environment 3. Unions: Objectives, Processes, Structure, and History 4. Employers: Objectives, Processes, and Strategy 5. Governments, Labour Relations Boards, and Other Parties 6. Collective Bargaining Rights Appendix to Chapter 6 Collective Bargaining Rights Appendices 7. The Collective Agreement 8. Negotiation of the Collective Agreement 9. Administration of the Collective Agreement 10. Contract Dispute Resolution, Strikes, and Lockouts Appendix to Chapter 10 Third-Party Assistance in Contract Disputes 11. Public Sector Labour Relations 12. Summary and Future of Labour Relations Appendix A: Cases Appendix B: Grievance and Arbitration Appendix C: Contract Negotiation Simulation Appendix D: Canadian Council of Human Resources Associations Required Professional Capabilities
Leigh Thompson
Mind and Heart of the Negotiator, The, 5/e
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate-level business courses that cover the skills of negotiation. Delve into the mind and heart of the negotiator in order to enhance negotiation skills. The Mind and Heart of the Negotiator is dedicated to negotiators who want to improve their ability to negotiatewhether in multimillion-dollar business deals or personal interactions. This text provides an integrated view of what to do and what to avoid at the bargaining table, facilitated by an integration of theory, scientific research, and practical examples. This edition contains new examples and chapter-opening sections, as well as more than a hundred new scientific articles on negotiations.
Table of Contents
PART I: ESSENTIALS OF NEGOTIATION 1. Negotiation: The Mind and the Heart 2. Preparation: What to Do before Negotiation 3. Distributive Negotiation: Slicing the Pie 4. Win-Win Negotiation: Expanding the Pie PART II: ADVANCED NEGOTIATION SKILLS 5. Developing a Negotiating Style 6. Establishing Trust and Building a Relationship 7. Power, Persuasion, and Ethics 8. Creativity and Problem Solving in Negotiations PART III: APPLICATIONS AND SPECIAL SCENARIOS 9. Multiple Parties, Coalitions, and Teams 10. Cross-Cultural Negotiation 11. Tacit Negotiations and Social Dilemmas 12. Negotiating via Information Technology APPENDICES Appendix 1: Are You a Rational Person? Check Yourself Appendix 2: Nonverbal Communication and Lie Detection Appendix 3: Third-Party Intervention Appendix 4: Negotiating a Job Offer

Derek Torrington Stephen Taylor Laura Hall Carol Atkinson
Basic Approach
This best selling textbook provides a comprehensive introduction to human resource management, covering all the main areas of HRM practice as well as the key skills that HR practitioners will need. The book is written from a practical perspective in a clear and engaging style. It includes full coverage of operational issues and introduces the major academic debates of relevance to the field. It is written as an introduction for students of HRM at all levels, including those on CIPD courses.
168
Table of Contents
PART I: INTRODUCTION 1. The nature of Human Resource Management 2. Strategic Human Resource Management 3. Planning: jobs and people 4. The international dimension PART II: RESOURCING 5. Strategic aspects of resourcing 6. Contracts, contractors and consultants 7. Recruitment 8. Selection methods and decisions 9. Staff retention 10. Ending the contract PART III: PERFORMANCE 11. Strategic aspects of performance 12. Organisational performance: knowledge and learning 13. Employee Performance Management 14. Leadership and change management 15. Managing absence and attendance PART IV: DEVELOPMENT 16. Strategic aspects of development 17. Context, competence and competencies 18. Learning and development 19. Career development PART V: EMPLOYEE RELATIONS 20. Strategic aspects of employee relations 21. Employee involvement 22. Health, safety and welfare 23. The legal framework for equality 24. Equal opportunities and diversity 25. Grievance and discipline PART VI: REWARD 26. Strategic aspects of reward 27. Salaries 28. Incentives 29. Pensions and benefits PART VII: EMERGING ISSUES 30. Ethics and corporate social responsibility 31. Work-life balance 32. The changing HR function 33. Information Technology and Human Capital Measurement 34. The future of work PART VIII: FOCUS ON SKILLS
Training in Australia, 4/e

Michael Tovey Diane Lawlor
ISBN 10: 144253902X ISBN 13: 9781442539020 2011 Paper
Basic Approach
The essential resource for trainers and assessors Training in Australia continues to examine the impact of important developments in the training industry and the many changes this brings to the workplace. By finding the right mix of enthusiasm, content, techniques and approaches, Training in Australia continues to make the path to training excellence a little clearer for all. This highly respected text, now in its 4th edition, has been updated and revised to include coverage of the: TAE10 Training and Education Training Package 2010 AQTF Essential Conditions and Standards for Continuing Registration
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Context of training in Australia Plan effective learning Analyse training need Design and develop training Assess training Deliver training Validate training Manage training
169
Entrepreneurship: Perspectives and Cases

Paul Westhead Gerard McElwee Mike Wright
Basic Approach
Entrepreneurship is a hot topic, yet there is no agreed definition of entrepreneurship. There is even debate about whether entrepreneurship can be taught! This text and case study collection is designed to stimulate critical thinking and reflective learning relating to entrepreneurship. This book enables you to focus on the key issues that need to be considered with regard to new ventures and/or a business plan module, as well as courses on theory and policy relating to entrepreneurship and small businesses.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
Introduction: Context Issues and Case Study Selection Contributions of Entrepreneurial Firms Theoretical Insights: Economic Approaches Theoretical Insights: Sociological and Psychological Approaches Types of Entrepreneurs I: Habitual Entrepreneurs Types of Entrepreneurs II: High Technology and Academic Entrepreneurs Types of Organizations I: Family Firms Types of Organizations II: Corporate Entrepreneurship Types of Organizations III: Management Buy-Outs Types of Organizations IV: Social Entrepreneurship External Environmental Context for Enterprise Entrepreneurial Finance International Entrepreneurship Venture Development and Performance
Thomas L. Wheelen J. David Hunger, Iowa State University ISBN 10: 0132570203 ISBN 13: 9780132570206 912pp 2012 Paper
Strategic Management and Business Policy: Toward Global Sustainability, 13/e
Basic Approach
For Strategic Management and Business Policy courses. Class-tested approach to Strategy with new focus on environmental sustainability. Wheelen and Hungers class-tested approach to teaching Strategy is brought into sharper focus with a new theme: environmental sustainability. By bringing the sustainability theme into focus, this text equips students with the strategic concepts they will need to know as they face issues such as climate change, global warming and energy availability. This thirteenth edition provides students with an array of timely, well-researched, and class-tested cases nineteen of which are new or revised. Also Available: Concepts in Strategic Management and Business Policy: Toward Global Sustainability, 13/e ISBN 10: 0132570211 ISBN 13: 9780132570213 440pp 2012 Paper
Table of Contents
PART ONE: INTRODUCTION TO STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT AND BUSINESS POLICY 1. Basic Concepts in Strategic Management 2. Corporate Governance 3. Ethics and Social Responsibility in Strategic Management PART TWO: SCANNING THE ENVIRONMENT 4. Environmental Scanning & Industry Analysis 5. Internal Scanning & Organizational Analysis PART THREE: STRATEGY FORMULATION 6. Strategy Formulation: Situation Analysis & Business Strategy 7. Strategy Formulation: Corporate Strategy 8. Strategy Formulation: Functional Strategy & Strategic Choice PART FOUR: STRATEGY IMPLEMENTATION AND CONTROL 9. Strategy Implementation: Organizing for Action 10. Strategy Implementation: Staffing & Directing 11. Evaluation & Control PART FIVE: INTRODUCTION TO CASE ANALYSIS 12. Suggestions for Case Analysis PART SIX: WEB CHAPTERS: OTHER STRATEGIC ISSUES
170
Web Chapter A. Strategic Issues in Managing Technology & Innovation Web Chapter B. Strategic Issues in Entrepreneurial Ventures & Small Businesses Web Chapter C. Strategic Issues in Not-For-Profit Organizations PART SEVEN: CASES IN STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT Section A. Corporate Governance and Social Responsibility Case 1: The Recalcitrant Director at Byte Products, Inc.: Corporate Legality versus Corporate Responsibility Case 2: The Wallace Group 4 Section B. Business Ethics Case 3: Everyone Does It Case 4: The Audit Section C. International Issues in Strategic Management Case 5: Starbucks Coffee Company: The India Dilemma Case 6: Guajilote Cooperativo Forestal: Honduras Section D. General Issues in Strategic Management Case 7: Apple, Inc. Case 8: iRobot: Finding the Right Market Mix? Case 9: Dell, Inc., Changing the Business Model (Mini Case) Case 10: Rosetta Stone Inc., Changes the Way People Learn Languages Case 11: Logitech (Mini Case) Case 12: Google Case 13: Reorganizing Yahoo Case 14: TiVo, Inc: TiVo vs. Cable and Satellite DVR Can VO Survive? Case 15: Marvel Entertainment Case 16: Carnival Corporation & plc Case 17: Chrysler in Trouble Case 18: Tesla Motors, Inc. Case 19: Harley Davidson: Thriving Through Recession Case 20: JetBlue: Always Growing Pains? Case 21: TomTom: New Competition Everywhere! Case 22: Volcom Inc.: Riding the Wave Case 23: TOMS Shoes Case 24: Best Buy Co., Inc.: Sustainable Customer Centricity Model? Case 25: The Future of Gap Inc. Case 26: Rocky Mountain Chocolate Factory, Inc. Case 27: Dollar General Corporation: 2011 Growth Expansion Plans Case 28: Inner-City Paint Corporation (Revised) Case 29: The Carey Plant Case 30: The Boston Beer Company: Brewers of Samuel Adams Boston Lager Case 31: Wal-Mart and Vlasic Pickles Case 32: Panera Bread Company (2010): Still Rising Fortunes? Case 33: Whole Food Market 2010: How to Grow in An Increasingly Competitive Market? Case 34: Burger King Case 35: Church & Dwight: Time to Rethink the Portfolio
Management Consulting: Delivering an Effective Project, 4/e

Philip Wickham Louise Wickham
Basic Approach
Management Consulting remains a popular career choice but undertaking a consulting project for the first time can seem a daunting prospect for any student or new professional. This book, now in its fourth edition, aims specifically to guide you through the process of management consultancy, while also providing tips and techniques for the more seasoned practitioner. The authors and contributors, who all have been consultants, deliver this from their accumulated knowledge and insights. Anybody studying management consulting or undertaking a consulting project will benefit from the ideas contained inside this book.
Table of Contents
PART ONE: MANAGEMENT CONSULTING IN CONTEXT AND HOW IT ADDS VALUE 1. The nature of management consulting and how it adds value 2. Consulting: the wider context and consulting process 3. The skills of the consultant and the project proposal 4. Consulting across borders and cultures Robinson Mason case study: Part 1 PART TWO: PROJECT EVALUATION AND ANALYSIS 5. Defining the destination, developing a strategy and understanding change 6. Evaluating client capabilities and business opportunities 7. Working with clients and teams: the 'soft skills' Robinson Mason case study: Part 2 PART THREE: UNDERTAKING THE PROJECT 8. Working with the client 9. Creative approaches for developing solutions
171
10. Analysing decision-making in the client business and the decision context 11. Consulting project planning and time management Robinson Mason case study: Part 3 PART FOUR: DELIVERING THE PRODUCT TO THE CLIENT 12. Communication skills and presenting your ideas 13. Learning from success 14. Consulting as a career Appendix: Example of a consulting report

John J. Wild Kenneth L. Wild
Basic Approach
For introductory International Business courses with the need for a brief, accessible text. A readable, concise, and innovative tour through the study of international business. International Business: The Challenges of Globalization presents international business in a comprehensive yet concise framework with unrivaled clarity. Real-world examples and engaging features help to bring the concepts to life and make international business accessible for all students. The sixth edition captures and explains the influence of the global credit crisis and recent recession on international business, while also emphasizing its focus on the crucial role of emerging markets in todays global marketplace. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART 1: GLOBAL BUSINESS ENVIRONMENTS 1. Globalization PART 2: NATIONAL BUSINESS ENVIRONMENTS 2. Cross-Cultural Business 3. Politics, Law, and Business Ethics 4. Economics and Emerging Markets PART 3: INTERNATIONAL TRADE AND INVESTMENT 5. International Trade 6. Business-Government Trade Relations 7. Foreign Direct Investment 8. Regional Economic Integration PART 4: THE INTERNATIONAL FINANCIAL SYSTEM 9. International Financial Markets 10. International Monetary System PART 5: INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MANAGEMENT 11. International Strategy and Organization 12. Analyzing International Opportunities 13. Selecting and Managing Entry Modes 14. Developing and Marketing Products 15. Managing International Operations 16. Hiring and Managing Employees
Nicolay Worren
Organisation Design
Basic Approach
Organization Design is part of every manager and leaders job: attempting to understand and improve how organizations function through creating or adjusting of roles, processes, and structures. In fact, most managers are faced with organization design challenges on an almost daily basis. Managers constantly design and redesign individual roles, define new projects (including their structure and reporting relationships), and contemplate better ways to co-ordinate organizational processes with multiple internal stakeholders. Periodically they may also make more fundamental changes to business structures, or adapt and implement high-level designs developed by others. This textbook introduces concepts and frameworks for designing complex organizations. It starts by outlining some of the key concepts that serve as a foundation to understanding how the theory applies in practice. It also reviews the status of organisation design - as a field of research and as a practical discipline - both its achievements, and some of its challenges and limitations. It then discusses how the field can develop to ensure that it provides research-based and useful knowledge that contributes to enhancing the effectiveness of
172
organizations.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Why design matters Organisational complexity Managing the organisation design process Designing multidimensional organizations Designing sub-units Structuring vertical layers Configuring interfaces Rooting out complexity
George S. Yip, China Europe International Business School G. Tomas M. Hult, Michigan State University ISBN 10: 0132374722 ISBN 13: 9780132374729 350pp 2012 Paper
Total Global Strategy, 3/e
For graduate courses in International Business, Competitive Strategy, International Marketing, and Strategic Management. A uniquely integrated view of the global strategy issues facing firms today. Written by the subject's leading academic authorities, this highly readable text (a student favorite) addresses the most challenging task faced by multinational companieshow to deal with globalization and the resulting need for globally integrated strategies. The third editionin addition to featuring new coauthor Tomas Hultpresents a complete rewrite of all chapters, a more integrated view of eBusiness and service issues, and a new slate of innovative, practical examples in the text and case vignettes.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
1. Understanding Global Strategy 2. Diagnosing Industry Globalization Potential 3. Building Global Market Participation 4. Designing Global Products and Services 5. Locating Global Activities 6. Creating Global Marketing 7. Making Global Competitive Moves 8. Building the Global Organization 9. Regional Strategy 10. Measuring Industry Drivers, Strategy Levers, Organization Factors, and Regional Focus 11. Conducting a Global Strategy Analysis Appendix: Worksheets for Evaluating Core Strategy
Gary A. Yukl
Leadership in Organizations, 8/e
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate-level courses in Leadership. An exploration of what makes an effective leader. Leadership in Organizations provides a balance of theory and practice as it surveys the major theories and research on leadership and managerial effectiveness in formal organizations. The eighth edition includes new examples, citations, and guidelines, and has been enhanced for better clarity and presentation. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Introduction Managerial Work Effective Leadership Behavior Leading Change and Innovation Participative Leadership and Empowerment Leadership Traits and Skills Contingency Theories and Adaptive Leadership Power and Influence Tactics
173
9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.
Dyadic Relations and Followers Leadership in Groups and Teams Strategic Leadership in Organizations Charismatic and Transformational Leadership Ethical, Servant, Spiritual, and Authentic Leadership Cross-cultural Leadership and Diversity Developing Leadership Skills Overview and Integration
174
Marketing
International Marketing and Export Management, 7/e
Gerald Albaum Edwin Duerr
Basic Approach
International Marketing and Export Management 7e offers an accessible and authoritative perspective on international marketing with a strong export management orientation, comprehensively describing the evolving competitive landscape as created by technological advances and international trade patterns. The seventh edition retains its clear and informed coverage of the opportunities for companies of all sizes and in all industries in the export of goods, services, intellectual property and business models. Written in a no-nonsense style, the book has been updated to offer the most up-to-date discussion of the literature in the area, as well as new and engaging cases and examples in every chapter.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.
International Marketing and Exporting Bases of International Marketing The International Environment: Culture, Economic and Competition The International Environment: Government, Political and Legal forces Export Market Selection: Definition and Strategies Information for International Market(ing) Decisions Market Entry Strategies Export Entry Modes Non-export Entry Modes Product Decisions Pricing Decisions Financing and Methods of Payment Promotion and Marketing Communication Handling Export Orders and Supply Chain Management Organization of International Marketing Activities
Principles of Marketing, 5/e

Gary Armstrong Stewart Adam Sara Denize Phillip Kotler
ISBN 10: 144253110X ISBN 13: 9781442531109 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Collaboration. Value Creation. Never content to rest on our laurels, during 2009 and 2010 we undertook a rigorous revision of the 4th Australian edition of Principles of Marketing. We collaborated with a total of 63 academics who reviewed, critiqued and provided suggestions to evolve the 5th Australian edition into an unsurpassed teaching and learning solution. We also collaborated with students who helped design the new cover. The 5th edition of Principles of Marketing makes the road to learning and teaching marketing more effective, easier, and more enjoyable than ever. Its streamlined approach strikes a careful balance between depth of coverage and ease of learning. The 5th editions brand new learning designwith an integrative Concept Map at the start of each chapter, and insightful author comments throughoutenhances student understanding. When combined with a completely new MyMarketingLab, our online homework study tool, Principles of Marketing ensures that your students will come to class well prepared and leave class with a richer understanding of core marketing concepts, strategies, and practices. We have thoroughly updated the 5th edition of Principles of Marketing to reflect the major trends and forces that marketing must take into account in this era of customer value and relationships. PART 1: DEFINING MARKETING AND THE MARKETING PROCESS 1. Marketing: Creating and Capturing Customer Value 2. Company and Marketing Strategy: Partnering to Build Customer Relationships PART 2: UNDERSTANDING THE MARKETPLACE AND CONSUMERS 3. Analysing the Marketing Environment 4. Managing Marketing Information to Gain Customer Insights 5. Understanding Consumer and Business Buyer Behaviour PART 3: DESIGNING A CUSTOMER-DRIVEN STRATEGY AND MIX 6. Customer-Driven Marketing Strategy: Creating Value for Target Customers 7. Products, Services and Brands: Building Customer Value 8. Developing New Products and Managing the Product Life Cycle 9. Pricing to Capture Customer Value
Table of Contents
175
10. Placement: Customer Value Fulfilment 11. Communicating Customer Value: Advertising and Public Relations 12. Personal Selling and Sales Promotion 13. Direct and Digital Marketing: Building One-to-One Customer Relationships PART 4: EXTENDED MARKETING 14. Sustainable Marketing: Social Responsibility, Ethics and Legal Compliance Appendix 1 Marketing Metrics Spotlights Appendix 2 The Marketing Plan: An Introduction
Marketing: An Introduction, 11/e

Gary Armstrong Philip Kotler
For undergraduate Principles of Marketing courses. This best-selling, brief text introduces marketing through the lens of creating value for customers. Todays marketing is about creating customer value and building profitable customer relationships. With engaging real-world examples and information, Marketing: An Introduction shows students how customer valuecreating it and capturing itdrives every effective marketing strategy.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
PART 1: DEFINING MARKETING AND THE MARKETING PROCESS 1. Marketing: Creating and Capturing Customer Value 2. Company and Marketing Strategy: Partnering to Build Customer Relationships PART 2: UNDERSTANDING THE MARKETPLACE AND CONSUMERS 3. Analyzing the Marketing Environment 4. Managing Marketing Information to Gain Customer Insights 5. Understanding Consumer and Business Buyer Behavior PART 3: DESIGNING A CUSTOMER-DRIVEN STRATEGY AND MIX 6. Customer-Driven Marketing Strategy: Creating Value for Target Customers 7. Products, Services, and Brands: Building Customer Value 8. Developing New Products and Managing the Product Life-Cycle 9. Pricing: Understanding and Capturing Customer Value 10. Marketing Channels: Delivering Customer Value 11. Retailing and Wholesaling 12. Communicating Customer Value: Advertising and Public Relations 13. Personal Selling and Sales Promotion 14. Direct and Online Marketing: Building Direct Customer Relationships PART 4: EXTENDING MARKETING 15. The Global Marketplace 16. Sustainable Marketing: Social Responsibility and Ethics Appendix 1 Marketing Cases Appendix 2 Marketing Plan Appendix 3 Marketing by the Numbers
Gary Armstrong Philip Kotler Michael Harker Ross Brennan
Marketing: An Introduction, 2/e
Basic Approach
Putting you in control of your own journey through marketing. Marketing: An Introduction is your clear, comprehensive and concise guide to the key ideas in marketing, focusing on how to deliver improved customer value in order to achieve marketing success. The second European edition of this classic text has been updated with the latest ideas in marketing and with numerous new European marketing examples and case studies. The Authors prompt students to discover the concepts of marketing and translate them into real commercial practice for themselves.
Table of Contents
PART 1 DEFINING MARKETING AND THE MARKETING PROCESS 1. Marketing: Managing profitable Customer Relationships 2. Company and Marketing Strategy: partnering to build customer relationships PART 2 UNDERSTANDING THE MARKETPLACE AND CONSUMERS 3. The Marketing Environment 4. Managing Marketing Information 5. Consumer and Business Buyer behaviour
176
PART 3 DESIGNING A CUSTOMER-DRIVEN MARKETING STRATEGY AND MARKETING MIX 6. Segmentation, targeting and positioning: Building the right relationships with the right customers 7. Product, services and branding strategy 8. New-product development and product life-cycle strategies 9. Pricing: understanding and capturing customer value 10. Marketing channels and supply chain management 11. Retailing and wholesaling 12. Communicating customer value: Advertising, sales promotion and public relations 13. Communicating customer value: Personal selling and direct marketing PART 4 EXTENDING MARKETING 14. Marketing in the digital age 15. The global marketplace 16. Ethics, social responsibility and sustainability Appendix 1, Marketing plan Appendix 2, Marketing metrics Appendix 3, Careers in marketing
Retail Management: A Strategic Approach, 12/e

Barry R. Berman Joel R. Evans
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate retail management courses. The text that helps students thrive in todays retailing industry. Without a pre-defined and well-integrated strategy, a retail firm may flounder as its attempting to cope with the changing environment that surrounds it. Berman/Evans reader-friendly text, Retail Management: A Strategic Approach, provides a strategic, decision-making approach that illustrates how retailers plan for, and adapt to, todays changing and complex retail environment.
Market-Based Management, 6/e

Roger Best ISBN 10: 0132848163 ISBN 13: 9780132848169 576pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Best is the book that focuses on marketing performance, marketing profitability, and the role marketing strategies play in building the profits of a business. Part I: Market Orientation and Marketing Performance 1. Customer Focus, Customer Performance and Profit Impact 2. Marketing Metrics and Marketing Profitability Part II: Market Analysis 3. Market Potential, Market Demand, and Market Share 4. The Customer Experience and Value Creation 5. Market Segmentation and Segmentation Strategies 6. Competitive Position and Sources of Advantage Part III: Marketing Mix Strategies 7. Product Positioning, Branding, and Product Line Strategies 8. Value-Based Pricing and Pricing Strategies 9. Marketing Channels and Channel Mapping 10. Marketing Communications, Social Media, and Customer RESPONSE Part IV: Strategic Marketing 11. Portfolio Analysis and Strategic Market Planning 12. Strategic Offensive Strategies 13. Strategic Defensive Strategies Part V: Marketing Plans and Performance 14. Building a Marketing Plan 15. Marketing Metrics, Performance, and Strategy Implementation 16. Market-Based Management and Financial Performance
Table of Contents
177
Selling Financial Products

James B. Bexley ISBN 10: 0132752131 ISBN 13: 9780132752138 192pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses focusing on selling financial products and services. A solid foundation to selling financial products and services. Bexley is designed to take the fear out of selling by explaining key concepts and then effectively showing students how to apply the concepts to selling financial products. And since sales are a skill that needs to be practiced, this text promotes practice by providing several cases and exercises.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
Times Have Changed Introduction to Selling Selling Scope The Selling Officer Prospecting for Business Successful Selling Cycle Product Knowledge Pricing in the Selling Process Calling Program a Must to Sell Advertising/Marketing to Sell Marketing Research to Successfully Ethics in Selling Financial Products and Services
Jim Blythe
Essentials of Marketing, 5/e
Basic Approach
Essentials of Marketing 5e provides a vibrant and accessible introduction to Marketing providing concise and accessible coverage of: traditional marketing techniques and theories, the practical and tactical decision-making processes involved in marketing, up-to-date topics such as corporate social responsibility, social media and ethics. The book takes a practical approach, with plentiful examples and up-to-date case studies, complimented by a full range of online resources including video cases for every chapter and new author podcasts making this book perfect for undergraduates taking a one semester introductory marketing course.
Glen Broom
Cutlip and Center's Effective Public Relations, 11/e
Basic Approach
For courses in Introductory Public Relations. Cutlip & Center offers students the gold standard in public relations, providing the most up-to-date reference in the market.
Table of Contents
PART I: CONCEPT, PRACTITIONERS, CONTEXT, AND ORIGINS 1. Introduction to Contemporary Public Relations 2. Practitioners of Public Relations 3. Organizational Settings 4. Historical Origins and Evolution PART II: FOUNDATIONS 5. Professionalism and Ethics 6. Legal Considerations 7. Theory: Adjustment and Adaptation 8. Theory: Communication and Public Opinion
178
9. Internal Relations and Employee Communication 10. External Media and Media Relations PART III: MANAGEMENT PROCESS 11. Step One: Defining Public Relations Problems 12. Step Two: Planning and Programming 13. Step Three: Taking Action and Communicating 14. Step Four: Evaluating the Program PART IV: THE PRACTICE 15. Business and Industry 16. Government and Politics 17. Military Public Affairs 18. Nonprofits and NGOs 19. Health Care 20. Education 21. Associations and Unions
eTourism: Information Technology for Strategic Tourism Management, 2/e

Ebert Dimitrios Buhalis ISBN 10: 027373783X ISBN 13: 9780273737834 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
The book is aimed at advanced undergraduate and postgraduate students in business, tourism and hospitality programmes that need to explore how they can use ICTs in a strategic context. It is also anticipated that researchers and practitioners will find it useful and stimulating. This book addresses the digitization of all processes and value chains in the tourism, travel, hospitality and catering industries. By analysing the new technological trends it provides a solid basis for analysing the impacts of the Information Communication Technology (ICT) revolution on the tourism industry. The book adopts a strategic management and marketing perspective for tourism enterprises and destinations. It suggests that eTourism revolutionizes all business processes, the entire value chain as well as the strategic relationships of tourism organizations with all their stakeholders. It additionally focuses on how ICTs are employed in airlines, hotels, travel agencies, tour operators and destinations management organizations. The book demonstrates that eTourism increasingly determines the competitiveness of the organization, and therefore, it is critical for the competitiveness of the industry in the longer term.
Basic Marketing Research with Excel, 3/e

Alvin C. Burns Ronald F. Bush
Basic Approach
For undergraduate Marketing Research courses. A concise presentation of marketing research fundamentals. Basic Marketing Research uses Excel add-in software for data analysis, an integrated case, and experiential learning exercises to present a concise introduction to market research fundamentals. This text also provides students with resources they can use in their future careers. The third edition provides an improved software packageXL Data Analystand includes more information on qualitative research.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
An Introduction to Marketing Research The Marketing Research Industry The Marketing Research Process Including the Problem and Research Objectives Research Design Alternatives and Qualitative Research Information Types and Sources: Secondary Data and Standardized Information Data Collection Methods Measurement Scales Designing Data Collection Forms Determining Sample Size and the Sample Plan
179
Dave Chaffey Fiona Ellis-Chadwick Kevin Johnston Richard Mayer
Digital Marketing: Strategy, Implementation and Practice, 5/e
Basic Approach
The Internet has revolutionised marketing practice, connecting potential customers to businesses in a way never before possible. Today, with online audiences spending more time using price comparison sites, search engines and social networks, this text explains how marketers can find new and engaging ways of getting their message across. This text provides comprehensive, practical guidance on how companies can get the most out of the web to meet their marketing goals. Edited by Dave Chaffey, one of Europes top thinkers in this area, this text links marketing theory with case studies on cutting edge companies to help students to understand digital marketing in the real world.
Table of Contents
PART I: INTERNET MARKETING FUNDAMENTALS 1. Introducing Internet marketing 2. The Internet micro-environment 3. The Internet macro-environment PART II: INTERNET STRATEGY DEVELOPMENT 4. Internet marketing strategy 5. The Internet and the marketing mix 6. Relationship marketing using the Internet PART III: INTERNET MAKKETING: IMPLEMENTATION & PRACTICE 7. Delivering the online customer experience 8. Campaign planning for digital media 9. Marketing communications using digital media channels 10. Evaluation and improvement of digital channel performance 11. Business-to-consumer Internet marketing 12. Business-to-business Internet marketing
Integrated Advertising, Promotion and Marketing Communications, 5/e

Kenneth E. Clow Donald Baack
For undergraduate Advertising and Integrated Marketing Communication courses. Clow and Baack examine advertising and promotions through the lens of integrated marketing communications. The carefully integrated approach of this text blends advertising, promotions and marketing communications together, providing students with the information they need to understand the process and benefits of successful IMC campaigns. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
PART 1: THE IMC FOUNDATION 1. Integrated Marketing Communications 2. Corporate Image and Brand Management 3. Buyer Behaviors 4. The IMC Planning Process PART 2: IMC ADVERTISING TOOLS 5. Advertising Management 6. Advertising Design: Theoretical Frameworks and Types of Appeals 7. Advertising Design: Message Strategies and Executional Frameworks PART 3: IMC MEDIA TOOLS 8. Traditional Media Channels 9. E-active Marketing 10. Alternative Marketing PART 4: IMC PROMOTIONAL TOOLS 11. Database and Direct Response Marketing and Personal Selling 12. Sales Promotions 13. Public Relations and Sponsorship Programs PART 5: IMC ETHICS, REGULATION, AND EVALUATION 14. Regulations and Ethical Concerns 15. Evaluating an Integrated Marketing Program
180
Integrated Marketing Communication

Kenneth E. Clow Marshall Julian McCarthy Donald Baack
ISBN 10: 0733992900 ISBN 13: 9780733992902 2012 Paper
Chris Cooper
Essentials of Tourism
Basic Approach
Essentials of Tourism offer a concise and student-friendly introduction to the field of tourism. Written in a lively and engaging style, the book boasts an extensive range of case studies from around the world, and provides you with a coherent and consistent text, blending tourism principles and theory with practice. Each chapter features three case studies which illustrate contemporary practice in the leisure and tourism industry. Examples are drawn from a wide variety of destinations from around the globe, giving this text a truly international approach. The book is the essential companion for undergraduate students studying Tourism and Tourism Management. It is accompanied by a companion website packed with extra resources for both students and lecturers, including multiple choice questions, PowerPoint slides and links to further reading.
Table of Contents
SECTION 1: TOURISM ESSENTIALS: AN INTRODUCTION 1. Tourism Essentials SECTION 2: DESTINATION ESSENTIALS 2. The Destination 3. The Economic Consequences of Tourism 4. The Environmental Consequences of Tourism 5. The Social and Cultural Consequences of Tourism 6. Sustainable Tourism SECTION 3: TOURISM SECTOR ESSENTIALS 7. Attractions 8. Hospitality 9. Intermediaries 10. Transport 11. Government and Tourism SECTION 4: TOURISM DEMAND AND MARKETING ESSENTIALS 12. Demand 13. Tourism Marketing SECTION 5: TOURISM FUTURES: THE ESSENTIALS 14. Tourism Futures
Advertising Research: Theory & Practice, 2/e

Joel J. Davis, San Diego State University ISBN 10: 0132128322 ISBN 13: 9780132128322 704pp 2012 Cloth
Basic Approach
For courses in Advertising Research. Discover how to design and use advertising research. In order to become successful advertising professionals, students need to understand the importance of research. Advertising Research: Theory & Practice shows students how research helps advertisers make the best decisions in regards to strategy, target audiences, and creativity in a complex consumer and media environment. New chapters have been added in this edition that highlight recent developments in advertisers behaviors. Changes and advancements in research design and methodology are also addressed.
Table of Contents
PART I. FOUNDATIONS 1. The Nature and Process of Research 2. Research Ethics PART II. SOURCES OF INFORMATION
181
3. Secondary Research 4. Sampling PART III. QUALITATIVE RESEARCH 5. Collecting Qualitative Insights 6. Focus Groups 7. Analysis of Qualitative Data PART IV. QUANTITATIVE RESEARCH 8. Data Collection through Observation: Human and Automated 9. Data Collection through Observation: Biometrics 10. Survey Research 11. Measurement 12. Asking Questions 13. Questionnaire Design 14. Experiments 15. Quantitative Data Analysis: Descriptive Statistics 16. Quantitative Data Analysis: Inferential Statistics PART V. APPLIED TOPICS 17. Segmentation 18. Brand Maps 19. Concept and Benefit Testing 20. Post-Production Advertising Testing and Optimization 21. Presenting Research
Lynne Eagle Alan Tapp Stephan Dahl Sara Bird
Social Marketing
Basic Approach
Social marketing is receiving unprecedented focus and support from government, the private sector and charities internationally. Social marketing attempts to educate people in the hope that they will make informed (i.e. healthy) choices regarding diet, lifestyle and health related issues. The effective application of social marketing principles can be complex and controversial. Social marketing planning cannot be reduced to a simple set of actions on a checklist; there is no single strategy for success and strategies that have proved successful with one population may not transfer to other populations. This text will explore the complexities involved in researching, planning and implementing effective social marketing programmes, using illustrative cases from both successful and unsuccessful real-world programmes. The authors provide a critical analysis of the origins of social marketing as a concept and of the claims made by its supporters and detractors in order to highlight what social marketing can and cannot achieve. This is followed by a review of strategic issues that must be considered in developing social marketing programmes, including persuasion resistance, message relevance and message framing. Key themes included in the text are the impact of cultural factors on health-related behaviours, ethical issues and attitudes as a key factor underlying health-related behaviours. The authors introduce concepts, theories and strategies that will aid the development, testing and implementation of social marketing interventions. The book is suitable for both undergraduate and postgraduate students of business and marketing and those studying modules in social marketing.
Table of Contents
PART 1: THE PRINCIPLES OF SOCIAL MARKETING 1. What is socialmarketing? 2. The core principlesof social marketing 3. The social marketing intervention planning process 4. Upstream, policy, and partnershipsin social marketing 5. Ethical issues in social marketing PART 2: UNDERSTANDING THE CITIZEN 6. Understanding the citizen: the role of developing effective social marketing interventions 7. Segmentation in social marketing 8. Research in social marketing 9. Social forces and population level effects PART 3: DESIGNING EFFECTIVE SOCIAL MARKETING SOLUTIONS 10. Designing social marketing interventions: products, services, locations, channels. 11. Message platforms for effective social marketing communications 12. Creativity in social marketing communications 13. Media in social marketing 14. Measurement and evaluation of social marketing programmes
182
Relationship Marketing: Exploring Relational Strategies in Marketing, 4/e

John Egan ISBN 10: 0273737783 ISBN 13: 9780273737780 328pp 2011 Paper
Basic Approach
Relationship Marketing comprehensively examines relationships in marketing and how these influence modern marketing strategy and practice, by critically reviewing and analysing what has been described as 'marketing's new paradigm'. Established as the key text in the area, the fourth edition continues to offer an accessible and authoritative introduction to this increasingly important subject. It retains its informed coverage of the most recent and important literature, as well as clearly organising and structuring the book around its core themes. The new edition includes a wide range of examples to illuminate the real world relevance of concepts. In addition, overviews and summaries add clarity and help consolidate understanding. A complete package of supplements is available to assist students and instructors in using this book. Visit www.pearsoned.co.uk/egan to find an Instructors Manual, PowerPoint slides, and links to other useful sites. This book is ideal for undergraduates and postgraduates taking modules in Relationship Marketing, Customer Services, and Marketing Communications. It is core reading for the CIM Level 4 module on Stakeholder Marketing.
Table of Contents
PART I - RELATIONSHIPS 1. 100 Years of Marketing 2. Relationships in Marketing 3. Relationships 4. Relationship economics 5. Strategy continuum 6. Relationship drivers 7. Customer partnerships 8. Internal partnerships 9. Supplier partnerships 10. External Partnerships 11. Relationship technology 12. Conceptual Developments
Barry Emery
Sustainable Marketing
Basic Approach
Consideration for the ethics of business, social responsibility and the environment has put sustainability at the top of the agenda for many organisations and marketing has a key role to play in driving this agenda. This book explores the complex and challenging environment of sustainable marketing. The author starts by considering the background of traditional marketing in order to understand the changes that have occurred over recent times and their significance. From corporate social responsibility to societal and green marketing movements, leading to the development of sustainable marketing practice, this book is the most complete and accessible introduction to Sustainable Marketing on the market. Key themes covered in the book include: Current developments in the marketing environment and their role in stimulating or impeding the progress of sustainability The nature of consumption in relation to sustainability The underlying attitudes of consumers towards sustainable consumption The use of social marketing for planning and implementing behavioural change in consumers towards a more sustainable lifestyle
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
Marketing in the sustainable environment The backdrop to sustainability Consumer attitudes to sustainability The evolution of sustainable segmentation Motivating behavioural change Reconciling product sustainability Addressing supply chain sustainability Communicating sustainability Managing sustainable change The future for sustainability: Raising the game, changing the game
183
Sports Marketing
Michael Fetchko Donald Roy Kenneth E. Clow, University of Louisiana at Monroe ISBN 10: 0132135469 ISBN 13: 9780132135467 624pp 2013 Cloth
Chris Fill
Essentials of Marketing Communications
Basic Approach
Essentials of Marketing Communications offer a concise and student-friendly introduction to the principles and theories of marketing communications. Written in a lively and engaging style, the book provides you with a coherent and consistent text, blending marketing communications principles and theory with practice. Divided into three parts, the book considers the strategic issues associated with managing marketing communications activities before moving on to look at branding, budgeting and evaluation issues and concluding with chapters on stakeholders, international marketing communications, and the operations and personnel involved in the industry. The book is the essential companion for undergraduate and postgraduate students studying Marketing Communications. It is also an invaluable resource for students studying for professional marketing qualifications, most notably those studying courses offered by the Chartered Institute of Marketing.
Table of Contents
PART ONE: INTRODUCTION TO MARKETING COMMUNICATIONS 1. The Scope of Marketing Communications 2. Communication: interactivity & conversations 3. Audiences: attitudes, behaviour & decision making PART TWO: MANAGING MARKETING COMMUNICATIONS 4. Strategies, objectives and positioning 5. Integration and Planning 6. Branding, Budgeting & Evaluation 7. Agencies: Practice, Regulation & International Communications 8. Shaping Relationships with Marketing Communications PART THREE: THE MARKETING COMMUNICATIONS MIX 9. Advertising 10. Public Relations and Sponsorship 11. Direct Marketing and Personal Selling 12. Sales Promotion, Exhibitions and Product Placement 13. Media: conventional and digital 14. Interactive Marketing Communications 15. Content: credibility, messages and creative approaches
Advertising
Chris Fill Graham Hughes Scott De Francesco ISBN 10: 0273760890 ISBN 13: 9780273760894 504pp 2013 Paper
Corporate Reputation, Brand and Communication

Chris Fill Stuart Roper
Basic Approach
Why should and how can organisations manage their reputations? All organisations, the executives who direct
184
them, the employees who create value and their stakeholders who influence them, all interact and can impact corporate reputation. In a 24/7 media environment, where even a tweet can shape impressions, the importance of reputation management has never been higher. Every single move, decision taken and each isolated event that involves a company or public figure, is scrutinised, documented and publicised globally, compounding the task of reputation managers. Just ask BP, Toyota or Tiger Woods.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
The Rise of Corporate Reputation The Scope of Corporate Reputation The Significance of Corporate Culture The Measurement of Corporate Reputation The Branding Reputation Dilemma The Rise of Corporate Brands Measuring Corporate Brands The Future of Brands The Dimensions of Corporate Communication Contexts for Corporate Communication Symbols, Tools and the Media Methods of Corporate Communication
Critical Thinking in Consumer Behavior, 3/e

Judy F. Graham ISBN 10: 0132760118 ISBN 13: 9780132760119 140pp 2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
Designed to be used alone or packaged WITH ANY core texts in consumer behavior. This unique casebook applies consumer behavior theory to practice via thirty-five cases and activities.
Strategic Communication: Cases in Marketing, Public Relations, Advertising and Media

Greenland Bainbridge Galloway Gill
ISBN 10: 1442555491 ISBN 13: 9781442555495 2012 Paper Strategic Communications: Cases in Marketing, Public Relations, Advertising and Media provides a collection of 13 comprehensive, contemporary case studies for use in Advertising, Marketing, PR and Media courses with a focus on Australia, New Zealand and the wider Asia Pacific region. In the past it has been the norm for these disciplines to remain distinct entities. However, with growing recognition and emergence of the all encompassing theme of communication in the contemporary business arena, modern professionals need to be skilled in all these communication related areas. Edited by an expert multi-disciplinary group of communications specialists, and supported by an instructors manual, Strategic Communications will help lecturers provide their students with a solid grounding in the theoretical and practical aspects of contemporary business communication practices.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
MARKETING 1. Does plain packaging spell death for cigarette brands in Australia and beyond? 2. Wheres the harm, dude? Taking the party out of party drugs with anti-drugs communications? 3. Its all in the design: How IKEA makes you buy with clever store design. MEDIA 4. Justin Bieber: A case study on celebrity and the participatory culture of YouTube 5. Freeview: A case study in television's survival in the post-broadcast era 6. Wikileaks and Journalism in the 21st century PUBLIC RELATIONS 7. Aviva solar car: Using green sponsorship to enhance CSR reputation 8. Managing the risk of trouble in the tap: Desalination and drought-proofing Melbourne 9. An Utterly Fantastic online campaign: How the Australian Diary Industry use online social networking for community relations and issues in management ADVERTISING 10. eftpos: The building of a brand 11. Licensed to sell: Product placement in the James Bond film series 12. The mother of all scare campaigns: The role of advertising in the miners campaign to defeat the
185
Resources Super Profits Tax (RSPT) 13. Making it work!
Consumer Behaviour: A European Outlook, 2/e

Havard Hansen Leon G. Schiffman Leslie Kanuk
Basic Approach
The second European edition of Schiffman and Kanuk's classic Consumer Behaviour focuses not only on what consumers buy, but also why they buy, when they buy, where they buy, how they evaluate their purchase, and how they ultimately dispose of it. The text has been thoroughly adapted and revised to reflect European conditions, and to focus attention on critical concepts in consumer behaviour. The authors discuss the effects of family, social class, culture and subculture on the decision-making process, and, by taking a psychological approach, illuminate the ways in which marketers apply the principles of consumer behaviour to the development and implementation of marketing strategies.
Table of Contents
PART ONE: INTRODUCTION 1. An introduction to the study of Consumer Behavior 2. Consumer Research 3. Market Segmentation PART TWO: THE CONSUMER AS AN INDIVIDUAL 4. Consumer Decision Making 5. Consumer Motivation 6. Personality and Consumer Behavior 7. Consumer Perception 8. Consumer Learning 9. Consumer Attitude Formation and Change 10. Communication and Consumer Behavior PART THREE: CONSUMERS IN THEIR SOCIAL AND CULTURAL SETTINGS 11. Reference Groups and Family Influences 12. Social Class and Consumer Behavior 13. The Influence of Culture and Subculture on Consumer Behavior 14. Cross-Cultural Consumer Behaviour: An International Perspective PART FOUR: MORE ON THE CONSUMER'S DECISION-MAKING PROCESS 15. Consumer Influence and the Diffusion of Innovations 16. Consumer Decision Making - Again
Customer Service: A Practical Approach, 6/e

Elaine K. Harris ISBN 10: 0132974347 ISBN 13: 9780132974349 192pp 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate courses in Customer Service, Training and Development, and Service Marketing; also as a supplement for a course in Marketing Principles. The market-leader, Customer Service: A Practical Approach, Sixth Edition, goes beyond providing reasons why customer service is important to defining proven methods for creating customer service excellence. Using a hands-on approach, it covers a wide range of knowledge and skills and offers an extensive collection of activities to enliven and invigorate any lecture. This edition features a revised chapter on technology, new Ethics in Action exercises and coverage of the latest trends in the customer service field. Focusing on problem solving, communication strategies and technology, this classic text pinpoints the skills needed to improve and sustain customer satisfaction and business relationships.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
What is Customer Service? The Challenges of Customer Service Problem Solving Strategy for Formulating a Plan for Success Empowerment Communications in Customer Service Coping with Challenging Customers Motivation Leadership in Customer Service Customer Retention and Measurement of Satisfaction Technology and Customer Service
186
12. Excellence in Customer Service
Svend Hollensen
Essential of Global Marketing, 2/e
Basic Approach
Essentials of Global Marketing offers a concise and manageable approach to the subject. The accessible structure takes the reader through the entire international marketing planning process, and fundamental concepts are illuminated by examples from a wide range of companies, small and large, from around the world.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
Global Marketing in the firm Initiation of internationalisation Internationalisation theories Development of the firm's international competitiveness The political and economic environment The sociocultural environment The international market selection process Some approaches to the choice of entry mode Export, intermediate and hierarchical entry modes International buyer-seller relationships Product and pricing decisions Distribution and communication decisions Cross-cultural sales negotiations Organisation and control of the global marketing programme
Graham Hooley Brigitte Nicoulaud Nigel F. Piercy
Marketing Strategy and Competitive Positioning, 5/e
Basic Approach
Marketing Strategy and Competitive Positioning 5e deals with the process of developing and implementing a marketing strategy. The book focuses on competitive positioning at the heart of marketing strategy and includes in-depth discussion of the processes used in marketing to achieve competitive advantage. The book is primarily about creating and sustaining superior performance in the marketplace. It focuses on the two central issues in marketing strategy formulation the identification of target markets and the creation of a differential advantage. In doing that, it recognises the emergence of new potential target markets born of the recession and increased concern for climate change; and it examines ways in which firms can differentiate their offerings through the recognition of environmental and social concerns.
Table of Contents
PART I: MARKETING STRATEGY 1. Market-led strategic management Case Study: Psion 2. Strategic marketing planning Case Study: iPhone PART II: COMPTETIVE MARKET ANALYSIS 3. The Changing Market Environment Case Study: Virgin Megastore 4. Customer analysis Case Study: Procter & Gamble 5. Competitor analysis Case Study: Emap 6. Understanding the Organisational Resource Base Case Study: Miele 7. Forecasting future demand and market requirements Case Study: Boeing PART III: IDENTIFYING CURRENT AND FUTURE COMPETITIVE POSITIONS 8. Segmentation and positioning principles Case Study: Internet Exchange 9. Segmentation and positioning research Case Study: Asianet, Zee TV, Namaste and more 10. Selecting market targets Case Study: B&O
187
PART IV: COMPETITIVE POSITIONING STRATEGIES 11. Creating Sustainable Competitive Advantage Case Study: Nokia 12. Competing through the New Marketing Mix Case Study: Tyrrell's 13. Competing through innovation Case Study: Gillette 14. Competing through superior service and customer relationships Case Study: Pret a Manger PART V: IMPLEMENTING THE STRATEGY 15. Strategic customer management Case Study: Xerox 16. Strategic alliances and networks Case Study: Yahoo and eBay 17. Strategy implementation and internal marketing Case Study: British Airways 18. Corporate Social Responsibility Case Study: Ballantyne, Smythson and others 19. Twenty-first Century Marketing Case Study: Trend spotting at the Henley Centre and elsewhere
Selling and Sales Management, 9/e

David Jobber Geoffrey Lancaster
Over the last twenty years, Selling and Sales Management has proved itself to be the definitive text in this exciting and fast-moving area. This new edition comes fully updated with brand new case studies using working businesses to connect sales theory to the practical implications of selling in a modern environment. This edition continues to place emphasis on global aspects of selling and sales management whilst also covering all of the important elements of the marketing mix. Topics covered include the technological applications of selling and sales management, the ethics of selling & sales management, a look at the sales cycle, cold canvassing and systems selling, and a thorough coverage of B2B and B2C selling.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
PART ONE: SALES PERSPECTIVE 1. Development and role of selling in marketing 2. Sales strategies PART TWO: SALES ENVIRONMENT 3. Consumer and organisational buyer behaviour 4. Sales settings 5. International selling 6. Law and ethical issues PART THREE: SALES TECHNIQUE 7. Sales responsibilities and preparation 8. Personal selling skills 9. Key account management 10. Relationship selling 11. Direct marketing 12. Internet and IT applications in selling and sales management PART FOUR: SALES MANAGEMENT 13. Recruitment and selection 14. Motivation and training 15. Organisation and control 16. Sales forecasting and budgeting 17. Salesforce evaluation
Warren J. Keegan Mark Green
Global Marketing, 7/e
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate global marketing courses. The excitement, challenges, and controversies of global marketing.
188
Global Marketing strives to reflect current issues and events while offering conceptual and analytical tools that will help readers apply the 4Ps to global marketing. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
Introduction to Global Marketing The Global Economic Environment The Global Trade Environment Social and Cultural Environments The Political, Legal, and Regulatory Environments of Global Marketing Global Information Systems and Market Research Segmentation, Targeting, and Positioning Importing, Exporting, and Sourcing Global Market Entry Strategies: Licensing, Investment, and Strategic Alliances Product and Brand Decisions Pricing Decisions Global Marketing Channels and Physical Distribution Global Marketing Communications Decisions I:Advertising and Public Relations Global Marketing Communications Decisions II: Sales Promotion, Personal Selling, Special Forms of Marketing Communication, New Media 15. Global Marketing and the Digital Revolution 16. Strategic Elements of Competitive Advantage 17. Leadership, Organization, and Corporate Social Responsibility
Best Practice Cases in Branding, Strategic Brand Management, 4/e

Kevin Lane Keller ISBN 10: 0132664267 ISBN 13: 9780132664264 372pp 2013 Cloth
Strategic Brand Management, 4/e

Kevin Lane Keller ISBN 10: 0132664259 ISBN 13: 9780132664257 710pp 2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
Keller, Strategic Brand Management provides insights into how to create profitable brand strategies by building, measuring, and managing brand equity.
Kevin Lane Keller Tony Aperia Mats Georgson
Strategic Brand Management: A European Perspective, 2/e
Basic Approach
Strategic Brand Management provides a comprehensive and up-to-date treatment of the subjects of brands, brand equity, and strategic brand management. Strategic brand management involves the design and implementation of marketing programmes and activities to build, measure, and manage brand equity. The book aims to provide managers with concepts and techniques to improve the long-term profitability of their brand strategies. It incorporates current thinking and developments on these topics from both academics and industry participants. It also combines a comprehensive theoretical foundation with numerous practical insights to assist managers in their day-to-day and long-term brand decisions.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Brands and brand management Customer-based brand equity Brand positioning Choosing brand elements to build brand equity Designing marketing campaigns to build brand equity
189
6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.
Integrating marketing campaigns to build brand equity Using secondary brand associations to build brand equity Developing a brand equity measurement and management system Measuring sources of brand equity: capturing the customer mindset Measuring outcomes of brand equity: capturing market performance Designing and implementing branding strategies Introducing and naming products and brand extensions Managing brands over time Managing brands over geographic boundaries and market segments Closing observations
Roger Kerin Robert Peterson
Strategic Marketing Problems, 13/e
ISBN 10: 0273768948 ISBN 13: 9780273768944 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and graduate marketing strategy courses. A comprehensive, practice-driven approach to developing decision-making skills in marketing. Decision-making in marketing is first and foremost, a skill. And since all skills are learned through practice, Strategic Marketing Problems: Cases and Comments balances the concepts and tools used for solving marketing problems with numerous case studies that challenge students to apply what theyve learned. This edition includes new cases, updated material and a new chapter on Global Marketing.
Principles of Marketing, 14/e

Philip Kotler Gary Armstrong
Basic Approach
For undergraduate Principles of Marketing courses Todays marketing challenge is creating vibrant, interactive communities of consumers who make products and brands a part of their daily lives. Learn how to create value and gain loyal customers. Kotler/Armstrong is a comprehensive, classic principles text organized around an innovative customer-value framework. Students learn how to create customer value, target the correct market, and build customer relationships. The changing nature of consumer expectations means that marketers must learn how to build communities in addition to brand loyalty. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART 1 DEFINING MARKETING AND THE MARKETING PROCESS 1. Marketing: Creating and Capturing Customer Value 2. Company and Marketing Strategy: Partnering to Build Customer Relationships PART 2 UNDERSTANDING THE MARKETPLACE AND CONSUMERS 3. The Marketing Environment 4. Managing Marketing Information to Gain Customer Insights 5. Consumer Markets and Consumer Buyer Behavior 6. Business Markets and Business Buyer Behavior PART 3 DESIGNING A CUSTOMER-DRIVEN MARKETING STRATEGY AND MARKETING MIX 7. Customer-Driven Marketing Strategy: Creating Value for Target Customers 8. Product, Services, and Brands: Building Customer Value 9. New-Product Development and Life-Cycle Strategies 10. Pricing: Understanding and Capturing Customer Value 11. Pricing Strategies 12. Marketing Channels: Delivering Customer Value 13. Retailing and Wholesaling 14. Communicating Customer Value: Integrated Marketing Communication Strategy 15. Advertising and Public Relations 16. Personal Selling and Sales Promotion 17. Direct and Online Marketing: Building Direct Customer Relationships PART 4 EXTENDING MARKETING 18. Creating Competitive Advantage 19. The Global Marketplace 20. Marketing Ethics and Social Responsibility
190
Philip Kotler Gary Armstrong Ang Swee Hoon Leong Siew Meng Tan Chin Tiong Oliver Hong-Ming Yau
Principles of Marketing: An Asian Perspective, 3/e
Basic Approach
For undergraduates studying Principles of Marketing courses. Principles of Marketing: An Asian Perspective provides a comprehensive coverage on topics of Marketing set in an Asian context. Learning is made more engaging for students and teaching more convenient for instructors. PART 1 DEFINING MARKETING AND THE MARKETING PROCESS 1. Marketing: Managing Profitable Customer Relationships 2. Company and Marketing Strategy: Partnering to Build Customer Relationships PART 2 UNDERSTANDING THE MARKETPLACE AND CONSUMERS 3. The Marketing Environment 4. Managing Marketing Information 5. Consumer Markets and Consumer Buyer Behavior 6. Business Markets and Business Buyer Behavior PART 3 DESIGNING A CUSTOMER-DRIVEN STRATEGY AND MIX 7. Customer-Driven Marketing Strategy: Creating Value for Target Customers 8. Product, Services, and Branding Strategy 9. New-Product Development and Product Life-Cycle Strategies 10. Pricing Products: Understanding and Capturing Customer Value 11. Pricing Products: Pricing Strategies 12. Marketing Channels and Supply Chain Management 13. Retailing and Wholesaling 14. Communicating Customer Value: Integrated Marketing Communications Strategy 15. Advertising and Public Relations 16. Personal Selling and Sales Promotion 17. Direct and Online Marketing: Building Direct Customer Relationships PART 4 EXTENDING MARKETING 18. Creating Competitive Advantage 19. The Global Marketplace 20. Sustainable Marketing: Social Responsibility and Ethics Appendix 1: Marketing Plan Appendix 2: Marketing by the Numbers
Table of Contents
Framework for Marketing Management, 5/e

Philip Kotler Kevin Lane Keller
Basic Approach
For graduate and undergraduate marketing management courses. Framework for Marketing Management is a concise adaptation of the gold standard marketing management textbook for professors who want authoritative coverage of current marketing management practice and theory, but the want the flexibility to add outside cases, simulations, or projects. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States. PART I: UNDERSTANDING MARKETING MANAGEMENT 1. Defining Marketing for the 21st Century 2. Developing and Implementing Marketing Strategies and Plans 3. Understanding Markets, Market Demand, and the Marketing Environment PART II: CONNECTING WITH CUSTOMERS 4. Creating Customer Value, Satisfaction, and Loyalty 5. Analyzing Consumer Markets 6. Analyzing Business Markets 7. Identifying Market Segments and Targets PART III: BUILDING STRONG BRANDS 8. Creating Brand Equity 9. Crafting the Brand Positioning and Dealing with Competition Part IV: Shaping the Market Offerings 10. Setting Product Strategy and Marketing Through the Life Cycle 11. Designing and Managing Services
Table of Contents
191
12. Developing Pricing Strategies and Programs PART V: DELIVERING VALUE 13. Designing and Managing Integrated Marketing Channels 14. Managing Retailing, Wholesaling, and Logistics PART VI: COMMUNICATING VALUE 15. Designing and Managing Integrated Marketing Communications 16. Managing Mass Communications 17. Managing Personal Communications PART VII: CREATING SUCCESSFUL LONG-TERM GROWTH 18. Managing Marketing in the Global Economy
Philip Kotler Kevin Lane Keller
Marketing Management, 14/e
For undergraduate and graduate courses in marketing management. Stay on the cutting-edge with the gold standard text that reflects the latest in marketing theory and practice. The world of marketing is changing everydayand in order for students to have a competitive edge, they need a textbook that reflects the best of todays marketing theory and practices. Marketing Management is the gold standard marketing text because its content and organization consistently reflect the latest changes in todays marketing theory and practice. Remaining true to its gold-standard status, the fourteenth edition includes an overhaul of new material and updated information, and now is supported by mymarketinglabPearsons online tutorial and assessment platform. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
PART 1: UNDERSTANDING MARKETING MANAGEMENT 1. Defining Marketing for the 21st Century 2. Developing Marketing Strategies and Plans PART 2: CAPTURING MARKETING INSIGHTS 3. Gathering Information and Scanning the Environment 4. Conducting Marketing Research and Forecasting on Demand PART 3: CONNECTING WITH CUSTOMERS 5. Creating Long-term Loyalty Relationships 6. Analyzing Consumer Markets 7. Analyzing Business Markets 8. Identifying Market Segments and Targets PART 4: BUILDING STRONG BRANDS 9. Creating Brand Equity 10. Crafting the Brand Position 11. Competitive Dynamics PART 5: SHAPING THE MARKET 12. Setting Product Strategy 13. Designing and Managing Services 14. Developing Pricing Strategies and Programs PART 6: DELIVERING VALUE 15. Designing and Managing Integrated Marketing 16. Managing Retailing, Wholesaling, and Logistics PART 7: COMMUNICATING VALUE 17. Designing and Managing Integrated Marketing Communications 18. Managing Mass Communications: Advertising, Sales Promotions, Events and Experiences, and Public Relations 19. Managing Personal Communications: Direct and Interactive Marketing, Word of Mouth, and Personal Selling PART 8: CREATING SUCCESSFUL LONG-TERM GROWTH 20. Introducing New Marketing Offerings 21. Tapping into Global Markets 22. Managing a Holistic Marketing Organization
Marketing Management: An Asian Perspective, 6/e

Philip Kotler Kevin Lane Keller Ang Swee Hoon Leong Siew Meng Tan Chin Tiong
ISBN 10: 9810687974 ISBN 13: 9789810687977
192
976pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduates studying Marketing Management courses. Marketing Management: An Asian Perspective, 6/E boasts a host of new features and continues with the key factors that have made the earlier editions successful.
Table of Contents
PART 1: UNDERSTANDING MARKETING MANAGEMENT 1. Defining Marketing for the 21st Century 2. Developing Marketing Strategies and Plans PART 2: CAPTURING MARKETING INSIGHTS 3. Gathering Information and Scanning the Environment 4. Conducting Marketing Research and Forecasting on Demand PART 3: CONNECTING WITH CUSTOMERS 5. Creating Customer Value, Satisfaction, and Loyalty 6. Analyzing Consumer Markets 7. Analyzing Business Markets 8. Identifying Market Segments and Targets PART 4: BUILDING STRONG BRANDS 9. Creating Brand Equity 10. Crafting the Brand Positioning 11. Competitive Dynamics PART 5: SHAPING THE MARKET OFFERINGS 12. Setting Product Strategy 13. Designing and Managing Services 14. Developing Pricing Strategies and Programs PART 6: DELIVERING VALUE 15. Designing and Managing Marketing Channels and Value Networks 16. Managing Retailing, Wholesaling, and Logistics PART 7: COMMUNICATING VALUE 17. Designing and Managing Integrated Marketing Communications 18. Managing Mass Communications: Advertising, Sales Promotions, Events and Public Relations 19. Managing Personal Communications: Direct and Personal Selling PART 8: CREATING SUCCESSFUL LONG-TERM GROWTH 20. Introducing New Marketing Offerings 21. Tapping into Global Markets 22. Managing a Holistic Marketing Organization
Marketing Management: European Edition, 2/e

Philip Kotler Kevin Lane Keller Mairead Brady Malcolm Goodman Torben Hansen
ISBN 10: 0273743619 ISBN 13: 9780273743613 2012 Cloth The American edition of Marketing Management is the world's leading marketing text because its content and organization consistently reflect changes in marketing theory and practice. This European Edition of Marketing Management has been inspired by the American edition and explores the challenges facing European marketing practitioners, with all the case studies and exercises newly re-written for European students. PART 1: UNDERSTANDING MARKETING MANAGEMENT 1. Defining Marketing : The European Context 2. Understanding Marketing Management 3. Developing Marketing Strategies and Plans 4. Managing Digital Technology in Marketing PART 2: CAPTURING MARKETING INSIGHTS 5. The Changing Marketing Environment and Information Management 6. Managing Market Research and Forecasting 7. Analysing Consumer Markets 8. Analysing Business Markets 9. Dealing with the Competition PART 3: CONNECTING WITH CUSTOMERS 10. Segmenting, Analysing and Creating Target Market Differentiating and Positioning Strategies 11. Creating Customer Value, Satisfaction and Loyalty PART 4: BUILDING STRONG BRANDS 12. Creating and Managing Brands and Brand Equity 13. Digital and Global Brand Management Strategy PART 5: SHAPING THE MARKET OFFERING 14. Designing, Developing and Managing Market Offerings 15. Introducing New Market Offerings 16. Developing and Managing Pricing Strategies PART 6: DELIVERING VALUE
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
193
17. Designing and Managing Integrated Marketing channels and global value networks 18. Managing process, people and physical evidence and the Customer Interface PART 7: COMMUNICATING VALUE 19. Designing and Managing Marketing Communications 20. Managing Global and Personal Communications PART 8: MANAGING MARKETING IMPLEMENTATION AND CONTROL 21. Implementing Marketing Management 22. Managing Marketing Metrics
Michael Levens
Marketing: Defined, Explained, Applied, 2/e
Basic Approach
For undergraduate Principles of Marketing courses. A unique breakdown of marketing that speaks to students learning style. Marketing: Defined, Explained, Applied was written from the ground up with student feedback to be the most usable reference guide for Principles of Marketing students. The unique visual and organizational style of the text clearly presents key information that draws students into the material, allowing them to use their text rather than passively read it. The second edition features a new format that makes it easier for students to study and learn the material.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.
The Meaning of Marketing The Market in Marketing Planning and Marketing in an Organization A Broader Perspective on Marketing Global Marketing Value for Customers A Perspective on Consumer Behavior Consumer Insight The Brand Segmenting, Targeting, and Positioning The Marketing Plan Product and Service Strategies Pricing Strategies Supply Chain and Distribution Strategies Retailing and Wholesaling Marketing Communications: Advertising and Sales Promotion Personal Selling and Direct Marketing Strategies Integrated Marketing Communications The Marketing Mix Marketing Measurement
Jochen Wirtz Patricia Chew Christopher H Lovelock
Essentials of Services Marketing, 2/e
Basic Approach
For undergraduate services marketing courses. Essentials of Services Marketing delivers streamlined coverage of services marketing topics with an exciting global outlook. With its visual learning aids and clear language, students read less to learn more.
Table of Contents
PART I UNDERSTANDING SERVICE PRODUCTS, CONSUMERS, AND MARKETS 1. Introduction to Services Marketing 2. Consumer Behavior in a Services Context 3. Positioning Services in Competitive Markets PART II APPLYING THE 4Ps OF MARKETING TO SERVICES 4. Developing Service Products: Core and Supplementary Elements 5. Distributing Services through Physical and Electronic Channels 6. Setting Prices and Implementing Revenue Management 7. Promoting Services and Educating Customers PART III DESIGNING AND MANAGING THE CUSTOMER INTERFACE 8. Designing and Managing Service Processes
194
9. Balancing Demand and Productive Capacity 10. Crafting the Service Environment 11. Managing People for Service Advantage PART IV DEVELOPING CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIPS 12. Managing Relationships and Building Loyalty 13. Complaint Handling and Service Recovery PART V STRIVING FOR SERVICE EXCELLENCE 14. Improving Service Quality and Productivity 15. Managing Change and Leading towards Service Excellence CASES
Public Relations: Theories, Practices, Critiques

Jim Macnamara ISBN 10: 1442543299 ISBN 13: 9781442543294 2012 Paper
Public Relations: Theories, Practices, Critiques 1st edition is an essential resource for Australian public relations students. Jim Macnamara, one of Australias best-known and widely-respected public relations and communication professionals, clearly explains public relations concepts, models and theories and applies theory to Australian practice with case studies and culturally relevant examples. The latest industry practices, methods and activities, including the latest thinking about Web 2.0 and Web 3.0 media and communication practices are covered in detail. In addition, practical tools, resources and case studies are provided in the Appendices. In a clear, lively and engaging style, Jim challenges the US-centric models and theories of public relations and encourages students to think critically about communication and public relations. Public Relations: Theories, Practices, Critiques is accompanied by an Instructor Manual and additional case studies. PART 1: FOUNDATIONAL UNDERSTANDINGS: COMMUNICATION CHALLENGES, THEORIES & MODELS 1. The best and worst job in the world 2. Understanding how humans communicateor dont 3. Understanding media 4. Public relations PART 2: PRACTICES, METHODS & THE INDUSTRY 5. Public relations practices 6. Public relations methods and activities 7. The public relations industry PART 3: CRITIQUES & CHANGE 8. Public relations critiques 9. Public relations futures APPENDICES: PRACTICAL TOOLS FOR PUBLIC RELATIONS Appendix 1 Public relations case studies Appendix 2 PR resources
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
Basic Marketing Research, 4/e

Naresh K. Malhotra ISBN 10: 0132570181 ISBN 13: 9780132570183 672pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate-level courses in Marketing Research. With a hands-on, do-it-yourself approach, Malhotra offers a contemporary focus on decision making, illustrating the interaction between marketing research decisions and marketing management decisions.
195
Marketing Research: An Applied Approach, 4/e

Naresh Malhotra David Birks Peter Wills
Basic Approach
Marketing Research: An Applied Approach forms a comprehensive, authoritative and thoroughly European introduction to applied marketing research and covers both quantitative and qualitative techniques in depth. This text is aimed at students studying marketing research at undergraduate and postgraduate level.
Table of Contents
1. Introduction to marketing research 2. Defining the marketing research problem and developing a research approach 3. Research design 4. Secondary data collection and analysis 5. Internal secondary data and the use of databases 6. Qualitative research: its nature and approaches 7. Qualitative research: focus group discussions 8. Qualitative research: depth interviewing and projective techniques 9. Qualitative research: data analysis 10. Survey and quantitative observation techniques 11. Causal research design: experimentation 12. Measurement and scaling: fundamentals, comparative and non-comparative scaling 13. Questionnaire design 14. Sampling: design and procedures 15. Sampling: final and initial sample size determination 16. Survey fieldwork 17. Data preparation 18. Frequency distribution, cross-tabulation and hypothesis testing 19. Analysis of variance and covariance 20. Correlation and regression 21. Discriminant analysis 22. Factor analysis 23. Cluster analysis 24. Multidimensional scaling and conjoint analysis 25. Structural Equation Modelling and Path Analysis 26. Report preparation and presentation 27. International marketing research 28. Business-to-business (b2) marketing research Appendix: Statistical tables
Gerald L. Manning, Des Moines Area Community College Michael L. Ahearne, University of Houston Barry L. Reece, Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State University ISBN 10: 013257019X ISBN 13: 9780132570190 544pp 2012 Paper
Selling Today, 12/e
Basic Approach
For courses in Sales and Personal Selling. Extensive, real-world applications, carefully integrated with current personal selling concepts. Selling Today: Partnering to Create Value helps students understand the value of developing their personal selling skills by exposing them to a careful integration of personal selling academic theory and real-world applications. And with the largest number of learn by doing materials available in any personal selling text, Manning/Ahearne/Reece offers instructors a variety of teaching tools to strengthen the learning process. As the developed nations of the world transition from a production focus to a sales-and-service focus, this cutting-edge new edition prepares students to succeed as members of a new generation of businesspeople.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
Relationship Selling Opportunities in the Information Economy Evolution of Selling Models that Complement the Marketing Concept Developing a Relationship Strategy Communication Styles: A Key to Adaptive Selling Today Ethics: The Foundation for Relationships in Selling Developing a Product Strategy Product-Selling Strategies that Add Value The Buying Process and Buyer Behavior Developing and Qualifying a Prospect Base Approaching the Customer with Adaptive Selling Determining Customer Needs with a Consultative Questioning Strategy Creating Value with the Consultative Presentation
196
13. 14. 15. 16. 17.
Negotiating Buyer Concerns Adapting the Close and Confirming the Partnership Servicing the Sale and Building the Partnership Management of Self and Others Management of the Sales Force
Diane Martin John Schouten
Sustainable Marketing
Basic Approach
For courses in Sustainable Marketing or as a supplement to marketing courses that include sustainability as a focus. A lasting approach to marketing. As the engine that drives the global economy, marketing leaves an enormous footprint on the environment and society. To help readers make a lasting impression in their marketing efforts, Martin/Schouten provides the concepts behind valuableand lucrativesustainable marketing strategies.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.
An Introduction to Sustainable Marketing Sustainable Marketing Strategy Ethical Dimensions of Sustainable Marketing The Marketing Environment and Processes Consumer Behavior and Sustainable Marketing Measurement and Research for Sustainable Marketing Market Segmentation, Targeting, and Positioning for Sustainability Global Problems, Global Opportunities Sustainable Products and Services Sustainable Branding and Packing Marketing Channels: Sustainability in the Value Chain Sustainable Pricing Sustainable Marketing Communication Sustainability in the Promotion MixMethods, Media, and Customer Relationships Digital Media and Sustainable Marketing
Strategic Marketing
Todd Mooradian Kurt Matzler Lawrence J. Ring
Basic Approach
For highly applied undergraduate and graduate marketing management or strategy courses. An all-purpose approach to strategic marketing management. Because strategic marketing is the essential marketing activity, Mooradian provides students with a highly applied decision-making framework and exploration of the tools that can be used to solve marketing problems.
Table of Contents
SECTION I OVERVIEW 1. Overview of Marketing Strategy and the Strategic Marketing Process 2. Situation Assessment: The External Environment 3. Situation Assessment: The Company 4. Strategy Formation 5. Implementation 6. Planning, Assessment and Adjustment SECTION II SITUATION ASSESSMENT Note 1: Market Definition Note 2: Context (PEST) Note 3: Customer Assessment Trends and Insights Note 4: Consumer and Organizational Buyer Behavior Note 5: Competitor Analysis Competitive Intelligence Note 6: Company Assessment Missions and Visions Note 7: Company Assessment The Value Chain Note 8: Industry Analysis Note 9: Product Lifecycle Note 10: Experience Curve Effects on Cost Reduction Note 11: Economies and Diseconomies of Scale
197
Note 12: Economies of Scope/Synergies and Virtuous Circles Note 13: Market Share Effects Note 14: Scenario Analysis SECTION III MARKETING STRATEGIES Note 15: The Marketing Concept Note 16: What Is a Marketing Strategy? Note 17: Generic Strategies Advantage and Scope Note 18: Generic Strategies The Value Map Note 19: Generic Strategies Product-Market Growth Strategies Note 20: Specific Marketing Strategies SECTION IV STRATEGY FORMULATION Note 21: Market Segmentation Note 22: Loyalty-Based Marketing, Customer Acquisition, and Customer Retention Note 23: Customer Lifetime Value Note 24: Competitive Advantages Note 25: SWOT Analysis Note 26: Targeting Note 27: Positioning SECTION V IMPLEMENTATION Note 28: Customer-Oriented Market Research Note 29: Brands and Branding Note 30: Products New Product Development Note 31: Products Innovations Note 32: Products Product Portfolios Note 33: Pricing Strategies Note 34: Promotion and People Integrated Marketing Communications Note 35: Place Distribution SECTION VI DOCUMENTATION, AND ASSESSMENT AND ADJUSTMENT Note 36: Budgets, Forecasts, and Objectives Note 37: Staircase Analysis Note 38: Assessment and Adjustment Appendix A: Basic Financial Math for Marketing Strategy Appendix B: Strategic Marketing Plan Exercise Appendix C: The One-Page Memo Appendix D: Case Analysis and Action-Oriented Decisions
Sandra Moriarty Nancy Mitchell William Wells
Advertising & IMC: Principles and Practices, 9/e
Basic Approach
For introductory courses in advertising. An accessible, well-written, and student-friendly approach to advertising. Advertising tracks the changes in todays dynamic world of media and marketing communicationas well as the implications of these changes to traditional practiceand presents them to students through an accessible, wellwritten approach. The ninth edition highlights the increasing importance of consumers as the driving force in todays advertising strategies, social media, and the Internet evolution/revolution. It also includes an increased IMC and brand focus. This title is a Pearson Global Edition. The Editorial team at Pearson has worked closely with educators around the world to include content which is especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Table of Contents
PART I: PRINCIPLES ENDURE IN TIMES OF TURMOIL 1. The New World of Marketing Communication 2. Integrated Brand Communication 3. Brand Communication and Society PART II: PRINCIPLE: BE TRUE TO THY BRAND 4. How Brand Communication Works 5. Segmenting and Targeting the Audience 6. Strategic Research 7. Strategic Planning PART III: PRACTICE: WHERE IS CREATIVE HEADED? 8. Creative Strategy 9. Copywriting 10. Visual Communication PART IV: PRACTICE: WHERE ARE MEDIA HEADING? 11. Media Basics 12. Traditional Media 13. Digital Media 14. Media Planning and Buying PART V: PRACTICE: IMC AND TOTAL COMMUNICATION 15. Public Relations 16. Direct-Response
198
17. Promotions 18. The IMC Umbrella 19. Evaluation of Effectiveness
Brand You for Marketing: Real People Real Choices, 7/e

Kim Richmond ISBN 10: 013038853X ISBN 13: 9780130388537 312pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Products arent alone in benefiting from branding. People can benefit too. Branding strategies help professionals get noticed and position them for exciting new career opportunities. Prepared by Kim Richmond of Saint Josephs University, the Brand You handbook gives students concrete advice on how to thrive in a competitive marketplace and provides a hands-on approach to achieving career success. Brand You boxes appear throughout this textbook to help students plot their own branding strategies.
Consumer Behavior, 11/e

Leon G. Schiffman Leslie G. Kanuk
For undergraduate and graduate consumer behavior courses. The text that set the standard for consumer behavior study. Consumer Behavior explores how the examination and application of consumer behavior is central to the planning, development, and implementation of marketing strategies. This edition captures the impact of new media on consumer behavior and focuses on the marketers ability to learn more about customers purchases in order to implement strategy with greater precision. This is a Pearson Global Edition. The Pearson Editorial team worked closely with educators around the world to include content especially relevant to students outside the United States.
Basic Approach
Matthew D. Shank
Sports Marketing, 5/e
Basic Approach
For courses in Sports Marketing. Shank provides a framework or conceptual model of the strategic marketing process that can be applied to the sports industry.
Consumer Behavior, 10/e

Michael R. Solomon ISBN 10: 0273767313 ISBN 13: 9780273767312 640pp 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate and MBA courses in consumer behavior. Solomon goes beyond the discussion of why people buy things and explores how products, services, and consumption activities contribute to shape peoples social experiences. This is a Pearson Global Edition. The Pearson Editorial team worked closely with educators around the world to include content especially relevant to students outside the United States.
199
Table of Contents
SECTION 1: CONSUMERS IN THE MARKETPLACE 1. Buying, Having, and Being SECTION 2: CONSUMERS AS INDIVIDUALS 2. Perception 3. Learning and Memory 4. Motivation and Global Values 5. The Self 6. Personality and Psychographics SECTION 3: CONSUMERS AS DECISION MAKERS 7. Attitudes and Persuasion 8. Decision Making 9. Buying and Disposing 10. Organizational and Household Decision Making SECTION 4: CONSUMERS AND SUBCULTURES 11. Groups and Social Media 12. Social Class and Lifestyles 13. Subcultures 14. Culture
Marketing: Real People, Real Choices, 7/e
Michael R. Solomon, Saint Joseph's University Greg W. Marshall, Rollins College Elnora W. Stuart, The University of South Carolina Upstate ISBN 10: 0132494027 ISBN 13: 9780132494021 600pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate Principles of Marketing courses. Real people, real choicesgive students a real feel for marketing. Marketing: Real People, Real Choices is the only text to introduce marketing from the perspective of real people who make real marketing decisions at leading companies everyday. This reader-friendly text conveys timely and relevant material in a dynamic presentation, highlighting how marketing concepts are implemented, and what they mean in the marketplace. The seventh edition includes more information on marketing metrics, todays new approach to advertising and promotions, and an increased emphasis on the links between marketing principles and the real world.
Table of Contents
PART 1: MAKE MARKETING VALUE DECISIONS 1. Welcome to the World of Marketing: Create and Deliver Value 2. Strategic Market Planning: Take the Big Picture 3. Thrive in the Marketing Environment: The World Is Flat PART 2: UNDERSTAND CONSUMERS VALUE NEEDS 4. Marketing Research: Gather, Analyze, and Use Information 5. Consumer Behavior: How and Why We Buy 6. Business-to-Business Markets: How and Why Organizations Buy 7. Sharpen the Focus: Target Marketing Strategies and Customer Relationship Management PART 3: CREATE THE VALUE PROPOSITION 8. Create the Product 9. Manage the Product 10. Services and Other Intangibles: Marketing the Product That Isnt There 11. Price the Product PART 4: COMMUNICATE THE VALUE PROPOSITION 12. Old and New Media: From One to Many to Many to Many 13. Advertising, Sales Promotion, and Public Relations: One to Many 14. Personal Selling, Sales Management, and Direct Marketing: One to One PART 5: DELIVER THE VALUE PROPOSITION 15. Deliver Value through Supply Chain Management, Channels of Distribution, and Logistics 16. Retailing: Bricks and Clicks Appendix A: Marketing Plan: The S&S Smoothie Company Appendix B: Marketing Math
Brand You: Marketing: Real People, Real Choices: European Edition

Michael R. Solomon Greg Marshall Elnora Stuart Kim Richmond John Kawalek
200
What does your Facebook profile say about you to future employers? How do you communicate your value proposition in a crowded market? Personal branding is becoming increasingly important in todays competitive jobs market. The Brand You workbook gives you concrete advice on how to thrive in a competitive marketplace and provides a hands-on approach to achieving career success. Brand You boxes appear throughout the text to help you plot their own branding strategies. The ability to talk about yourself so that others understand what you do and appreciate the value of your work separates the successful from the also-rans. Suitable for all undergraduates and postgraduates studying Business Management and Marketing and those taking modules in Public Relations.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
STEP 1 CHOOSING YOUR PATH 1. Welcome to Brand You: A Framework for Your Career Search 2. Planning Your Career: Setting Your Direction 3. Choosing the Right Work Environment: How to Find the Right Fit STEP 2 RESEARCHING THE MARKET 4. Career Information and Research: Know Where to Look 5. Why Employers Buy: How to Build Your Brand Based on Employers Needs 6. Meeting Employers Needs: How the Selection Process Works 7. Sharpening Your Focus: How to Use Target Marketing in Your Search for Work STEP 3 CREATING YOUR VALUE PROPOSITION 8. Creating the ProductYou: Identifying Your Value 9. Managing the ProductYou: Launching and Managing Your Career 10. Providing Services as Brand You: Exploring Entrepreneurship and Other Alternative Ways to Work 11. Pricing the Product: What Salary Can You Expect? STEP 4 COMMUNICATING YOUR VALUE PROPOSITION 12. Creating Your Communication Plan: Getting the Word Out about Your Brand 13. Advertising Your Brand: Crafting Your Resum and Cover Letter 14. Personal Selling: How Networking Can Help You Achieve Your Goals STEP 5 DELIVERING YOUR VALUE PROPOSITION 15. Delivering Value: How to Make Every Interview Successful 16. Evaluating and Finalizing Your Offer: Get What You Want
Stephan Sorger
Marketing Planning: Where Strategy Meets Action
Basic Approach
For courses on marketing planning. Marketing Planning: Where Strategy Meets Action offers marketing students and professionals a practical, step by step guide to creating marketing plans that deliver measurable results. It presents a comprehensive framework for strategic marketing planning and outlines a structured approach for developing effective marketing plans. The approach uses numerous figures, checklists, and decision charts to leverage proven marketing techniques and market data for high quality marketing plans. The book is packed with current examples, culminating in a complete sample marketing plan that demonstrates the books unique approach. The book is ideal for planning-related courses in upper-level undergraduate and lower-level graduate school programs, as well as for business executives seeking a competitive edge in the speed and quality of their marketing planning.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
The Planning Process Objectives Market Overview Market Segments Competitive Landscape Strategy Products and Services Pricing Distribution Promotion Finance Implementation Sample Marketing Plans
201
Judy Strauss Raymond Frost
E-Marketing, 6/e
Basic Approach
For courses in Internet Marketing or E-marketing. Traditional marketing coverage with an e-marketing twist. Strauss/Frost offers traditional marketing coverage with a twist: its focus is on the Internet and other technologies that have had a profound effect on marketing. The sixth edition focuses more on e-marketing strategy and practice, and less on principles of marketing refresher material.
Table of Contents
PART 1: E-MARKETING IN CONTEXT 1. Past, Present, and Future 2. Strategic E-Marketing and Performance Metrics 3. The E-Marketing Plan PART 2: E-MARKETING ENVIRONMENT 4. Building Inclusive E-Markets 5. Ethical and Legal Issues PART 3: E-MARKETING STRATEGY 6. E-Marketing Research 7. Consumer Behavior Online 8. Segmentation, Targeting, Differentiation, and Positioning Strategies PART 4: E-MARKETING MANAGEMENT 9. Product: The Online Offer 10. Pricing: The Online Value 11. The Internet for Distribution 12. E-Marketing Communication Tools 13. Engaging Customers with Social Media 14. Buying Digital Media Space 15. Customer Relationship Management Appendix A: Internet Penetration Worldwide in 2009 Appendix B: Glossary Appendix C: References
Innovation Management and New Product Development, 5/e

Paul Trott ISBN 10: 0273736566 ISBN 13: 9780273736561 648pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Most of the significant inventions of the past two centuries have not come from flashes of inspiration but from collaborative endeavours. This book argues that innovation is a management process that continues to be at the forefront of economic and political debate about how to improve the competitiveness of economies and firms. Innovation Management and New Product Development offers an accessible and authoritative multifunctional perspective on innovation management and new product development. Its clear and informed coverage of the management processes of new product development, coupled with a practical orientation of taking you through real life challenges and dilemmas, results in a book that brings together the most up-to-date and accessible discussion of the literature in this area, as well as a wealth of examples and illustrations in every chapter.
Table of Contents
PART 1: INNOVATION MANAGEMENT 1. Innovation Management: An Introduction 2. Entrepreneurship and Market Adoption 3. Managing Innovation within Firms 4. Process Innovation and Operations Management 5. Imitation, Counterfeit Products and Intellectual Property PART 2: MANAGING TECHNOLOGY AND KNOWLEDGE 6. Managing Organisational Knowledge 7. Strategic Alliances And Networks 8. Knowledge Transfer and Open Innovation in Innovation 9. Management of Research & Development 10. Managing R&D projects PART 3: NEW PRODUCT/SERVICE DEVELOPMENT 11. Product & Brand Strategy 12. New Product Development
202
13. 14. 15. 16.
New Service Development Packaging and Product Development The Role Of Market Research In New Product Development Practical Steps to Help Innovation and New Product Development
Tracy Tuten Michael R. Solomon, Saint Joseph's University ISBN 10: 0132551799 ISBN 13: 9780132551793 272pp 2013 Paper
Social Media Marketing
Basic Approach
The social media content that studentsand their future employersneed to have. Tuten/Solomon is the first social media marketing textbook that focuses on showing students how social media fits into the marketers toolbox.
Table of Contents
SECTION I: FOUNDATIONS OF SOCIAL MEDIA MARKETING 1. The Horizontal Revolution 2. Strategic Planning with Social Media 3. Social Consumers 4. Digital communities SECTION II: THE FOUR ZONES OF SOCIAL MEDIA 5. Social Communities 6. Social Publishing 7. Social Entertainment 8. Social Commerce SECTION III: MEASURING USERS AND SOCIAL MEDIA CAMPAIGNS 9. Social Media for Consumer Insight 10. Social Media Metrics
Marketing Across Culture, 6/e

Jean-Claude Usunier Julie Lee
ISBN 10: 0273757733 ISBN 13: 9780273757733 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
In an increasingly interconnected global business environment it is crucial that marketers recognise how a better understanding of cultural differences can help improve performance. Marketing Across Cultures examines how multinational companies can appreciate and adapt to international diversity. By comparing national marketing systems with local commercial customs, Usunier and Lee use a crosscultural approach that provides essential information on how marketing strategies can be implemented in different national contexts. This edition is full of up-to-date examples of internationally recognised companies that illuminate the various theories that underpin this area. Using clear language and numerous illustrations the text guides students through key cultural marketing issues, including new material on hot topics such as ethics, corporate social responsibility, and bribery.
William Wells Ruth Spence-Stone Robert Crawford Sandra Moriarty Nancy Mitchell
Advertising: Principles and Practice, Australasian Edition, 2/e
ISBN 10: 1442525126 ISBN 13: 9781442525122 2011 Paper
Basic Approach
Advertising-the Australian way! How do you define great advertising? How do you encourage creativity in advertising? Do interactive and digital media add value to advertising? Advertising: Principles and Practice 2e is the only practical, applied guide to the real world of advertising in Australasia showing how and why effective advertising is achieved.
203
Wells presents completely updated award-winning examples and the latest research on the expanding array of advertising methods available to advertisers. Consumer behaviour, measuring, planning and executing effective advertising, getting the right kind of attention and a wide range of ethical and sustainable issues are comprehensively covered. Advertising: Principles and Practice 2e is accompanied by an enhanced and updated set of teaching resources designed to underpin student success.
Table of Contents
PART I: FOUNDATIONS 1. Introduction to advertising 2. Advertisings role in marketing 3. Regulation and ethics of advertising PART II: PLANNING AND STRATEGY 4. How advertising works 5. Defining audiences for advertising 6. Strategic research in advertising 7. Advertising strategy and planning PART III: EFFECTIVE ADVERTISING MEDIA 8. Print and out-of-home media 9. Broadcast media 10. Interactive and digital media 11. Media strategy, planning and buying PART IV: CREATIVE ADVERTISING AND EFFECTIVE ADVERTISING 12. The creative side and message strategy 13. Copywriting 14. Art direction and production
Alan Wilson
Marketing Research: An Integrated Approach, 3/e
ISBN 10: 0273718703 ISBN 13: 9780273718703 432pp 2012 Paper Bound w/CD-ROM
Basic Approach
Marketing Research: An Integrated Approach, Third Edition, is invaluable for anyone studying marketing research at a degree or diploma level. The author is the lead examiner for modules in the professional qualifications of the Market Research Society and the Chartered Institute of Marketing, and the content of the book has been developed to fully support the Chartered Institute of Marketings Marketing Information and Research Professional Certificate module and The Market Research Societys Principles of Market and Social Research and Information Diploma module. The book places research in the bigger picture of marketing and demonstrates how an understanding of marketing research is a key requirement of any effective marketing professional. The text integrates the key concepts and techniques of marketing research with both the management of customer information from customer databases along with the monitoring of user-generated content appearing on online social networks. Marketing Research is written in a clear and accessible style using many examples, real-life case histories and discussions of current issues in marketing research and customer information management, making it ideal for supporting the delivery of single semester modules on marketing research.
Table of Contents
1. The role of marketing research and customer information in decision making 2. The marketing research process 3. Secondary data and customer databases 4. Collecting observation data and monitoring online user-generated contents 5. Collecting and analysing qualitative data 6. Collecting quantitative data 7. Designing questionnaires 8. Sampling methods 9. Analysing quantitative data 10. Presenting the research results MARKETING RESEARCH IN ACTION: CASE HISTORIES Case 1: Lynx - launching a new brand Case 2: Sony Ericsson - understanding the mobile phone market Case 3: AIR MILES - researching advertising effectiveness Case 4: The Metro - newspaper media research and understanding the reader Case 5: Birmingham airport - researching customer satisfaction Case 6: Gu - establishing a community for research Case 7: English Rugby - researching participation Case 8: Malta and MTV - researching attitudes Case 9: Allied Domecq - researching lifestyles Case 10: Dove - researching beauty for a communications campaign CURRENT ISSUES IN MARKETING RESEARCH Issue 1: Marketing research versus customer insight Issue 2: Merging marketing research with customer databases Issue 3: Observation and surveillance cameras Issue 4: Declining response rates
204
Issue 5: Challenges of business-to-business research Issue 6: Difficulties in achieving representative samples Issue 7: Research and social media Issue 8: Multi-mode interviewing Issue 9: Using technology for data collection Issue 10: Clients going direct to respondents Issue 11: International research Issue 12: The respondents' view of research Appendix 1 Statistical tables Appendix 2 Snap Getting Started Guide
205
Hospitality & Tourism

Events Management
John Beech Sebastian Kaiser Robert Kaspar
ISBN 10: 0273758624 ISBN 13: 9780273758624 2013 Paper
Jane Bokunewicz Donald Kneisel Maria McNichols
Casino Gaming Technology
For courses in Hospitality Information Systems and Gaming Technology. The first of its kind, this book explores the systems and technologies crucial to casino operations. Offering broad coverage, it traces the evolution of technology in slots, tables, casino cage, marketing, security, and miscellaneous systems like race/simulcast and sports book. Written from a business perspective, it focuses on how technology and systems are used to make better decisions, improve customer service and streamline operations. Each chapter includes learning activities and in-class discussions that prompt students to understand the past, present, and future impact of technology on the casino business.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
SECTION I: INTRODUCTION 1. Evolution of Gaming Technology 2. Casino Information Systems and Interfaces SECTION II: TABLES 3. Table Games Management 4. Cage Credit Collections 5. Table Player Rating SECTION III: SLOTS 6. The History of Slot Machines 7. Slot Machine Technology 8. Slot Information Systems SECTION IV: MARKETING 9. Player Loyalty Programs 10. Database Marketing SECTION V: 11. Security and Surveillance 12. Race and Simulcast Systems 13. Sports Betting Systems 14. A Look to the Future
George G. Fenich, University of New Orleans ISBN 10: 0132719916 ISBN 13: 9780132719919 360pp 2012 Paper
Meetings, Expositions, Events & Conventions: An Introduction to the Industry, 3/e
Basic Approach
For courses in Meeting, Event, Exposition and Convention Planning and Management. The Meetings, Expositions, Events, and Conventions industry continues to grow and garner increasing attention from the hospitality industry, communities, and college faculty. With a broad view of the industry, this book moves beyond just one segment to include all aspects related to the MEEC industry. Developed as a collaborative work, the text features contributions from some of the best and most notable practitioners and educators in the field. (Using the Delphi method, even the texts topics were selected based on industry input.) Now in its third edition, this revision features over 30 new case studies, the latest statistics and a new chapter devoted to green meetings and social responsibility.
206
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.
Introduction to the Meetings, Expositions, Events, and Conventions Industry Meeting, Exhibition, Event, And Convention Organizers and Sponsors Destination Marketing Organizations (DMOs) Meeting and Convention Venues Exhibitions Service Contractors Destination Management Companies (DMC) Special Events Management Planning and Producing MEEC Gatherings Food and Beverage Legal Issues in the MEEC Industry Technology and the Meeting Professional Green Meetings & Social Responsibility International Aspects in MEEC Pulling It All Together
Tourism: Principles and Practice, 5/e

John Fletcher Alan Fyall David Gilbert Stephen Wanhill
ISBN 10: 0273758276 ISBN 13: 9780273758273 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
In a changing and turbulent environment for tourism, Tourism: Principles and Practice offers the reader the fundamental and underlying principles with which to approach the study of tourism, contributing a complete framework that effectively integrates theory and practice. The text has been updated to take into account developments such as growing concern for climate change and the maturing response of tourism to the safety and security of tourists.
Foundations of Lodging Management, 2/e

David K. Hayes Jack D. Ninemeier Allisha A. Miller
For junior college or undergraduate courses in hotel management, lodging operations, and hospitality. Written in an easy-to-read, easy-to-understand style, Foundations of Lodging Management, 2e explores how the lodging industry and the hotels in the industry operate. With coverage of both small and large hotels, it addresses each department, including the front office, sales and marketing, housekeeping, maintenance and more! This edition features more on green initiatives, expanded discussion of revenue optimization, and an updated Front Office Simulation that helps students learn how to manage a hotels front office and better understand the complexity of the entire property.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
1. Introduction to the Lodging Industry 2. The Structure of the lodging Industry 3. Guest Service in the Lodging Industry 4. Managing Lodging Operations 5. Staffing the Lodging Operation 6. The Front Office Department 7. The Sales and Marketing Department 8. The Housekeeping Department 9. The Maintenance Department 10. Food and Beverage Operations: Limited Service Hotels 11. Food and Beverage Operations: Full-Service Hotels 12. The Accounting Department 13. Safety and Security 14. Careers in the Lodging Industry 15. The Front Office Management Simulation I. Front Office Management Training Challenges II. The Front Office Management Simulation (FOMS) III. Revenue Management Lessons IV. Reservation Management Lessons V. Guest Stay Information Lessons VI. Guest Departure and Payment VII. Accounting and Financial Summaries VIII. FOMS Completion
207
The Business of Tourism, 9/e

Chris Holloway Claire Humphreys
Basic Approach
The tourism industry is in a constant state of flux, where trends and attitudes are frequently susceptible to outside influences such as changes in technology and economical factors. The Business of Tourism by Chris Holloway and Claire Humphreys is the ideal textbook to help you to not only understand these new changes but look at them with a critical eye and predict future trends. This book is the ideal foundation text for Tourism or Tourism Management students. The historical context is combined with background theory and research plus up-to-date international case studies. The result is a practical and relevant text for any student wishing to work in the Tourism sector.
Table of Contents
PART I: DEFINING AND ANALYSING TOURISM AND ITS IMPACTS 1. An introduction to tourism 2. The development and growth of tourism to the mid 20th century 3. The era of popular tourism: 1950 to the twenty-first century 4. The demand for tourism 5. The economic impact of tourism 6. The socio-cultural impact of tourism 7. The environmental impact of tourism PART II: THE TRAVEL AND TOURISM PRODUCT 8. The structure and organisation of the travel and tourism industry 9. Tourist destinations 10. Visitor attractions 11. Business tourism 12. The hospitality sector: accommodation and catering services 13. Tourist transport by air 14. Tourist transport by water 15. Tourist transport on land PART III: INTERMEDIARIES IN THE PROVISION OF TRAVEL AND TOURISM 16. Visitor management 17. The structure and role of the public sector in tourism 18. Tour operating 19. Selling and distributing travel 20. Ancillary tourism services PART IV: CASE STUDIES
Bulent I. Kastarlak Brian Barber
Fundamentals of Planning and Developing Tourism
Basic Approach
For all courses in tourism development planning for both the public and private sectors. Fundamentals of Planning and Developing Tourism brings into focus the growing importance of tourism in developing economies of the world, for social change, alleviating poverty, and achieving sustained growth. It offers a complete, organized, and quantifiable methodology for tourism development planning that reflects economics, marketing, and crucial issues such as conservation, capacity constraints, and social acceptability. It covers all steps used for analyzing and planning tourism development in free market, mixed, and centrallyplanned economies. The text is replete with historical explorations and examples, including several real life case studies illuminating both successes and failures in tourism planning and development.
Table of Contents
PART I. BASIC PRINCIPLES OF PLANNING AND DEVELOPING TOURISM 1. Understanding Tourism Development 2. Toward a General Theory of Tourism Planning and Development. the BIK System 3. Prerequisites for Sustainable Tourism 4. Examples of General and Special Interest Tourism PART II. PLANNING ISSUES FOR TOURISM DEVELOPMENT 5. Market System and Planned Growth 6. Practicing Sustainable Tourism Development PART III. PLANNING PROCESSES FOR TOURISM DEVELOPMENT 7. Planning Cycle in Government Assisted Tourism Development 8. Tourism Development in Market Economic Systems 9. Government Policies and Legislations for Tourism Development
208
10. Financing Government and Private Sector Tourism Projects PART IV. TECHNIQUES FOR PLANNING AND DEVELOPING TOURISM 11. Surveying the Tourism Product 12. Analyzing Tourism Economy and Tourism Product 13. Planning Tourism At National, Regional, and Local Destination Levels 14. Project Design, Permit and Construction 15. Project Financing, Agreements and Ownership 16. Computer Simulations, Computer Aided Design (CAD) and Geographic Information System (GIS) 17. Managing, Planning and Marketing Tourism PART V. HISTORIES AND CASE STUDIES OF TOURISM PLANNING Waterfront Tourism Destination and Redevelopment, Boynton Beach, Florida, USA Suite Hotel & Resort (Apart-Hotel), Marmaris, Mu
Technology Strategies for the Hospitality Industry, 2/e

Peter Nyheim, The Pennsylvania State University Daniel Connolly, University of Denver ISBN 10: 0135038022 ISBN 13: 9780135038024 288pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For undergraduate/graduate-level courses in Hospitality Information Systems, and Hospitality Technology. This text examines technology strategies for the hospitality industry using case studies, interviews, and an interactive web page. Exceptionally practical in approach, this edition includes a new chapter on technology in the casino industry and a new chapter on technology for meetings and events. A separate chapter is devoted to planning and investment as students learn what technology exists and how to use it to succeed in the hospitality business.
Table of Contents
1. If You Think You Dont Need to Know About IT, Think Again! 2. Using Information Technology to Drive Competitive Advantage 3. Computing Essentials 4. Networks and Security 5. E-commerce 6. Restaurant Management Systems 7. Hotel and Resort Technology 8. Hotel Global Distribution Systems and Channels 9. Databases 10. Competing on Knowledge: How the Power of Information Can Enable Great Things 11. Technology in the Casino Industry 12. Technology for the Meetings and Events Industry 13. Strategic Hospitality Technology Investment APPENDIX I: Sample Request for Proposal (RFP)
Daniel Traster
Foundations of Cost Control
Basic Approach
For courses in Culinary Cost Control. Foundations of Cost Control inspires students to learn cost control as an essential skill for any future chef or foodservice manager. Students begin by mastering key culinary math basics, making subsequent cost control equations easier to understand and compute. Balancing real-world industry challenges with cost control theory, the text covers topics such as recipe costing and sales price determination, purchasing and storeroom control, labor control, revenue management, and income statements and budgeting. Throughout the text, author Daniel Traster encourages students to think critically about the material, promoting a deeper understanding of cost control.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Introduction to Cost Control Basic Math Unit and Recipe Conversions Yields Recipe Costing Calculating Sales Price and Food Cost Beverage Control Control through the Purchasing Process
209
9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.
Receiving, Storage, and Issuing Control Employee Organization and Scheduling Labor Management and Control Revenue Prediction Revenue Management Income Statements and Budgets A Discussion of Other Expenses
Gary K. Vallen, Northern Arizona University Jerome J. Vallen, University of Nevada, Las Vegas ISBN 10: 0132706717 ISBN 13: 9780132706711 624pp 2013 Cloth
Check-in Check-Out: Managing Hotel Operations, 9/e
Basic Approach
For courses in hotel administration that focus on front desk operations or hotel management, and as an adjunct to other hotel courses such as housekeeping, hotel accounting, hotel marketing or hotel personnel/human resources. Now in its Ninth Edition, Check-in Check-Out remains the leading guide to managing profitable hotel operations. Extensively revised to reflect the industrys rapid change, it presents rich detail about best practices and future directions, while offering the widest coverage of any book in the field. Students gain an intuitive understanding based on the flow of the guests experience: through reservation, arrival, registration, service purchasing, departure, billing, and recordkeeping. The entire rooms division is covered thoroughly, and linked to other hospitality functions, related industries, and the broader economy. Extensive new coverage includes: increased internationalization; green operations; new financing sources; boutique and urban collections; new reservations strategies; and much more. This edition has been streamlined to help students learn more in less time, and contains 150+ exhibits to promote visual learning.
Table of Contents
PART I: THE HOTEL INDUSTRY 1. The Traditional Hotel Industry 2. The Modern Hotel Industry 3. The Structures of the Hotel Industry PART II: THE RESERVATIONS PROCESS 4. Forecasting Availability and Overbooking 5. Global Reservations Technologies 6. Individual Reservations and Group Reservations PART III: GUEST SERVICE AND RATE STRUCTURES 7. Managing Guest Services 8. Arrival, Registration, Assignment and Rooming 9. The Role of the Room Rate PART IV: THE HOTEL REVENUE CYCLE 11. Billing the Guest Folio 12. Cash or Credit: The City Ledger PART V: TECHNOLOGY 10. The Night Audit 11. Hotel Technology
Hospitality Management, 3/e

Lynn Van der Wagen ISBN 10: 1442534796 ISBN 13: 9781442534797 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
Hospitality Management, 3e covers the core competency units in SIT07 Tourism, Hospitality and Events Training Package for the Diploma and Advanced Diploma in Hospitality Management. It provides the foundation knowledge needed for the role of a hospitality manager. The 3rd edition continues to combine theory with a skills building approach to explain the key principles of hospitality management at a supervisory, line management and senior management level. The text helps students develop the professional skills necessary to ensure quality products and services in all hospitality operations.
Table of Contents
PART 1: FRONTLINE SERVICE 1. The hospitality industry 2. A culturally diverse workplace 3. The customer service experience 4. Procedures for health, safety and the environment
210
PART 2: OPERATIONAL MANAGEMENT 5. Operational planning 6. OHS systems and procedures 7. Recruitment and selection 8. Coaching and monitoring performance 9. Leadership and motivation 10. Interpreting financial information 11. Stock control PART 3: STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT 12. Strategic marketing 13. Coordinate marketing activities 14. Legal compliance 15. Business relationships 16. Budgetary management 17. Financial management 18. Asset management 19. Risk management 20. Customer service management 21. Human resource management 22. Business planning
A.J. Veal
Research Methods for Leisure and Tourism, 4/e
Now in its fourth edition, Research Methods for Leisure and Tourism has quickly become the ultimate reference text for both students undertaking academic research and practising managers. This book combines comprehensive coverage of a wide variety of qualitative and quantitative research methods with in-depth step-by step guidance through research software including Excel, SPSS and NVivo.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
PART ONE PREPERATION 1. Introduction to research: what, why and who? 2. Approaches to leisure, sport and tourism research 3. Starting out - research plans and proposals 4. Research ethics 5. The range of research methods 6. Reviewing the literature PART TWO - DATA COLLECTION 7. Secondary data sources 8. Observation 9. Qualitative data collection 10. Questionnaires - surveys, design and coding 11. Experimental methods 12. The Case Study method 13. Sampling PART THREE - DATA ANALYSIS 14. Analysing secondary data 15. Analysing qualitative data 16. Survey analysis 17. Statistical analysis PART FOUR - COMMUNICATING RESULTS 18. Preparing a research report
John R. Walker
Exploring the Hospitality Industry, 2/e
Basic Approach
For courses in Introduction to Hospitality. Exploring the Hospitality Industry, 2e offers broad coverage of the hospitality industry in an easy-to-read, conversational style. Written by best-selling author John Walker, this book is less theoretical and more industryrelevant than mostemphasizing the people, companies, and positions that make up the hospitality industry today. Moving beyond just restaurants and hotels, it includes new growth areas such as event management,
211
meeting planning, cruising, theme parks, attractions and entertainment. With a new focus on sustainability, this edition features case studies, practitioners and corporations that engage and involve readers as they explore the trends in this ever-growing field.
Table of Contents
PART I: HOSPITALITY, TOURISM, AND TRAVEL 1. Hospitality Spirit 2. Tourism 3. Why People Travel PART II: LODGING AND CRUISING 4. Lodging 5. Lodging Operations 6. Cruising PART III: FOOD AND BEVERAGE SERVICE AND MANAGEMENT 7. Restaurants 8. Restaurant Operations 9. Managed Services 10. Beverages PART IV: CLUB MANAGEMENT, ATTRACTIONS, AND RECREATION 11. Clubs 12. Theme Parks and Attractions 13. Gaming Entertainment PART V: ASSEMBLIES AND EVENT MANAGEMENT 14. Meetings, Conventions, and Expositions 15. Special Events
Introduction to Hospitality, 6/e

John R. Walker ISBN 10: 0132993074 ISBN 13: 9780132993074 600pp 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For all introductory-level courses in hospitality. The Sixth Edition of Introduction to Hospitality focuses on hospitality operations while offering a broad, comprehensive foundation of current knowledge about the worlds largest industry. Throughout, author John R. Walker invites students to share this industrys unique enthusiasm and passion. The text is organized into five sections: the hospitality industry and tourism; lodging; restaurants, managed services, and beverages; recreation, theme parks, clubs, and gaming entertainment; and assemblies and event management. Each section includes insight from industry professionals, contains up-to-date information on career opportunities, and includes many examples illuminating current industry trends and realities. Extensively revised and updated, this edition contains new photos, new page layouts, and new coverage on topics ranging from sustainability to globalization.
Table of Contents
PART 1. INTRODUCING HOSPITALITY AND LODGING 1. Introducing Hospitality 2. The Hotel Business 3. Rooms Division Operations 4. Food and Beverage Operations PART 2. BEVERAGES, RESTAURANTS AND MANAGED SERVICES 5. Beverages 6. The Restaurant Business 7. Restaurant Operations 8. Managed Services PART 3. TOURISM, RECREATION, ATTRACTIONS, CLUBS, AND GAMING 9. Tourism 10. Recreation, Attractions and Clubs 11. Gaming and Entertainment PART 4. ASSEMBLIES, EVENTS, ATTRACTIONS, LEADERSHIP AND MANAGEMENT 12. Meetings, Conventions, and Expositions 13. Special Events 14. Leadership
John R. Walker Josielyn T. Walker
Introduction to Hospitality Management, 4/e
212
Basic Approach
For courses in Introduction to Hospitality and Hospitality Management. Capturing the flavor and breadth of the industry, Introduction to Hospitality Management explores all aspects of the field including: travel and tourism; lodging; foodservice; meetings, conventions and expositions; and leisure and recreation. Devoting six chapters to management, the text focuses on hospitality and management and uses first-person accounts, corporate profiles and industry morsels to foster a students appreciation for the field.
Spa Management: An Introduction

Mary S. Wisnom Lisa L. Capozio
Basic Approach
For courses in Spa Management, Spa Operations, Spa Customer Experience, and Resort/Club Management. This book provides a contemporary look at the spa industry, and the unique aspects of spa operations, and management. Complete with photos, tables and figures, it addresses spa industry basics, how to establish a spa business, operations and management, business skills and knowledge, and future trends in the industry. Each chapter includes a realistic view of operations and is accompanied by creative exercises and assignments. An appendix of industry resources and robust online resources help readers understand what it takes to manage a spa and succeed in this evolving industry.
Table of Contents
PART ONE: SPA INDUSTRY BASICS 1. Introduction to the Spa Industry PART TWO: ESTABLISHING THE BUSINESS 2. Spa Business Basics 3. Spa Offerings 4. Spa Facility Design and Construction PART THREE: OPERATIONS AND MANAGEMENT 5. Standard Operating Procedures 6. Spa Human Resources 7. Spa Facility Operations 8. Spa Client Management PART FOUR: BUSINESS SKILLS AND KNOWLEDGE 9. Spa Operations and the Law 10. Spa Financial Management 11. Spa Marketing and Promotion 12. Spa Business Evaluation PART FOUR: SPA PROFESSIONALS AND THE FUTURE OF THE INDUSTRY 13. The Spa Management Professional 14. Trends and the Future of the Spa Industry APPENDIX: SPA INDUSTRY RESOURCES
213
Culinary Arts
Menu, The: Development, Strategy, and Application
David Barrish ISBN 10: 0135078660 ISBN 13: 9780135078662 312pp 2013 Paper
For courses in Menu Planning, Menu Management, Menu Marketing, Restaurant Management, Culinary Management, Strategic Restaurant Marketing, Food Service Operations, and Food Service Management. The Menu: Development, Strategy, and Application offers an indispensable business resource for creative culinarian and hospitality manager students transitioning into careers. This text bridges understanding and action by avoiding a prescriptive approach in favor of recommendations and examples of best practices that bolster the creative process. Contextual exercises throughout each chapter help todays student actively transform learning into relevant, career-based skill sets. Following a logical sequence, the text addresses American Culinary Federation competencies such as Beverage Management, Business and Math Skills, Food Preparation, Nutrition, Purchasing and Receiving, and Sanitation.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
1. A Holistic Context for Menu Development 2. Where Food and Beverages are Served 3. How Customers Buy Your Products 4. The Strategic Value of Knowledge 5. Positioning Your Menus for Business Success 6. Operational Considerations 7. Conceiving Menus that Respond to Your Market 8. Menu Pricing 9. Communicating with Menus 10. Menu Analysis Appendix A: Extract from Food and Drug Administration Guidance for Industry: A Labeling Guide for Restaurants and Other Retail Establishments Selling Away-From-Home Foods
World of Culinary Management, The: Leadership and Development of Human Resources, 5/e
Jerald W. Chesser Noel C. Cullen, Boston University ISBN 10: 013274774X ISBN 13: 9780132747745 312pp 2013 Cloth For courses in Human Resource Management; Supervision; Management; sophomore/senior-level undergraduate courses in Food and Beverage; courses in all culinary arts two- and four-year degree programs; training seminars for chefs; and certification programs for the American Culinary Federation Educational Institute. The World of Culinary Management: Leadership and Development of Human Resources, Fifth Edition, gives aspiring chefs the foundational knowledge and skills required to lead, supervise, and manage foodservice workers. It outlines in clear terms those elements crucial to success in today's quality-driven foodservice industry, with in-depth exploration of the roles and responsibilities of a successful kitchen manager. It examines all aspects of training as it affects the chef supervisor, providing practical, step-by-step discussions on crucial management skills and functions. Written specifically for the associate degree and certificate level program, this is one of the only texts available thats designed to provide complete information on human resource management from a culinary perspective.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
SECTION ONE: THE WORLD OF SUPERVISION 1. Supervision 2. Legal Aspects 3. Recruiting and Selecting Team Members 4. Compensation, Benefits and Scheduling SECTION TWO: THE WORLD OF TRAINING AND DEVELOPMENT 5. Orientation 6. Training and Quality 7. Training Objectives and Planning 8. Training Methods 9. Instructional Delivery 10. Performance Appraisal 11. Work Environment
214
SECTION THREE: THE WORLD OF MANAGEMENT 12. Management 13. Motivation 14. Team Building 15. Respect 16. Discipline SECTION FOUR: THE WORLD OF LEADERSHIP 17. Leadership 18. Communication 19. Time Management 20. Problem Solving and Decision Making
Food Defense Fundamentals: Using the S.H.A.R.E. Principle To Protect the Global Food Supply
Michael Dixon Tara Paster
Basic Approach
For all courses in food safety intended for students who will participate in the food industry, food regulation, or academia. This is a comprehensive, all-inclusive global food defense solution intended to help students protect families, friends, colleagues, public health, their brands, and the food industry from deliberate contamination. Students are guided through creating a food defense culture, writing a food defense plan, and building the confidence of both managers and employees. Successful completion of this eight-hour program will enable students to earn a Food Defense certification that is valid for four years.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Strategy Hazards Accessibility Restrictions Enforcement
Practical Chef's Reference, The: A Compendium of Charts, Formulas and Ratios

Russell Furdell ISBN 10: 0135125774 ISBN 13: 9780135125779 432pp 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Culinary Arts, Post-Secondary; Culinary Arts, Secondary. The Practical Chefs Reference: A Compendium of Charts, Formulas, and Ratios is designed to serve as a data reference, a basic formula reference, and a teaching tool. Developed to address the need for a compact, single source, comprehensive culinary data reference, this book provides broad coverage of culinary arts fundamentals in an accessible chart format.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22.
Batter/Dough/Crumb Crust Beverage Charcuterie Chemical Leavening Chocolate Cocoa Condiment Custard Dairy Products Eggs Equipment Fats Fish/Seafood Flour Fruit Gelatin Math Meat Meringue Methods Nuts Pasta Products
215
23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34.
Poultry Safety Sanitation Sauce Seasoning Soup Spice/Herb Stock Sweeteners Vegetable Weight/Measure Yeast
Food Service Organizations: A Managerial and Systems Approach, 8/e

Mary B. Gregoire, College of Family and Consumer Sciences Apparel, Educational Studies, Hospitality ISBN 10: 0132620812 ISBN 13: 9780132620819 600pp 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For all dietetic and foodservice management courses covering topics such as procurement, financial management, quantity food production, human resource management, and leadership. Organized around the well-proven foodservice systems model, this text provides detailed and current information on how managers can optimally transform human, material, facility, and operational inputs into outputs of meals, customer satisfaction, employee satisfaction, and financial accountability. Blending theory and practice, it gives foodservice managers a strong empirical base for managing operations. After thoroughly introducing the model, it presents in-depth coverage of each functional subsystem: procurement, production, distribution, service, safety, sanitation, and maintenance. Next, readers master todays most relevant leadership, communication, decision making, HR, financial, and marketing techniques. The book concludes with a full section on system outputs, including methods for evaluating them. This edition adds new coverage of sustainability; updated information on energy management and food safety; expanded coverage of marketing and globalization; and the latest dietary guidelines. PART 1. THE FOODSERVICE SYSTEMS MODEL 1. Systems Approach to a Foodservice Organization 2. Managing Quality 3. The Menu PART 2. TRANSFORMATION: FUNCTIONAL SUBSYSTEMS 4. Food Product Flow and Kitchen Design 5. Procurement 6. Food Production 7. Distribution and Service 8. Safety, Sanitation, and Maintenance PART 3. TRANSFORMATION: MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS AND LINKING PROCESSES 9. Management Principles 10. Leadership and Organizational Change 11. Decision Making, Communication, and Balance 12. Management of Human Resources 13. Management of Financial Resources 14. Marketing Foodservice PART 4. OUTPUTS OF THE SYSTEM 15. Meals, Satisfaction, and Accountability APPENDIX A. Sample Specifications for Food Products APPENDIX B. Resources for Writing Specifications APPENDIX C. Standards for Food Products
Table of Contents
David K. Hayes Allisha A. Miller Jack D. Ninemeier
Professional Kitchen Manager, The
Basic Approach
For Culinary Arts courses in Cost Control, Menu Planning and Development, Purchasing, and Supervision. Focusing on back-of-house management, Professional Kitchen Management addresses topics such as supervision, menu planning, development and use of standard recipes, purchasing, and cost control. Students will learn how to evaluate menus, manage inventory, train personnel and deliver food services on a budget.
216
An innovative format pairs concepts presented in each chapter with cleverly animated and highly interactive Kitchen Management Simulations (KMS) lessons to provide hands-on training that is fun for students and time freeing for instructors. Reader-friendly features explain why concepts are important to daily operations and identify the skills needed to manage a high-quantity food production kitchen.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Kitchen Kitchen Kitchen Kitchen Kitchen Kitchen Kitchen Kitchen Kitchen Kitchen Kitchen
Managers Managers Managers Managers Managers Managers Managers Managers Managers Managers Managers
Get Ready for Food Production Select and Train Production Employees Lead Food Production Employees Plan Their Menus Design Their Menu Use Standard Recipes Cost Recipes and Assist Food Servers Use Effective Purchasing Practices Use Effective Receiving, Inventory, Management and Issuing Practices Analyze Their Menus Analyze Sales and Control Revenue
International Cooking: A Culinary Journey, 2/e

Patricia A. Heyman ISBN 10: 0132126117 ISBN 13: 9780132126113 576pp 2012 Paper
For courses in International Cookery, Continental Cookery, Cuisines of the World, World Cookery. Streamlined in this edition, this text looks at the worlds cuisines and how they developed and evolved. Organized by continent, each country and cuisine is explored in terms of its history, topography, cooking methods, common foods, flavorings, and general characteristics. Over 340 recipes appear in this edition and represent a variety of foods and dishes from all segments of the menu. This edition features 90 brand new recipes, three new countries and ideas for modernizing classic recipes. With an emphasis on flavor components and traditional and contemporary cookery, this edition reflects the evolving nature of world cuisine.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
I. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. II. 8. III. 9. 10. IV. 11. 12. 13. 14. V. 15. VI. 16. 17. 18.
EUROPE British Isles Spain and Portugal France Italy Germany Scandinavia Russia and Eastern Europe AFRICA The Countries of Africa MIDDLE EAST Lebanon, Jordan, Iraq, Saudi Arabia, Syria, Iran, Greece, and Turkey Israel ASIA China Japan and Korea Vietnam, Thailand, Indonesia, and the Philippines India AUSTRALIA Australia and New Zealand LATIN AMERICA Mexico South America Caribbean Islands
Sarah R. Labensky Priscilla A. Martel Eddy Van Damme ISBN 10: 0132374560 ISBN 13: 9780132374569 848pp 2013 Cloth
On Baking, 3/e
Basic Approach
For courses in baking and the pastry arts.
217
On Baking, Third Edition brings a fresh new design and 350+ new images to the fundamentals approach that has prepared thousands of students for successful careers in the baking and pastry arts. It teaches both the hows and whys, starting with general procedures, highlighting core principles and skills, and then presenting many applications and sample recipes. Professionalism, breads, desserts and pastries, and advanced pastry work are each covered in detail, and baking and pastry arts are presented in cultural and historical context throughout. An expanded recipe testing program involving chef-instructors at leading culinary schools ensures superior accuracy, clarity and instructional value. This edition reflects key trends including artisan baking, sensory science, and flavor pairing, and is complemented by a greatly enhanced support package, including media solutions MyCulinaryLab for course management and Pearson Kitchen Manager for recipe management.
Table of Contents
PART I. PROFESSIONALISM AND THE BAKESHOP 1. Professionalism 2. Tools and Equipment for the Bakeshop 3. Principles of Baking 4. Bakeshop Ingredients 5. Mise En Place PART II. BREADS 6. Quick Breads 7. Yeast Breads 8. Enriched Yeast Breads 9. Laminated Doughs PART III. DESSERTS AND PASTRIES 10. Cookies and Brownies 11. Pies and Tarts 12. Pastry and Dessert Components 13. Cakes and Icings 14. Custards, Creams and Sauces 15. Ice Cream and Frozen Desserts 16. Healthful and Special-Needs Baking PART IV. ADVANCED PASTRY WORK 17. Tortes and Specialty Cakes 18. Petits Fours and Confections 19. Restaurant and Plated Desserts 20. Chocolate and Sugar Work Appendix I. Measurement and Conversion Charts Appendix II. Fresh Fruit Availability Chart Appendix III. Volume Formulas Appendix IV. Templates
Food Fundamentals, 10/e

Margaret McWilliams, California State University, Los Angeles
Basic Approach
For introductory courses serving students who intend to pursue degrees and careers in food science, dietetics, or nutrition. This text integrates the scientific principles of safe and nutritious food preparation with the basic techniques students need to work effectively with food. It introduces the scientific basis of current practices and procedures, and explains ingredients both as nutrient sources and as food product components. The effects of preparation techniques are discussed in the context of the science underlying food manipulation, ingredients, ratios, effects of heat and cold, storage, preservation, and evaluation. Foods from diverse cultures are covered, and Cultural Accents features present a global perspective. Study aids include Key Concepts chapter roadmaps; Science Notes and Industry Insights; Judging Points to help students evaluate food products; updated web links; and many new illustrations. Fully revised to reflect MyPlate and the 2010 Dietary Guidelines for Americans, this edition adds more information on healthy food choices, labeling, vegetarian diets, and gluten-free products.
Table of Contents
SECTION 1. FOUNDATION FOR FOOD STUDY 1. Food for Today 2. Nutrition and Food 3. Food Safety SECTION 2. FOOD PREPARATION 4. Factors in Food Preparation 5. Vegetables 6. Fruits 7. Salads and Salad Dressings 8. Fats and Oils 9. Carbohydrates: Sugar 10. Carbohydrates: Starches and Cereals 11. Proteins: Milk and Cheese 12. Proteins: Eggs 13. Proteins: Meats, Poultry, and Fish
218
14. Leavening Agents 15. Basics of Batters and Doughs 16. Breads 17. Cakes, Cookies, and Pastries 18. Beverages 19. Preserving Food SECTION 3. FOOD IN THE CONTEXT OF LIFE 20. Menu Planning and Meal Preparation 21. Meal Service and Hospitality Appendix A. The Metric System Appendix B. Some Food Additives Appendix C. Dietary Reference Intakes
Margaret McWilliams, California State University, Los Angeles ISBN 10: 013707929X ISBN 13: 9780137079292 600pp 2012 Cloth
Foods: Experimental Perspectives, 7/e
Basic Approach
For all courses in experimental foods, food science, and related topics. Foods: Experimental Perspectives, Seventh Edition will help students pursuing food-related careers broaden and deepen their scientific knowledge of food and its safe preparation. It clearly explains food sciences foundational principles and most important emerging technologies. The text first surveys the consumer marketplace, career opportunities, and basic food research techniques. Next, it discusses foods physical aspects and preparation, and thoroughly explains carbohydrates, lipids, and proteins. Finally, it presents up-to-date coverage of food safety, preservation, and additives. Learning is promoted through Food for Thought boxes, photos, objectives, margin notes, definitions, charts, web links, and study questions. Updated throughout, this edition includes extensively revised coverage of food safety, GMOs, trans fats, alternative sweeteners, and much more.
Table of Contents
PART I. RESEARCH PERSPECTIVES 1. Dimensions of Food Studies 2. The Research Process 3. Sensory Evaluation 4. Objective Evaluation PART II. PHYSICAL PERSPECTIVES 5. Water 6. Physical Aspects of Food Preparation PART III. CARBOHYDRATES 7. Overview of Carbohydrates 8. Monosaccharides, Disaccharides, and Sweeteners 9. Starch 10. Vegetables and Fruits PART IV. LIPIDS 11. Overview of Fats and Oils 12. Fats and Oils in Food Products PART V. PROTEINS 13. Overview of Proteins 14. Milk and Milk Products 15. Meat, Fish, and Poultry PART VI. FOOD SUPPLY PERSPECTIVES 16. Food Safety Concerns and Controls 17. Food Preservation 18. Food Additives
Margaret McWilliams, California State University, Los Angeles ISBN 10: 0132738759 ISBN 13: 9780132738750 408pp 2013 Paper
Illustrated Guide to Food Preparation, 11/e
Basic Approach
For first-year introductory foods courses; and first or second-year courses in Dietetics/Consumer & Family Sciences, Food & Nutrition, Nutrition Science, Food Science, or Food Technology. Uniting scientific and aesthetic principles with laboratory realities, students learn about the distinctive characteristics of a wide range of ingredients, and develop the skills and knowledge they need to cost-effectively create delicious and nourishing dishes. Reflecting societys growing focus on locally-grown foods, phytochemicals, and weight control, this edition deepens its emphasis on preparing fruits and vegetables in appetizing ways.
219
Throughout, recipes have been tailored to minimize calories and maximize appeal. Many are integrated in an updated meal management chapter showing how to create appealing, nutritious dishes within tight budgets and schedules. Topic coverage includes: fruits/vegetables; salads/dressings; sugar, starch, cereals, and eggs; meats, poultry, and fish; breads, cakes, cookies, and pies; beverages, and preservation.
Table of Contents
1. Laboratory Basics 2. Vegetables 3. Fruits 4. Salads and Salad Dressings 5. Sugar Cookery 6. Starch and Cereal Cookery 7. Milk and Cheese 8. Egg Cookery 9. Meats, Poultry, and Fish 10. Breads 11. Cakes and Cookies 12. Pies 13. Beverages 14. Food Preservation 15. Meal Management Appendix A. The Metric System
HACCP Food Safety Employee Manual

Tara Paster ISBN 10: 0131391828 ISBN 13: 9780131391826 78pp 2012 Paper
For all courses in food safety intended for retail food service employees, food handlers, cooks, frontof-house team members, and back-of-house team members; especially for courses covering the HACCP system and/or preparing students to take the Basic HACCP Certification Exam. This easy-to-read text teaches the basics of food safety using the HACCP system, presenting the core knowledge, skills, and abilities that retail foodservice employees need to prevent accidental or deliberate food contamination. The easy-to-understand HACCP Star concept is used throughout to illustrate how HACCPs standard operating procedures and seven principles work together. The text begins by presenting basic food safety and food defense standard operating procedures, and explaining why they are so important. Next, it covers all elements of creating and using an effective HACCP plan, including: conducting hazard analyses, determining critical control points, establishing critical limits monitoring procedures, and corrective actions; verifying that the system works, and keeping records.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
HACCP HACCP HACCP HACCP HACCP Star Star Star Star Star Point Point Point Point Point 1: 2: 3: 4: 5:
Master Prerequisite Food Safety Programs Apply Food Defense Create A HACCP Plan Work The Plan Checks And Balances
Foodservice Management: Principles and Practices, 12/e

June Payne-Palacio, Pepperdine University Monica Theis, University of Wisconsin, Madison ISBN 10: 0132719924 ISBN 13: 9780132719926 600pp 2012 Paper
For courses in foodservice management or administration; hospitality management; quantity food production and/or purchasing; foodservice accounting/financial management; menu planning; foodservice marketing/merchandising, or related topics. This is todays most comprehensive, current, and practical overview of foodservice operations and the business principles needed to manage them successfully. Authored by leading industry experts and experienced instructors, it covers all core topics, including food safety, organizational design, human resources, performance improvement, finance, equipment, design, layout, and marketing. This 12th Edition is retitled to better reflect its college level. The content is still concentrated on basic principles, but increasingly reflects the impact of current social, economic, technological, and political factors. For example, it now focuses on sustainability throughout, and offers greater emphasis on culinary issues. The textbook also contains a new running case study based on University of Wisconsin, Madisons University Dining Services.
Basic Approach
220
Table of Contents
PART I. THE FOUNDATIONS 1. The Foodservice Industry 2. The Systems Approach PART II. THE FUNDAMENTALS 3. Food Safety 4. Cleaning, Sanitation, and Environmental Safety 5. The Menu PART III. THE OPERATIONAL FUNCTIONS 6. Purchasing 7. Receiving, Storage, and Inventory 8. Production 9. Service PART IV. THE FACILITIES 10. Facilities Planning and Design 11. Equipment and Furnishings 12. Environmental Management PART V. THE MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS 13. Organizational Design 14. Leadership 15. Human Resource Management 16. Performance Improvement 17. Financial Management 18. Marketing APPENDIX A. Principles of Basic Cooking APPENDIX B. Foodservice Equipment
American Regional Cuisines: Food Culture and Cooking

Lou Sackett David Haynes
Basic Approach
For courses in American Regional Cooking or American Cuisine. Filled with colorful recipes and comprehensive information on American food culture and history, this book provides an overview of American Regional Cuisines: Food Culture and Cooking. Featuring over 300 master recipes, it examines the culture, products and cuisine of fifteen culinary regionsfrom New England to Hawaii and the micro-cuisines that exist within each region. Designed for the working chef, its recipes offer an ideal format based on how professionals actually cook in restaurants. The authors foodservice and education backgrounds give the book the scholarly knowledge and the professional experience needed to make it an authentic reference that meets the demands of todays culinary students.
Table of Contents
KEYS TO UNDERSTANDING AMERICAN REGIONAL CUISINES 1. Defining and Exploring Americas Regional Cuisines 2. The Haynes Five Factors in the Development of a Regional Cuisine 3. The Restaurant Recipe Format THE PLANTATION SOUTH 4. The Food Culture of the Plantation South 5. The Carolina Lowcountry and Soul Food Micro-Cuisines 6. Recipes and Ingredients of the Plantation South NEW ENGLAND 7. The Food Culture of New England 8. The New England Acadian Micro-Cuisine 9. Recipes and Ingredients of New England THE CHESAPEAKE BAY SHORE 10. The Food Culture of the Chesapeake Bay Shore 11. Recipes and Ingredients of the Chesapeake Bay Shore THE MID-ATLANTIC 12. The Food Culture of the Mid-Atlantic 13. The Pennsylvania Dutch Micro-Cuisine 14. Recipes and Ingredients of the Mid-Atlantic LOUISIANA 15. The Food Culture of Louisiana 16. Recipes and Ingredients of Louisiana THE MEXICAN BORDER 17. The Food Culture of the Mexican Border 18. The Southwestern Native American Micro-Cuisines 19. Recipes and Ingredients of the Mexican Border THE APPALACHAIN SOUTH 20. The Food Culture of the Appalachian South 21. Recipes and Ingredients of the Appalachian South THE CENTRAL FARMLANDS AND CITIES
221
22. The Food Culture of the Central Farmlands and Cities 23. The German-American, Polish-American, and Scandinavian-American Micro Cuisines 24. Recipes and Ingredients of the Central Farmlands and Cities THE WESTERN AND CENTRAL RANCHLANDS 25. The Food Culture of the Western and Central Ranchlands 26. Recipes and Ingredients of the Western and Central Ranchlands ANGLO-ASIAN CALIFORNIA 27. The Food Culture of Anglo-Asian California 28. The Chinese-American Micro-Cuisine 29. Recipes and Ingredients of Anglo-Asian California THE PACIFIC NORTHWEST 30. The Food Culture of the Pacific Northwest 31. Recipes and Ingredients of the Pacific Northwest THE ROCKY MOUNTAINS AND THE GREAT BASIN 32. The Food Culture of the Rocky Mountains and the Great Basin 33. Recipes and Ingredients of the Rocky Mountains and the Great Basin HAWAII 34. The Food Culture of Hawaii 35. Recipes and Ingredients of Hawaii SOUTH FLORIDA AND THE AMERICAN CARIBBEAN 36. The Food Culture of South Florida and the American Caribbean 37. The Cuban-American and Puerto Rican Micro-Cuisines 38. Recipes and Ingredients of South Florida and the American Caribbean THE NEW YORK CITY MELTING POT 39. The Food Culture of the New York City Melting Pot 40. The Italian-American and Jewish-American Micro-Cuisines 41. Recipes and Ingredients of the New York City Melting Pot AMERICAS NATIONAL CUISINE 42. The Development, Decline, and Renaissance of Americas National Cuisine AMERICAN BASICS 43. Fundamental Recipes APPENDIX I: BARBEQUE APPENDIX II: CURING AND SMOKING APPENDIX III: SEASONAL AVAILABILITY CHART FOR REGIONAL PRODUCTS APPENDIX IV: PRODUCT SOURCES APPENDIX V: GUIDE TO READING AND LISTENING APPENDIX VI: INDEX
Edward E. Sanders, Hospitality News Group Paul C. Paz Ronald C. Wilkinson Marcella Giannasio ISBN 10: 0131709925 ISBN 13: 9780131709928 240pp 2013 Paper
Professional Server, The: A Training Manual, 2/e
For undergraduate Hospitality/Travel/Tourism courses that focus on waiter/waitress training and service of food. Filled with real-life examples, The Professional Server: A Training Manual covers all aspects of dining room service. This edition contains in-depth coverage of everything a good waiter or waitress needs to know to be successful in this competitive professionfrom professional appearance, to server readiness, to guest communication. Self-contained chapters flow in a logical sequence and offer an explanation of table settings, wine and beverage service and current technologies. Restaurant Reality stories, Server Profiles, charts and photos give students an insiders look into the realities of the profession.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
1. The Professional Server 2. Professional Appearance 3. Table Settings, Napkin Presentations, and Table Service 4. Serving Food and Beverages 5. Service Readiness 6. Wine and Beverage Service 7. Guest Communication 8. The Technology of Service 9. The Host 10. Banquets, Catering, and Buffet Service Appendix A: Common Menu Terms Appendix B: Wine Terminology: General, Sight, Smell, and Taste Appendix C: Spirit Brands and Related Cocktails Appendix D: Ales, Lagers, and Non-Alcoholic Beers
222
Beverage Manager's Guide to Wines, Beers and Spirits, The, 3/e

Albert W.A. Schmid John Peter Laloganes
Basic Approach
For courses in Beverage Management, Wines, Beers and Spirits, Dining Room Services and Beverage Purchasing and Cost Control. The Beverage Managers Guide to Wines, Beers and Spirits, Third Edition, navigates the reader through an intriguing journey on the vast world of alcoholic beverages. The text serves as an authoritative guide intended to inspire those individuals pursuing or enhancing a career in the food and beverage industry; the book will be equally fascinating for the beverage enthusiast. Written in a lively and engaging literary style, that is both comprehensive and yet concise; exploring the essential management and service aspects of drink. Designed to be intellectually appealing, with stimulating photography while providing the necessary knowledge on building and sustaining a profitable beverage program. This read provides marvelous insights into the beverage industry by discovering the sometimes perplexing, yet enduring influence of wines, beers and spirits that have been inseparable from the evolution of civilization.
Table of Contents
UNIT 1.0 AN EXPLORATION OF ALCOHOL BEVERAGES 1. The Evolution of Alcoholic Beverages 2. Alcohol Safety and Professional Beverage Service UNIT 2.0 AN EXPLORATION OF WINES 3. Viticulture: Outside in the Vineyard 4. Enology: Inside the Winery 5. Wine Regulations and Labeling Methods 6. The Wine Styling Approach 7. Other Wines: Sparkling, Fortified and Dessert Wines UNIT 3.0 AN EXPLORATION OF BEERS 8. The Brewery: Beer Production and Other Fermented Beverages 9. Ales And Lagers Of The World UNIT 4.0 AN EXPLORATION OF SPIRITS 10. The Distillery: Spirits and Liqueurs of the World 11. Mixology: The Art and Science of the Cocktail UNIT 5.0 AN EXPLORATION OF BAR AND BEVERAGE MANAGEMENT 12. Constructing the Beverage Concept 13. Managing for Profit 14. Marketing the Beverage Establishment APPENDIX A. The Science of Fermentation B. The Tasting Process C. Food and Drink Pairing D. Lexicon of Beverage Terms
Garde Manger: Cold Kitchen Fundamentals
The American Culinary Federation Edward Leonard, Certified Master Chef, WACS Master Chef Brenda R. Carlos Tina Powers ISBN 10: 0131182196 ISBN 13: 9780131182196 912pp 2012 Cloth
Basic Approach
For courses in the Cold Kitchen, Banquets & Catering & Charcuterie. ACFs Cold Kitchen Fundamentals covers all aspects of the garde manger, from simple salad prep, to dressing and sauce making, to appetizers, soups and sandwiches, to charcuterie, cheese making, and ice carving. Each chapter is rich with photos, chefs tips, and recipes and each unit includes learning activities and benchmark formulas that encourage specific learning outcomes. Offering unique coverage of competition and food technology, the book helps students understand the underlying principals of the cold kitchen and develop the skills needed to produce their own signature sauces, salads, and more!
Table of Contents
SECTION ONE HISTORY OF THE COLD KITCHEN AND BASIC SANITATION 1. Introduction of the Cold Kitchen 2. Sanitation and Safety SECTION TWO: EQUIPMENT AND INGREDIENTS 3. Basic Equipment 4. Flavorings 5. Produce, Legumes and Grains 6. Proteins in the Cold Kitchen SECTION THREE: APPETIZERS 7. Canaps
223
8. Appetizers SECTION FOUR: SANDWICHES AND COLD SOUPS 9. Sandwiches 10. Cold Soups SECTION FIVE: SALADS 11. Salad Basics 12. Side Salads 13. Main Course Salads SECTION SIX: DRESSINGS, DIPS AND COLD SAUCES 14. Dressings 15. Cold Sauces, Dips, Aioli, Salsas, Relishes and Chutneys SECTION SEVEN: FABRICATION 16. Curing, Smoking, Marinating, Drying and Pickling 17. Basic Charcutire SECTION EIGHT: BUFFETS & CATERING 18. Buffets 19. Catering SECTION NINE: THE CRAFT 20. Decorative Work, the Heart of the Garde Manger 21. Preparing for Culinary Competitions Appendices Appendix A Safety Charts Appendix B Miscellaneous Charts Appendix C Food Charts Appendix D ACF COMPETITIONS Appendix E Sources
224
Fashion
Jay Diamond, Nassau Community College Gerald Pintel, Nassau Community College ISBN 10: 0132179350 ISBN 13: 9780132179355 384pp 2013 Paper
Retail Buying, 9/e
Basic Approach
For courses in Retail Buying, Retail Merchandising and Fashion Merchandising. Retail Buying, Ninth Edition is known for its clear depiction of retail buying, reflecting what buyers face every day in their pursuit of excellence. Focusing on the changes in todays market, the book addresses topics such as diverse ethnicities and the nuances of purchasing abroad. Contemporary market considerations are highlighted throughout, including chapters on buying for discount operations, using the Internet for product procurement, and methods of analyzing customer demand. With a host of end-of-chapter materials and visual aids, this book continues its tradition of effectively preparing students for their role as professional retail buyers.
Table of Contents
SECTION ONE: INTRODUCTION TO RETAIL BUYING 1. The Retail Playing Field 2. The Buyers Role 3. Buying Practices for the Different Retail Classifications 4. The Market Specialists and how They Service Retailers SECTION TWO: PLANNING THE PURCHASE 5. Consumer Analysis 6. Multiculturalism: Assessing the Product Needs of Americas Major Ethnicities 7. What to Buy 8. How Much to Buy 9. Merchandise Sourcing and Timing the Purchase SECTION THREE: MAKING THE PURCHASE 10. Purchasing in the Domestic Marketplace 11. Foreign Market Purchasing 12. The Importance of Business Etiquette When Purchasing in Global Markets 13. Wholesale Purchasing on the Internet 14. Negotiating the Purchase and Writing the Order SECTION FOUR: ADDITIONAL BUYER RESPONSIBILITIES 15. Merchandise Pricing 16. The Development of Private-Label Programs 17. Disseminating Product information to Retail personnel 18. The Buyers Role in Planning Advertising, Special Events, and Visual Merchandising
Cynthia R. Easterling Ellen L. Flottman Marian H. Jernigan, Texas Woman's University Beth ES Wuest ISBN 10: 0132724162 ISBN 13: 9780132724166 336pp 2013 Paper
Merchandising Mathematics for Retailing, 5/e
Basic Approach
For courses in mathematics for retail merchandising. Written by experienced retailers, this text introduces students to the essential principles and techniques of merchandising mathematics, and explains how to apply them in solving everyday retail merchandising problems. Instructor- and student-friendly, it features clear and concise explanations of key concepts, followed by problems, case studies, spreadsheets, and summary problems using realistic industry figures. Most chapters lend themselves to spreadsheet use, and skeletal spreadsheets are provided to instructors. This edition is extensively updated to reflect current trends, and to discuss careers from the viewpoint of working professionals. It adds 20+ new case studies that encourage students to use analytic skills, and link content to realistic retail challenges. This edition also contains a focused discussion of profitability measures, and an extended discussion of assortment planning.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Introduction Basic Merchandising Mathematics Profitability Cost of Merchandise Sold Markup as a Merchandising Tool Retail Pricing for Profit Inventory Valuation
225
8. 9.
The Dollar Merchandise Plan Open-to-Buy and Assortment Planning
Design Basics for Apparel

Virginia Elsasser Julia Sharp
Basic Approach
For courses in fashion design or fashion merchandising. Design Basics for Apparel is a handbook for students and professionals in the fashion industry who need a good understanding of visual design. The book provides valuable information for fashion design and merchandising students, encouraging readers to consider the elements and principles of design as a whole with emphasis on the emotional and physical effect of clothing.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
Introduction to the Aspects of Design Space Line Shape and Form Light Color Texture Repetition Emphasis Balance Scale and Proportion Unity and Harmony Specialized Application in Apparel Design
Susan S. Fiorito Myron Gable
Retail Buying Practices and Policies in a Global Economy
Basic Approach
For courses in Retail Buying; Fashion Merchandising Planning and Buying; The Apparel Industry; Advanced Retailing. Retail Buying Practices and Policies in a Global Economy details every aspect of a buyers job and includes step-by-step videos that detail the completion of Excel spread sheets for assignments and in-depth instruction. The text provides students with insights into buying from a truly global perspective, preparing them for the global economy in which they will be working. In addition, students will find in-depth coverage of topicssuch as financial statements and ratios, branding, and technologynot found in other texts. From large international specialty stores to small privately owned stores, this text covers all the skills and concepts students need to pursue a career in retail buying.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.
Introduction to Retail Buying Why Consumers Buy A Basic Understanding of Financial Statements and Ratios Determination of Markup and Pricing of Merchandise Essentials of Markdown Management The Merchandise Budget Planning Process Assortment Planning Branding Selecting, Categorizing & Evaluating Vendor Relationships and Performance The Legal Environment and Negotiating with Vendors Advertising and Sales Promotion Merchandise Resources Buying in a Global Marketplace The Basics of Fashion Technology Trends in the Buying Process
226
Deborah Fowler Ben Goh
Retail Category Management
Basic Approach
For courses in Category Management or Retail Management. Retail Category Management was created to help undergraduate students majoring in retailing, marketing, or supply chain management understands the nature of the retail process. The text starts off with fundamental concepts, such as an explanation of the original eight-step category, before moving to more complex topics, including the latest models and concepts in the field. A final chapter on careers offers practical insights and examples to help students as they consider their career options. The text is structured so that anyone with a retail background can teach from iteven those not versed in category management.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.
Introduction Retail Evolution and Strategies Measurements and Productivity Retail Value Chain Management Category Management Cycles Category Role Category Management Strategies Category Tactics Shopper Insights Careers in Category Management
Portfolio for Fashion Designers
Kathryn Hagen, Otis College of Art and Design Julie Hollinger ISBN 10: 0135020476 ISBN 13: 9780135020470 425pp 2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For all junior and senior-level courses in fashion design that cover portfolio development. This text brings together detailed information and step-by-step guidance for fashion design students seeking to prepare portfolios that represent their personality and creative vision, and showcase their strongest skills. Replete with examples of student work, it covers every topic related to fashion portfolio design and development. Coverage includes: time management, four groups planning, mood boards, fabric, rendering and figures, designing groups, flat templates, flats as a presentation layout, digital, resumes, and more. All of this texts key concepts and techniques are integrated through a complete portfolio example.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
The Big Picture Gather Your Resources Develop Your Fabric Skills Creating Your Mini-Mockup Portfolio Develop Your Designs Develop Your Poses Draw and Render Your Designs Garment and Technical Flats Digital Portfolios Additional Portfolio Categories Getting and Keeping the Job
Abridged History of World Costume and Fashion, An

Daniel Delis Hill ISBN 10: 0131963678 ISBN 13: 9780131963672 504pp 2012 Cloth
Basic Approach
For courses in Fashion Design, Fashion/Costume History, Fashion Sketching/Illustration, and Theater Costuming. An Abridged History of World Costume and Fashion presents a comprehensive survey of dress from around
227
the world including Asia, Africa, the Islamic Empire, and the Ancient Americas. This extensive study features descriptions and analysis of mens, womens and childrens clothing, accessories, and cultural styles from prehistory into the twenty-first century. Lavishly illustrated, it features more than 1600 imagesincluding over 100 in full colorand is a valuable resource for students of historical dress, fashion designers, theater costumers, textile researchers, costume collectors and curators, and anyone interest in clothing and style customs of the world.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26.
Prehistory The Ancient Near East Egypt The Aegean Etruria and Rome Byzantium Northern Europe in the Early Middles Ages Islamic Empire China Japan India Africa The Ancient Americas Middle Ages Italy and Spain in the Renaissance 14501600 Northern Renaissance The Seventeenth Century The Eighteenth Century The Nineteenth Century 18001850 The Nineteenth Century 18501900 The Twentieth Century 19001920 The Twentieth Century 19201940 The Twentieth Century 19401960 The Twentieth Century 19601980 The Twentieth Century 1980Present The Fashion Makers
Fashion from Victoria to the New Millennium

Daniel Delis Hill ISBN 10: 013227518X ISBN 13: 9780132275187 384pp 2013 Cloth
Basic Approach
For courses in Fashion Design, Fashion/Costume History, Fashion Sketching/Illustration, and Theater Costuming. This study of EuroAmerican fashion and style features a detailed, thoroughly illustrated chronology of womens, mens, and childrens dress since 1800. Each chapter covers in detail virtually all categories of attire including day attire, evening dress, outerwear, sportswear and swimwear, undergarments, sleepwear, accessories, footwear, hats, hairstyles and grooming, and more. Over 800 illustrations, including more than 100 in full color, visually document the past 200 years of fashion and style. Each era is introduced with an overview of the history and cultural developments that impacted modern fashion. Also included are classroom projects for research and portfolio, chapter glossaries of terms, an extensive bibliography, and a comprehensive index.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
Prelude: The Empire and Romantic Eras: 1800-1850 The Victoria Age: 1850-1900 Edwardianism: 1900-1909 The End of Innocence and World War I: 1910-1919 The Jazz and Gin Age: 1920-1929 The Great Depression: 1930-1939 The Second World War and a New Look: 1940-1949 The Jet Age: 1950-1959 The Space Age: 1960-1969 The Me Decade: 1970-1979 A New Gilded Age: 1980-1989 From Cyberspace into the New Millennium: 1990 to Present The Fashion Makers
228
Angella L. Hoffman
Fundamentals of Retail Buying with Merchandising Math
Basic Approach
For courses in Retail Buying, Merchandising Math, Merchandise Management, Advanced Buying, Strategic Merchandise Planning. Bridging the gap between current merchandising math textbooks and retail buying textbooks, Fundamentals of Retail Buying with Merchandising Math incorporates both buying philosophies and merchandising math. The text's problem-based method of learning incorporates questions and problems that train the reader to think like a buyer and encourage group collaboration and critical thinking. Simulated exercises mimic real-life buying responsibilities. Additionally, the order of the chapters and content within each chapter mimic the training of an assistant buyer in a corporate buying office. Providing a full, broad view of the retail buyers role, the text also includes the key merchandising math formulae that is the basis of all retail buying analysis.
Table of Contents
UNIT 1: FORMULAS AND BASIC PRINCIPLES 1. Sales and Percent Change 2. Percent to Total 3. Sell Thru 4. Stock-to-Sales Analysis 5. Markup & Markdowns UNIT 2: MANAGING THE BUSINESS 6. Purchase Orders 7. The Six Month Merchandise Plan 8. Profit & Loss Statement 9. Cooperative Advertising UNIT 3: PRIORITIZING AND NEGOTIATING 10. Buying Simulations 11. End-of-Season Negotiations 12. Monday Morning Reports (Sales) 13. Monday Morning Reports (Markdowns)
Hilde Jaffe, Fashion Institute of Technology Nurie Relis, Fashion Institute of Technology ISBN 10: 0132447274 ISBN 13: 9780132447270 272pp 2012 Paper
Draping for Fashion Design, 5/e
Basic Approach
For courses in Fashion Design, Pattern Making, Draping, Introduction to Fashion, and Fashion Promotion. Draping for Fashion Design, Fifth Edition, is the definitive basic instructional text for draping in numerous fashion design programs since its original publication. This book covers all of the fundamental material for beginning and advanced study in an intensive fashion design program and prepares students for the industry. Based on current industry methods, it reflects the dramatic changes of computer integration into the basic design and pattern development process and demonstrates simplified methods wherever they are employed in the industry. Updated throughout, the fifth edition offers a new chapter on children's wear, new illustrations, and revised diagrams that enhance clarity.
Table of Contents
1. Basic Preparation 2. Basic Patterns 3. Bodices 4. Skirts 5. Pants 6. The Midriff and Yokes 7. Collars 8. Sleeves 9. The Shift 10. The Princess Dress 11. Sportswear and Casual Wear 12. Tailored Garments 13. Children's Wear 14. Functional Finishes 15. Pockets 16. Draping in Fabric and Fitting Appendix A: Conversion of Inches to Centimeters
229
Sara J. Kadolph, Iowa State University ISBN 10: 0132620820 ISBN 13: 9780132620826 336pp 2013 Cloth
Textiles: Basics
For courses in Introduction to Textiles, Beginning Textiles, Basic Textiles, Textiles I, Textile Science. Textiles: Basics provides students with a basic knowledge of textiles, preparing them for a career in the global textile and apparel industry. This book gives students the foundation they need to make informed decisions regarding textile materials and textile products and to communicate effectively with other individuals and companies in the workplace.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
1. Introduction to Textiles 2. Textile Serviceability and Sustainability 3. Natural Fibers 4. Manufactured and Synthetic Fibers 5. Yarns 6. Woven Fabrics 7. Knit Fabrics 8. Other Fabrics 9. Finishes 10. Dyeing and Printing 11. Care of Textiles Appendix A. Common Trade Names for Fibers, Fabrications, and Finishes Appendix B. Guide to Stain Removal Appendix C. World Map Appendix D. Major Dye Classes Appendix E. Fiber Names in Other Languages Appendix F. Fiber Property Charts
Adobe Illustrator for Fashion Design, 2/e

Susan Lazear, Mesa College ISBN 10: 0132785773 ISBN 13: 9780132785778 456pp 2012 Paper
For college and high school courses in Fashion Design by Computer, Fashion Illustration by Computer, Computer Design, and CAD for Fashion. This fully-updated text addresses industrys need to train fashion students to draw fashion flats and illustrations, textile designs, and presentations using the latest versions of Adobe Illustrator. Emphasizing the creative process, Adobe Illustrator for Fashion Design, 2/e explores Illustrators powerful capabilities as related to drawings of clothing, fashion poses, and textile prints. It offers clear and illustrated instructions throughout, guiding students through learning all the electronic drawing techniques they will need to work successfully in fashion. In this second edition, new online videos show students how to perform many key techniques step-bystep, and online examples of previous student projects inspire new students. This Second Edition also adds updated coverage of merchandising techniques, electronic portfolio preparation, technical drawings, tech packs, and much more.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
SECTION ONE: TOUR OF ADOBE ILLUSTRATOR 1. Overview of Adobe Illustrator 2. Quick Start: Basic Drawing in Illustrator 3. Illustrators Tools Panel 4. Illustrators Menus 5. Illustrators Panels SECTION TWO: BASIC DRAWING EXERCISES SECTION THREE: FASHION FLATS EXERCISES SECTION FOUR: FASHION ILLUSTRATION EXERCISES SECTION FIVE: TEXTILE DESIGN EXERCISES SECTION SIX: PRESENTATION EXERCISES
230
Individuality in Clothing Selection and Personal Appearance, 7/e

Suzanne Marshall Hazel Jackson, California State University, Long Beach M. Sue Stanley ISBN 10: 0136136265 ISBN 13: 9780136136262 384pp 2012 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses in Introduction to Fashion and Fashion Merchandising. Individuality in Clothing Selection and Personal Appearance, Seventh Edition, provides a strong, multidisciplinary foundation for individual and family clothing choices. Balancing theory with actual applications, the authors present a broad base of knowledge at an introductory level for students' general education. Packed with activities, learning objectives, illustrations, and photographs, this user-friendly book meets the needs of future fashion professionals as well as students taking a single fashion course.
Table of Contents
I. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. II. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. III. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.
INFLUENCES ON CONSUMER CLOTHING SELECTION Socio-Psychological Influences Cultural Influences Physical Influences Fashion Industry Influences Target Market Influences DESIGN ELEMENTS AND PRINCIPLES APPLIED TO CLOTHING SELECTION Design Elements: Space, Shape, Form, and Line Design Elements: Color Design Elements: Texture Design Principles Fabric Design CONSUMER CLOTHING SELECTION ISSUES Clothing Fit Clothing Quality Clothing Care Wardrobe Strategies Clothing Purchasing Strategies
Aeran Park
Workbook for the Fashion Designer: The Complete Guide to Fashion Illustration
Basic Approach
For primary fashion drawing or illustration courses. Workbook for The Fashion Designer: The Complete Guide To Fashion Illustration brings together comprehensive and easy-to-understand step-by-step instructions for the core aspects of fashion illustration, including figure variation examples, preparing beginning students to grow within their own styles and eventually master advanced professional techniques. The author provides progressive instructional content for a 16 week course, showing instructors who are not professional illustrators exactly how to do it," with detailed instructions and fully illustrated basic figure details and variations. It emphasizes stylized garment drawings, simplified fashion drawing processes, practical usage, and skills that can be learned easily at students own pace. All chapters are fully illustrated and gradually progress to rendering as students skills develop.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.
Understanding Body Proportion Eyes. Nose. Mouth. Ears. Head Hands. Arms. Feet. Legs Hair Fashion Poses-I Weight on One Leg Poses Fashion Poses-II Three Quarter View Poses Fashion Poses-III Variations Garment Rendering: Tops Garment Rendering: Bottoms Garment Rendering: Jackets. Coats Detailing Rendering: Drapery Texture Rendering: Sheer. Lace. Satin Texture Rendering: Patterns. Prints Texture Rendering: Fur. Knits Shoes. Handbags. Hats Men. Children
231
Fashionomics
Donna W. Reamy Deidra W. Arrington ISBN 10: 0132109816 ISBN 13: 9780132109819 320pp 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For courses that integrate fashion, business, and economics; Fashion Merchandising; Survey of Fashion; Global Fashion Business. Fashionomics gives students a fundamental understanding of economic principles and their direct application to the rational and decision-making of the fashion industry. From the Industrial Revolution to contemporary trends in textiles and fashion, this text explores business and economic theories through real-world, up-to-date examples applied to the fashion industry.
Table of Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
A Fashion History The Language of Fashion Fashion Economics Fashion: Big Business Profit = Success Competition, the Stock Market, and Financial Measurement Government Policies Affect Fashion Dominating Segments of the Fashion Industry Domestic and International Fashion Consumers The Economic Impact of International Fashion Centers International Fashion Economics Trends in Fashionomics
Sewing for the Apparel Industry, 2/e

Claire Shaeffer ISBN 10: 0131884433 ISBN 13: 9780131884434 600pp 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
For freshmen-level courses in Industrial Sewing, Introduction to Industry Methods, Sewn Product Techniques, Production Management, Workroom Techniques, and Beginning Apparel Construction. Sewing for the Apparel Industry, Second Edition focuses on the fundamental principles of garment construction, the interrelationship of assembly methods, and the elements which the designer must consider at the outset of individual design creation. It details easy-to-master production operations, while emphasizing the equipment, practical skills, and sewing processes used in apparel manufacturing. Efficient and cost effective procedure descriptions complement material on the basic concept of design and desired quality, providing students with an understanding of various production methods and how they affect design decisions and relate to garment quality and labor and material costs.
Table of Contents
I APPAREL PRODUCTION 1. Overview to Apparel Production Quick Start Tutorial 2. Orientation: The Lockstitch Machine 3. Basic Machine Skills: The Lockstitch Machine 4. Other Industrial Equipment 5. Basic Production Skills II BASIC OPERATIONS 6. Seams, Types, Classifications, and Basic Plain Seams 7. More Plain Seams 8. Seam Finishes 9. Self-finished Seams 10. Hems 11. Darts 12. Facings 13. Plackets 14. Interlinings III BASIC PRODUCTION OPERATIONS 15. Assembling the Garment 16. Bands: Cuffs and Waistbands 17. Sleeves 18. Closures 19. Zippers 20. Collars 21. Pockets
232
22. Bias 23. Linings IV BASIC KNIT APPLICATIONS: SEAMS, HEMS, EDGE FINISHES, BANDS AND CUFFS, ZIPPERS, PLACKETS, AND SLEEVES 24. Knit Types and Seams 25. Hems and Edge Finishes 26. More Applications for Knits Appendix 1: Safety Rules Appendix 2: Forms Appendix 3: Using Measuring Tools Appendix 4: Fibers, Yarns, and Fabrics Appendix 5: Hand Stitches Appendix 6: Schematics of Seams and Stitches Appendix 7: Troubleshooting Stitching and Pressing Defects Appendix 8: Basic Tools and Supplies Appendix 9: Burn Test Appendix 10: Pattern Numbers and Shapes
Jan Symington Karen Peppercorn
At Your Fingertips
ISBN 10: 1442544554 ISBN 13: 9781442544550 2011 Paper Bound with PIN
With over 250 colour photos and images, At Your Fingertips provides the foundation to this creative and vibrant profession all in one volume. Basic salon and customer service skills, step-by-step procedures, as well as the science of nails, and diseases and disorders of the hands, are all presented in plain English and full colour bringing the theory of nail technology to life. At Your Fingertips covers all ten core units and five elective units in the Certificate II in Nail Technology from the SIB10 Beauty Training Package.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
1. Workplace personal health and safety 2. Communication in the workplace 3. Providing client services 4. Financial transactions 5. Selling products and services 6. Applying nail science to nail services 7. Performing manicure and pedicare services 8. Nail enhancements 9. Removing artificial nail enhancements 10. Applying gel enhancements 11. Applying acrylic enhancements 12. Applying nail art 13. Using electrical equipment Appendix 1 Troubleshooting Appendix 2 Research and apply beauty industry information
Michele Wesen Bryant, Virginia Commonwealth University ISBN 10: 0135094240 ISBN 13: 9780135094242 416pp 2012 Cloth
Fashion Drawing: Illustration Techniques for Fashion Designers
Basic Approach
Appropriate for courses in Fashion Illustration and Introduction to Fashion. This book is a comprehensive, practical guide to fashion drawing for students and designers looking to improve their skills. With a contemporary and comprehensive approach, the book offers step-by-step guidance and shows how drawing is an integral function of the garment design process. Illustrated throughout with a wide range of images from key illustrators and designers, Fashion Drawing provides the instruction necessary to allow students to develop their own illustration style.
Table of Contents
PART I: DRAWING FASHION FIGURES: 1. Drawing Women 2. Drawing Men 3. Drawing Children and Young Adults 4. Zooming In
233
5. Working from Life/Model Drawing PART II: GARMENT DETAILS: 6. Basic Garment Details 7. Drapery 8. Tailored Clothing PART III: RENDERING TECHNIQUES: 9. Shine 10. Woven Wools 11. Print Fabrics 12. Sheers
234
Interior Design
Lydia Cline
Drafting and Visual Presentation for Interior Designers
For courses in Visual Presentation for Interior Design and Drafting for Interior Design. Drafting and Visual Presentation for Interior Designers teaches architectural drafting skills, color rendering, and visual presentation techniques for interior design students. Taking a tutorial approach, this easy-to-read text walks students step-by-step from simple to more complex skills. Every step of the way full-color illustrations and photos help students learn such techniques as concept sketching, drafting floor plans, creating 3-D pictorials, rendering with markers, constructing color boards and models, and cutting a mat. Tear-out worksheets reinforce the competencies for each chapter, providing easy opportunities for students to apply the concepts they have learned.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
1. The Design/Graphics Relationship 2. Sketching 3. Drafting and Lettering 4. The Floor Plan 5. Other Architectural Drawings 6. Paraline Drawing 7. Perspective Drawings 8. Shade, Shadow and Reflections 9. Color Theory 10. Rendering 11. Drawing Efficiencies 12. Color Boards and Books 13. The Scale Model 14. The Verbal Presentation Appendices I. Scaled line drawings of floor plans and interior elevations II. How to cut a mat
Treena Crochet, A Matter of Style, Ltd. ISBN 10: 0132414287 ISBN 13: 9780132414289 168pp 2012 Cloth
Designer's Guide to Building Construction and Systems
Basic Approach
For courses in Building Construction and Systems. Designers Guide to Building Construction and Systems offers students a concise, easy-to-understand guide for learning about building construction and systems in preparation for a successful practice as an interior designer. Using language geared for students of interior design, the text covers basic structural principles applied to the building environment through a review of common building methods including timber frame, masonry, and steel construction for residential and commercial projects as applicable.
Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION: A BRIEF HISTORY OF STRUCTURES, MATERIALS, AND METHODS SECTION I: RESIDENTIAL CONSTRUCTION AND SYSTEMS 1. Residential Construction: Building the Envelope 2. Systems for Residential Construction 3. Interior Finish-Out for Residential Construction SECTION II: COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION AND SYSTEMS 4. Commercial Construction: Building the Envelope 5. Mechanical Systems for Commercial Buildings 6. Interior Construction for Commercial Buildings
235
Designer's Guide to Furniture Styles, 3/e

Treena Crochet, A Matter of Style, Ltd. ISBN 10: 0132050412 ISBN 13: 9780132050418 464pp 2013 Cloth
For courses in the history of interiors, history of furniture, and furniture design and construction. This image-rich text introduces significant movements in the evolution of the decorative arts, including furniture, design motifs, and accessories related to interior design and architectural settings from the Neolithic Age to the 21st century. It augments the study of art and architectural history by discussing the function and aesthetic purpose of furniture, pottery, glassware, lighting, textiles, mirrors, metalworking, clocks, and wallcoverings; as well as their integration into interior design. The author presents crucial contextual information on political and social events and the technological advances that influenced each periods design trends, and compares objects from different periods, demonstrating how ideas and concepts progress through their stylistic development. Descriptions of period room settings show how the decorative arts complement architecture and interior design. Valuable websites and bibliographic information are provided for further exploration, and a glossary highlights key vocabulary.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
PART 1. HISTORICAL DEVELOPMENTS 1. The Ancient World 2. Ancient Greece and Rome 3. The Medieval Period PART 2. THE MODERN WORLD 4. Fifteenth and Sixteenth Centuries 5. The Seventeenth Century 6. The Eighteenth Century 7. The Late Eighteenth and Early Nineteenth Centuries 8. The Nineteenth Century 9. The Twentieth and Twenty-First Centuries 10. Furniture Construction
Buie Harwood, Professor Emeritus, Virginia Commonwealth University Bridget May, Marymount University Curt Sherman, Professor Emeritus, Winthrop University ISBN 10: 0135093570 ISBN 13: 9780135093573 912pp 2012 Cloth
Architecture and Interior Design: An Integrated History to the Present
Basic Approach
The book is most appropriate for an integrated design history course, typically titled History of Architecture, Interior Design, Furnishings, and Decorative Arts. Architecture and Interior Design: An Integrated History to the Present provides a survey of architecture, interiors, furniture, and decorative arts from the past to the present. It is a completely integrated and interdisciplinary reference for: architecture, architectural details, architectural surface treatments, space planning, interior design, interior architectural features, interior surface treatments, motifs, furniture, color, lighting, textiles, and decorative accessories. The unique scope allows comparison in all areas of the built environment through the centuries to illustrate historical, social, cultural, and stylistic influences. Narrative and graphics interweave design analysis with architectural and design history.
Table of Contents
A. INTRODUCTION 1. Cultural Precedents B. EAST ASIA 2. China 3. Japan C. ANTIQUITY 4. Egypt 5. Greece 6. Rome D. MIDDLE AGES 7. Early Christian 8. Byzantine 9. Islamic 10. Romanesque 11. Gothic E. RENAISSANCE 12. Italian Renaissance 13. Spanish Renaissance
236
14. French Renaissance 15. English Renaissance 16. American Colonial F. BAROQUE 17. European Baroque 18. Louis XIV 19. English Restoration G. ROCOCO 20. Regence & Louis XV 21. English Neo-Palladian & Georgian 22. American Georgian H. EARLY NEOCLASSIC 23. Louis XVI & French Provincial 24. Late English Georgian 25. American Federal I. REVOLUTION 26. Industrial Revolution J. LATE NEOCLASSIC 27. Directoire, French Empire 28. German Greek Revival, Biedermeier 29. English Regency, British Greek Revival 30. American Greek Revival, American Empire K. VICTORIAN REVIVALS 31. Gothic Revival 32. Italianate, Renaissance Revival 33. Second Empire, Rococo Revival 34. Exoticism 35. Stick, Queen Anne L. ACADEMIC HISTORICISM 36. Romanesque Revival 37. Classical Eclecticism 38. Colonial Revival 39. Spanish Colonial Revival M. REFORMS 40. The Shakers 41. Aesthetic Movement 42. English Arts & Crafts 43. Shingle, American Arts & Crafts N. INNOVATION 44. Art Nouveau 45. Vienna Secession 46. Chicago School 47. Modern Forerunners 48. DeStijl 49. The Bauhaus O. MODERNISM 50. International Style 51. Art Deco, Art Moderne 52. Scandinavian Modern 53. Geometric Modern 54. Organic & Sculptural Modern 55. Modern Historicism P. EXPERIMENTATION 56. Late Modern 1 57. Post Modern 58. Late Modern 2 59. Environmental Modern 60. Neo-Modern
Samuel L. Hurt, R.I.D., P.E., R.A. ISBN 10: 0137033036 ISBN 13: 9780137033034 240pp 2012 Paper
Codes, Regulations, and Standards in Interior Design
Basic Approach
For courses, or portions of courses, focused on Codes, Regulations, and Standards for Interior Design. Codes, Regulations, and Standards in Interior Design shows interior design students and practitioners how to make the incorporation of code requirements an integral part of their design process. The text develops a clear understanding of the reasons for, the history of, the meaning and application of, and the enforcement of applicable codes, regulations, and standards to real problems in Interior Design. Hurt instills in students that codes, regulations, and standards are not "necessary evils", but are there to assist them as designers in understanding and applying the principles of life safety and property protection, both of which are important and integral goals in any design project. The text covers the most current reference documents available today primarily the 2009 series of model codes from the International Code Council.
237
Table of Contents
1. Why is Code Language So Difficult? 2. What Are Codes? 3. What is Code Enforcement? 4. What is Building Type? 5. What is Occupancy Type? 6. What is Egress? 7. What is Accessibility? 8. Interior Materials Requirements 9. Mechanical, Electrical, and Plumbing 10. Residential Requirements 11. Building Renovation Requirements Appendix A: Design Tips Appendix B: Definitions Appendix C: Resources Appendix D: Exercises
Peter A. Koenig, Florida State University ISBN 10: 013713696X ISBN 13: 9780137136964 192pp 2012 Paper
Design Graphics: Drawing Techniques for Design Professionals, 3/e
Basic Approach
For beginning/intermediate-level Basic Design Drawing courses in Interior Design, Architecture, and other related programs. Design Graphics: Drawing Techniques for Design Professionals, Third Edition, combinesin a single volumesimple techniques and skills related to sketching, design-development, and the schematic or preliminary phase of design presentation. Emphasizing drawing as a mental as well as physical exercise, the text helps students draw designs on paper faster and easier, showing them how visual communication with clients can provide better, more economical design solutions. Practical, straightforward, and reader-friendly, Design Graphics provides more complete coverage of the basics, making concepts and techniques accessible to students with highly diversified educational and technical backgrounds.
Table of Contents
Introduction: Drawing I SKETCHING 1. The Basics 2. Line 3. Light 4. Texture II DESIGN DRAWING 5. Conceptual/Doodle Diagrams 6. Perspective Drawing III DRAWING PROCESS 7. One-Point Eyeball Perspective 8. Two-Point Eyeball Perspective 9. Overlay Method 10. Entourage for Final Drawings 11. Presentation
Evidence Based Design: A Process for Research and Writing

Dak Kopec Edith Sinclair Bruce Matthes
For courses in Research Methods, Design Research, Design Thesis, or Dissertation Preparation. Evidence Based Design: A Process for Research and Writing serves as a guide to help students conceptualize and formulate their design ideas and then to evaluate and test those ideas through a succinct, organized process. The result is the culmination of a comprehensive document that articulates a design concept and justifies key design attributes. Step-by-step, students are guided through the process of writing a robust, research-based document geared towards empirical design research. From developing a critical position to performing a thorough review of the literature to providing an overview of common research methods, this text is a perfect guide for students producing an evidence-based thesis or dissertation.
Basic Approach
Table of Contents
1.
Call for Methods-Based Research
238
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
Importance of Citations Developing a Line of Logic Formation of a Topic and Argument Review of Literature Issues in Research Methods Site Analysis and Case Studies Surveys, Interviews and Observations Historical Analysis Method and Photo Analysis Method Experimentation and Computer Modeling The Final Phase
Perspective and Sketching for Designers

Jessica Newman Jack Beduhn
Basic Approach
For all first perspective drawing courses at the Freshman/Sophomore level for majors including Interior Design, Graphic Design, Game Art, Animation, and Industrial Design; and for all courses in Interior Design Perspective, Sketch, and/or Presentation. This book will also be useful in high school courses for students pursuing careers in the Applied Arts. This book helps students learn how to draw quickly and believably by mastering practical techniques for perspective drawing and estimating scale and proportion. Drawing on extensive experience teaching beginners, the authors overcome many limitations of previous books. Rather than featuring professional work that beginners cant possibly duplicate, they show examples of student drawings, helping students gain confidence and gauge their progress. Avoiding unnecessary theory, math, and jargon, they help students develop an intuitive sense of scale and proportion for creating believable perspectives, and offer valuable tricks and shortcuts throughout. In place of lengthy narratives, they support each lesson with supporting video walking through key techniques. The authors also devote lessons to SketchUp (for blocking out perspectives) and Photoshop (for enhancing sketches).
Table of Contents
Introduction Lesson 1. Lesson 2. Lesson 3. Lesson 4. Lesson 5. Lesson 6. Lesson 7. Lesson 8. Lesson 9. Lesson 10. Lesson 11. Lesson 12. Lesson 13. Lesson 14. Perspective Basics One-point Perspective Two-point Perspective and Ellipses Two-point Perspective Proportioning Methodologies Proportioning a Two-point Perspective Perceived Sale and Multiple Vanishing Points Shadows and Reflections People, Lighting and Colorizing Three-point Perspective and Horizon Line Tricks Chiaroscuro/value Markers and color Color pencils Metallic surfaces Wood
Anglicized and Illustrated Dictionary of Interior Design, The

Josette H. Rabun, Assessment Training Institute, Inc. Catherine L. Kendall, University of Tennessee Julie H. Rabun, University of Pittsburg, Johnstown ISBN 10: 0130925381 ISBN 13: 9780130925381 400pp 2013 Paper
Basic Approach
Appropriate as a working tool for Interior Designers as well as professionals in related fields. The Anglicized and Illustrated Dictionary of Interior Design includes traditional, historic, and modern day terminology ranging from pre-classical to present day. The scope of the words, articulated with precise anglicized definitions that include illustrations where appropriate, will prove to be an invaluable resource to the professional and amateur alike.
Table of Contents
Guide to Pronunciation Dictionary of Words Architects, Artists, and Designers Appendix
239
Bonnie Roskes Annie Elliott
Conceptualize, Create, Communicate: Designing Living Spaces with Google SketchUp
Basic Approach
For courses in Interior Design. Until now, interior design education has focused on overly complex software programs such as AutoCADthe equivalent of hitting a fly with a sledgehammer. This breakthrough text helps create and present designs using free, easy-to-learn software: Google SketchUp. Created specifically for college-level courses in Interior Design, the text covers all of the ways SketchUp can be used for interior design and decorating. Step-by-step, illustrated projects walk readers through the design process, including modeling an empty room, finding or creating furniture and accessories, using color and materials, and presenting designs to clients.
Table of Contents
Introduction 1. Model a Room 2. Furnish a Room 3. Basic Furniture: Straight Lines 4. Advanced Furniture: Curvy Lines 5. Working with 3D Warehouse Models 6. Working with Colors and Materials 7. Working with Digital Images 8. Kitchen Design 9. Presenting Your Designs 10. Labels, Dimensions, and Plans Appendix: Additional Products
240
AUTHOR Author A Aguinis Albaum Alon Anderson Anderson Andrews Anupindi Arens Armstrong Armstrong Armstrong Arnold Arnold Arthur Ashleigh Atkinson Atrill Atrill Atrill Atrill Author Author Author Author Author Author Author B Bade Bade Bade Bade Balakrishnan Barney Barney Barringer Barrish Beams Beasley Beech Beekman Beekman Bekaert Berenson Berk Berman Best Best Bexley Bhimani Bhimani
Title
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
BUSINESS & ECONOMICS YR Page
Performance Management, 3/e International Marketing and Export Management, 7/e Global Franchising Operations Management: Cases in International and Emerging Markets Operations, 1/e Prentice Hall's Federal Taxation 2013 Corporations, Partnerships, Estates and Trusts, 26/e Professionalism: Skills for Workplace Success, 3/e Jump Right In: Essential Computer Skills Using Microsoft Office 2010, 1/e Managing Business Process Flows, 3/e Auditing and Assurance Services with ACL Software, 14/e Marketing: An Introduction, 11/e Marketing: An Introduction, 2/e Principles of Marketing, 5/e Essentials of Corporate Financial Management, 2/e Modern Financial Markets and Institutions: A Practical Perspective, 1/e Accounting for Corporate Combinations and Associations, 7/e The Psychology of People in Organisations, 1/e Management Accounting: Information for DecisionMaking and Strategy Execution, 6/e Financial Management for Decision Makers, 6/e Accounting: An Introduction, 5/e Financial Accounting for Decision Makers, 6/e Management Accounting for Decision Makers, 7/e IT Project Library Project #1, 1/e IT Project Library Project #2, 1/e IT Project Library Project #3, 1/e IT Project Library Project #4, 1/e IT Project Library Project #5, 1/e IT Project Library Project #6, 1/e IT Project Library Project #7, 1/e
0132974355 0273743880 0132884143 0132891549 0132624664 013297570X 0132811367 0273754947 0273767186 0273762605 144253110X 027375887X 0273730355 1442519568 0273755765 0273769987 0273756931 144253480X 0273763458 0273762265 0132766884 0132766949 0132766930 0132766914 0132766892 0132766957 0132766906
9780132974356 9780273743880 9780132884143 9780132891547 9780132624664 9780132975704 9780132811361 9780273754947 9780273767183 9780273762607 9781442531109 9780273758877 9780273730354 9781442519565 9780273755760 9780273769989 9780273756934 9781442534803 9780273763451 9780273762263 9780132766883 9780132766944 9780132766937 9780132766913 9780132766890 9780132766951 9780132766906
2013 2011 2012 2013 2013 2013 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2011 2011 2012 2011 2012 2013 2013 2014 2013 2013 2013 2013
128 175 61 35 128 38 61 2 176 176 175 105 105 2 129 3 105 4 3 4 45 45 45 45 45 45 45
Essential Foundations of Economics, 6/e Foundations of Economics, 6/e Foundations of Macroeconomics, 6/e Foundations of Microeconomics, 6/e Managerial Decision Modeling with Spreadsheets, 3/e Strategic Management and Competitive Advantage, 4/e Strategic Management and Competitive Advantage: Concepts, 4/e Entrepreneurship: Successfully Launching New Ventures, 4/e Menu, The: Development, Strategy, and Application, 1/e Advanced Accounting, 11/e Auditing Cases: An Interactive Learning Approach, 5/e Events Management, 1/e Digital Planet: Tomorrow's Technology and You, Complete, 10/e Digital Planet: Tomorrow's Technology and You, Introductory, 10/e International Financial Management, 2/e Basic Business Statistics, 12/e Fundamentals of Corporate Finance, 2/e Retail Management: A Strategic Approach, 12/e Market-Based Management, 6/e Auditing, Assurance Services & Ethics in Australia, 8/e Selling Financial Products, 1/e Introduction to Management Accounting, 1/e Management and Cost Accounting, 5/e
0132833115 0132984873 0133029522 0132830884 0132969440 0132560453 0132560445 0273761404 0135078660 0132830361 0132815591 0273758624 0132737515 0132737523 013284298X 0273753185 0273753460 0273768565 0132848163 1442541199 0132752131 0273737554 0273762230
9780132833110 9780132984874 9780133029529 9780132830881 9780132969444 9780132560450 9780132560443 9780273761402 9780135078662 9780132830362 9780132815598 9780273758624 9780132737517 9780132737524 9780132842983 9780273753186 9780273753469 9780273768562 9780132848169 9781442541191 9780132752138 9780273737551 9780273762232
2013 2013 2013 2013 2013 2012 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2013 2012 2011 2012 2012 2012
76 76 76 76 62 129 129 130 214 5 5 206 39 39 106 62 106 177 177 6 178 7 6
Author B Birt Blanchard Blanchard Blythe Boardman Bocij Boczko Boddy Bodnar Bokunewicz Bovee Bovee Bovee Boyle Bozarth Bozionelos Braun Breitner Breitner Brooks Broom Browaeys Brown Brunsdon Brunsdon
Title
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
YR
Page
Legal and Taxation Aspects of Your Small Business (Revised), 3/e Effective Training, 5/e Macroeconomics: A European Perspective, 1/e Essentials of Marketing, 5/e Foundations of Business Thought, 1/e Business Information Systems: Technology, Development and Management, 5/e Introduction to Accounting Information Systems, 1/e Essentials of Management: A Concise Introduction, 1/e Accounting Information Systems, 11/e Casino Gaming Technology, 1/e Business Communication Essentials, 5/e Business Communication Today, 11/e Business in Action, 6/e Corporate Computer Security, 3/e Introduction to Operations and Supply Chain Management, 3/e Managing People in Organisations, 1/e Managerial Accounting, 3/e Core Concepts of Accounting, 11/e Essentials of Accounting, 11/e Financial Management: Core Concepts, 2/e Cutlip and Center's Effective Public Relations, 11/e Understanding Cross-Cultural Management, 2/e Managing Information Technology, 7/e Learning QuickBooks Pro 2012: A Practical Approach, 6/e Learning QuickBooks Pro and Premier Accountant 2011: A Practical Approach and QuickBooks 2011 Software, 5/e Learning Microsoft Office Excel 2010, Student Edition, 1/e Financial Crisis: Causes, Context and Consequences, 1/e International Finance: A Practical Perspective, 1/e Quantitative Methods for Business and Management, 1/e eTourism: Information Technology for Strategic Tourism Management, 2/e Basic Marketing Research with Excel, 3/e
1442552654 0273768379 0273763113 0273757687 0132856077 0273736450 0273739387 027373928X 0132871939 0135046041 0132564807 0273761463 0132828782 0132599023 027377008X 027372679X 0132954796 0132744392 0273771469 0273768476 0273768395 0273732951 0132737531 0132751674 0132743256
9781442552654 9780273768371 9780273763116 9780273757689 9780132856072 9780273736455 9780273739388 9780273739289 9780132871938 9780135046043 9780132564809 9780273761464 9780132828789 9780132599023 9780273770084 9780273726791 9780132954792 9780132744393 9780273771463 9780273768470 9780273768395 9780273732952 9780132737531 9780132751674 9780132743259
2011 2013 2011 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2013 2013 2012 2013 2013 2013 2012 2012 2012 2011 2012 2013 2012
130 131 77 178 121 49 7 131 8 206 124 124 121 49 63 131 8 9 9 107 178 132 49 10 10
Bucki Buckley Buckley Buglear Buhalis Burns C Cafferky Cannon Caproni Carlopio Carnall Carrell Carter Carter Case Case Case Casu Cavusgil Cavusgil Cavusgil Certo Chaffey
0135112109 027373511X 0273731866 0273736280 027373783X 0132598965
9780135112106 9780273735113 9780273731863 9780273736288 9780273737834 9780132598965
2012 2011 2012 2012 2013 2012
44 108 108 63 179 179
Management: A Faith-Based Perspective, 1/e Corporate Responsibility: Governance, Compliance and Ethics in a Sustainable Environment, 2/e Management Skills for Everyday Life, 3/e Developing Management Skills: A Comprehensive Guide for Leaders, 5/e Managing Change in Organizations, 6/e Labor Relations and Collective Bargaining: Private and Public Sectors, 10/e Keys to Business Communication, 1/e Enterprise and Small Business: Principles, Practice and Policy, 3/e Principles of Economics, 10/e Principles of Macroeconomics, 10/e Principles of Microeconomics, 10/e Introduction to Banking, 2/e Framework of International Business, A, 1/e International Business: The New Realities, 2/e International Business: The New Realities, Australasian Edition, 1/e Modern Management: Concepts and Skills, 12/e E-Business and E-Commerce Management: Strategy, Implementation and Practice, 5/e
0136058345 0273738739 0132479079 1442547626 0273736418 0132730014 0132598973 0273726102 027375372X 0273754823 0273754696 0273718134 0132598949 0132453274 1442533560 0273756761 0273752014
9780136058342 9780273738732 9780132479073 9781442547629 9780273736417 9780132730013 9780132598972 9780273726104 9780273753728 9780273754824 9780273754695 9780273718130 9780132598941 9780132453271 9781442533561 9780273756767 9780273752011
2012 2012 2012 2012 2013 2013 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2013 2013 2012 2012 2011 2011
132 133 133 134 134 135 125 135 78 78 78 109 136 136 137 138 50
Author C Chaffey Chesser Chopra Clawson Cline Clow Clow Cole Conger Cooper Cooter Cotter Coulter Cousins Coyle CPA CPA Crochet Crochet Crocker
Title
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
YR
Page
Digital Marketing: Strategy, Implementation and Practice, 5/e World of Culinary Management, The: Leadership and Development of Human Resources, 5/e Supply Chain Management, 5/e Level Three Leadership: Getting Below the Surface, 5/e Drafting and Visual Presentation for Interior Designers, 1/e Integrated Advertising, Promotion and Marketing Communications, 5/e Integrated Marketing Communications, 1/e SharePoint for Students, 1/e Hands-On Database, 1/e Essentials of Tourism, 1/e Law and Economics, 6/e Advanced Financial Reporting: A Complete Guide to IFRS, 1/e Strategic Management in Action, 6/e Strategic Supply Management: Principles, Theories and Practice, 2/e Next Series: Web 2.0, 2/e Accounting Handbook 2012, 1/e Auditing, Assurance and Ethics Handbook 2012, 1/e Designer's Guide to Building Construction and Systems, 1/e Designer's Guide to Furniture Styles, 3/e Inbound Logistics Management: Storage and Supply of Materials for the Modern Supply Chain, 7/e
0273746103 013274774X 0273765221 0132556413 013506421X 0273753282 0733992900 0130000094 013610827X 027372438X 0132846152 0273732358 0132620677 0273761900 0132840154 1442558105 1442558091 0132414287 0132050412 0273720481
9780273746102 9780132747745 9780273765226 9780132556415 9780135064214 9780273753285 9780733992902 9780130000095 9780136108276 9780273724384 9780132846158 9780273732358 9780132620673 9780273761907 9780132840156 9781442558106 9781442558090 9780132414289 9780132050418 9780273720485
2012 2013 2013 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2013 2013 2012 2012 2012 2012 2013 2012
180 214 64 138 235 180 181 50 51 181 79 10 139 64 42 11 12 235 236 64
D Dagwell Daniels David David Davies Davies Davis De Kluyver Dean Delves-Broughton DeMarr Deresky Dessler Dessler Dessler Dessler Diamond Dixon Donnelly Dorfman Dubrin DuBrin Dwyer E Eagle Easterling Ebert Egan Social Marketing, 1/e Merchandising Mathematics for Retailing, 5/e Business Essentials, 9/e Relationship Marketing: Exploring Relational Strategies in Marketing, 4/e 0273727222 0132724162 0273766597 0273737783 9780273727224 9780132724166 9780273766599 9780273737780 2013 2013 2013 2011 182 225 121 183 Corporate Accounting in Australia, 1/e International Business, 14/e Strategic Management: A Competitive Advantage Approach, Concepts and Cases, 14/e Strategic Management: A Competitive Advantage Approach, Concepts, 14/e Business Accounting and Finance, 1/e Financial Accounting, 1/e Advertising Research: Theory & Practice, 2/e Strategy: A View From The Top, 4/e Sustainable Venturing, 1/e Financial Time Guide to Management: The Art and Science of Being an Effective Manager, 1/e Negotiation and Dispute Resolution, 1/e International Management, 2/e Framework for Human Resource Management, A, 7/e Fundamentals of Human Resource Management, 2/e Human Resource Management, 13/e Supervision and Leadership in a Changing World, 1/e Retail Buying, 9/e Food Defense Fundamentals: Using the S.H.A.R.E. Principle To Protect the Global Food Supply, 1/e Business Statistics, 1/e Introduction to Risk Management and Insurance, 10/e Human Relations: Interpersonal Job-Oriented Skills, 11/e Human Relations for Career and Personal Success, Canadian Edition, 4/e Communication in Business: Strategies and Skills, 5/e 1442527161 0273766953 0273767488 0273767607 027372312X 0273723073 0132128322 0132145626 0136044891 0273761986 0131577530 1442539674 0132576147 0132570130 0273766023 0135058651 0132179350 013139181X 0132145391 0131394126 0132680033 0138127875 1442548487 9781442527164 9780273766957 9780273767480 9780273767602 9780273723127 9780273723073 9780132128322 9780132145626 9780136044895 9780273761983 9780131577534 9781442539679 9780132576147 9780132570138 9780273766025 9780135058657 9780132179355 9780131391819 9780132145398 9780131394124 9780132680035 9780138127879 9781442548480 2012 2013 2013 2013 2011 2012 2012 2012 2013 2012 2013 2012 2013 2012 2013 2012 2013 2012 2013 2013 2012 2012 2013 13 139 140 140 13 14 181 141 141 141 142 142 143 143 143 144 225 215 65 110 145 145 121
Author E Ehrenberg Eiteman Elliott Elsasser Emery Estrin Evans Evans Evans Evans F Fabozzi Farrington Fenich Ferrett Ferrett Ferrett Fetchko Fill Fill Fill Finkler Fiorito Fisher Fletcher Folland Foot Foster Fowler Freeman Frino Froyen Furdell
Title
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
YR
Page
Modern Labor Economics: Theory and Public Policy, 11/e Multinational Business Finance, 13/e Financial Accounting and Reporting, 15/e Design Basics for Apparel, 1/e Sustainable Marketing, 1/e Microeconomics, 6/e Business Analytics, 1/e Statistics, Data Analysis, and Decision Modeling, 5/e Technology In Action Complete, 9/e Technology In Action Introductory, 9/e
013272765X 0273765531 0273760882 0132375281 1408292777 0273734873 0133051714 0273768220 0132928388 0132924528
9780132727655 9780273765530 9780273760887 9780132375283 9781408292778 9780273734871 9780133051711 9780273768227 9780132928380 9780132924528
2012 2013 2012 2013 2012 2012 2013 2012 2013 2013
79 110 14 226 183 80 65 65 39 39
Bond Markets, Analysis and Strategies, 8/e Purchasing and Supply Chain Management, 8/e Meetings, Expositions, Events and Conventions: An Introduction to the Industry, 3/e Computer Literacy for IC3 Unit 2: Using Productivity Software, 1/e Computer Literacy for IC3 Update for Windows 7, 1/e GO! with Office 2010 Volume 1, 2/e Sports Marketing, 1/e Essentials of Marketing Communications, 1/e Advertising, 1/e Corporate Reputation, Brand and Communication, 1/e Financial Management for Public, Health, and Not-forProfit Organizations, 4/e Retail Buying Practices and Policies in a Global Economy, 1/e Business Ethics and Values, 4/e Tourism: Principles and Practice, 5/e Economics of Health and Health Care, The, 7/e Introducing Human Resource Management, 6/e Managing Quality: Integrating the Supply Chain, 5/e Retail Category Management, 1/e Governmental and Nonprofit Accounting, 10/e Introduction to Corporate Finance, 5/e Macroeconomics: Theories and Policies, 10/e Practical Chef's Reference, The: A Compendium of Charts, Formulas and Ratios, 1/e
0273766139 0273723685 0132719916 0132861070 0132873974 0132840162 0132135469 0273738445 0273760890 0273727591 0132912813 0135046602 0273757911 0273758276 013295480X 0273740989 0273768255 0135152089 0132751267 1442542489 0273765981 0135125774
9780273766131 9780273723684 9780132719919 9780132861076 9780132873970 9780132840163 9780132135467 9780273738442 9780273760894 9780273727590 9780132912815 9780135046609 9780273757917 9780273758273 9780132954808 9780273740988 9780273768258 9780135152089 9780132751261 9781442542488 9780273765981 9780135125779
2013 2012 2012 2012 2012 2013 2013 2011 2013 2012 2013 2012 2012 2013 2013 2011 2013 2012 2013 2012 2013 2013
110 66 206 40 40 46 184 184 184 184 15 226 146 207 81 146 67 227 15 111 81 215
G Galitz Financial Times Handbook of Financial Engineering: Tools and Techniques for Managing Derivatives, Options, Swaps and Risk, 3/e GO! with Microsoft Office Web Apps Getting Started, 1/e Go! All in One: Computer Concepts and Applications, 1/e GO! with Internet Explorer 9 Getting Started, 1/e GO! With Microsoft Excel 2010 Introductory, 1/e GO! with Microsoft OneNote 2010 Getting Started, 1/e GO! with Microsoft Outlook 2010 Comprehensive, 1/e GO! with Microsoft Outlook 2010 Getting Started, 1/e GO! with Microsoft Publisher 2010 Comprehensive, 1/e GO! with Microsoft SharePoint 2010 Getting Started, 1/e GO! with Microsoft Windows 7 Comprehensive, 1/e GO! with Microsoft Windows Live and Windows Live Essentials Getting Started, 1/e GO! with Office 2010 Integrated Projects, 1/e GO! with Office 365 Getting Started, 1/e Business Driven Data Communications, 1/e Visualizing Technology, Complete, 1/e Visualizing Technology, Introductory, 1/e 027374240X 9780273742401 2013 111
Gaskin Gaskin Gaskin Gaskin Gaskin Gaskin Gaskin Gaskin Gaskin Gaskin Gaskin Gaskin Gaskin Gendron Geoghan Geoghan
0132544849 0132844125 013293454X 0132743787 0132542994 0132791285 013702536X 0132791722 0132543028 0132375753 013254329X 0132843307 0132955741 0131564978 0137056346 013137625X
9780132544849 9780132844123 9780132934541 9780132743785 9780132542999 9780132791281 9780137025367 9780132791724 9780132543026 9780132375757 9780132543293 9780132843300 9780132955744 9780131564978 9780137056347 9780131376250
2012 2013 2012 2011 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2013 2013 2012 2012
46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 47 47 46 47 51 41 41
Author G George Gitman Gitman Gitman Glazer
Title
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
YR
Page
Understanding and Managing Organizational Behavior, 6/e Fundamentals of Investing, 3/e Principles of Managerial Finance, 13/e Principles of Managerial Finance, Brief, 6/e High Performance Operations: Leverage Compliance to Lower Costs, Increase Profits, and Gain Competitive Advantage, 1/e Corporate Governance: Principles and Perspectives, 1/e International Corporate Governance, 1/e Management, 1/e Managing Human Resources, 7/e Forecasting for Economics and Business, 1/e Macroeconomics, 12/e Critical Thinking in Consumer Behavior, 3/e Logistics Management, 1/e Exploring Microsoft Office 2010 Getting Started with VBA, 1/e Exploring Microsoft Office 2010 Getting Started with Web Apps, 1/e Exploring Microsoft Office 2010, Volume 1, 2/e Microeconomics, 4/e Managing Behavior in Organizations, 6/e Econometric Analysis, 7/e Strategic Communication: Cases in Marketing, Public Relations, Advertising and Media, 1/e Food Service Organizations: A Managerial and Systems Approach, 8/e International Business, 7/e Conflict Survival Kit: Tools for Resolving Conflict at Work, 2/e Applied Economics, 12/e Economics for Business and Management, 3/e International Trade, 1/e
0273753797 1442532882 0273754289 0132701065 0132779889
9780273753797 9781442532885 9780273754282 9780132701068 9780132779883
2012 2012 2012 2012 2012
146 112 113 113 67
Goddard Goergen Gomez-Mejia Gomez-Mejia Gonzalez-Rivera Gordon Graham Grant Grauer Grauer Grauer Gravelle Greenberg Greene Greenland Gregoire Griffin Griffith Griffiths Griffiths Grimwade H Hagen Hansen Harris Harvey Harwood Hayes Hayes Hayes Heilbroner Hersey Heyman Hill Hill
027375940X 0273751255 0132604337 0132570149 0131474936 0132727676 0132760118 0273731351 0132140136 0132149621 0132873605 0273710400 0132729830 0273753568 1442555491 0132620812 0273765868 0132741059 0273736906 0273735241 0273718886
9780273759409 9780273751250 9780132604338 9780132570145 9780131474932 9780132727679 9780132760119 9780273731351 9780132140133 9780132149624 9780132873604 9780273710400 9780132729833 9780273753568 9781442555495 9780132620819 9780273765868 9780132741057 9780273736905 9780273735243 9780273718888
2013 2012 2012 2012 2013 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2013 2013 2013 2012 2012 2013 2013 2013 2011 2011 2013
114 147 148 148 81 82 185 67 44 45 44 82 149 83 185 216 149 149 84 84 85
Portfolio for Fashion Designers, 1/e Consumer Behaviour: A European Outlook, 2/e Customer Service: A Practical Approach, 6/e Understanding and Managing Diversity, 5/e Architecture and Interior Design: An Integrated History to the Present, 1/e Foundations of Lodging Management, 2/e Principles of Auditing: An Introduction to International Standards on Auditing, 3/e Professional Kitchen Manager, The, 1/e Making of the Economic Society, The, 13/e Management of Organizational Behavior, 10/e International Cooking: A Culinary Journey, 2/e Abridged History of World Costume and Fashion, An, 1/e Encyclopedia of Operations Management, The: A Field Manual and Glossary of Operations Management Terms and Concepts, 1/e Fashion from Victoria to the New Millennium, 1/e Management, 3/e Modern Database Management, 11/e Fundamentals of Retail Buying with Merchandising Math, 1/e Practical Computing, 3/e Excel Modeling in Corporate Finance, 4/e Excel Modeling in Investments, 4/e Essentials of Global Marketing, 2/e The Business of Tourism, 9/e Marketing Strategy and Competitive Positioning, 5/e
0135020476 0273736957 0132974347 0132847701 0135093570 0132560895 0273768174 0131391747 0132822385 0132556405 0132126117 0131963678 0132883708
9780135020470 9780273736950 9780132974349 9780132847704 9780135093573 9780132560894 9780273768173 9780131391741 9780132822381 9780132556408 9780132126113 9780131963672 9780132883702
2013 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012
227 186 186 150 236 207 16 216 85 151 217 227 68
Hill Hitt Hoffer Hoffman Hogan Holden Holden Hollensen Holloway Hooley
013227518X 0132378175 0132662256 0132724146 0132839962 0205235220 0132497875 0273756540 0273755145 0273740938
9780132275187 9780132378178 9780132662253 9780132724142 9780132839969 9780205235223 9780132497879 9780273756545 9780273755142 9780273740933
2013 2012 2013 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012
228 151 52 229 41 114 115 187 208 187
Author H Hopp
Title
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
YR
Page
Horne Horngren Horngren Horngren Horngren Horngren Horngren Horngren Horngren Horngren Horngren Hubbard Hubbard Hubbard Hubbard Hubbard Hubbard Hubbard Hubbard Hull Hurt Husted I Ives
Hospital Operations: Applying the Principles of Operations Management to Improve Health Care Systems, 1/e QuickBooks Pro 2012: A Complete Course, 13/e Accounting, 7/e Accounting, 9/e Cost Accounting, 14/e Cost Accounting, Revised Edition, 1/e Financial Accounting, 7/e Financial and Managerial Accounting , Ch 1-15 (Financial Chapters), 3/e Financial and Managerial Accounting Ch 14-24 (Managerial Chapters), 3/e Financial and Managerial Accounting, 3/e Introduction to Financial Accounting, 10/e Management Accounting, Canadian Edition, 6/e Economics, 4/e Essentials of Economics, 3/e Macroeconomics, 1/e Macroeconomics, 2/e Macroeconomics, 4/e Microeconomics, 2/e Microeconomics, 4/e Money, Banking, and the Financial System, 1/e Options, Futures, and Other Derivatives and DerivaGem CD Package, 8/e Codes, Regulations, and Standards in Interior Design, 1/e International Economics, 9/e
0132908662
9780132908665
2013
68
0132751755 1442551925 0273770268 0273753878 1442554770 1442551933 0132497948 0132497921 0132497999 0273770179 013257084X 0273771302 0133035867 0273762176 1442533714 0273771523 1442531770 0273771604 0132722011 0273759078 0137033036 027376828X
9780132751759 9781442551923 9780273770268 9780273753872 9781442554771 9781442551930 9780132497947 9780132497923 9780132497992 9780273770176 9780132570848 9780273771302 9780133035865 9780273762171 9781442533714 9780273771524 9781442531772 9780273771609 9780132722018 9780273759072 9780137033034 9780273768289
2013 2013 2013 2012 2011 2013 2012 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2013
16 17 18 17 20 17 18 18 18 19 19 87 88 89 85 87 86 87 88 115 237 89
Introduction to Governmental and Not-for-Profit Accounting, 7/e
0132776014
9780132776011
2013
21
J Jacques Jaffe Jelassi Jobber Johnson Johnston Jones K Kadolph Kastarlak Katsaropolous Kay Keator Keegan Keller Keller Keller Kemp Keown Kerin Kinser Kinser Kinser Textiles: Basics, 1/e Fundamentals of Planning and Developing Tourism, 1/e Learning Microsoft Office PowerPoint 2010, Student Edition, 1/e Accounting Information Systems: The Crossroads of Accounting and IT, 1/e Skills for Success with Concepts Getting Started, 1/e Global Marketing, 7/e Best Practice Cases in Branding, Strategic Brand Management, 4/e Strategic Brand Management, 4/e Strategic Brand Management: A European Perspective, 2/e Financial Accounting, 2/e Personal Finance: Turning Money into Wealth, 6/e Strategic Marketing Problems, 13/e Your Office: Getting Started with Advanced Cases for Microsoft Office 2010, 1/e Your Office: Getting Started with Business Communication, 1/e Your Office: Getting Started with Computing Concepts, 1/e 0132620820 0135078814 0135112095 0132132524 0135088348 0273766716 0132664267 0132664259 0273737872 0132771586 0132941287 0273768948 0132675498 013267548X 0132625350 9780132620826 9780135078815 9780135112090 9780132132527 9780135088340 9780273766711 9780132664264 9780132664257 9780273737872 9780132771580 9780132941280 9780273768944 9780132675499 9780132675482 9780132625357 2013 2012 2012 2012 2012 2013 2013 2013 2012 2013 2013 2013 2013 2013 2013 230 208 44 21 47 188 189 189 189 21 116 190 48 48 48 Mathematics for Economics and Business, 7/e Draping for Fashion Design, 5/e Strategies For E-Business: Concepts and Cases, 3/e Selling and Sales Management, 9/e Fundamentals of Strategy, 2/e Service Operations Management: Improving Service Delivery, 4/e Organizational Theory, Design, and Change, 7/e 0273763563 0132447274 0273757873 0273762656 0273757253 0273740482 0273765604 9780273763567 9780132447270 9780273757870 9780273762652 9780273757252 9780273740483 9780273765608 2013 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2013 90 229 52 188 152 69 152
Author K Kinser Kinser Kinser Kinser Kinser Koenig Kopec Kotler Kotler Kotler Kotler Kotler Kotler Krajewski Kroenke Kroenke Kroenke Kroenke Kroenke Kroenke Kroenke Krugman Kuratko
Title
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
YR
Page
Your Office: Getting Started with Outlook 2010, 1/e Your Office: Getting Started with Web 2.0, 1/e Your Office: Getting Started with Windows 7, 1/e Your Office: Microsoft Access 2010 Comprehensive, 1/e Your Office: Microsoft Office 2010, Volume 1, 1/e Design Graphics: Drawing Techniques for Design Professionals, 3/e Evidence Based Design: A Process for Research and Writing, 1/e Framework for Marketing Management, 5/e Marketing Management, 14/e Marketing Management: An Asian Perspective, 6/e Marketing Management: European Edition, 2/e Principles of Marketing, 14/e Principles of Marketing: An Asian Perspective, 3/e Operations Management: Processes and Supply Chains, 10/e Experiencing MIS, 3/e MIS Essentials, 2/e Using MIS, 5/e Database Concepts, 6/e Database Processing, 12/e Experiencing MIS, 2/e Processes, Systems, and Information: An Introduction to MIS, 1/e International Economics, 9/e Innovation Acceleration: Transforming Organizational Thinking, 1/e
0132675463 0132675455 0132675471 0132560887 0132604299 013713696X 0132174065 0273752510 0273753363 9810687974 0273743619 027375243X 9810687532 027376683X 0132570173 013266500X 0273766481 0132742926 0132570114 1442533145 0132783479 0273754092 0136021484
9780132675468 9780132675451 9780132675475 9780132560887 9780132604291 9780137136964 9780132174060 9780273752516 9780273753360 9789810687977 9780273743613 9780273752431 9789810687533 9780273766834 9780132570176 9780132665001 9780273766483 9780132742924 9780132570114 9781442533141 9780132783477 9780273754091 9780136021483
2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012 2013 2013 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012
48 48 48 48 48 238 238 191 192 192 193 190 191 69 52 53 53 54 54 54 55 90 153
L Labensky Laberta Laberta Laudon Laudon Laudon Lawson Lazear Leask Levens Levine Lo Lo Lynch M Macnamara Malhotra Malhotra Manning Marghitu Marghitu Mariotti Mariotti Marshall Martin Martocchio May McDonald McIntosh Public Relations: Theories, Practices, Critiques, 1/e Basic Marketing Research, 4/e Marketing Research: An Applied Approach, 4/e Selling Today, 12/e Exploring Getting Started with SharePoint 2010, 1/e Exploring Microsoft SharePoint 2010, 1/e Entrepreneurship and Small Business Management, 1/e Entrepreneurship: Starting and Operating a Small Business, 3/e Individuality in Clothing Selection and Personal Appearance, 7/e Sustainable Marketing, 1/e Strategic Compensation: A Human Resource Management Approach, 7/e Effective Writing, 9/e Derivatives Markets, 3/e Accounting Practices: The New Zealand Context, 3/e 1442543299 0132570181 0273725858 013257019X 0132882086 0138007373 0135030315 0132784084 0136136265 0136117074 0132975203 0132842998 0321543084 1442562552 9781442543294 9780132570183 9780273725855 9780132570190 9780132882088 9780138007379 9780135030318 9780132784085 9780136136262 9780136117070 9780132975209 9780132842990 9780321543080 9781442562554 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012 2013 2012 2013 2011 195 195 196 196 45 45 154 155 231 197 155 23 117 23 On Baking, 3/e Computers Are Your Future Complete, 12/e Computers Are Your Future, Introductory, 12/e E-Commerce 2012, 8/e Essentials of MIS, 10/e Management Information Systems, 12/e Skills for Success with Office 2010 Web Applications Getting Started, 1/e Adobe Illustrator for Fashion Design, 2/e Managing Strategy and Measuring Value: A Financial Perspective, 1/e Marketing: Defined, Explained, Applied, 2/e Business Statistics: A First Course, 6/e Intermediate Accounting, Vol. 1, 1/e Intermediate Accounting, Vol. 2, 1/e Strategic Management, 6/e 0132374560 0132818310 0132545187 0273761293 0273765426 027375453X 0132550040 0132785773 0273736248 0132719894 0273770926 0132612119 0132657953 0273750925 9780132374569 9780132818315 9780132545181 9780273761297 9780273765424 9780273754534 9780132550048 9780132785778 9780273736240 9780132719896 9780273770923 9780132612111 9780132657952 9780273750925 2013 2012 2012 2012 2013 2012 2013 2012 2013 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 217 42 42 56 56 56 47 230 153 194 70 22 22 153
Author M McKee McKeen McLaney McWilliams McWilliams Melville Melville Merchant Miller Miller Miller Miller Miller Miller Miller Miller Mintzberg Mishkin Mishkin Mishkin Mishkin Moffett Mondy Mooradian Moriarty Morris Motiwalla Mullins Munter Munter N Nahavandi Neck Newbold Newman Nobes Northey Nyheim O Ormiston O'Rourke Osland O'Sullivan O'Sullivan O'Sullivan O'Sullivan
Title
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
YR
Page
Management: A Focus on Leaders, 1/e IT Strategy: Issues and Practices, 2/e Business Finance: Theory and Practice, 9/e Food Fundamentals, 10/e Foods: Experimental Perspectives, 7/e International Financial Reporting: A Practical Guide, 3/e Taxation: Finance Act 2011, 17/e Management Control Systems: Performance Measurement, Evaluation and Incentives, 3/e Economics Today, 16/e Economics Today: The Macro View, 16/e Economics Today: The Micro View, 16/e Next Series: Best Practices in using Office 2010, 1/e Next Series: Introduction to Google Apps, Personal Apps, 1/e Next Series: Introduction to Google Apps, Productivity Apps, 1/e Economics of Macro Issues, The, 5/e Economics of Public Issues, The, 17/e The Strategy Process, 5/e Economics of Money, Banking and Financial Markets, The: The Business School Edition, 3/e Economics of Money, Banking, and Financial Markets, The, 10/e Macroeconomics: Policy and Practice, 1/e Financial Markets and Institutions, 7/e Fundamentals of Multinational Finance, 4/e Human Resource Management, 12/e Strategic Marketing, 1/e Advertising & IMC: Principles and Practices, 9/e Quantitative Approaches in Business Studies, 8/e Enterprise Systems for Management, 2/e Essentials of Organisational Behaviour, 3/e Guide to Managerial Communication, 9/e Guide to PowerPoint Version 2010, 1/e
0132478803 0132843013 0273750453 0132747731 013707929X 0273758152 0273758284 0273737619 013268005X 0132554518 0132554410 0132540312 0132552124 0132725185 0321788400 0132827689 027371628X 0133047938 0273765736 0273760505 0273754440 0132829916 0273752995 0137136978 0273752928 0273738720 0132570165 0273757342 0132719878 0132568888
9780132478809 9780132843010 9780273750451 9780132747738 9780137079292 9780273758150 9780273758280 9780273737612 9780132680059 9780132554510 9780132554411 9780132540315 9780132552127 9780132725187 9780321788405 9780132827683 9780273716280 9780133047936 9780273765738 9780273760504 9780273754442 9780132829915 9780273752998 9780137136971 9780273752929 9780273738725 9780132570169 9780273757344 9780132719872 9780132568883
2012 2012 2011 2013 2012 2011 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2012 2013 2013 2013 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2011 2012 2012
156 57 117 218 219 24 24 25 91 91 91 43 43 43 92 92 156 93 94 94 117 118 157 197 198 70 58 157 125 126
Art and Science of Leadership, The, 6/e Mastering Self Leadership: Empowering Yourself for Personal Excellence, 6/e Statistics for Business and Economics, 8/e Perspective and Sketching for Designers, 1/e Comparative International Accounting, 12/e Impact: A Guide to Business Communication, Canadian Edition, 8/e Technology Strategies for the Hospitality Industry, 2/e
0132729741 013275441X 0273767062 0132574942 0273763792 013257439X 0135038022
9780132729741 9780132754415 9780273767060 9780132574945 9780273763796 9780132574396 9780135038024
2012 2013 2013 2013 2012 2012 2012
158 158 71 239 26 122 209
Understanding Financial Statements, 10/e Management Communication, 5/e Organizational Behavior: An Experiential Approach, 9/e Economics: Principles, Applications and Tools, 7/e Macroeconomics: Principles, Applications and Tools, 7/e Microeconomics: Principles, Applications and Tools, 7/e Survey of Economics: Principles, Applications and Tools, 5/e
0132655063 0132980630 0132374730 0132722003 0132555492 0132555514 0132727684
9780132655064 9780132980630 9780132374736 9780132722001 9780132555494 9780132555517 9780132727686
2013 2013 2013 2012 2012 2012 2012
26 126 159 95 95 95 96
P Panko Park Parkin Parkin Parkin Business Data Networks and Security, 9/e Workbook for the Fashion Designer: The Complete Guide to Fashion Illustration, 1/e Economics, 10/e Macroeconomics, 10/e Microeconomics, 10/e 0132742934 0132675811 0273754211 0273753584 0273753983 9780132742931 9780132675819 9780273754213 9780273753582 9780273753988 2013 2013 2012 2012 2012 58 231 97 97 97
Author P Parkin Parkin Paster Payne-Palacio Perman Petty Phelps Phillips Pike Pindyck Pinto Plenborg Poatsy Poatsy Pope Pope Proctor
Title
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
YR
Page
Economics: European Edition, 8/e Essentials of Economics, 1/e HACCP Food Safety Employee Manual, 1/e Foodservice Management: Principles and Practices, 12/e Natural Resource and Environmental Economics, 4/e Financial Management, 6/e Health Economics, 5/e Strategic Staffing, 2/e Corporate Finance and Investment: Decision and Strategies, 7/e Microeconomics, 8/e Project Management: Achieving Competive Advantage, 3/e Financial Statement Analysis: Valuation - Credit Analysis - Executive Compensation, 1/e Exploring Getting Started with Internet Explorer 9, 1/e Exploring Getting Started with Programming, 1/e Prentice Hall's Federal Taxation 2013 Comprehensive, 26/e Prentice Hall's Federal Taxation 2013 Individuals, 26/e Managerial Accounting: Decision Making and Performance Improvement, 4/e
0273736558 0273718975 0131391828 0132719924 0321417534 1442539178 0132948532 0132763591 0273763466 0133041700 0273767429 0273752359 0132886219 0132896540 0132891646 0132891379 0273764489
9780273736554 9780273718970 9780131391826 9780132719926 9780321417534 9781442539174 9780132948531 9780132763592 9780273763468 9780133041705 9780273767428 9780273752356 9780132886215 9780132896542 9780132891646 9780132891370 9780273764489
2012 2012 2012 2012 2011 2012 2013 2012 2012 2013 2013 2012 2013 2013 2013 2013 2012
97 98 220 220 99 119 100 159 119 100 71 27 45 45 35 36 27
R Rabun Reamy Render Richmond Robbins Robbins Robbins Robbins Robbins Robbins Robbins Robbins Rollinson Romney Roskes Rugman S Sackett Sanders Sangster Sangster Saunders Saunders Scarborough Schiffman Schmid Schneider Schoenebeck Scott Shaeffer Shank Shapland Shwom American Regional Cuisines: Food Culture and Cooking, 1/e Professional Server, The: A Training Manual, 2/e Frank Wood's Business Accounting Volume 1, 12/e Frank Wood's Business Accounting Volume 2, 12/e Doing Research in Business & Management: An Essential Guide to Planning Your Project, 1/e Research Methods for Business Students, 6/e Effective Small Business Management, 10/e Consumer Behavior, 11/e Beverage Manager's Guide to Wines, Beers and Spirits, The, 3/e Managing Across Cultures, 3/e Interpreting and Analyzing Financial Statements, 6/e Financial Accounting Theory, 6/e Sewing for the Apparel Industry, 2/e Sports Marketing, 5/e Shapland & Turner Cases in Financial Accounting, 1/e Business Communication: Polishing Your Professional Presence, 1/e 0131109367 0131709925 0273759280 0273767925 0273726412 0273750755 0132378159 0132170264 0132706725 0273746324 0132746247 0135119154 0131884433 0132809486 0132752816 0132599031 9780131109360 9780131709928 9780273759287 9780273767923 9780273726418 9780273750758 9780132378154 9780132170260 9780132706728 9780273746324 9780132746243 9780135119150 9780131884434 9780132809481 9780132752817 9780132599030 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2013 2013 2013 2012 2013 2013 2013 2012 221 222 28 29 165 165 166 199 223 167 30 31 232 199 31 127 Anglicized and Illustrated Dictionary of Interior Design, The, 1/e Fashionomics, 1/e Quantitative Analysis for Management, 11/e Brand You for Marketing: Real People Real Choices, 7/e Essentials of Organizational Behavior, 11/e Fundamentals of Management, 8/e Management, 11/e Management, 6/e Management: The Essentials, 1/e Organizational Behavior, 15/e Supervision Today!, 7/e Training in Interpersonal Skills: TIPS for Managing People at Work, 6/e Organisational Behaviour and Analysis: An Integrated Approach, 5/e Accounting Information Systems, 12/e Conceptualize, Create, Communicate: Designing Living Spaces with Google SketchUp, 1/e International Business, 6/e 0130925381 0132109816 0273752863 013038853X 0273752669 0273766171 0273752774 1442538600 1442533625 0273765299 0132784033 0132778432 0273756680 0273754378 0135125804 0273760971 9780130925381 9780132109819 9780273752868 9780130388537 9780273752660 9780273766179 9780273752776 9781442538603 9781442533622 9780273765295 9780132784030 9780132778435 9780273756682 9780273754374 9780135125809 9780273760979 2013 2013 2012 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2013 2013 2012 2013 2012 2013 2012 239 232 72 199 163 161 160 159 161 164 162 162 164 28 240 164
Author S Skintik Slack Slack Slater Slater Sloman Sloman Solomon Solomon Solomon Solomon Sorger Soyka Spector Strauss Suffield Sydsaeter Symington T Taylor The American Culinary Federation Thill Thompson Tietenberg Todaro Torrington Tovey Townsend Townsend Townsend Traster Trott Trussel Turban Turban Tuten U Usunier V Vaidyanathan Valacich Valacich Valentine Vallely Vallen Van der Wagen Van Looy Van Peursem Veal W Waldman
Title
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
YR
Page
Learning Microsoft Office Publisher 2010, Student Edition, 1/e Essentials of Operations Management, 1/e Operations and Process Management: Principles and Practice for Strategic Impact, 3/e College Accounting Chapters 1-12 with Study Guide and Working Papers, 12/e College Accounting, 12/e Economics and the Business Environment, 3/e Economics, 8/e Consumer Behavior, 10/e Better Business, 2/e Brand You: Marketing: Real People, Real Choices: European Edition, 1/e Marketing: Real People, Real Choices, 7/e Marketing Planning: Where Strategy Meets Action, 1/e Creating a Sustainable Organization: Approaches for Enhancing Corporate Value Through Sustainability, 1/e Implementing Organizational Change: Theory into Practice, 3/e E-Marketing, 6/e Labour Relations, 3/e Essential Mathematics for Economic Analysis, 4/e At Your Fingertips, 1/e
0135108993 0273756192 0273768808 0132772175 013277206X 0273734865 0273763121 0273767313 0132599058 0273709488 0132494027 0132544709 0132874407 0132970171 0132806460 0132626322 0273760688 1442544554
9780135108994 9780273756194 9780273768807 9780132772174 9780132772068 9780273734864 9780273763123 9780273767312 9780132599054 9780273709480 9780132494021 9780132544702 9780132874403 9780132970174 9780132806466 9780132626323 9780273760689 9781442544550
2012 2011 2011 2013 2013 2011 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2011
444 73 72 32 31 101 101 199 122 200 200 201 73 167 202 167 102 233
Introduction to Management Science, 11/e Garde Manger: Cold Kitchen Fundamentals, 1/e Excellence in Business Communication, 10/e Mind and Heart of the Negotiator, The, 5/e Environmental & Natural Resources Economics, 9/e Economic Development, 11/e Human Resource Management, 8/e Training in Australia, 4/e Skills for Success with Internet Explorer 9 Getting Started, 1/e Skills for Success with Windows 7 Comprehensive, 1/e Skills for Success with Office 2010, Volume 1, 2/e Foundations of Cost Control, 1/e Innovation Management and New Product Development, 5/e Lakeside Company: Case Studies in Auditing, 12/e Electronic Commerce 2012: A Managerial and Social Networks Perspectives, 7/e Introduction to Electronic Commerce, 4/e Social Media Marketing, 1/e
0273766406 0131182196 0273768891 0132827662 0132843005 1408284472 0273756923 144253902X 0132934558 0132375761 0132840324 0132156555 0273736566 0132567253 027376134X 0132742918 0132551799
9780273766407 9780131182196 9780273768890 9780132827669 9780132843003 9781408284476 9780273756927 9781442539020 9780132934558 9780132375764 9780132840323 9780132156554 9780273736561 9780132567251 9780273761341 9780132742917 9780132551793
2013 2012 2012 2012 2012 2011 2011 2011 2012 2012 2013 2013 2012 2012 2012 2013 2013
74 223 127 168 102 103 168 169 47 47 47 209 202 32 58 59 203
Marketing Across Cultures, 6/e
0273757733
9780273757733
2013
203
IT Project Management, 1/e Essentials of Systems Analysis and Design, 5/e Information Systems Today, 5/e Modern Financial and Investment Planning, 2/e MYOB AccountRight Enterprise v19: A Hands On Approach, 5/e Check-in Check-Out: Managing Hotel Operations, 9/e Hospitality Management, 3/e Services Management: An Integrated Approach, 3/e Auditing: Theory and Practice in New Zealand, 6/e Research Methods for Leisure and Tourism, 4/e
0132807181 0132599015 0273756818 144254354X 1442545860 0132706717 1442534796 027373203X 1442543671 0273717502
9780132807180 9780132599016 9780273756811 9781442543546 9781442545861 9780132706711 9781442534797 9780273732037 9781442543676 9780273717508
2013 2012 2011 2012 2011 2013 2012 2013 2011 2011
59 59 60 120 32 210 210 74 33 211
Industrial Organization: Theory and Practice, 4/e
0132770989
9780132770989
2013
103
Author W Walker Walker Walker Wallace Walters Waters Weetman Weetman Weil Weixel Wells Wesen Bryant Westhead Wheelen Wheelen Wickham Wild Williams Wilson Wirtz Wisnom Worren Y Yip Yukl
Title
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
YR
Page
Exploring the Hospitality Industry, 2/e Introduction to Hospitality, 6/e Introduction to Hospitality Management, 4/e Information Systems in Organizations, 1/e Dormonomics: Today's Students Discuss Today's Issues, 1/e Quantitative Methods for Business, 5/e Financial & Management Accounting, 5/e Financial Accounting: An Introduction, 5/e Economic Growth, 3/e Learning Microsoft Office Word 2010, Student Edition, 1/e Advertising: Principles and Practice, Australasian Edition, 2/e Fashion Drawing: Illustration Techniques for Fashion Designers, 1/e Entrepreneurship: Perspectives and Cases, 1/e Concepts in Strategic Management and Business Policy: Toward Global Sustainability, 13/e Strategic Management and Business Policy: Toward Global Sustainability, 13/e Management Consulting: Delivering an Effective Project, 4/e International Business, 6/e Business: A Practical Introduction, 1/e Marketing Research: An Integrated Approach, 3/e Essentials of Services Marketing, 2/e Spa Management: An Introduction, 1/e Organisation Design, 1/e
0135118859 0132993074 0132959941 0136115624 0132544660 0273739476 027376196X 0273761811 0273769294 0135112265 1442525126 0135094240 0273726137 0132570211 0132570203 0273768743 027375257X 0132334291 0273718703 9810686188 0135039444 0273738836
9780135118856 9780132993074 9780132959940 9780136115625 9780132544665 9780273739470 9780273761969 9780273761815 9780273769293 9780135112267 9781442525122 9780135094242 9780273726135 9780132570213 9780132570206 9780273768746 9780273752578 9780132334297 9780273718703 9789810686185 9780135039441 9780273738831
2012 2013 2013 2013 2013 2011 2011 2012 2013 2012 2011 2012 2011 2012 2012 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2012
211 212 212 60 104 75 34 33 104 44 203 233 170 170 170 171 172 123 204 194 213 172
Total Global Strategy, 3/e Leadership in Organizations, 8/e
0132374722 0273765663
9780132374729 9780273765660
2012 2013
173 173
TITLE Title A Abridged History of World Costume and Fashion, An, 1/e Accounting for Corporate Combinations and Associations, 7/e Accounting Handbook 2012, 1/e Accounting Information Systems, 11/e Accounting Information Systems, 12/e Accounting Information Systems: The Crossroads of Accounting and IT, 1/e Accounting Practices: The New Zealand Context, 3/e Accounting, 7/e Accounting, 9/e Accounting: An Introduction, 5/e Adobe Illustrator for Fashion Design, 2/e Advanced Accounting, 11/e Advanced Financial Reporting: A Complete Guide to IFRS, 1/e Advertising & IMC: Principles and Practices, 9/e Advertising Research: Theory & Practice, 2/e Advertising, 1/e Advertising: Principles and Practice, Australasian Edition, 2/e American Regional Cuisines: Food Culture and Cooking, 1/e Anglicized and Illustrated Dictionary of Interior Design, The, 1/e Applied Economics, 12/e Architecture and Interior Design: An Integrated History to the Present, 1/e Art and Science of Leadership, The, 6/e At Your Fingertips, 1/e Auditing and Assurance Services with ACL Software, 14/e Auditing Cases: An Interactive Learning Approach, 5/e Auditing, Assurance and Ethics Handbook 2012, 1/e Auditing, Assurance Services & Ethics in Australia, 8/e Auditing: Theory and Practice in New Zealand, 6/e B Basic Business Statistics, 12/e Basic Marketing Research with Excel, 3/e Basic Marketing Research, 4/e Best Practice Cases in Branding, Strategic Brand Management, 4/e Better Business, 2/e Beverage Manager's Guide to Wines, Beers and Spirits, The, 3/e Bond Markets, Analysis and Strategies, 8/e Brand You for Marketing: Real People Real Choices, 7/e Brand You: Marketing: Real People, Real Choices: European Edition, 1/e Business Accounting and Finance, 1/e Business Analytics, 1/e Business Communication Essentials, 5/e Business Communication Today, 11/e Business Communication: Polishing Your Professional Presence, 1/e Business Data Networks and Security, 9/e Business Driven Data Communications, 1/e Business Essentials, 9/e Business Ethics and Values, 4/e Business Finance: Theory and Practice, 9/e Business in Action, 6/e Business Information Systems: Technology, Development and Management, 5/e Business Statistics, 1/e
Author
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
BUSINESS & ECONOMICS YR Page
Hill Arthur CPA Bodnar Romney Kay McIntosh Horngren Horngren Atrill Lazear Beams Cotter Moriarty Davis Fill Wells Sackett Rabun Griffiths Harwood Nahavandi Symington Arens Beasley CPA Best Van Peursem
0131963678 1442519568 1442558105 0132871939 0273754378 0132132524 1442562552 1442551925 0273770268 144253480X 0132785773 0132830361 0273732358 0273752928 0132128322 0273760890 1442525126 0131109367 0130925381 0273736906 0135093570 0132729741 1442544554 0273754947 0132815591 1442558091 1442541199 1442543671
9780131963672 9781442519565 9781442558106 9780132871938 9780273754374 9780132132527 9781442562554 9781442551923 9780273770268 9781442534803 9780132785778 9780132830362 9780273732358 9780273752929 9780132128322 9780273760894 9781442525122 9780131109360 9780130925381 9780273736905 9780135093573 9780132729741 9781442544550 9780273754947 9780132815598 9781442558090 9781442541191 9781442543676
2012 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012 2011 2013 2013 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2013 2011 2012 2013 2011 2012 2012 2011 2012 2012 2012 2011 2011
227 2 11 8 28 21 23 17 18 4 230 5 10 198 181 184 203 221 239 84 236 158 233 2 5 12 6 33
Berenson Burns Malhotra Keller Solomon Schmid Fabozzi Richmond Solomon Davies Evans Bovee Bovee Shwom Panko Gendron Ebert Fisher McLaney Bovee Bocij Donnelly
0273753185 0132598965 0132570181 0132664267 0132599058 0132706725 0273766139 013038853X 0273709488 027372312X 0133051714 0132564807 0273761463 0132599031 0132742934 0131564978 0273766597 0273757911 0273750453 0132828782 0273736450 0132145391
9780273753186 9780132598965 9780132570183 9780132664264 9780132599054 9780132706728 9780273766131 9780130388537 9780273709480 9780273723127 9780133051711 9780132564809 9780273761464 9780132599030 9780132742931 9780131564978 9780273766599 9780273757917 9780273750451 9780132828789 9780273736455 9780132145398
2012 2012 2012 2013 2012 2013 2013 2012 2012 2011 2013 2012 2012 2012 2013 2013 2013 2012 2011 2013 2012 2013
62 179 195 189 122 223 110 199 200 13 65 124 124 127 58 51 121 146 117 121 49 65
Title B Business Statistics: A First Course, 6/e Business: A Practical Introduction, 1/e C Casino Gaming Technology, 1/e Check-in Check-Out: Managing Hotel Operations, 9/e Codes, Regulations, and Standards in Interior Design, 1/e College Accounting Chapters 1-12 with Study Guide and Working Papers, 12/e College Accounting, 12/e Communication in Business: Strategies and Skills, 5/e Comparative International Accounting, 12/e Computer Literacy for IC3 Unit 2: Using Productivity Software, 1/e Computer Literacy for IC3 Update for Windows 7, 1/e Computers Are Your Future Complete, 12/e Computers Are Your Future, Introductory, 12/e Concepts in Strategic Management and Business Policy: Toward Global Sustainability, 13/e Conceptualize, Create, Communicate: Designing Living Spaces with Google SketchUp, 1/e Conflict Survival Kit: Tools for Resolving Conflict at Work, 2/e Consumer Behavior, 10/e Consumer Behavior, 11/e Consumer Behaviour: A European Outlook, 2/e Core Concepts of Accounting, 11/e Corporate Accounting in Australia, 1/e Corporate Computer Security, 3/e Corporate Finance and Investment: Decision and Strategies, 7/e Corporate Governance: Principles and Perspectives, 1/e Corporate Reputation, Brand and Communication, 1/e Corporate Responsibility: Governance, Compliance and Ethics in a Sustainable Environment, 2/e Cost Accounting, 14/e Cost Accounting, Revised Edition, 1/e Creating a Sustainable Organization: Approaches for Enhancing Corporate Value Through Sustainability, 1/e Critical Thinking in Consumer Behavior, 3/e Customer Service: A Practical Approach, 6/e Cutlip and Center's Effective Public Relations, 11/e D Database Concepts, 6/e Database Processing, 12/e Derivatives Markets, 3/e Design Basics for Apparel, 1/e Design Graphics: Drawing Techniques for Design Professionals, 3/e Designer's Guide to Building Construction and Systems, 1/e Designer's Guide to Furniture Styles, 3/e Developing Management Skills: A Comprehensive Guide for Leaders, 5/e Digital Marketing: Strategy, Implementation and Practice, 5/e Digital Planet: Tomorrow's Technology and You, Complete, 10/e Digital Planet: Tomorrow's Technology and You, Introductory, 10/e Doing Research in Business & Management: An Essential Guide to Planning Your Project, 1/e Dormonomics: Today's Students Discuss Today's Issues, 1/e Drafting and Visual Presentation for Interior Designers, 1/e Draping for Fashion Design, 5/e
Author
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
YR
Page
Levine Williams
0273770926 0132334291
9780273770923 9780132334297
2013 2013
70 123
Bokunewicz Vallen Hurt Slater Slater Dwyer Nobes Ferrett Ferrett Laberta Laberta Wheelen Roskes Griffith Solomon Schiffman Hansen Breitner Dagwell Boyle Pike Goddard Fill Cannon Horngren Horngren Soyka Graham Harris Broom
0135046041 0132706717 0137033036 0132772175 013277206X 1442548487 0273763792 0132861070 0132873974 0132818310 0132545187 0132570211 0135125804 0132741059 0273767313 0132170264 0273736957 0132744392 1442527161 0132599023 0273763466 027375940X 0273727591 0273738739 0273753878 1442554770 0132874407 0132760118 0132974347 0273768395
9780135046043 9780132706711 9780137033034 9780132772174 9780132772068 9781442548480 9780273763796 9780132861076 9780132873970 9780132818315 9780132545181 9780132570213 9780135125809 9780132741057 9780273767312 9780132170260 9780273736950 9780132744393 9781442527164 9780132599023 9780273763468 9780273759409 9780273727590 9780273738732 9780273753872 9781442554771 9780132874403 9780132760119 9780132974349 9780273768395
2012 2013 2012 2013 2013 2013 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2013 2013 2013 2012 2012 2013 2012 2013 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2011 2012 2013 2013 2012
206 210 237 32 31 121 26 40 40 42 42 170 240 149 199 199 186 9 13 49 119 114 184 133 17 20 73 185 186 178
Kroenke Kroenke McDonald Elsasser Koenig Crochet Crochet Carlopio Chaffey Beekman Beekman Saunders Walters Cline Jaffe
0132742926 0132570114 0321543084 0132375281 013713696X 0132414287 0132050412 1442547626 0273746103 0132737515 0132737523 0273726412 0132544660 013506421X 0132447274
9780132742924 9780132570114 9780321543080 9780132375283 9780137136964 9780132414289 9780132050418 9781442547629 9780273746102 9780132737517 9780132737524 9780273726418 9780132544665 9780135064214 9780132447270
2013 2012 2013 2013 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012
54 54 117 226 238 235 236 134 180 39 39 165 104 235 229
Title E E-Business and E-Commerce Management: Strategy, Implementation and Practice, 5/e E-Commerce 2012, 8/e Econometric Analysis, 7/e Economic Development, 11/e Economic Growth, 3/e Economics and the Business Environment, 3/e Economics for Business and Management, 3/e Economics of Health and Health Care, The, 7/e Economics of Macro Issues, The, 5/e Economics of Money, Banking and Financial Markets, The: The Business School Edition, 3/e Economics of Money, Banking, and Financial Markets, The, 10/e Economics of Public Issues, The, 17/e Economics Today, 16/e Economics Today: The Macro View, 16/e Economics Today: The Micro View, 16/e Economics, 10/e Economics, 4/e Economics, 8/e Economics: European Edition, 8/e Economics: Principles, Applications and Tools, 7/e Effective Small Business Management, 10/e Effective Training, 5/e Effective Writing, 9/e Electronic Commerce 2012: A Managerial and Social Networks Perspectives, 7/e E-Marketing, 6/e Encyclopedia of Operations Management, The: A Field Manual and Glossary of Operations Management Terms and Concepts, 1/e Enterprise and Small Business: Principles, Practice and Policy, 3/e Enterprise Systems for Management, 2/e Entrepreneurship and Small Business Management, 1/e Entrepreneurship: Perspectives and Cases, 1/e Entrepreneurship: Starting and Operating a Small Business, 3/e Entrepreneurship: Successfully Launching New Ventures, 4/e Environmental & Natural Resources Economics, 9/e Essential Foundations of Economics, 6/e Essential Mathematics for Economic Analysis, 4/e Essentials of Accounting, 11/e Essentials of Corporate Financial Management, 2/e Essentials of Economics, 1/e Essentials of Economics, 3/e Essentials of Global Marketing, 2/e Essentials of Management: A Concise Introduction, 1/e Essentials of Marketing Communications, 1/e Essentials of Marketing, 5/e Essentials of MIS, 10/e Essentials of Operations Management, 1/e Essentials of Organisational Behaviour, 3/e Essentials of Organizational Behavior, 11/e Essentials of Services Marketing, 2/e Essentials of Systems Analysis and Design, 5/e Essentials of Tourism, 1/e eTourism: Information Technology for Strategic Tourism Management, 2/e Events Management, 1/e Evidence Based Design: A Process for Research and Writing, 1/e Excel Modeling in Corporate Finance, 4/e
Author
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
YR
Page
Chaffey Laudon Greene Todaro Weil Sloman Griffiths Folland Miller Mishkin Mishkin Miller Miller Miller Miller Parkin Hubbard Sloman Parkin O'Sullivan Scarborough Blanchard May Turban Strauss Hill
0273752014 0273761293 0273753568 1408284472 0273769294 0273734865 0273735241 013295480X 0321788400 0133047938 0273765736 0132827689 013268005X 0132554518 0132554410 0273754211 0273771302 0273763121 0273736558 0132722003 0132378159 0273768379 0132842998 027376134X 0132806460 0132883708
9780273752011 9780273761297 9780273753568 9781408284476 9780273769293 9780273734864 9780273735243 9780132954808 9780321788405 9780133047936 9780273765738 9780132827683 9780132680059 9780132554510 9780132554411 9780273754213 9780273771302 9780273763123 9780273736554 9780132722001 9780132378154 9780273768371 9780132842990 9780273761341 9780132806466 9780132883702
2011 2012 2012 2011 2013 2011 2011 2013 2012 2013 2013 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2012
50 56 83 103 104 101 84 81 92 93 94 92 91 91 91 97 87 101 97 95 166 131 23 58 202 68
Carter Motiwalla Mariotti Westhead Mariotti Barringer Tietenberg Bade Sydsaeter Breitner Arnold Parkin Hubbard Hollensen Boddy Fill Blythe Laudon Slack Mullins Robbins Wirtz Valacich Cooper Buhalis Beech Kopec Holden
0273726102 0132570165 0135030315 0273726137 0132784084 0273761404 0132843005 0132833115 0273760688 0273771469 027375887X 0273718975 0133035867 0273756540 027373928X 0273738445 0273757687 0273765426 0273756192 0273757342 0273752669 9810686188 0132599015 027372438X 027373783X 0273758624 0132174065 0205235220
9780273726104 9780132570169 9780135030318 9780273726135 9780132784085 9780273761402 9780132843003 9780132833110 9780273760689 9780273771463 9780273758877 9780273718970 9780133035865 9780273756545 9780273739289 9780273738442 9780273757689 9780273765424 9780273756194 9780273757344 9780273752660 9789810686185 9780132599016 9780273724384 9780273737834 9780273758624 9780132174060 9780205235223
2012 2012 2012 2011 2013 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012 2013 2012 2013 2012 2012 2011 2012 2013 2011 2011 2012 2012 2012 2012 2013 2013 2012 2012
135 58 154 170 155 130 102 76 102 9 105 98 88 187 131 184 178 56 73 157 163 194 59 181 179 206 238 114
Title E Excel Modeling in Investments, 4/e Excellence in Business Communication, 10/e Experiencing MIS, 2/e Experiencing MIS, 3/e Exploring Getting Started with Internet Explorer 9, 1/e Exploring Getting Started with Programming, 1/e Exploring Getting Started with SharePoint 2010, 1/e Exploring Microsoft Office 2010 Getting Started with VBA, 1/e Exploring Microsoft Office 2010 Getting Started with Web Apps, 1/e Exploring Microsoft Office 2010, Volume 1, 2/e Exploring Microsoft SharePoint 2010, 1/e Exploring the Hospitality Industry, 2/e F Fashion Drawing: Illustration Techniques for Fashion Designers, 1/e Fashion from Victoria to the New Millennium, 1/e Fashionomics, 1/e Financial & Management Accounting, 5/e Financial Accounting and Reporting, 15/e Financial Accounting for Decision Makers, 6/e Financial Accounting Theory, 6/e Financial Accounting, 1/e Financial Accounting, 2/e Financial Accounting, 7/e Financial Accounting: An Introduction, 5/e Financial and Managerial Accounting , Ch 1-15 (Financial Chapters), 3/e Financial and Managerial Accounting Ch 14-24 (Managerial Chapters), 3/e Financial and Managerial Accounting, 3/e Financial Crisis: Causes, Context and Consequences, 1/e Financial Management for Decision Makers, 6/e Financial Management for Public, Health, and Not-forProfit Organizations, 4/e Financial Management, 6/e Financial Management: Core Concepts, 2/e Financial Markets and Institutions, 7/e Financial Statement Analysis: Valuation - Credit Analysis - Executive Compensation, 1/e Financial Time Guide to Management: The Art and Science of Being an Effective Manager, 1/e Financial Times Handbook of Financial Engineering: Tools and Techniques for Managing Derivatives, Options, Swaps and Risk, 3/e Food Defense Fundamentals: Using the S.H.A.R.E. Principle To Protect the Global Food Supply, 1/e Food Fundamentals, 10/e Food Service Organizations: A Managerial and Systems Approach, 8/e Foods: Experimental Perspectives, 7/e Foodservice Management: Principles and Practices, 12/e Forecasting for Economics and Business, 1/e Foundations of Business Thought, 1/e Foundations of Cost Control, 1/e Foundations of Economics, 6/e Foundations of Lodging Management, 2/e Foundations of Macroeconomics, 6/e Foundations of Microeconomics, 6/e Framework for Human Resource Management, A, 7/e Framework for Marketing Management, 5/e Framework of International Business, A, 1/e Frank Wood's Business Accounting Volume 1, 12/e
Author
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
YR
Page
Holden Thill Kroenke Kroenke Poatsy Poatsy Marghitu Grauer Grauer Grauer Marghitu Walker
0132497875 0273768891 1442533145 0132570173 0132886219 0132896540 0132882086 0132140136 0132149621 0132873605 0138007373 0135118859
9780132497879 9780273768890 9781442533141 9780132570176 9780132886215 9780132896542 9780132882088 9780132140133 9780132149624 9780132873604 9780138007379 9780135118856
2012 2012 2012 2012 2013 2013 2012 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012
115 127 54 52 45 45 45 44 45 44 45 211
Wesen Bryant Hill Reamy Weetman Elliott Atrill Scott Davies Kemp Horngren Weetman Horngren Horngren Horngren Buckley Atrill Finkler Petty Brooks Mishkin Plenborg Delves-Broughton Galitz
0135094240 013227518X 0132109816 027376196X 0273760882 0273763458 0135119154 0273723073 0132771586 1442551933 0273761811 0132497948 0132497921 0132497999 027373511X 0273756931 0132912813 1442539178 0273768476 0273754440 0273752359 0273761986 027374240X
9780135094242 9780132275187 9780132109819 9780273761969 9780273760887 9780273763451 9780135119150 9780273723073 9780132771580 9781442551930 9780273761815 9780132497947 9780132497923 9780132497992 9780273735113 9780273756934 9780132912815 9781442539174 9780273768470 9780273754442 9780273752356 9780273761983 9780273742401
2012 2013 2013 2011 2012 2011 2012 2012 2013 2013 2012 2012 2012 2012 2011 2011 2013 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2013
233 228 232 34 14 3 31 14 21 17 33 18 18 18 108 105 15 119 107 117 27 141 111
Dixon McWilliams Gregoire McWilliams Payne-Palacio Gonzalez-Rivera Boardman Traster Bade Hayes Bade Bade Dessler Kotler Cavusgil Sangster
013139181X 0132747731 0132620812 013707929X 0132719924 0131474936 0132856077 0132156555 0132984873 0132560895 0133029522 0132830884 0132576147 0273752510 0132598949 0273759280
9780131391819 9780132747738 9780132620819 9780137079292 9780132719926 9780131474932 9780132856072 9780132156554 9780132984874 9780132560894 9780133029529 9780132830881 9780132576147 9780273752516 9780132598941 9780273759287
2012 2013 2013 2012 2012 2013 2013 2013 2013 2012 2013 2013 2013 2012 2013 2012
215 218 216 219 220 81 121 209 76 207 76 76 143 191 136 28
Title F Frank Wood's Business Accounting Volume 2, 12/e Fundamentals of Corporate Finance, 2/e Fundamentals of Human Resource Management, 2/e Fundamentals of Investing, 3/e Fundamentals of Management, 8/e Fundamentals of Multinational Finance, 4/e Fundamentals of Planning and Developing Tourism, 1/e Fundamentals of Retail Buying with Merchandising Math, 1/e Fundamentals of Strategy, 2/e G Garde Manger: Cold Kitchen Fundamentals, 1/e Global Franchising Operations Management: Cases in International and Emerging Markets Operations, 1/e Global Marketing, 7/e Go! All in One: Computer Concepts and Applications, 1/e GO! with Internet Explorer 9 Getting Started, 1/e GO! With Microsoft Excel 2010 Introductory, 1/e GO! with Microsoft Office Web Apps Getting Started, 1/e GO! with Microsoft OneNote 2010 Getting Started, 1/e GO! with Microsoft Outlook 2010 Comprehensive, 1/e GO! with Microsoft Outlook 2010 Getting Started, 1/e GO! with Microsoft Publisher 2010 Comprehensive, 1/e GO! with Microsoft SharePoint 2010 Getting Started, 1/e GO! with Microsoft Windows 7 Comprehensive, 1/e GO! with Microsoft Windows Live and Windows Live Essentials Getting Started, 1/e GO! with Office 2010 Integrated Projects, 1/e GO! with Office 2010 Volume 1, 2/e GO! with Office 365 Getting Started, 1/e Governmental and Nonprofit Accounting, 10/e Guide to Managerial Communication, 9/e Guide to PowerPoint Version 2010, 1/e H HACCP Food Safety Employee Manual, 1/e Hands-On Database, 1/e Health Economics, 5/e High Performance Operations: Leverage Compliance to Lower Costs, Increase Profits, and Gain Competitive Advantage, 1/e Hospital Operations: Applying the Principles of Operations Management to Improve Health Care Systems, 1/e Hospitality Management, 3/e Human Relations for Career and Personal Success, Canadian Edition, 4/e Human Relations: Interpersonal Job-Oriented Skills, 11/e Human Resource Management, 12/e Human Resource Management, 13/e Human Resource Management, 8/e I Illustrated Guide to Food Preparation, 11/e Impact: A Guide to Business Communication, Canadian Edition, 8/e Implementing Organizational Change: Theory into Practice, 3/e Inbound Logistics Management: Storage and Supply of Materials for the Modern Supply Chain, 7/e Individuality in Clothing Selection and Personal Appearance, 7/e Industrial Organization: Theory and Practice, 4/e
Author
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
YR
Page
Sangster Berk Dessler Gitman Robbins Moffett Kastarlak Hoffman Johnson
0273767925 0273753460 0132570130 1442532882 0273766171 0132829916 0135078814 0132724146 0273757253
9780273767923 9780273753469 9780132570138 9781442532885 9780273766179 9780132829915 9780135078815 9780132724142 9780273757252
2012 2012 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2012
29 106 143 112 161 118 208 229 152
The American Culinary Federation Alon Keegan Gaskin Gaskin Gaskin Gaskin Gaskin Gaskin Gaskin Gaskin Gaskin Gaskin Gaskin Gaskin Ferrett Gaskin Freeman Munter Munter
0131182196 0132884143 0273766716 0132844125 013293454X 0132743787 0132544849 0132542994 0132791285 013702536X 0132791722 0132543028 0132375753 013254329X 0132843307 0132840162 0132955741 0132751267 0132719878 0132568888
9780131182196 9780132884143 9780273766711 9780132844123 9780132934541 9780132743785 9780132544849 9780132542999 9780132791281 9780137025367 9780132791724 9780132543026 9780132375757 9780132543293 9780132843300 9780132840163 9780132955744 9780132751261 9780132719872 9780132568883
2012 2012 2013 2013 2012 2011 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2013 2013 2013 2012 2012
223 61 188 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 46 47 47 46 46 47 15 125 126
Paster Conger Phelps Glazer
0131391828 013610827X 0132948532 0132779889
9780131391826 9780136108276 9780132948531 9780132779883
2012 2012 2013 2012
220 51 100 67
Hopp
0132908662
9780132908665
2013
68
Van der Wagen DuBrin Dubrin Mondy Dessler Torrington
1442534796 0138127875 0132680033 0273752995 0273766023 0273756923
9781442534797 9780138127879 9780132680035 9780273752998 9780273766025 9780273756927
2012 2012 2012 2012 2013 2011
210 145 145 157 143 168
McWilliams Northey Spector Crocker Marshall Waldman
0132738759 013257439X 0132970171 0273720481 0136136265 0132770989
9780132738750 9780132574396 9780132970174 9780273720485 9780136136262 9780132770989
2013 2012 2013 2012 2012 2013
219 122 167 64 231 103
Title I Information Systems in Organizations, 1/e Information Systems Today, 5/e Innovation Acceleration: Transforming Organizational Thinking, 1/e Innovation Management and New Product Development, 5/e Integrated Advertising, Promotion and Marketing Communications, 5/e Integrated Marketing Communications, 1/e Intermediate Accounting, Vol. 1, 1/e Intermediate Accounting, Vol. 2, 1/e International Business, 14/e International Business, 6/e International Business, 6/e International Business, 7/e International Business: The New Realities, 2/e International Business: The New Realities, Australasian Edition, 1/e International Cooking: A Culinary Journey, 2/e International Corporate Governance, 1/e International Economics, 9/e International Economics, 9/e International Finance: A Practical Perspective, 1/e International Financial Management, 2/e International Financial Reporting: A Practical Guide, 3/e International Management, 2/e International Marketing and Export Management, 7/e International Trade, 1/e Interpreting and Analyzing Financial Statements, 6/e Introducing Human Resource Management, 6/e Introduction to Accounting Information Systems, 1/e Introduction to Banking, 2/e Introduction to Corporate Finance, 5/e Introduction to Electronic Commerce, 4/e Introduction to Financial Accounting, 10/e Introduction to Governmental and Not-for-Profit Accounting, 7/e Introduction to Hospitality Management, 4/e Introduction to Hospitality, 6/e Introduction to Management Accounting, 1/e Introduction to Management Science, 11/e Introduction to Operations and Supply Chain Management, 3/e Introduction to Risk Management and Insurance, 10/e IT Project Library Project #1, 1/e IT Project Library Project #2, 1/e IT Project Library Project #3, 1/e IT Project Library Project #4, 1/e IT Project Library Project #5, 1/e IT Project Library Project #6, 1/e IT Project Library Project #7, 1/e IT Project Management, 1/e IT Strategy: Issues and Practices, 2/e J Jump Right In: Essential Computer Skills Using Microsoft Office 2010, 1/e K Keys to Business Communication, 1/e L Labor Relations and Collective Bargaining: Private and Public Sectors, 10/e Labour Relations, 3/e
Author
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
YR
Page
Wallace Valacich Kuratko Trott Clow Clow Lo Lo Daniels Rugman Wild Griffin Cavusgil Cavusgil Heyman Goergen Husted Krugman Buckley Bekaert Melville Deresky Albaum Grimwade Schoenebeck Foot Boczko Casu Frino Turban Horngren Ives Walker Walker Bhimani Taylor Bozarth Dorfman Author Author Author Author Author Author Author Vaidyanathan McKeen
0136115624 0273756818 0136021484 0273736566 0273753282 0733992900 0132612119 0132657953 0273766953 0273760971 027375257X 0273765868 0132453274 1442533560 0132126117 0273751255 027376828X 0273754092 0273731866 013284298X 0273758152 1442539674 0273743880 0273718886 0132746247 0273740989 0273739387 0273718134 1442542489 0132742918 0273770179 0132776014 0132959941 0132993074 0273737554 0273766406 027377008X 0131394126 0132766884 0132766949 0132766930 0132766914 0132766892 0132766957 0132766906 0132807181 0132843013
9780136115625 9780273756811 9780136021483 9780273736561 9780273753285 9780733992902 9780132612111 9780132657952 9780273766957 9780273760979 9780273752578 9780273765868 9780132453271 9781442533561 9780132126113 9780273751250 9780273768289 9780273754091 9780273731863 9780132842983 9780273758150 9781442539679 9780273743880 9780273718888 9780132746243 9780273740988 9780273739388 9780273718130 9781442542488 9780132742917 9780273770176 9780132776011 9780132959940 9780132993074 9780273737551 9780273766407 9780273770084 9780131394124 9780132766883 9780132766944 9780132766937 9780132766913 9780132766890 9780132766951 9780132766906 9780132807180 9780132843010
2013 2011 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2011 2012 2011 2013 2013 2011 2012 2013 2012 2013 2013 2013 2013 2013 2012 2013 2012 2013 2013 2013 2014 2013 2013 2013 2013 2013 2012
60 60 153 202 180 181 22 22 139 164 172 149 136 137 217 147 89 90 108 106 24 142 175 85 30 146 7 109 111 59 19 21 212 212 7 74 63 110 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 59 57
Andrews
013297570X
9780132975704
2013
38
Carter
0132598973
9780132598972
2012
125
Carrell Suffield
0132730014 0132626322
9780132730013 9780132626323
2013 2012
135 167
Title L Lakeside Company: Case Studies in Auditing, 12/e Law and Economics, 6/e Leadership in Organizations, 8/e Learning Microsoft Office Excel 2010, Student Edition, 1/e Learning Microsoft Office PowerPoint 2010, Student Edition, 1/e Learning Microsoft Office Publisher 2010, Student Edition, 1/e Learning Microsoft Office Word 2010, Student Edition, 1/e Learning QuickBooks Pro 2012: A Practical Approach, 6/e Learning QuickBooks Pro and Premier Accountant 2011: A Practical Approach and QuickBooks 2011 Software, 5/e Legal and Taxation Aspects of Your Small Business (Revised), 3/e Level Three Leadership: Getting Below the Surface, 5/e Logistics Management, 1/e M Macroeconomics, 1/e Macroeconomics, 2/e Macroeconomics, 4/e Macroeconomics, 10/e Macroeconomics, 12/e Macroeconomics: A European Perspective, 1/e Macroeconomics: Policy and Practice, 1/e Macroeconomics: Principles, Applications and Tools, 7/e Macroeconomics: Theories and Policies, 10/e Making of the Economic Society, The, 13/e Management Accounting for Decision Makers, 7/e Management Accounting, Canadian Edition, 6/e Management Accounting: Information for DecisionMaking and Strategy Execution, 6/e Management and Cost Accounting, 5/e Management Communication, 5/e Management Consulting: Delivering an Effective Project, 4/e Management Control Systems: Performance Measurement, Evaluation and Incentives, 3/e Management Information Systems, 12/e Management of Organizational Behavior, 10/e Management Skills for Everyday Life, 3/e Management, 1/e Management, 11/e Management, 3/e Management, 6/e Management: A Faith-Based Perspective, 1/e Management: A Focus on Leaders, 1/e Management: The Essentials, 1/e Managerial Accounting, 3/e Managerial Accounting: Decision Making and Performance Improvement, 4/e Managerial Decision Modeling with Spreadsheets, 3/e Managing Across Cultures, 3/e Managing Behavior in Organizations, 6/e Managing Business Process Flows, 3/e Managing Change in Organizations, 6/e Managing Human Resources, 7/e Managing Information Technology, 7/e Managing People in Organisations, 1/e Managing Quality: Integrating the Supply Chain, 5/e Managing Strategy and Measuring Value: A Financial Perspective, 1/e
Author
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
YR
Page
Trussel Cooter Yukl Bucki Katsaropolous Skintik Weixel Brunsdon Brunsdon
0132567253 0132846152 0273765663 0135112109 0135112095 0135108993 0135112265 0132751674 0132743256
9780132567251 9780132846158 9780273765660 9780135112106 9780135112090 9780135108994 9780135112267 9780132751674 9780132743259
2012 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2012 2013 2012
32 79 173 44 44 444 44 10 10
Birt Clawson Grant
1442552654 0132556413 0273731351
9781442552654 9780132556415 9780273731351
2011 2012 2012
130 138 67
Hubbard Hubbard Hubbard Parkin Gordon Blanchard Mishkin O'Sullivan Froyen Heilbroner Atrill Horngren Atkinson Bhimani O'Rourke Wickham Merchant Laudon Hersey Caproni Gomez-Mejia Robbins Hitt Robbins Cafferky McKee Robbins Braun Proctor Balakrishnan Schneider Greenberg Anupindi Carnall Gomez-Mejia Brown Bozionelos Foster Leask
0273762176 1442533714 0273771523 0273753584 0132727676 0273763113 0273760505 0132555492 0273765981 0132822385 0273762265 013257084X 0273769987 0273762230 0132980630 0273768743 0273737619 027375453X 0132556405 0132479079 0132604337 0273752774 0132378175 1442538600 0136058345 0132478803 1442533625 0132954796 0273764489 0132969440 0273746324 0132729830 0132811367 0273736418 0132570149 0132737531 027372679X 0273768255 0273736248
9780273762171 9781442533714 9780273771524 9780273753582 9780132727679 9780273763116 9780273760504 9780132555494 9780273765981 9780132822381 9780273762263 9780132570848 9780273769989 9780273762232 9780132980630 9780273768746 9780273737612 9780273754534 9780132556408 9780132479073 9780132604338 9780273752776 9780132378178 9781442538603 9780136058342 9780132478809 9781442533622 9780132954792 9780273764489 9780132969444 9780273746324 9780132729833 9780132811361 9780273736417 9780132570145 9780132737531 9780273726791 9780273768258 9780273736240
2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2011 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2011 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2013 2012 2013 2013 2013 2012 2013 2012 2012 2013 2013 2013
89 85 87 97 82 77 94 95 81 85 4 19 3 6 126 171 25 56 151 133 148 160 151 159 132 156 161 8 27 62 167 149 61 134 148 49 131 67 153
Title M Market-Based Management, 6/e Marketing Across Cultures, 6/e Marketing Management, 14/e Marketing Management: An Asian Perspective, 6/e Marketing Management: European Edition, 2/e Marketing Planning: Where Strategy Meets Action, 1/e Marketing Research: An Applied Approach, 4/e Marketing Research: An Integrated Approach, 3/e Marketing Strategy and Competitive Positioning, 5/e Marketing: An Introduction, 11/e Marketing: An Introduction, 2/e Marketing: Defined, Explained, Applied, 2/e Marketing: Real People, Real Choices, 7/e Mastering Self Leadership: Empowering Yourself for Personal Excellence, 6/e Mathematics for Economics and Business, 7/e Meetings, Expositions, Events and Conventions: An Introduction to the Industry, 3/e Menu, The: Development, Strategy, and Application, 1/e Merchandising Mathematics for Retailing, 5/e Microeconomics, 10/e Microeconomics, 2/e Microeconomics, 4/e Microeconomics, 4/e Microeconomics, 6/e Microeconomics, 6/e Microeconomics, 8/e Microeconomics: Principles, Applications and Tools, 7/e Mind and Heart of the Negotiator, The, 5/e MIS Essentials, 2/e Modern Database Management, 11/e Modern Financial and Investment Planning, 2/e Modern Financial Markets and Institutions: A Practical Perspective, 1/e Modern Labor Economics: Theory and Public Policy, 11/e Modern Management: Concepts and Skills, 12/e Money, Banking, and the Financial System, 1/e Multinational Business Finance, 13/e MYOB AccountRight Enterprise v19: A Hands On Approach, 5/e N Natural Resource and Environmental Economics, 4/e Negotiation and Dispute Resolution, 1/e Next Series: Best Practices in using Office 2010, 1/e Next Series: Introduction to Google Apps, Personal Apps, 1/e Next Series: Introduction to Google Apps, Productivity Apps, 1/e Next Series: Web 2.0, 2/e O On Baking, 3/e Operations and Process Management: Principles and Practice for Strategic Impact, 3/e Operations Management: Processes and Supply Chains, 10/e Options, Futures, and Other Derivatives and DerivaGem CD Package, 8/e Organisation Design, 1/e Organisational Behaviour and Analysis: An Integrated Approach, 5/e Organizational Behavior, 15/e Organizational Behavior: An Experiential Approach, 9/e Organizational Theory, Design, and Change, 7/e
Author
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
YR
Page
Best Usunier Kotler Kotler Kotler Sorger Malhotra Wilson Hooley Armstrong Armstrong Levens Solomon Neck Jacques Fenich Barrish Easterling Parkin Hubbard Gravelle Hubbard Estrin Perloff Pindyck O'Sullivan Thompson Kroenke Hoffer Valentine Arnold Ehrenberg Certo Hubbard Eiteman Vallely
0132848163 0273757733 0273753363 9810687974 0273743619 0132544709 0273725858 0273718703 0273740938 0273767186 0273762605 0132719894 0132494027 013275441X 0273763563 0132719916 0135078660 0132724162 0273753983 1442531770 0273710400 0273771604 0273734873 0273754602 0133041700 0132555514 0132827662 013266500X 0132662256 144254354X 0273730355 013272765X 0273756761 0132722011 0273765531 1442545860
9780132848169 9780273757733 9780273753360 9789810687977 9780273743613 9780132544702 9780273725855 9780273718703 9780273740933 9780273767183 9780273762607 9780132719896 9780132494021 9780132754415 9780273763567 9780132719919 9780135078662 9780132724166 9780273753988 9781442531772 9780273710400 9780273771609 9780273734871 9780273754602 9780133041705 9780132555517 9780132827669 9780132665001 9780132662253 9781442543546 9780273730354 9780132727655 9780273756767 9780132722018 9780273765530 9781442545861
2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2013 2013 2012 2013 2013 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2011 2012 2013 2011
177 203 192 192 193 201 196 204 187 176 176 194 200 158 90 206 214 225 97 86 82 87 80 99 100 95 168 53 52 120 105 79 138 88 110 32
Perman DeMarr Miller Miller Miller Coyle
0321417534 0131577530 0132540312 0132552124 0132725185 0132840154
9780321417534 9780131577534 9780132540315 9780132552127 9780132725187 9780132840156
2011 2013 2013 2012 2012 2012
99 142 43 43 43 42
Labensky Slack Krajewski Hull Worren Rollinson Robbins Osland Jones
0132374560 0273768808 027376683X 0273759078 0273738836 0273756680 0273765299 0132374730 0273765604
9780132374569 9780273768807 9780273766834 9780273759072 9780273738831 9780273756682 9780273765295 9780132374736 9780273765608
2013 2011 2013 2012 2012 2013 2013 2013 2013
217 72 69 115 172 164 164 159 152
Title P Performance Management, 3/e Personal Finance: Turning Money into Wealth, 6/e Perspective and Sketching for Designers, 1/e Portfolio for Fashion Designers, 1/e Practical Chef's Reference, The: A Compendium of Charts, Formulas and Ratios, 1/e Practical Computing, 3/e Prentice Hall's Federal Taxation 2013 Comprehensive, 26/e Prentice Hall's Federal Taxation 2013 Corporations, Partnerships, Estates and Trusts, 26/e Prentice Hall's Federal Taxation 2013 Individuals, 26/e Principles of Auditing: An Introduction to International Standards on Auditing, 3/e Principles of Economics, 10/e Principles of Macroeconomics, 10/e Principles of Managerial Finance, 13/e Principles of Managerial Finance, Brief, 6/e Principles of Marketing, 14/e Principles of Marketing, 5/e Principles of Marketing: An Asian Perspective, 3/e Principles of Microeconomics, 10/e Processes, Systems, and Information: An Introduction to MIS, 1/e Professional Kitchen Manager, The, 1/e Professional Server, The: A Training Manual, 2/e Professionalism: Skills for Workplace Success, 3/e Project Management: Achieving Competive Advantage, 3/e Public Relations: Theories, Practices, Critiques, 1/e Purchasing and Supply Chain Management, 8/e Q Quantitative Analysis for Management, 11/e Quantitative Approaches in Business Studies, 8/e Quantitative Methods for Business and Management, 1/e Quantitative Methods for Business, 5/e QuickBooks Pro 2012: A Complete Course, 13/e R Relationship Marketing: Exploring Relational Strategies in Marketing, 4/e Research Methods for Business Students, 6/e Research Methods for Leisure and Tourism, 4/e Retail Buying Practices and Policies in a Global Economy, 1/e Retail Buying, 9/e Retail Category Management, 1/e Retail Management: A Strategic Approach, 12/e S Selling and Sales Management, 9/e Selling Financial Products, 1/e Selling Today, 12/e Service Operations Management: Improving Service Delivery, 4/e Services Management: An Integrated Approach, 3/e Sewing for the Apparel Industry, 2/e Shapland & Turner Cases in Financial Accounting, 1/e SharePoint for Students, 1/e Skills for Success with Concepts Getting Started, 1/e Skills for Success with Internet Explorer 9 Getting Started, 1/e Skills for Success with Office 2010 Web Applications Getting Started, 1/e
Author
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
YR
Page
Aguinis Keown Newman Hagen Furdell Hogan Pope Anderson Pope Hayes Case Case Gitman Gitman Kotler Armstrong Kotler Case Kroenke Hayes Sanders Anderson Pinto Macnamara Farrington
0132974355 0132941287 0132574942 0135020476 0135125774 0132839962 0132891646 0132891549 0132891379 0273768174 027375372X 0273754823 0273754289 0132701065 027375243X 144253110X 9810687532 0273754696 0132783479 0131391747 0131709925 0132624664 0273767429 1442543299 0273723685
9780132974356 9780132941280 9780132574945 9780135020470 9780135125779 9780132839969 9780132891646 9780132891547 9780132891370 9780273768173 9780273753728 9780273754824 9780273754282 9780132701068 9780273752431 9781442531109 9789810687533 9780273754695 9780132783477 9780131391741 9780131709928 9780132624664 9780273767428 9781442543294 9780273723684
2013 2013 2013 2013 2013 2013 2013 2013 2013 2013 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2012 2013 2012 2013 2013 2013 2012 2012
128 116 239 227 215 41 35 35 36 16 78 78 113 113 190 175 191 78 55 216 222 128 71 195 66
Render Morris Buglear Waters Horne
0273752863 0273738720 0273736280 0273739476 0132751755
9780273752868 9780273738725 9780273736288 9780273739470 9780132751759
2012 2012 2012 2011 2013
72 70 63 75 16
Egan Saunders Veal Fiorito Diamond Fowler Berman
0273737783 0273750755 0273717502 0135046602 0132179350 0135152089 0273768565
9780273737780 9780273750758 9780273717508 9780135046609 9780132179355 9780135152089 9780273768562
2011 2012 2011 2012 2013 2012 2013
183 165 211 226 225 227 177
Jobber Bexley Manning Johnston Van Looy Shaeffer Shapland Cole Keator Townsend Lawson
0273762656 0132752131 013257019X 0273740482 027373203X 0131884433 0132752816 0130000094 0135088348 0132934558 0132550040
9780273762652 9780132752138 9780132570190 9780273740483 9780273732037 9780131884434 9780132752817 9780130000095 9780135088340 9780132934558 9780132550048
2012 2012 2012 2012 2013 2013 2013 2012 2012 2012 2013
188 178 196 69 74 232 31 50 47 47 47
Title S Skills for Success with Office 2010, Volume 1, 2/e Skills for Success with Windows 7 Comprehensive, 1/e Social Marketing, 1/e Social Media Marketing, 1/e Spa Management: An Introduction, 1/e Sports Marketing, 1/e Sports Marketing, 5/e Statistics for Business and Economics, 8/e Statistics, Data Analysis, and Decision Modeling, 5/e Strategic Brand Management, 4/e Strategic Brand Management: A European Perspective, 2/e Strategic Communication: Cases in Marketing, Public Relations, Advertising and Media, 1/e Strategic Compensation: A Human Resource Management Approach, 7/e Strategic Management and Business Policy: Toward Global Sustainability, 13/e Strategic Management and Competitive Advantage, 4/e Strategic Management and Competitive Advantage: Concepts, 4/e Strategic Management in Action, 6/e Strategic Management, 6/e Strategic Management: A Competitive Advantage Approach, Concepts and Cases, 14/e Strategic Management: A Competitive Advantage Approach, Concepts, 14/e Strategic Marketing Problems, 13/e Strategic Marketing, 1/e Strategic Staffing, 2/e Strategic Supply Management: Principles, Theories and Practice, 2/e Strategies For E-Business: Concepts and Cases, 3/e Strategy: A View From The Top, 4/e Supervision and Leadership in a Changing World, 1/e Supervision Today!, 7/e Supply Chain Management, 5/e Survey of Economics: Principles, Applications and Tools, 5/e Sustainable Marketing, 1/e Sustainable Marketing, 1/e Sustainable Venturing, 1/e T Taxation: Finance Act 2011, 17/e Technology In Action Complete, 9/e Technology In Action Introductory, 9/e Technology Strategies for the Hospitality Industry, 2/e Textiles: Basics, 1/e The Business of Tourism, 9/e The Psychology of People in Organisations, 1/e The Strategy Process, 5/e Total Global Strategy, 3/e Tourism: Principles and Practice, 5/e Training in Australia, 4/e Training in Interpersonal Skills: TIPS for Managing People at Work, 6/e U Understanding and Managing Diversity, 5/e Understanding and Managing Organizational Behavior, 6/e Understanding Cross-Cultural Management, 2/e Understanding Financial Statements, 10/e Using MIS, 5/e
Author
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
YR
Page
Townsend Townsend Eagle Tuten Wisnom Fetchko Shank Newbold Evans Keller Keller Greenland Martocchio Wheelen Barney Barney Coulter Lynch David David Kerin Mooradian Phillips Cousins Jelassi De Kluyver Dessler Robbins Chopra O'Sullivan Emery Martin Dean
0132840324 0132375761 0273727222 0132551799 0135039444 0132135469 0132809486 0273767062 0273768220 0132664259 0273737872 1442555491 0132975203 0132570203 0132560453 0132560445 0132620677 0273750925 0273767488 0273767607 0273768948 0137136978 0132763591 0273761900 0273757873 0132145626 0135058651 0132784033 0273765221 0132727684 1408292777 0136117074 0136044891
9780132840323 9780132375764 9780273727224 9780132551793 9780135039441 9780132135467 9780132809481 9780273767060 9780273768227 9780132664257 9780273737872 9781442555495 9780132975209 9780132570206 9780132560450 9780132560443 9780132620673 9780273750925 9780273767480 9780273767602 9780273768944 9780137136971 9780132763592 9780273761907 9780273757870 9780132145626 9780135058657 9780132784030 9780273765226 9780132727686 9781408292778 9780136117070 9780136044895
2013 2012 2013 2013 2012 2013 2013 2013 2012 2013 2012 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2013 2012 2013 2013 2013 2012 2012 2013 2013 2012 2012 2013 2013 2012 2012 2012 2013
47 47 182 203 213 184 199 71 65 189 189 185 155 170 129 129 139 153 140 140 190 197 159 64 52 141 144 162 64 96 183 197 141
Melville Evans Evans Nyheim Kadolph Holloway Ashleigh Mintzberg Yip Fletcher Tovey Robbins
0273758284 0132928388 0132924528 0135038022 0132620820 0273755145 0273755765 027371628X 0132374722 0273758276 144253902X 0132778432
9780273758280 9780132928380 9780132924528 9780135038024 9780132620826 9780273755142 9780273755760 9780273716280 9780132374729 9780273758273 9781442539020 9780132778435
2012 2013 2013 2012 2013 2012 2012 2013 2012 2013 2011 2012
24 39 39 209 230 208 129 156 173 207 169 162
Harvey George Browaeys Ormiston Kroenke
0132847701 0273753797 0273732951 0132655063 0273766481
9780132847704 9780273753797 9780273732952 9780132655064 9780273766483
2012 2012 2011 2013 2013
150 146 132 26 53
Title V Visualizing Technology, Complete, 1/e Visualizing Technology, Introductory, 1/e W Workbook for the Fashion Designer: The Complete Guide to Fashion Illustration, 1/e World of Culinary Management, The: Leadership and Development of Human Resources, 5/e Y Your Office: Getting Started Microsoft Office 2010, 1/e Your Office: Getting Started Communication, 1/e Your Office: Getting Started 1/e Your Office: Getting Started with Advanced Cases for with Business with Computing Concepts, with Outlook 2010, 1/e
Author
ISBN -10
ISBN - 13
YR
Page
Geoghan Geoghan
0137056346 013137625X
9780137056347 9780131376250
2012 2012
41 41
Park Chesser
0132675811 013274774X
9780132675819 9780132747745
2013 2013
231 214
Kinser Kinser Kinser Kinser Kinser Kinser Kinser Kinser Kinser
0132675498 013267548X 0132625350 0132675463 0132675455 0132675471 0132560887 0132610442 0132604299
9780132675499 9780132675482 9780132625357 9780132675468 9780132675451 9780132675475 9780132560887 9780132610445 9780132604291
2013 2013 2013 2012 2013 2012 2012 2012 2012
48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 48
Your Office: Getting Started with Web 2.0, 1/e Your Office: Getting Started with Windows 7, 1/e Your Office: Microsoft Access 2010 Comprehensive, 1/e Your Office: Microsoft Excel 2010 Comprehensive, 1/e Your Office: Microsoft Office 2010, Volume 1, 1/e

2012 2013 Catalog Eversion

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2012 2013 Catalog Eversion

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Auditing and Assurance Services with ACL Software, 14/e

Accounting for Corporate Combinations and Associations, 7/e

ISBN 10: 1442519568 ISBN 13: 9781442519565 2012 Paper

Management Accounting: Information for Decision-Making and Strategy Execution, 6/e

ISBN 10: 0273769987 ISBN 13: 9780273769989 552pp 2011 Paper

Financial Accounting for Decision Makers, 6/e

ISBN 10: 0273763458 ISBN 13: 9780273763451 2011 Kit/Package/ShrinkWrap

Management Accounting for Decision Makers, 7/e

ISBN 10: 0273762265 ISBN 13: 9780273762263 2012 Kit/Package/ShrinkWrap

Accounting: An Introduction, 5/e

ISBN 10: 144253480X ISBN 13: 9781442534803 2012 Paper

Advanced Accounting, 11/e

Mark S. Beasley Frank A. Buckless Steven M. Glover Douglas F. Prawitt

Auditing Cases: An Interactive Learning Approach, 5/e

ISBN 10: 0132815591 ISBN 13: 9780132815598 408pp 2012 Paper

12. Completing the Audit, Reporting to Management, and External Reporting

Peter Best Greg Shailer Brenton Fiedler

Auditing, Assurance Services & Ethics in Australia, 8/e

Management and Cost Accounting, 5/e

ISBN 10: 0273762230 ISBN 13: 9780273762232 2012 Kit/Package/ShrinkWrap

Introduction to Management Accounting

ISBN 10: 0273737554 ISBN 13: 9780273737551 624pp 2012 Paper

Introduction to Accounting Information Systems

PART 1: A CONTEXTUAL FRAMEWORK OVERVIEW

Accounting Information Systems, 11/e

ISBN 10: 0132871939 ISBN 13: 9780132871938 544pp 2013 Paper

Karen W. Braun Wendy M. Tietz

Managerial Accounting, 3/e

ISBN 10: 0132954796 ISBN 13: 9780132954792 864pp 2013 Paper

Introduction to Managerial Accounting

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

Core Concepts of Accounting, 11/e

Essentials of Accounting, 11/e

8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

Learning QuickBooks Pro 2012: A Practical Approach, 6/e

Advanced Financial Reporting: A Complete Guide to IFRS

ISBN 10: 0273732358 ISBN 13: 9780273732358 512pp 2012 Paper

Accounting Handbook 2012

ISBN 10: 1442558105 ISBN 13: 9781442558106 2012 Paper

Conceptual Framework Australian Accounting Standards Amending Standards Interpretations

Auditing, Assurance and Ethics Handbook 2012

Ron Dagwell Graeme Wines Cecilia Lambert

Corporate Accounting in Australia

ISBN 10: 1442527161 ISBN 13: 9781442527164 738pp 2012 Paper

Tony Davies Ian Crawford

Business Accounting and Finance

ISBN 10: 027372312X ISBN 13: 9780273723127 800pp 2011 Paper

ISBN 10: 0273723073 ISBN 13: 9780273723073 464pp 2012 Paper

Barry Elliott Jamie Elliott

Financial Accounting and Reporting, 15/e

ISBN 10: 0273760882 ISBN 13: 9780273760887 2012 Kit/Package/ShrinkWrap

Financial Management for Public, Health, and Notfor-Profit Organizations, 4/e

Governmental and Nonprofit Accounting, 10/e

ISBN 10: 0132751267 ISBN 13: 9780132751261 850pp 2013 Cloth

Principles of Auditing: An Introduction to International Standards on Auditing, 3/e

QuickBooks Pro 2012: A Complete Course, 13/e

Financial Accounting, 7/e

ISBN 10: 1442551933 ISBN 13: 9781442551930 2013 Paper

Cost Accounting, 14/e

ISBN 10: 0273753878 ISBN 13: 9780273753872 896pp 2012 Paper

Financial & Managerial Accounting, 3/e

Charles Horngren Gary L. Sundem John A. Elliot Donna Philbrick

Introduction to Financial Accounting, 10/e